ecpins 5000 6.0
ECPINS 5000 6.0
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
Version:
Part number:
Rev J
A-900125
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
Copyright © 2014 OSI Maritime Systems Ltd. and its affiliated or related companies.
ECPINS®, W-AIS®, WAIS®, COP-IDS® are registered trademark of OSI Maritime
Systems Ltd. Other company brand, product and service names are for identification
purposes only and may be either trademarks, service marks or registered trademarks of
their respective owners. Data subject to change without notice.
In ECPINS, press F1 to view this documentation.
For service and support, contact:
E-mail:
Telephone:
support@osimaritime.com
(+1) 778-373-4600
1-877-432-7467 (toll-free in North America, 24 hours)
DOCUMENT CONTROL
Revision/ Date
Description
Rev J
01 August 2014
ECPINS 6.0.3.2 Release
Minor Update
Authority
Robert West
System Engineering Manager
OSI Maritime Systems
Contents
Menu command reference......................................................................vii
1
Introduction............................................................................................. 1
1.A
1.B
1.C
1.D
1.E
1.F
1.G
2
Getting started ...................................................................................... 11
2.A
2.B
2.C
3
Starting up ............................................................................................. 11
Controls.................................................................................................. 13
Shutting down........................................................................................ 21
Chart display ......................................................................................... 25
3.A
3.B
3.C
4
About this document................................................................................ 1
New in ECPINS 6.0.3.2 ............................................................................. 2
New in ECPINS 6.0.3 ................................................................................ 2
New in ECPINS 6.0.2 ................................................................................ 3
New in ECPINS 6.0.1 ................................................................................ 4
New in ECPINS 6.0 ................................................................................... 6
System overview ...................................................................................... 7
Chart display control .............................................................................. 25
Screen layouts ........................................................................................ 36
Display settings ...................................................................................... 52
Own ship display ................................................................................... 61
4.A
4.B
4.C
4.D
4.E
4.F
4.G
4.H
4.I
Own ship symbol.................................................................................... 61
Velocity vectors ...................................................................................... 62
Wind vectors .......................................................................................... 64
Vessel track ............................................................................................ 66
Ghost ship .............................................................................................. 67
Anti-grounding cone .............................................................................. 68
Compass rose and range rings ............................................................... 70
Anchorage.............................................................................................. 72
Guard zone............................................................................................. 73
CONTENTS
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
iii
5
Progress monitoring .............................................................................. 75
5.A
5.B
5.C
5.D
5.E
5.F
5.G
6
Navigational assistance ....................................................................... 103
6.A
6.B
6.C
6.D
6.E
7
Sensor sources ..................................................................................... 179
Contacts............................................................................................... 189
AIS ....................................................................................................... 197
AIS settings .......................................................................................... 206
Radar ................................................................................................... 214
NAVTEX ............................................................................................... 221
Chart viewing ...................................................................................... 225
10.A
10.B
10.C
10.D
10.E
10.F
10.G
10.H
iv
Routes.................................................................................................. 145
Preparing a route ................................................................................. 147
Route features...................................................................................... 156
Working with routes ............................................................................ 168
Clearing lines ....................................................................................... 174
Sensor integration ............................................................................... 179
9.A
9.B
9.C
9.D
9.E
9.F
10
Log book .............................................................................................. 137
Capturing the screen............................................................................ 138
Data logs.............................................................................................. 140
Passage planning................................................................................. 145
8.A
8.B
8.C
8.D
8.E
9
Electronic bearing lines ........................................................................ 103
Range and bearing............................................................................... 112
Markers................................................................................................ 115
Position fixing ...................................................................................... 120
Tides and currents................................................................................ 131
Voyage recording................................................................................. 137
7.A
7.B
7.C
8
Route display ......................................................................................... 75
Monitoring the route.............................................................................. 78
Depth ..................................................................................................... 84
Adjusting the own ship’s position.......................................................... 88
Set and drift ........................................................................................... 90
Alarm conditions.................................................................................... 91
Track Control ......................................................................................... 96
Chart coverage..................................................................................... 226
Loading charts ..................................................................................... 229
Raster charts ........................................................................................ 235
Vector charts........................................................................................ 236
Querying a chart feature ...................................................................... 243
Chart notes .......................................................................................... 245
Locating chart and ECPINS features..................................................... 247
Notice to Mariners ............................................................................... 248
CONTENTS
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
10.I Shifting a chart’s datum ....................................................................... 249
11
Chart correction and enhancement ..................................................... 251
11.A
11.B
11.C
11.D
11.E
11.F
12
Making a quick correction.................................................................... 251
Making a chart correction .................................................................... 253
Viewing a correction ............................................................................ 261
Deleting a correction............................................................................ 262
Copying corrections.............................................................................. 262
Summary of chart corrections............................................................... 264
Chart installation and updating........................................................... 265
12.A
12.B
12.C
12.D
12.E
12.F
12.G
12.H
12.I
12.J
Data types ............................................................................................ 265
Installing charts.................................................................................... 267
Uninstalling charts ............................................................................... 272
ARCS/Seafarer/NZMariner chart administration ................................... 273
Encrypted S57 chart administration ..................................................... 276
Updating S57 charts and AMLs ............................................................ 280
Updating ARCS, Seafarer RNC, and NZMariner charts ......................... 283
Reviewing raster chart updates............................................................ 285
BSB charts ............................................................................................ 288
C-MAP charts ....................................................................................... 290
Appendices.......................................................................................... 311
Ap.A INT-1 abbreviations.............................................................................. 312
Ap.B Licensing ECPINS software................................................................... 313
Ap.C Chart display features .......................................................................... 317
Ap.D Objects detected by the anti-grounding cone....................................... 321
Ap.E Preparing the vessel shape................................................................... 323
Ap.F Setting up an Autopilot ........................................................................ 332
Ap.G Operating system security .................................................................... 333
Ap.H Vessel simulation ................................................................................. 335
Index ................................................................................................... 375
CONTENTS
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
v
vi
CONTENTS
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Menu command
reference
This section lists all commands on the main menu described in this manual. The Index also
contains specific menu commands.
> About... .....................................................................................................................................................................314
> Acknowledge Alarms .....................................................................................................................................15, 21, 100
> Chart Corrections > Copy Corrections from Disk... ..........................................................................................................263
> Chart Corrections > Copy Corrections to Disk... ..............................................................................................................263
> Chart Corrections > Import OSI Corrections... .................................................................................................................263
> Chart Corrections > Manual Corrections... ...................................................................................253, 254, 255, 261, 262
> Chart Corrections > Print Chart Corrections Report... ......................................................................................................264
> Chart Corrections > Quick Corrections... ........................................................................................................................252
> Chart Corrections > Review Chart Updates... ................................................................................................281, 286, 309
> Chart Corrections > Update Charts... ...........................................................................................280, 284, 305, 306, 308
> Chart Selection > Auto Chart Loading ...........................................................................................................................231
> Chart Selection > Auto Chart Loading Setup... ................................................................................................................232
> Chart Selection > Change Chart Order... ................................................................................................................. 54, 233
> Chart Selection > Chart Install > Install Charts... ...........................................................................................267, 290, 303
> Chart Selection > Chart Install > Uninstall Charts... ........................................................................................................272
> Chart Selection > Display Chart Information Panel... .......................................................................................................227
> Chart Selection > Display Chart Notes... ........................................................................................................................246
> Chart Selection > Display General T&P Notice to Mariners... ............................................................................................248
> Chart Selection > Enter Manual Datum Shift for Chart... ..................................................................................................250
> Chart Selection > Licenses > ARCS/Seafarer/NZMariner > Backup Permit Files to Disk ........................................................276
> Chart Selection > Licenses > ARCS/Seafarer/NZMariner > Display License Info... ....................................................... 270, 274
> Chart Selection > Licenses > ARCS/Seafarer/NZMariner > Display Permit ... Charts... ..........................................................274
> Chart Selection > Licenses > ARCS/Seafarer/NZMariner > Install New Permit from Disk... ...................................................270
> Chart Selection > Licenses > ARCS/Seafarer/NZMariner > Install New Permit from Keyboard... ............................................271
> Chart Selection > Licenses > ARCS/Seafarer/NZMariner > List and ... Charts... ...................................................................273
> Chart Selection > Licenses > ARCS/Seafarer/NZMariner > Restore Permit Files from Disk... .................................................276
> Chart Selection > Licenses > ARCS/Seafarer/NZMariner > Verify Permits... ........................................................................275
> Chart Selection > Licenses > C-MAP... ................................................................................................. 296, 298, 299, 302
> Chart Selection > Licenses > S57 > Backup Permits to Disk... ...........................................................................................279
> Chart Selection > Licenses > S57 > Display Permit Information for All Charts... ..................................................................277
> Chart Selection > Licenses > S57 > Display Public Keys... ................................................................................................279
> Chart Selection > Licenses > S57 > Display User Permit... ................................................................................................271
MENU COMMAND REFERENCE
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
vii
> Chart Selection > Licenses > S57 > Install New Permit from Disk... .................................................................................. 271
> Chart Selection > Licenses > S57 > Install New Permit from Keyboard... ........................................................................... 272
> Chart Selection > Licenses > S57 > Install New Public Key from Disk... ............................................................................. 279
> Chart Selection > Licenses > S57 > Recover Removed Public Keys... ................................................................................. 280
> Chart Selection > Licenses > S57 > Remove Public Keys... ............................................................................................... 280
> Chart Selection > Licenses > S57 > Remove S63 Permits... .............................................................................................. 278
> Chart Selection > Licenses > S57 > Restore Permits from Disk... ...................................................................................... 279
> Chart Selection > Licenses > S57 > Verify S63 Permits... ................................................................................................. 278
> Chart Selection > Licenses > S57 > View S63 Permits... .................................................................................................. 277
> Chart Selection > Load Charts... ...........................................................................................54, 229, 234, 235, 238, 281
> Chart Selection > Print Chart Summary Report... ............................................................................................................ 272
> Chart Selection > Remove Charts... .............................................................................................................................. 230
> Color Scheme... ......................................................................................................................................................53, 55
> Contacts > AIS Messaging > Broadcast AIS Message... ................................................................................................... 205
> Contacts > AIS Messaging > Delete Received Safety Messages... ..................................................................................... 201
> Contacts > AIS Messaging > Delete Sent Safety Messages... ........................................................................................... 206
> Contacts > AIS Messaging > Display AIS Long Range Requests... ..................................................................................... 203
> Contacts > AIS Messaging > Display Received Safety Messages... .................................................................................... 201
> Contacts > AIS Messaging > Display Sent Safety Messages... .......................................................................................... 206
> Contacts > AIS Messaging > Send AIS Message... .......................................................................................................... 205
> Contacts > Contact Info... ...................................................................................................................................192, 200
> Contacts > Contact Intercept... .................................................................................................................................... 197
> Contacts > Contact Symbols ........................................................................................................................................ 191
> Contacts > Scroll Contact Table Down ......................................................................................................................44, 45
> Contacts > Scroll Contact Table Up ...........................................................................................................................44, 45
> Contacts > Seaway Lock Info > Estimated Lock Time Report... ......................................................................................... 214
> Contacts > Seaway Lock Info > Lock Schedule Report... .................................................................................................. 214
> Contacts > Seaway Weather Info > Water Flow Report... ................................................................................................ 214
> Contacts > Seaway Weather Info > Water Level Report... ................................................................................................ 214
> Contacts > Seaway Weather Info > Wind Information Report... ....................................................................................... 214
> Contacts > Seaway Weather Info > Wind Station Report... .............................................................................................. 214
> Contacts > Target Tracking > Acquire ARPA Contact... .................................................................................................... 193
> Contacts > Target Tracking > ARPA Setup... ................................................................................................................... 195
> Contacts > Target Tracking > Auto ARPA Acquisition... ................................................................................................... 194
> Contacts > Target Tracking > Cancel All ARPA Contact... ................................................................................................ 194
> Contacts > Target Tracking > Cancel ARPA Contact... ..................................................................................................... 194
> Man Overboard .......................................................................................................................................................... 116
> Markers > Active Marker Mode > Closest Marker Active ................................................................................................. 115
> Markers > Active Marker Mode > Select Active Marker... ................................................................................................ 115
> Markers > Copy Markers from Disk... ............................................................................................................................ 119
> Markers > Copy Markers to Disk... ................................................................................................................................ 119
> Markers > Create Marker... .......................................................................................................................................... 117
> Markers > Delete Marker... .......................................................................................................................................... 117
> Markers > Drop Event Marker ...................................................................................................................................... 116
> Markers > Markers... ................................................................................................................................................... 117
> Markers > Move Marker... ........................................................................................................................................... 117
> Markers > Name Marker... ........................................................................................................................................... 117
> Markers > Print Marker Report... .................................................................................................................................. 120
> Navigation Tools > Adjust Parallel Index ....................................................................................................................... 109
> Navigation Tools > Calculator... ...........................................................................................................................113, 114
> Navigation Tools > Clearing Lines > Clearing Lines... ...................................................................................................... 175
> Navigation Tools > Clearing Lines > Copy Clearing Lines from Disk... ............................................................................... 178
> Navigation Tools > Clearing Lines > Copy Clearing Lines to Disk... ................................................................................... 178
> Navigation Tools > EBL/VRM # .............................................................................................................................106, 111
> Navigation Tools > Fixing > Apply Sensor Fix... .............................................................................................................. 122
> Navigation Tools > Fixing > Change Ordered Course and Speed... ...........................................................................129, 131
> Navigation Tools > Fixing > Clear Fix History... .............................................................................................................. 131
> Navigation Tools > Fixing > Copy Reference Points from Disk... ....................................................................................... 127
> Navigation Tools > Fixing > Copy Reference Points to Disk... ........................................................................................... 127
> Navigation Tools > Fixing > Create Manual Fix... ........................................................................................................... 121
viii
MENU COMMAND REFERENCE
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
> Navigation Tools > Fixing > Create Operator Fix... ................................................................................................. 127, 130
> Navigation Tools > Fixing > Reference Points... ..............................................................................................................124
> Navigation Tools > Ghost Ship > Ghost Ship ....................................................................................................................68
> Navigation Tools > Ghost Ship > Set Prediction Time... .....................................................................................................68
> Navigation Tools > Ghost Ship > Use Rate of Turn ............................................................................................................68
> Navigation Tools > Hazard 1 ........................................................................................................................................111
> Navigation Tools > Hazard 2 ........................................................................................................................................111
> Navigation Tools > Locate... .........................................................................................................................................247
> Navigation Tools > Log Book... .....................................................................................................................................138
> Navigation Tools > NAVTEX Message Manager... ............................................................................................................222
> Navigation Tools > NAVTEX Setup... ..............................................................................................................................222
> Navigation Tools > Query Chart Features... ............................................................................................................. 16, 243
> Navigation Tools > Set and Drift > Enter Set and Drift... ....................................................................................................91
> Navigation Tools > Set and Drift > Set Computed Set and Drift Interval... ............................................................................90
> Navigation Tools > Tides and Currents > Get Prediction... ...............................................................................................132
> Navigation Tools > Tides and Currents > Load Data... .....................................................................................................135
> Navigation Tools > Tides and Currents > Monitoring... ....................................................................................................134
> Navigation Tools > Tides and Currents > Unload Data... ..................................................................................................135
> Navigation Tools > Zone Alarms > Clear Anchor Watch .....................................................................................................72
> Navigation Tools > Zone Alarms > Clear Guard Zone ........................................................................................................74
> Navigation Tools > Zone Alarms > Set Anchor Position... ..................................................................................................72
> Navigation Tools > Zone Alarms > Set Drag Circle... .........................................................................................................73
> Navigation Tools > Zone Alarms > Set Guard Zone... ........................................................................................................74
> Navigation Tools > Zone Alarms > Set Swing Circle... .......................................................................................................73
> Routes > Action Points > Add Arrival Alert > Forward... ..................................................................................................160
> Routes > Action Points > Add Arrival Alert > Reverse... ...................................................................................................160
> Routes > Action Points > Add Chart Zoom Point > Forward... ..........................................................................................160
> Routes > Action Points > Add Chart Zoom Point > Reverse... ...........................................................................................160
> Routes > Action Points > Add Note > Forward... ............................................................................................................160
> Routes > Action Points > Add Note > Reverse... .............................................................................................................160
> Routes > Action Points > Edit Note... ............................................................................................................................160
> Routes > Action Points > Move Action Point... ...............................................................................................................160
> Routes > Action Points > Remove Action Point... ............................................................................................................160
> Routes > Create Route... ..............................................................................................................................................148
> Routes > Display Route Monitor... ........................................................................................................... 16, 81, 152, 162
> Routes > Edit Route > Add Waypoint... .........................................................................................................................149
> Routes > Edit Route > Delete Waypoint... ......................................................................................................................150
> Routes > Edit Route > Insert Waypoint... .......................................................................................................................151
> Routes > Edit Route > Leg Properties... ................................................................................................................ 157, 161
> Routes > Edit Route > Move Leg... ...............................................................................................................................151
> Routes > Edit Route > Move Waypoint... .......................................................................................................................149
> Routes > Edit Route > Name Waypoint... ......................................................................................................................152
> Routes > Edit Route > Scan Route Legs... ......................................................................................................................170
> Routes > Edit Route > Set Squat... ................................................................................................................................152
> Routes > Edit Route > Set Turn Radius... ........................................................................................................................158
> Routes > Edit Route > Set Water Level Station... ............................................................................................................153
> Routes > Edit Route > Squat ..........................................................................................................................................87
> Routes > Edit Route > Subdivide Leg... ..........................................................................................................................151
> Routes > Edit Route > Water Level .................................................................................................................................88
> Routes > Edit Route > Waypoint Properties... ........................................................................................................ 159, 164
> Routes > ETA/TTG Speed .............................................................................................................................................161
> Routes > Print Route Report... ......................................................................................................................................173
> Routes > Remove Route... ............................................................................................................................................147
> Routes > Route Calculator... ........................................................................................................................165, 166, 167
> Routes > SAR Patterns > Add SAR Pattern > Add Expanding Square .................................................................................155
> Routes > SAR Patterns > Add SAR Pattern > Add Parallel Legs... ......................................................................................155
> Routes > SAR Patterns > Add SAR Pattern > Add Sector Search... ....................................................................................155
> Routes > SAR Patterns > Edit SAR Pattern... ...................................................................................................................156
> Routes > Save or Delete Route > Copy Routes from Disk... ..............................................................................................171
> Routes > Save or Delete Route > Copy Routes to Disk... ..................................................................................................171
MENU COMMAND REFERENCE
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
ix
> Routes > Save or Delete Route > Delete Route from System... ......................................................................................... 170
> Routes > Save or Delete Route > Export NMEA Routes to Disk... ..................................................................................... 171
> Routes > Save or Delete Route > Import NMEA Routes from Disk... ................................................................................. 171
> Routes > Save or Delete Route > Save Route As... ..................................................................................................170, 171
> Routes > Save or Delete Route > Save Route... .............................................................................................................. 170
> Routes > Scan Route... ................................................................................................................................................ 168
> Routes > Select Active Route > Exit Manual Waypoint Selection Mode ............................................................................... 79
> Routes > Select Active Route > Select Active Waypoint... .................................................................................................. 79
> Routes > Select Active Route > Select Route by Name... ................................................................................................... 78
> Routes > Select Active Route > Select Route with Cursor... ............................................................................................... 78
> Routes > Select Active Route > Skip to Next Waypoint ..................................................................................................... 79
> Routes > Select Active Route > Skip to Previous Waypoint ................................................................................................ 79
> Routes > Select Route to Display... ............................................................................................................................... 146
> Routes > Set Route Direction... .................................................................................................................................... 161
> Routes > Track Control... ............................................................................................................. 97, 100, 101, 332, 341
> Screen Layout .............................................................................................................................................................. 36
> Screen Layout > AIS .............................................................................................................................................45, 199
> Screen Layout > Alarms ................................................................................................................................................ 43
> Screen Layout > ARPA .................................................................................................................................................. 44
> Screen Layout > Conning .............................................................................................................................................. 49
> Screen Layout > Dual .................................................................................................................................................... 40
> Screen Layout > GPS Data ............................................................................................................................................. 42
> Screen Layout > Large .................................................................................................................................................. 41
> Screen Layout > Nav ..................................................................................................................................................... 36
> Screen Layout > Nav Detailed ........................................................................................................................................ 38
> Screen Layout > OSI ..................................................................................................................................................... 39
> Setup > About... ...................................................................................................................................................13, 314
> Setup > AIS Setup > AIS Administration > AIS Radio Transmission ................................................................................... 207
> Setup > Display Enabled Features... ................................................................................................................................ 12
> Setup > Display Setup > Brightness and Contrast... .......................................................................................................... 54
> Setup > Display Setup > Distance to Run... ..................................................................................................................... 80
> Setup > Display Setup > EBL/VRM Display Options... ...................................................................................................... 112
> Setup > Display Setup > Full Light Sectors .................................................................................................................... 243
> Setup > Display Setup > Highlight Raster Updates ......................................................................................................... 285
> Setup > Display Setup > Highlight Shallow Dangers ....................................................................................................... 243
> Setup > Display Setup > Route Display Options... ............................................................................................................. 76
> Setup > Display Setup > Show Five Depth Shades .......................................................................................................... 241
> Setup > Display Setup > Show Shallow Water Pattern .................................................................................................... 242
> Setup > Display Setup > Show Symbol Info on Query ..................................................................................................... 245
> Setup > Display Setup > Standard Display on Startup ....................................................................................................... 36
> Setup > Display Setup > Use IMO Cursor ........................................................................................................................ 55
> Setup > Display Setup > Use Traditional Boundaries ....................................................................................................... 239
> Setup > Display Setup > Use Traditional Symbols ........................................................................................................... 238
> Setup > Display Setup > Velocity Vectors... ...................................................................................................................... 64
> Setup > Display Setup > Vessel Track... ........................................................................................................................... 67
> Setup > Help... ............................................................................................................................................................. 15
> Setup > Position Adjustment > Adjust Position with Cursor... ............................................................................................ 90
> Setup > Position Adjustment > Adjust Position... ............................................................................................................. 89
> Setup > Position Adjustment > Clear Position Adjustment... .............................................................................................. 90
> Setup > Radar > Active Radar ..................................................................................................................................... 189
> Setup > Radar > Calibrate Radar with Cursor... .............................................................................................................. 221
> Setup > Radar > Calibrate Radar... ............................................................................................................................... 221
> Setup > Radar > Color > Black .................................................................................................................................... 218
> Setup > Radar > Color > Dark Green ............................................................................................................................ 218
> Setup > Radar > Color > Light Green ........................................................................................................................... 218
> Setup > Radar > Color > White .................................................................................................................................... 218
> Setup > Radar > Radar Image ..................................................................................................................................... 216
> Setup > Radar > Radar Information... ........................................................................................................................... 218
> Setup > Radar > Radar Settings... ................................................................................................................................ 217
> Setup > Radar > Select Radar Source... ......................................................................................................................... 189
x
MENU COMMAND REFERENCE
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
> Setup > Radar > Set Blank Sectors... .............................................................................................................................218
> Setup > Radar > Set Transparency... ..............................................................................................................................217
> Setup > Screen Captures > Copy Screen Captures to Disk... .............................................................................................139
> Setup > Screen Captures > Create Screen Capture ..........................................................................................................138
> Setup > Screen Captures > Delete Screen Captures... ......................................................................................................139
> Setup > Screen Captures > Print Screen Captures... ........................................................................................................139
> Setup > Screen Captures > Screen Capture Recording Options... ......................................................................................139
> Setup > Security > Softlock ..........................................................................................................................................333
> Setup > Select System Units > Select Bearing Units... ........................................................................................................59
> Setup > Select System Units > Select Depth Units... ..........................................................................................................56
> Setup > Select System Units > Select Distance Units... ......................................................................................................56
> Setup > Select System Units > Select Speed Units... ..........................................................................................................57
> Setup > Select System Units > Select Time Zone... ............................................................................................................58
> Setup > Select Time Source... .........................................................................................................................................58
> Setup > Sensor Setup > AIS Setup > Acknowledge AIS Alarms... ......................................................................................208
> Setup > Sensor Setup > AIS Setup > Add AIS Channel Management Region... ...................................................................207
> Setup > Sensor Setup > AIS Setup > AIS Administration > AIS Radio Transmission .................................................... 208, 209
> Setup > Sensor Setup > AIS Setup > AIS Administration > Set AIS Data Port Rates... ..........................................................207
> Setup > Sensor Setup > AIS Setup > AIS Administration > Set AIS Transponder Identification... ...........................................207
> Setup > Sensor Setup > AIS Setup > AIS Display Options... ..............................................................................................199
> Setup > Sensor Setup > AIS Setup > Display AIS Alarm/Status... ......................................................................................208
> Setup > Sensor Setup > AIS Setup > Display AIS Non-Functioning Time... .........................................................................209
> Setup > Sensor Setup > AIS Setup > Edit/Display AIS Channel Management... .......................................................... 207, 209
> Setup > Sensor Setup > AIS Setup > Request Own Ship Status Info... .................................................................................46
> Setup > Sensor Setup > AIS Setup > Secure AIS > Display Secure Key Info... ......................................................................211
> Setup > Sensor Setup > AIS Setup > Secure AIS > Input Secure Key .................................................................................212
> Setup > Sensor Setup > AIS Setup > Secure AIS > Set Default Secure Mode... ...................................................................213
> Setup > Sensor Setup > AIS Setup > Secure AIS > Set Secure Channel Reporting Rate... .....................................................210
> Setup > Sensor Setup > AIS Setup > Secure AIS > Set Secure Identification... ....................................................................211
> Setup > Sensor Setup > AIS Setup > Secure AIS > Set Secure Mode... ...............................................................................213
> Setup > Sensor Setup > AIS Setup > Select AIS Source for Display... .................................................................................188
> Setup > Sensor Setup > AIS Setup > Select AIS Status Page... ............................................................................................46
> Setup > Sensor Setup > AIS Setup > Set AIS Long Range Response Filter... ........................................................................202
> Setup > Sensor Setup > AIS Setup > Set AIS Ship Static Data... ........................................................................................206
> Setup > Sensor Setup > AIS Setup > Set AIS Voyage Static Data... ....................................................................................207
> Setup > Sensor Setup > DGPS Beacon > Add DGPS Beacon... ..........................................................................................185
> Setup > Sensor Setup > DGPS Beacon > Delete DGPS Beacon... .......................................................................................185
> Setup > Sensor Setup > DGPS Beacon > Edit DGPS Beacon... ..........................................................................................185
> Setup > Sensor Setup > DGPS Beacon > Enter Beacon Name or Frequency... .....................................................................184
> Setup > Sensor Setup > DGPS Beacon > Select DGPS Beacon... .......................................................................................184
> Setup > Sensor Setup > Enable Heading Sources... .........................................................................................................187
> Setup > Sensor Setup > Enable Position Sources... ..........................................................................................................183
> Setup > Sensor Setup > Select ARPA Screen Index ................................................................................................... 44, 193
> Setup > Sensor Setup > Select Primary Position Source... ........................................................................................ 130, 182
> Setup > Sensor Setup > Select Secondary Position Source... .............................................................................................182
> Setup > Sensor Setup > Select Sensor Source... .................................................................................... 180, 181, 186, 188
> Setup > Sensor Setup > Set Anemometer Offset ...............................................................................................................66
> Setup > Sensor Setup > Set Gyro Error... ........................................................................................................................186
> Setup > Sensor Setup > Set Gyro Heading... ..................................................................................................................186
> Setup > Sensor Setup > Set Magnetic Deviation... ..........................................................................................................187
> Setup > Sensor Setup > Setup Sensors... ........................................................................................................................332
> Setup > Sensor Setup > Wind Vector ...............................................................................................................................65
> Setup > Set True Motion Paging... ...................................................................................................................................30
> Setup > Softlock .........................................................................................................................................................333
> Setup > Software Licenses > Display Enabled Features... .......................................................................................... 12, 316
> Setup > Software Licenses > Install Software License from Keyboard... .............................................................................315
> Setup > Software Licenses > Install Software License... ...................................................................................................315
> Setup > Software Licenses > Uninstall Software License... ...............................................................................................316
> Setup > Sound ..............................................................................................................................................................95
> Setup > Synchronization > Display Synchronization Settings... ...........................................................................................22
MENU COMMAND REFERENCE
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
xi
> Setup > Tides and Currents Setup... .............................................................................................................................. 136
> Setup > Vessel Setup > Anti-Grounding .......................................................................................................................... 69
> Setup > Vessel Setup > Select Vessel Shape... ................................................................................................................ 323
> Setup > Vessel Setup > Set Anti-Grounding... .................................................................................................................. 70
> Setup > Vessel Setup > Set Measurement Errors... ......................................................................................................... 124
> Setup > Vessel Setup > Set Safety Depth... ...................................................................................................................... 85
> Setup > Vessel Setup > Set Track Control Options... ...............................................................................................100, 102
> Setup > Vessel Setup > Ship Symbol ............................................................................................................................... 62
> Setup > Vessel Setup > Vessel Shape Editor... ........................................................................................................185, 324
> Setup > Voyage Data Recording > Export Recorded Data to Disk... .................................................................................. 141
> Setup > Voyage Data Recording > Import Recorded Data from Disk... .............................................................................. 142
> Setup > Voyage Data Recording > Playback Recorded Data... .......................................................................................... 143
> Setup > Voyage Data Recording > Remove Recorded Data from System... ........................................................................ 142
> Setup > Voyage Data Recording > Save Recorded Data As... ........................................................................................... 141
> Setup > Voyage Data Recording > Set Log File Size... ..................................................................................................... 140
> Shutdown... .........................................................................................................................................................21, 333
> Track Control... ........................................................................................................................... 97, 100, 101, 332, 341
xii
MENU COMMAND REFERENCE
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
1
1
Introduction
ECPINS 5000 6.0 is a computerized, shipboard navigational aid. It displays
electronic charts, the own ship's position in real time, and sensor information.
ECPINS provides features that facilitate precision navigation. ECPINS meets
the International Maritime Organization’s (IMO) ECDIS (electronic chart
display and information system) standards.
1.A
About this document
This document is a reference manual for the operator of an ECPINS 5000 6.0
system. As an operator, you are concerned with the safe navigation of a
vessel. It is assumed that you are familiar with essential navigational terms
and techniques.
For the experienced ECPINS user who wants to find a particular choice in the
main menu hierarchy, “Menu command reference” may be useful. The Index
includes among its entries individual ECPINS menu choices and a rudimentary
glossary.
The information in this document is also available on an ECPINS system: In
ECPINS, press the F1 key to view ECPINS Help, which contains this manual and
other documentation.
This document does not cover installation and configuration of an ECPINS
system. Typically, these tasks are the responsibility of a service technician.
Refer to the ECPINS Technician’s Guide (press F1 to view) and documentation
provided with the system hardware.
For information on vessel simulation, refer to Ap.H, Vessel simulation.
Note: Since colour is essential to the legibility of the ECPINS displays, this document is
intended to be printed or displayed in colour.
1 INTRODUCTION
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
1
1.B
New in ECPINS 6.0.3.2
The following summarizes some of the capabilities available to you that were
not available in version 6.0.3. For complete information and related
procedures, refer to sections of the ECPINS Operator’s Manual indicated.
Note: Throughout this manual, italics indicate new capabilities documented in ECPINS version
6.0, 6.0.1, 6.0.2, 6.0.3, and 6.0.3.2.
Note: The ECPINS 6.0.3.1 release did not have new features that required an update to this
ECPINS Operator’s Manual.
AIS Screen Layout Update
The AIS targets list now includes an Age column that shows the elapsed time
since the last position report was received [3.B.9].
ARPA Target Tracking configuration
For systems that use Target Tracking, a detailed ARPA Setup dialog is
available, which allows an ECPINS technician to adjust the ARPA Target
Tracking settings [9.B.2.B].
NVES Simulator update
The NVES Simulator [Ap.H] has additional functions available on the ARPA
Screen.
a
b
1.C
The Construct option originally sent track and constructs data together.
Now the Constructs and KH Tracks options are separated [Table Ap-6].
New CTC Contact types (ARPA, AIS, operator, and user-created) can be
simulated [Table Ap-6].
New in ECPINS 6.0.3
The following summarizes some of the major capabilities available to you
that were not available in version 6.0.2. For complete information and
related procedures, refer to sections of the ECPINS Operator’s Manual
indicated.
Note: Throughout this manual, italics indicate new capabilities documented in ECPINS version
6.0, 6.0.1, 602, and 6.0.3.
2
1 INTRODUCTION
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Chart Loading priority
The chart loading priority now includes the chart date to prioritize the most
recently updated charts for display [10.B.3.B].
Chart Centring modes
ECPINS has a new Chart Centring mode that allows you to centre the chart
display on a selected chart [3.A.4].
Vessel Shape Editor enhancements
The Vessel Shape Editor has a new “Fit to Screen” zoom option and can
support zooming using the left and right mouse buttons [Ap.E.4.C]. The
vessel offsets positions name can now be displayed beside the position
marker [Ap.E.4.D].
1.D New in ECPINS 6.0.2
The following summarizes some of the major capabilities available to you
that were not available in version 6.0.1. For complete information and
related procedures, refer to sections of the ECPINS Operator’s Manual
indicated.
Note: Throughout this manual, italics indicate new capabilities documented in ECPINS version
6.0, 6.0.1, and 6.0.2.
Synchronized network system
For ECPINS systems that are licensed to operate in a synchronized network
environment, you can now view a list of the types of data and system settings
that are synchronized in your system. The ability to manually initiate a data
synchronization is also provided [2.C.1].
Track Control navigation
ECPINS now offers Track Control functionality that meets the IEC 62065
Category B Track Control Standards. This is an optional autopilot mode for
navigation using the Raytheon NautoPilot 2025 (NP 2025) device [5.G.1].
Blank radar sectors
When using Raymarine RD418HD or RD424HD radars, the ECPINS radar Image
overlay can inhibit radar transmission for up to two sectors [9.E.1.C]. This is an
optional product feature.
1 INTRODUCTION
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
3
ARPA Target Tracking
The ARPA Target Tracking introduced in ECPINS 6.0.1 now supports the use of
a RIBNet radar board (in addition to the RTI radar board) to acquire ARPA
contacts from the radar image overlay on the ECPINS chart display [9.B.2.B].
This is an optional product feature.
AIS secure identification setting
When you set up a secure AIS Transponder, the Secure ID and Organization ID
fields are now defined in a new dialog box called “Set Secure Identification”
[9.D.4.B].
Company name change
Offshore Systems Ltd. is now called OSI Maritime Systems Ltd.
NVES Simulator update
The NVES Simulator [Ap.H] has the following enhancements:
a
b
c
1.E
New fields are available:
i Speed Through Water (STW)
ii Latitudinal water speed (LOG-L)
iii Transverse water speed (LOG-T)
iv Thrust of the vessel (Thrust)
New inertial navigation system (INS) settings are available.
All sensor data can be enabled or disabled using the Sensors On and
Sensors Off buttons.
New in ECPINS 6.0.1
The following summarizes some of the major capabilities available to you
that were not available in version 6.0. For complete information and related
procedures, refer to sections of the ECPINS Operator’s Manual indicated.
Note: Throughout this manual, italics indicate new capabilities documented in ECPINS version
6.0 and 6.0.1.
Alarms
The severity of alarms in ECPINS has been adjusted to include a new alarm
state (Caution) and to conform to the revised Performance Standards for
Integrated Navigation Systems (INS), IMO resolution MSC.252(83), appendix 5
[2.B.4.C], [3.B.11.C], and [5.F].
Warning alarms are now displayed in an orange colour instead of a yellow
colour. Also, the following tiles in the Alarms panel have been renamed:
4
1 INTRODUCTION
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
a
b
GPS is now Primary Pos
Secondary GPS is now Secondary Pos
Pressure units
You can now select the type of pressure units you want displayed in the
ECPINS system [3.C.7].
Enhanced playback support
The voyage logs will capture more types of messages for playback, including
operator contact messages.
Contact Symbol display mode
A new setting allows you to display the contacts symbols in a simplified
mode. This setting reduces the size of the symbols and removes additional
information, such as velocity vectors, tracks, and vessel names, from the chart
display [9.B.1].
ARPA Target Tracking
ECPINS systems that use an RTI radar board can acquire ARPA contacts from
the radar image overlay on the ECPINS chart display [9.B.2.B]. This is an
optional product feature.
Radar server connection
ECPINS now offers a networked radar connection for two or more radar
sources. A new menu option is available to select the active radar for
displaying the radar image overlay [9.A.5].
Print Chart Summary Report
The Print Chart Summary Report dialog now allows you to select or deselect all
of the reports by clicking a single button [12.B.4].
Objects detected by the anti-grounding cone
The list of objects detected by the anti-grounding cone is updated to reflect
the 3.0 edition of the IEC 61174 (for S57 data) and ECDIS-N (for DNC data)
standards [Ap.D].
NVES Vessel Simulator
The NVES Vessel Simulator is enhanced to include attitude sensor data for
pitch and roll [Ap.I.6.G].
1 INTRODUCTION
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
5
1.F
New in ECPINS 6.0
The following summarizes some of the major capabilities available to you
that were not available in version 5.3.2. For complete information and
related procedures, refer to sections of the ECPINS Operator’s Manual
indicated.
Note: Throughout this manual, italics indicate new capabilities documented in this major
ECPINS version (6.0).
Licensing
If you are upgrading to ECPINS 6.0 software from version 5.3.2 or earlier, the
system requires a new license, either a software license or hardlock [Ap.B].
PNG screen captures
ECPINS now saves manual and automatic screen captures as Portable Network
Graphics (PNG) files, rather than Bitmap (BMP) files [7.B].
Asset Control and Tracking (ACT) Features
Note: This section discusses an optional ECPINS feature, called ACT, that is
only available on some systems.
Network Time Protocol (NTP)
ECPINS can directly interface to one or more NTP servers and manage time
adjustments within the software [3.C.7].
Disk space monitoring
ECPINS now monitors the disk space available on your ECPINS hard drive and
provides warning messages [7.C.3].
Chart display
ECPINS now supports the following chart display standards:
a
b
c
d
6
IHO Special Publication 52 “Specifications for Chart Content and Display
Aspects of ECDIS”, Edition 6.0, March 2010. This includes edition 3.4 of
the Digital Presentation Library and all cumulative maintenance
amendments.
Admiralty Information Overlay (AIO), which is intended for use in
combination with ENC data to display Temporary and Preliminary Notices
to Mariners [12.A].
C-MAP Jeppesen PRIMAR services and database [12.J].
Integration with the C-MAP SDK 4.5 [12.J].
1 INTRODUCTION
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
ECPINS also support the IHS Fairplay World Register of Ships.
1.G
System overview
ECPINS provides the ship navigator and bridge team with a precise, real-time
display of the own ship's position and progress on electronic charts.
Figure 1-1 ECPINS Console
1
1
1.G.1
Repeater display
2
2
Console on a ship’s bridge
Own ship
On a computer display, you can observe the own ship's position, heading,
speed, course over ground, cross-track distance, and other critical passagemaking information at a scale appropriate to the navigational task. The own
ship display features a time-labeled track, predicted positions, rate of turn,
relative wind, and — at larger display scales [figure 1-2] — the vessel's outline
with motion vectors.
ECPINS automatically derives the ship's position from designated sensors.
Sensor information is integrated into ECPINS from sources such as GPS/DGPS,
DPS, LORAN-C, speed log, gyrocompass, ARPA, Anemometer, radar, AIS, INS,
and depth sounder.
1 INTRODUCTION
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
7
Figure 1-2 Own ship displayed
1.G.2
Chart display
As a certified ECDIS (Electronic Chart Display and Information System), ECPINS
displays the own ship on a geo-referenced electronic chart display. ECPINS
automatically selects the best charts for the area in view. You must install
charts to cover operational areas. ECPINS can work with a large range of
official vector and raster chart formats, which it synthesizes into a single,
“multi-fuel” display with no borders or seams. You have the option of
selecting particular charts and overlaying specialized information such as
tides and currents [figure 1-3].
The electronic chart brings great flexibility to the display. Chart orientation
can be relative to the ship's heading, route, or a compass point. The display
can move with the ship's movement or stay fixed to a location. You can zoom
to a wide range of scales, pan with no delay, and go directly to any charted
location. Detailed information is available on any charted object or area.
ECPINS automatically limits feature detail based on display scale. By adding or
removing overlays and using filters, you can increase or decrease feature
detail beyond the IHO standard. Should it be necessary, you can correct
charted objects or add new objects, including interpolated bottom contours.
Finally, charts can be updated (when electronic updates are available from
the producer) or replaced with new versions.
8
1 INTRODUCTION
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Figure 1-3 Chart display overview
Alternative screen layouts ensure optimal presentation of charts and data to
support diverse navigational tasks — from ocean transits to harbour pilotage.
Each layout provides a different combination of chart and sensor data
display. For example, one layout maximizes the display area for route
planning purposes while another facilitates route monitoring with sensor
data and system alarms. ECPINS recalls any adjustments to a layout for the
next time it is used.
1.G.3
Navigation
You can prepare any number of routes by laying out waypoints, legs, planned
speeds, and cross-track corridors [figure 1-4]. For planned intended
movement, you can specify ETA, ETD, and stopover. You can enhance a route
with action points, distance-to-run marks, and wheel-over/wheel-steady
points based on ship-specific turn data. When a route is ready, it can be
quickly scanned for hazards and saved for future use. In an emergency,
standard search and rescue patterns are available for instant application.
En-route, ECPINS displays time to go, course to steer, and ETAs. An antigrounding cone precedes or surrounds the ship, scanning for potential
hazards. Visual and audible alarms alert you to such hazards as shallow
depth, route departure, or a sensor deficiency. At an anchorage, the ship can
make use of tools such as a swing circle and guard zone.
For navigational assistance, you can employ various types of electronic
bearing lines (fixed, offset, turn, hazard, parallel index, offset parallel index),
1 INTRODUCTION
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
9
ranges, markers, and safety depth contours. Fixing tools use all recognized
methods, such as visual reference points, and radar.
Figure 1-4 Navigational tools displayed
1.G.4
Records
When operations are complete, you have access to voyage data, which
ECPINS recorded continuously. The data includes alarms, visual fixes, and
sensor data. An official log book is also available for required and routine
entries while underway.
1.G.5
Simulation
For planning and training purposes, ECPINS is accompanied by a vessel
simulator application. Refer to Ap.H, “Vessel simulation”.
10
1 INTRODUCTION
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
2
2
Getting started
ECPINS is ready to use when the ECPINS system is started up. Using the
trackball, you can zoom in, centre on the own ship, select a waypoint, and so
on. Most tasks and features are available through a main menu, which
appears in front of the chart display when you centre-click. Keyboard
shortcuts provide one-touch access to key tasks.
2.A
Starting up
To start up the system:
1
Power up the system.
On most ECPINS systems, the operator turns on the computer. On some
systems, the operator turns on the power bar to which the computer and
other devices are connected.
• On most ECPINS systems, the keyboard powers up along with the computer.
If the keyboard is not a type that is backlit, the operator may need external
illumination, such as a small lamp, to discern the keys.
Turn on the monitor.
•
2
On most ECPINS systems, the monitor’s power button is located on the
bottom right of the monitor frame.
ECPINS undergoes an automatic start up process.
•
3
•
2.A.1
If the automatic start up process is not installed, double-click the ECPINS
icon on the Windows desktop.
Feature access
The features available to you are determined by the license or hardlock
installed on the system. The license or hardlock determines the ECPINS
version, which is displayed on the title bar. The features enabled by the
license are potentially available to all system users. For information on
2 GETTING STARTED
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
11
obtaining and installing a software license or hardlock, refer to Ap.B.2,
Obtain a license.
To confirm the features available on an ECPINS system:
Choose > Setup > Display Enabled Features....,or, if the maintenance kit is
installed, choose > Setup > Software Licenses > Display Enabled Features....
A dialog lists all the features enabled by the installed license.
2.A.2
User-configured system settings
When ECPINS starts up, it adopts as system settings those that were in use
when ECPINS was shut down. You can configure some system settings. The
user-configured settings that ECPINS retains from session to session are:
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
2.A.3
Standard Display on Startup [3.A.6.B]: Consists of:
i
Nav screen layout
ii North Up orientation
iii Relative Motion
iv Standard chart features (IMO-standard)
Screen layout [3.B]
Anti-grounding cone dimensions [4.F]
System units:
i
Distance [3.C.4]
ii Depth [3.C.5]
iii Speed [3.C.6]
iv Bearing [3.C.8]
v
vi Pressure Units [3.C.7]
Safety limits [5.C.1]
Velocity vectors setup [4.B]
Wind vector setup [4.C]
Vessel track setup [4.D]
Audible alarm [2.B.4.C]
Automatic chart loading [10.B.3]
Chart display settings;
i
Traditional symbols and boundaries [10.D.1]
ii Depth shades [10.D.5]
iii Shallow water pattern [10.D.6]
iv Shallow dangers [10.D.8]
v Light sectors [10.D.9]
vi Raster updates [12.H.1]
Query settings [10.E.1]
About ECPINS
You can get information about the ECPINS software. This information
includes:
12
2 GETTING STARTED
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
a
b
c
d
ECPINS: Software type and version number
Product ID: A unique identifier of the software installed on the computer
Size: The size in bytes of the ECPINS executable file (eng.exe)
Chart Library: A list of display standards and presentation libraries that ECPINS uses. These
standards include:
i
IHO S–52 Edition 6.0 including Edition 3.4 of the Digital Presentation Library
ii IHO S–57 Edition 3.1.2
iii IHO S–63 Edition 1.1
iv NGA Geosym Edition 2.1
v ARCS HCRF Version 2.00
vi NOAA BSB Edition 4.0
To display information about the ECPINS software:
Choose > Setup > About…. The About ECPINS box appears.
2.B
Controls
ECPINS is controlled by means of a trackball (or mouse or joystick) and a
keyboard.
Using the trackball, you have single-click access to key tasks, such as zooming
in, centring on the own ship, and selecting a waypoint. Most tasks and
features are available through the main menu, which is optimized for seagoing operation. Finally, the keyboard’s function keys enable the experienced
user to take a shortcut to an important procedure such as dropping a man
overboard marker.
2.B.1
Trackball/mouse/joystick controls
The trackball or mouse or joystick controls the cursor on the screen. You use
the cursor to display and choose menu items [2.B.3] as well as other tasks. You
can use a three-button trackball or mouse or joystick to do the following:
2 GETTING STARTED
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
13
Figure 2-1 Trackball/mouse control
Left button
•
•
•
Click on a menu item to
choose it.
Click on the display to
zoom in.
On a dialog, click to
select an option.
Centre button
•
•
•
Click to toggle the main
menu on and off
Double-click to centre
the display on a new
location. If the own ship
is shifted off the screen,
ECPINS is set to Fixed
Position.
Click and hold to centre
on the own ship. ECPINS
is set to Relative Motion.
Right button
•
•
While the current
submenu is displayed,
click to go to a higher
menu level.
Click on the display to
zoom out.
Trackball or
Mouse
It is possible, but not recommended, to operate ECPINS with a two-button
mouse or trackball or joystick as follows:
2.B.2
a
To centre-click: Press both mouse buttons simultaneously.
b
To double-centre-click: Press Ctrl while pressing both mouse buttons simultaneously.
Keyboard control
The keyboard is used to enter numbers and text. Certain key combinations
enable you to take a “shortcut”, that is, bypass use of the trackball. The
keyboard's function (F) keys are mapped to frequently used ECPINS
commands.
14
2 GETTING STARTED
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
For users who prefer to use the keyboard, ECPINS offers several keyboard
shortcuts to ECPINS commands as well as control of lists and dialogs.
Table 2-1
Key
F1
Function (F) keys
Function
Help
Displays ECPINS documentation (including an electronic version of this document) and
release notes. The documentation appears in an ECPINS Browser, in which you click
hyperlinks to view information.
You can expand the browser window by clicking the expand button in the top right. You
can continue to use ECPINS while the browser window is open. You can print a topic by
clicking the area to be printed and clicking the browser’s print button.
Or, choose > Setup > Help....
Note: Complete, printable documents are in Adobe Acrobat format (PDF), which
requires Acrobat Reader to view. Acrobat Reader is available for installation from the
ECPINS Software CD.
Caution: In low-light conditions, the printable documents (PDF) may appear very bright
on the screen. The ECPINS colour scheme does not affect this type of document.
F2
Radar image
Toggles the radar image overlay display on and off (if the ECPINS system is connected to
a radar).
F3
Acknowledge all alarms and warnings.
This is equivalent to choosing Acknowledge Alarms from the main menu.
F4
Contact information
Displays a dialog with instructions to select a contact (ARPA, AIS, or operator) on the
chart.
F5
Create an operator fix
Displays a dialog with tools to set lines of position (LOPs).
F6
Man overboard
Drops an MOB marker at the ship's current position. The marker is date and time
stamped.
F7
EBL/VRM 1
Creates an EBL [6.A] of your choice:
- A fixed electronic bearing line (EBL) and variable range marker (VRM)
- An offset EBL/VRM
- A range and bearing line
- A parallel index
If an EBL exists, ECPINS makes it active (ECPINS displays the EBL’s information in the EBL
text box).
If the EBL is ON, ECPINS removes it.
Or press Shift+F1a.
F8
EBL/VRM 2
Controls an EBL as for F7.
Or press Shift+F2a.
F9
EBL/VRM 3
Controls an EBL as for F7.
Or press Shift+F3a.
F10
Standard display
Returns the display to Standard display.
Or press Shift+F4a.
2 GETTING STARTED
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
15
Table 2-1
Function (F) keys (continued)
Key
Function
F11
Opens the Route Monitor [Figure 8-21], which displays details of the active route [5.B.4].
This is equivalent to choosing > Routes > Display Route Monitor….
Or press Shift+F5a.
F12
Query a chart feature
This is equivalent to choosing > Navigation Tools > Query Chart Features….
Or press Shift+F6a.
a. For keyboards with only 6 function keys. Also works on keyboards with 12 function keys.
Table 2-2
16
Keyboard shortcuts — system-defined actions
Key(s)
Action
Alt+Ctrl+S
Shut down ECPINS.
Ctrl+down arrow
Moves the cursor down the screen 10 pixels.
Ctrl+up arrow
Moves the cursor up the screen 10 pixels.
Ctrl+left arrow
Moves the cursor left across the screen 10 pixels.
Ctrl+right arrow
Moves the cursor right across the screen 10 pixels.
Enter
Closes of the current dialog and saves its contents or concludes the procedure
in progress.
Esc
Exits or cancels the current dialog or procedure in progress.
Tab
Moves to input point or selection to the next input box.
Page Up
Scrolls up a list (where scroll bars are visible).
Page Down
Scrolls down a list (where scroll bars are visible).
Pause
AIS Radio Transmission [9.D]on and off.
Print Scrn or
Ctrl+PrScrn
Create screen capture.
Ctrl+Shift+C
Changes the colour scheme [3.C.1].
[Letter]
When a drop-down list is open, moves the selection to the first item that starts
with that letter.
Table 2-3
Keyboard shortcuts — other actions
Key(s)
ECPINS-specific action
Alt+I
Opens the Install Charts dialog [12.B].
Ctrl+A
Toggles the display of ARPA contacts on and off.
Ctrl+F
Displays the Locate dialog [10.G].
Ctrl+H
Left-click (can be used to zoom in on the display)
Ctrl+I
Toggle the display of AIS contacts on and off.
2 GETTING STARTED
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Table 2-3
2.B.3
Keyboard shortcuts — other actions (continued)
Key(s)
ECPINS-specific action
Ctrl+J
Centre-click (can be used to toggle the main menu on and off)
Ctrl+K
Right-click (can be used to zoom out on the display)
Ctrl+L
Displays the Log Book [7.A].
Ctrl+P
Enables you to change the AIS Status display on the AIS screen layout.
Ctrl+T
Opens the Track Control dialog [5.G.1].
Menus
Two menus control the operation of the system: a “main menu” system and
chart-display menu [3.A]. In this manual, main menu commands are shown as
follows: > Screen Layout > Nav Detailed.
The main menu [figure 2-2] is optimized for sea-going operation. When the
menu is open, the trackball is “captive”, that is, ECPINS enables you to scroll
through the menu but nowhere else; movement does not generate cascading
submenus. You click (that is, left-click) to view a submenu or right-click to go
back one menu. A single centre-click closes the menu. Finally, when you
reopen the main menu, the most recently used submenu item is selected.
Note: In ECPINS-SC the main menu expands when the Maintenance Kit is installed. ECPINS
automatically detects the presence of the Maintenance Kit and displays additional menu
functions related to maintenance tasks. When the kit is disconnected, ECPINS hides functions
that are not normally performed at sea, such as those requiring file transfer.
Figure 2-2 Main menu — root
1
2
3
1
2
3
Arrowhead (>): Indicates a submenu.
Three dots (ellipses) (...): Indicates a
dialog.
Plain menu choice: Indicates an immediate
action.
•
Angle brackets (< >): Indicate an active
menu selection where a choice exists, for
example, Wind Vector TRUE <RELATIVE>.
To use the main menu:
1
Centre-click (that is press the centre button) on the screen.
2 GETTING STARTED
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
17
Or press Ctrl+J on the keyboard.
Instead of the main menu root, a submenu may appear. Right-click to return
up the menu tree until the main menu root is displayed.
• ECPINS displays the menu at the cursor location (if screen space permits, the
top left corner of the menu appears at the cursor).
Choose (that is, click) a menu item [figure 2-2].
•
•
2
•
To close the main menu, centre-click or press Ctrl+J.
Note: To get to the menu root quickly, right-click up to four times. (The menu hierarchy
structure is no more than four layers deep. See “Menu command reference” on page vii.)
2.B.4
The display
ECPINS offers several screen layouts [3.B] for general navigation and for
specific tasks. Each screen layout is an arrangement of the chart display(s) and
text boxes [figure 2-3].
Figure 2-3 Screen layout example— Nav layout
1
3
4
5
2
6
7
1
18
ECPINS version: Controlled by the
software license. Typical versions include:
“5000”, “W” (WECDIS), and blank (basic
ECPINS). To these, “Sub” may be added;
for example, ”ECPINS-W Sub”.
2 GETTING STARTED
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
2
3
Chart display: Displays the selected charts,
own ship symbol, and routes.
Chart-display title bar: Displays the title of
the chart at the centre of the chart display.
Appended to the chart title, ECPINS
4
5
2.B.4.A
displays — when relevant — warnings,
status messages, current tasks; for
example, “Overscale” [3.A.2.A], “Datum
Shift” [10.I], or “Unknown Datum”
[10.A.3].
Chart display menu: Controls chart scale
[Figure 3-2], chart orientation, and the
display of chart features.
Message line: The message line is a record
of the most recent system events,
including cautions, warnings [figure 26],and alarms, AIS alarms and messages,
and chart loadings. Click the arrow to see
a list of past events (up to 200).
6
7
A text box: Information is grouped into the
various types of text boxes according to
purpose. The arrangement of the various
text boxes varies according to the screen
layout. Typical text boxes, include:
EBL: Information on the active EBL
Route: Information on the active route and
the ship’s position relative to it.
Cursor: The cursor’s location relative to the
own ship [6.B.1].
Sensor: Information on the electronic
sensor serving as the primary position
source.
own ship symbol
Underlying world chart
When there is no chart selected for display and when you zoom out to a small
scale, ECPINS displays an underlying chart of the world. The presence of this
underlying chart ensures that there is always chart coverage for any location.
The world chart is a basic vector chart.
Caution: The world chart should not be used for navigation.
2.B.4.B
Own ship position
ECPINS updates the position of the own ship on the display once per second.
The position of the own ship is indicated by either an own ship symbol [4.A]
or a vessel shape [figure 2-4].
Figure 2-4 Own ship displays
1
2
1
A vessel shape representing the own ship
2
The own ship symbol
The vessel shape can be customized to suit the ship on which ECPINS is
operating [4.A.1].
Note: To calculate the own ship’s position, ECPINS refers to the vessel shape, regardless if that
or the own ship symbol is displayed.
Own ship position source ECPINS displays the position of the own ship
according to the active position source [9.A.2], which is either a sensor or a
calculation based on a position fix.
2.B.4.C
Alarms
ECPINS issues alarms based on a variety of conditions, some of which you set
[5.F]. There are five levels of severity for alarms; however, most alarms only
go through two or three levels.
2 GETTING STARTED
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
19
The alarm levels in table 2-4 are listed from the lowest severity level to the
highest.
Table 2-4
Alarm indicators and alerts
Alarm severity
Visual indication
Audible alert
Calm
Only in message line
None
Event
Only in message line
None
Caution
Steady yellow highlighting
None
Warning
Flashing orange highlighting
Double beep every minute
Alarm
Flashing red highlighting
Continuous on/off or dual tone beep
Alarm indicators appear in:
a
b
c
d
Data fields in text boxes [figure 2-5] — the affected field is highlighted in
yellow, flashing orange, or flashing red.
Alarm panel of the Conning [3.B.10] or Alarms [3.B.7] screen layout — the
affected tile turns yellow or flashes orange or red.
The External Alarm Status page of the AIS screen layout [figure 3-31].
The message line [figure 2-6] — a description of each alarm appears. For
example, “own ship outside of drag circle”, or “ARPA contact 3 inside of
swing circle”. Using the message line, you can review the details of any
recent alarms. The message line also displays AIS warnings and alarms
[9.C].
Also, ECPINS records all alarms in the voyage logs [7.C].
Figure 2-5 Alarm indicators in text boxes
1
1
2
2
Caution: Steady yellow.
Warning: Flashes orange. After you
acknowledge the warning, the field stays
orange until the alarm conditions no
longer exist.
3
3
Alarm: Flashes red. After you acknowledge
the alarm, the field stays red until the
alarm conditions no longer exist.
Figure 2-6 Message line with warnings
An alarm persists until you acknowledge it or the condition is resolved. When
you acknowledge an alarm, the audible alert is silenced and the flashing
ceases. However, the highlighting remains either orange (warning) or red
(alarm) as long as the alarm conditions persist.
20
2 GETTING STARTED
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
To acknowledge an alarm:
Press F3, or
Choose > Acknowledge Alarms, or
On the Conning, screen layout, click the appropriate Alarm Panel tile; for
example, the Zone Alarms tile.
On the Conning screen layout, click the All tile on the Alarm Panel.
•
2.B.4.D
If the alarm is GPS-related, clicking the GPS tile silences all five alarm tiles.
North indicator
At the top left corner of the chart display, a large arrow in orange indicates
the direction of true north [figure 2-7]. A smaller arrow in purple indicates
the direction of magnetic north.
Figure 2-7 North indicators
1
2
1
True north indicator
2
Magnetic north indicator at the centre of
the chart display (when the chart mode is
FP) or at the own ship (RM or TM).
For the magnetic variation at the cursor’s geographic location, consult the
Mag Var field, which appears on several screen layouts [3.B] including OSI and
Dual. ECPINS uses the NGDC World Magnetic Model to calculate magnetic
variation.
2.C
Shutting down
In general, an ECPINS system operates continuously. Should it be necessary,
you have the option of shutting down the system or restarting ECPINS. If
operating system security is active [Ap.G], you are not permitted access to the
operating system.
Caution: Do not power down the system without first shutting down the ECPINS software and
Microsoft Windows operating system. Powering down without first shutting down the ECPINS
software and Windows may cause the loss of data. The system may not restart.
To shut down ECPINS:
1
Choose > Shutdown…. A dialog appears.
Or, press Ctrl+Alt+S.
Click OK.
•
2
If operating system security is active, the SoftLock dialog appears.
When ECPINS has shut down, power down the PC.
•
3
2 GETTING STARTED
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
21
2.C.1
Synchronized ECPINS network
Note: This section describes an optional ECPINS feature that is available only on some
systems.
In a synchronized ECPINS network, data that is installed or updated on a
workstation is automatically transmitted to every workstation that is running
ECPINS. If a workstation is not running ECPINS, it will automatically get a
copy of the data the next time an operator launches ECPINS on that
workstation.
Your ECPINS license controls which data types and system settings are
synchronized.
To view your synchronization settings:
1
2
2.C.1.A
Choose > Setup > Synchronization > Display Synchronization Settings... The Display
Synchronization Settings dialog appears.
Click OK to close the dialog.
Working in a synchronized environment
To provide a synchronized environment ECPINS handles a few operator
functions in a new way. For example, procedures that change the user data
files may need to prevent two operators from accessing the same file at the
same time. If this occurs, you will receive a message to inform you that
someone else is currently using the file or function.
In a networked environment the acknowledgement of an alarm can be
shared. If configured accordingly, an alarm can be acknowledged at one
workstation and have the other workstations reflect that the alarm is
acknowledged. The alarm status will still be displayed in the Alarms Panel
and fields, but each workstation does not need to acknowledge the alarm
separately.
When you use ECPINS Setup Mode, the data synchronization and alarm
sharing functions are temporarily deactivated on your workstation. This
allows you to access system setup functions and make changes without
having your local data files changed while you are working. When you
complete your changes and restart ECPINS the new data, created while in the
Setup Mode, will not automatically be distributed.
If you have the appropriate user privileges, you can manually initiate (force) a
synchronization update. This will immediately push all of the synchronized
data from one ECPINS workstation to the other networked ECPINS
workstations.
To force a synchronization update:
1
2
22
Choose > Setup > Synchronization > Synchronize Other ECPINS Workstations... The
Synchronize Other ECPINS Workstations dialog appears [figure 2-8].
Click YES.
2 GETTING STARTED
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Figure 2-8 Synchronize Other ECPINS Workstations dialog
2 GETTING STARTED
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
23
24
2 GETTING STARTED
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
3
3
Chart display
This chapter describes how to adjust the display of charts to better suit your
task at hand. These procedures assume that the required charts have already
been installed.
3.A
Chart display control
Information on the chart display is found on the chart display menu. You use
this menu to control and customize aspects of the chart display.
Figure 3-1 Chart display menu
9
1
10
2
3
8
4
7
5
6
This menu is located at the top of the chart. You
can click each menu choice to change its
settings. Some menu choices indicate their
current state; for example, NUP. The chart
display menu is usable even when you are
working with a dialog.
1 Features ( ): Enables you to add or remove
optional chart features from the display.
The brackets indicate the current display
setting. In this example, the (B+) indicates
that the display is composed of base
features plus some other non-base chart
features [3.A.6.A].
2 +: Click to zoom in.
3 -: Click to zoom out.
4 Chart production date or date of its most
recent update.
3 CHART DISPLAY
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
5
6
7
8
9
Chart display range [3.A.1]: A menu of
chart display ranges. In this example, the
range is 96 nautical miles, which is the
distance from the centre of the chart
display to its top edge.
Chart display scale [3.A.2]: A menu of
scales. In this example the scale is
1:1441000.
Chart mode [3.A.4]: A menu of chart
modes. In this example, the mode is RM
(Relative Motion).
Chart orientation [3.A.3]: A menu of chartorientation modes. In this example the
orientation is NUP (North Up).
Chart title: The title of the chart currently
displayed at the centre of the chart display
[10.B.4].
25
10 Chart projection: Equidistant Cylindrical
(EC)
3.A.1
Chart display range
The chart display range is the distance from the centre of the chart display to
the top edge. The chart display range menu's [figure 3-2] list of ranges starts
at 0.05 nautical miles and ends at 3,072 nautical miles. ECPINS displays the
ranges in nautical miles, regardless of the distance units selected for the
system [3.C.4]. This facilitates the use of a radar alongside ECPINS.
Figure 3-2 Chart display range menu
1
2
1
3.A.2
The chart display range is 3 NM.
2
The chart scale is 1:45000. When a range
is chosen, ECPINS calculates and displays
the appropriate chart scale.
Chart display scale
The chart display scale menu [figure 3-3] has a list of scales divided into two
sections: relative and absolute scales.
26
3 CHART DISPLAY
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Figure 3-3 Chart display scale menu
1
2
3
1
2
Chart display scale
Relative display scales
3
Absolute display scales: These chart scales
give the relationship between screen size
and geographic size.
Caution: The effect of the relative display scale of 1:1 differs between vector and raster charts.
For a vector chart, choosing 1:1 means that ECPINS displays the chart at the original or
“native” scale of the source chart. For a raster chart, 1:1 means the scale at which the source
chart was scanned. This scale is displayed only when a chart is loaded and it may differ from the
chart’s native or “compilation” scale.
You can change the display scale and other chart display menu choices
without interrupting other procedures such as placing waypoints.
To change the chart display scale without interrupting a procedure:
In the chart display menu [figure 3-3], click +. The scale zooms in by one
increment.
or
Click -. The scale zooms out by one increment.
•
Zooming in or out takes place within the chosen scale: relative or absolute.
That is, if relative scale is in use, the chart changes between 0.5:1, 1:1, and
2:1 only. To switch between relative and absolute scales, choose a scale
from the menu.
The menu items + and - control the last-chosen pull-down list. The reason is
that chart range and chart scale values depend on which of them is selected
last.
For example, in figure 3-3, the range value of 1.5 NM was selected by the user,
and the display scale of 1:23200 corresponds to the scale computed from the
range value. This scale may or may not correspond to any of the available
values in the scale menu’s pull-down list.
A quick check of the scale values listed in figure 3-3 shows that 1:23200 is not
part of the listed scales. The reason is that the list of chart display ranges must
have been chosen last. Therefore, using the + and - changes the chart display
range according to the list of values in figure 3-2.
3 CHART DISPLAY
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
27
3.A.2.A
Scale warnings
If a chart is displayed at a magnification beyond its original scale, ECPINS
displays an “Overscale” or “Underscale” warning beside the chart title and
displays an overscale pattern of vertical, light grey lines on the chart in
question [figure 3-4].
Figure 3-4 Overscale warning and pattern
1
2
1
Overscale warning: Includes the overscale
magnification. Followed by the chart title.
2
Overscale pattern (vertical grey lines)
If a chart is under-scaled, ECPINS displays an “Underscale” warning beside the
chart title.
If you attempt to zoom in to a scale that ECPINS cannot display, a “Zoom
Floor” message [figure 3-5] appears briefly appended to the chart title; for
zooming out, a “Zoom Ceiling” message appears.
Figure 3-5 Zoom Floor message
Beyond a certain magnification of a raster chart, ECPINS displays a “Beyond
Scale” warning beside the raster chart title [figure 3-6].
Figure 3-6 Beyond Scale warning
You can remove the Overscale pattern from the display.
To remove overscale lines from the display:
1
In the chart display menu [3.A], click Features. The Feature Settings dialog
appears [3.A.6.A].
2
In the Categories list, choose Viewing Groups.
3
In the Displayed Features list, select Scale Areas/Boundaries.
4
Click << REMOVE.
•
28
To have the overscale lines displayed, reverse this procedure.
3 CHART DISPLAY
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
3.A.2.B
Automatic selection of chart display scale
If a relative scale is in effect (0.5:1, 1:1, or 2:1) when the own ship crosses a
chart boundary (or a scale boundary found within some S57 charts), the chart
display scale changes. As the own ship moves on to a new chart, the title and
number of the new chart at the centre of the chart display is displayed in the
chart-display title bar.
3.A.2.C
Chart scale bar
ECPINS displays a scale bar at the bottom left-hand corner of the chart display
[figure 3-7]. The value and colours of the scales vary with the magnification
scale.
Figure 3-7 Scale bar
1
2
3
1
2
3
The length of the scale bar; in this
example, 1 nautical mile.
Coloured bar. Colour varies according to
scale (see table 3-1).
Depth unit; in this example, Feet. Units can
be in meters (“M”), feet (“Ft”), fathoms
Table 3-1
3.A.3
(“Fm”), or, for raster charts only, fathom
feet (“Fm.ft”). On a raster chart, the depth
units match those of the chart, even if
another depth unit is selected as the
display unit [3.C.5].
Scale bar colours
Scale 1: ---:
IHO Colour
OSI Colour
Length
Divisions
Up to 80,000
orange/grey
orange/grey
One NM
10 @ 0.1NM
80,000 to 800,000
grey/black
red/grey
10 NM
5 @ 2 NM
Greater than 800,000
yellow/grey
yellow/grey
100 NM
5 @ 20 NM
Chart orientation
The chart can be oriented in one of five ways:
a
North Up (NUP): The chart is oriented to North.
b
Route Up (RUP): As the ship progresses, the display is oriented to the course of the active
route leg.
c
Head Up (HUP): the chart orientation corresponds to the own ship’s heading (to the
nearest five degree). Thus, the bow of own ship points to the top of the chart display. This
orientation is well suited to the navigation of rivers and narrow channels.
d
Manual: You enter the orientation in a dialog [figure 3-8].
3 CHART DISPLAY
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
29
e
Source Chart Up (SUP): The orientation of the original source chart from which the raster
chart was created. Source Chart Up is only displayed with raster charts that have a source
chart orientation that is not north up.
Figure 3-8 Chart-display orientation menu
1
2
3
1
Chart-display orientation
In this example, the orientation is Manual
and the orientation value is displayed.
2
3
Orientations
If Manual is chosen, a dialog requests a
value for the orientation of the chart.
To change the orientation of the chart display:
3.A.4
1
In the chart display menu, click the current orientation indicator
[figure 3-8], for example, NUP. A menu appears.
2
From the menu, choose an orientation.
Chart mode
ECPINS has six chart modes:
a
RM (relative motion): When in RM mode, ECPINS keeps the own ship at the centre of the
chart display. The chart, which ECPINS refreshes every second, appears to scroll or pan
under the own ship. You can offset the position of the own ship, for example, to see more
of the chart ahead of the own ship. This is particularly useful to monitor the own ship’s
progress along a route.
To offset the own ship in RM mode:
Place the cursor at a distance from the own ship symbol.
b Double-centre-click (that is, press twice quickly on the trackball or mouse’s
centre button). The chart display centres on the position selected (that is, the
point at that distance ahead of the own ship).
• If, as a result of this procedure, the own ship is outside the chart
display, ECPINS sets the mode to FP.
TM (True Motion): When in TM mode the chart stays fixed while the own ship moves
across it. When the own ship approaches the edge of the chart display, ECPINS “pages”
the chart, that is, i5chart to keep the own ship in view.
a
b
You can adjust the points at which ECPINS triggers a page and the new position at which
the own ship is placed:
a
b
30
Choose > Setup > Set True Motion Paging….
Enter the paging values [figure 3-9].
• The ratio 10:90 gives the maximum look-ahead area.
3 CHART DISPLAY
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Figure 3-9 Set True Motion Paging dialog
•
•
c
Vessel Retreat Limit. Distance from the
start side of the chart display ECPINS
places the own ship when it pages
(expressed as a percentage of the chart
display range).
Vessel Advance Limit. Percentage of the
chart display range the own ship will
•
travel before ECPINS pages (that is,
redraws the display).
In the example shown, when an own ship
moving from left to right across the
display has crossed 80% of the screen
width, ECPINS will page so that the own
ship is 20% of the screen width from the
left side of the screen.
FP (Fixed Position): When in FP mode the chart display is centred on a geographical
position and remains fixed in place.
i
d
In FP mode the cursor position does not move when the ship moves.
Therefore FP is useful for examining chart data and pinpointing a latitude
and longitude.
ii ECPINS automatically switches into FP mode if you scroll the own ship off
the screen.
FP-recall (Fixed Position - recall): When in FP-recall mode the last fixed position is
“recalled.”
An example of FP-recall use: You are reviewing chart data for a distant harbour (FP mode).
You then return to RM mode for a view of the vessel's position. You can choose FP-recall to
recentre the chart display on the view of the distant harbour.
e
CC (Chart Centred - topmost): When in CC-topmost mode, the chart display centres on the
chart at the top of the loaded “stack” [10.B.3.B].
f
CC (Chart Centred - selected): When CC-selected mode is chosen, a dialog appears to
allow the selection of a loaded chart [figure 3-10]. The chart display centres on the loaded
chart that you select.
Note: The Chart Centred - selected mode does not affect the chart order or priority. It only
centres the ECPINS display on the area where the selected chart is located.
Figure 3-10 Select Chart Center dialog
1
1
The selected chart is indicated with angle
brackets.
3 CHART DISPLAY
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
31
Figure 3-11 Chart mode menu
1
1
Current chart mode
2
2
Available chart modes
To change the chart mode:
1
In the chart display menu [3.A], click the chart mode indicator. The mode
menu appears [figure 3-11].
2
From the menu, choose a mode.
•
To switch the mode to RM from any other mode, with the cursor on the chart
display, press and hold the centre button until ECPINS changes to RM mode.
3.A.5
3.A.5.A
Note: This is an optional ECPINS feature that is only available on some systems.
3.A.6
Chart features
You can control the display of chart features [3.A]. ECPINS indicates the
features setting on the chart display menu. Possible settings are:
32
a
Base (B): All optional chart features are removed from the display [figure 3-12].
b
Base+ (B+): Some chart features are displayed but not all those required for the IMO
Standard display.
c
Standard (S): All chart features specified by the IMO as required for safe navigation are
displayed [figure 3-13].
d
Standard+ (S+): More chart features are displayed than those specified by the IMO, but
not all features.
e
Other (O): All chart features are displayed [figure 3-14].
3 CHART DISPLAY
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Figure 3-12 Base (B) features setting — S57 chart
Figure 3-13 Standard (S) features setting — S57 chart
3 CHART DISPLAY
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
33
Figure 3-14 Other features setting — S57 chart
3.A.6.A
Displaying and hiding features
To control the display content, you can selectively display optional feature
layers or remove them from display. The standard layers available in ECPINS
are grouped into several categories: Overlays, Text Groups, and Viewing Groups
[Ap.C].
The availability of a layer may depend on the types of charts loaded. The
types of charts loaded may also affect which features are available in each
layer.
To display an optional feature layer:
1
In the chart display menu, click Features. ECPINS displays the Feature Settings
dialog [3.A.6.A].
2
In the Category list, choose the feature layer.
3
In the Available Features list, select the feature.
4
Click ADD >>. The selected feature appear in the Displayed Features list.
•
34
Or, double-click the feature.
3 CHART DISPLAY
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Figure 3-15 Feature Settings dialog
1
•
•
Category: Gives access to several feature
layers, including: Overlays, VPF Layers,
Viewing Groups, AML Groups, Text
Groups. These layers are available
regardless of the types of charts installed
and loaded.
Standard: Automatically selects the IMO
Standard Display features. Clicking
Standard for any one Category
•
•
1
automatically chooses “Standard” for the
other categories.
ADD >>: Moves the selected features
from Available Features to Displayed
Features.
<< REMOVE: Moves the selected features
from Displayed Features to Available
Features.
Double click a feature to move it between
lists.
To remove a feature layer from display:
1
In the chart display menu, click Features.
2
In the Displayed Features list, select the feature.
3
Click << REMOVE.
•
Or, double-click on the feature.
You can quickly return to the display of standard feature layers.
To remove all but Standard feature layers:
1
In the chart display menu, click Features.
2
In the Features Settings dialog [3.A.6.A], click Standard. ECPINS adjusts the
Displayed Features in all Categories to a standard list.
3
Click OK.
or
Press F10.
3.A.6.B
Standard display
The default display is the Standard display. This Standard display adheres to a
number of parameters defined by the IMO, such as scale, orientation [3.A.3],
and “standard” chart features. You can return ECPINS to the Standard display
settings instantly by pressing F10.
The ECPINS Standard display consists of the following:
a
b
c
d
Own ship symbol on the display and centred in the chart display [3.A.4]
Nav screen layout with one chart display [figure 2-3]
North Up orientation of electronic chart in 1:1 scale in the chart display
IMO “Standard” chart feature display for the Electronic Nautical Chart
(ENC) [3.A.6]
3 CHART DISPLAY
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
35
e
Underlying world chart
When you start up the system, ECPINS uses the Standard display settings. You
can change this so that display settings used at startup are those that were in
use the last time ECPINS was shut down.
To change the startup display setting:
Choose > Setup > Display Setup > Standard Display on Startup. This toggles the
display of a dot before this menu item.
•
3.B
When there is no dot before Standard Display on Startup, the last display
settings are used on startup.
Screen layouts
You can change the arrangement of the screen to one of several designed
layouts. You can modify the appearance of a screen layout by changing the
chart mode and features displayed. ECPINS retains any such modifications
and displays them the next time you choose the screen layout to which they
were made.
To change the screen layout:
1
Choose > Screen Layout.
2
From the Screen Layout submenu, choose the screen layout.
•
3.B.1
A screen layout appears as it was last displayed. For example, if the chart
display was chart-centred, it remains chart-centred on the same chart.
Nav screen layout
This layout [figure 3-16] is suitable for general navigation including route
monitoring. This layout is similar in purpose to Nav Detailed [3.B.2].
36
3 CHART DISPLAY
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Note: Nav is the screen layout in the Standard display (press F10 to return to the Standard
display).
Figure 3-16 Nav screen layout
Features that distinguish this layout from Nav
Detailed [figure 3-17] include:
• Lat./Lon. coordinates in a separate text
box
• XTD (cross-track distance) is in a large
font. Cross-track distance is the distance
3 CHART DISPLAY
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
•
from the own ship to the let as measured
perpendicular to the leg. It is expressed as
”P” or “S” of the track (to the port or
starboard)
TTG (Time to Go) is in a large font.
37
3.B.2
Nav Detailed screen layout
This layout [figure 3-17] is similar in purpose to Nav [3.B.1], but provides more
sensor information.
Figure 3-17 Nav Detailed screen layout
Features that distinguish this layout from Nav
include:
• Log: Speed log
• Depth: The depth displayed is the depth as
provided by the depth sounder.
• Wind
38
3 CHART DISPLAY
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
•
•
•
Drift [5.E]
Set [5.E]
RoT: Rate of turn, expressed as “L” or “R”
(to the left or right) ”P” or “S” (to the port
or starboard). The maximum allowable
rate of turn is 720°/minute.
3.B.3
OSI screen layout
This layout, which maximizes the width of the chart display, is suitable for
general navigation [figure 3-18].
Figure 3-18 OSI screen layout
1
1
Mag Var: Displays the magnetic variation
at the cursor’s geographic location.
3 CHART DISPLAY
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
ECPINS uses the NGDC World Magnetic
Model to calculate magnetic variation.
39
3.B.4
Dual screen layout
This screen layout enables you to view two different areas at once [figure 319]. You can control the display of each chart display separately. This layout is
particularly useful where enhanced situational awareness is needed, such as
in pilotage waters or navigating in a flotilla.
Figure 3-19 Dual screen layout
1
2
3
4
1
2
40
Chart display menu: Each chart display has
its own menu.
Chart display 1: In this example, the
display is in relative-motion and north up
mode. The own ship is offset at the bottom
right-hand for maximum look-ahead.
Radar image overlay [9.E] appears in this
chart display by default.
3 CHART DISPLAY
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
3
4
Chart display 2: In this example, the
display is in chart-centred and north up
mode.
Chart display outline: This rectangle shows
the area covered by the other chart
display. In this example, the two chart
displays display areas of the same chart.
The area displayed in the second chart
display is contained within the window
outline.
3.B.5
Large screen layout
This layout [figure 3-20] emphasizes the display of the chart at the expense of
the text boxes common to other layouts. The large layout is well suited to
route planning, where the large chart display facilitates navigational
briefings or the printing [7.B] of various parts of the proposed route.
Figure 3-20 Large screen layout
3 CHART DISPLAY
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
41
3.B.6
GPS Data screen layout
This screen layout is used to display detailed information on GPS reception
[figure 3-21].
Figure 3-21 GPS Data screen layout
1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
42
The GPS Statistics box displays positioning
information received from GPS and DGPS.
Lat./Lon.: The antenna position of the
primary GPS-based position source.
Mode: Indicates two (2D) or
three-dimensional (3D) coverage. The
mode is a summary of the quality of the
coverage. 3D coverage requires a
minimum of 4 satellites.
Elev: Elevation of the GPS antenna.
Information for up to 12 satellites. The
columns display the following information:
[first column]. Lists the channels on the
receiver.
PRN: Lists the satellites' respective
pseudo-random noise number (PRN) or
identification number.
Az°: Gives azimuth angle of the satellites
in degrees from True North.
El°: Gives the elevation of the satellite in
degrees above the horizon.
3 CHART DISPLAY
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
•
•
•
•
•
C/NO: Gives the carrier-to-noise ratio. This
number indicates the strength of the
transmission from the satellite compared
to surrounding electrical noise. A higher
number represents a stronger signal.
Corr: Gives the differential correction.
Units depend on the manufacturer of the
DGPS receiver.
Rate: Gives the rate of differential
correction. The rate (that is, the delay in
processing a DGPS beacon’s transmission)
depends on the manufacturer of the DGPS
receiver.
Age(s): Gives the age of the differential
correction in seconds. Age is the difference
between the time the correction was
computed at the reference station and the
time the DGPS receiver received the
correction.
Beac Freq: Identity of the transmitting
differential beacon
•
•
3.B.7
Beac Str: Beacon signal strength. If the
beacon signal strength drops below 15 dB
uV/m, ECPINS displays a warning.
Beac SNR: Beacon signal-to-noise ratio. If
the beacon signal-to-noise ratio drops
below 10 dB, ECPINS displays a warning.
1
Own ship latitude and longitude. These
may differ from the GPS coordinates if the
GPS antenna is offset [Ap.E.4.D] from the
vessel’s centre of rotation.
Alarms screen layout
This layout enables you to monitor progress on a chart as well as depth under
the keel, adherence to the designated route, and alarms [figure 3-22].
Figure 3-22 Alarms screen layout
1
2
3
1
2
Depth profile [3.B.8]
Route Up display [3.B.11.B]
3 CHART DISPLAY
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
3
Alarms panel [3.B.11.C]
43
3.B.8
ARPA screen layout
This layout is suitable for viewing ARPA targets [9.B.2] on the chart with
detailed information on the targets available in an adjacent window
[figure 3-23].
Figure 3-23 ARPA screen layout
1
•
44
ARPA Targets: ECPINS can display any
number of targets. The list displays up to
23 targets at once. To scroll through the
list, press the PGUP or PGDN keys or
choose > Contacts > Scroll Contact Table
Up or Scroll Contact Table Down. The
columns are as follows:
Name: The target’s number and name, if
available.
Range: The target’s range
Bearing: The target’s bearing
3 CHART DISPLAY
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
1
CPA: The distance to CPA (Closest Point of
Approach)
TCPA: The time to CPA
ARPA targets on the chart. “ARPA1”
indicates the sensor source: Where more
than one ARPA device is connected, you
can choose the source from which the
ARPA Targets displayed are derived:
choose > Setup > Sensor Setup > Select
ARPA Screen Index.
3.B.9
AIS screen layout
This layout is suitable for viewing AIS contacts [9.C.1] on the chart with
detailed information on each contact available in an adjacent window
[figure 3-24].
Figure 3-24 AIS screen layout
1
•
3.B.9.A
AIS Targets: ECPINS can display any
number of AIS contacts [9.C.1]. The list
displays up to 23 contacts sorted in order
of proximity to the own ship. This list
contains only sensed, not virtual, AIS
contacts. To scroll through the list, press
the PGUP or PGDN keys or choose >
Contacts > Scroll Contact Table Up or
Scroll Contact Table Down. The columns
are as follows:
Name: The target’s MMSI or name.
Range: The target’s range
Bearing: The target’s bearing
Age: Time elapsed since the last position
report received.
1
•
CPA: The distance to CPA (Closest Point of
Approach)
TCPA: The time to CPA
AIS targets on the chart.
AIS Status: Information about the own
ship. You can change the information
displayed on this panel — press Ctrl+P
[3.B.9.A].
AIS Status
On the AIS screen layout, in the AIS Status panel, ECPINS displays by default
“dynamic” information about the own ship, including its position and MMSI.
You can change the type of AIS information displayed on this panel [9.D].
3 CHART DISPLAY
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
45
Note: On the AIS Status pages, ECPINS displays information that it reads from the AIS device.
Thus, the type of information available to display depends on the connected AIS device.
To change the AIS Status display:
1
Choose > Setup > Sensor Setup > AIS Setup > Select AIS Status Page....
2
Or press Ctrl+P.
On the Select AIS Status Page dialog [figure 3-25], select a status page.
3
Click Select and then Exit. ECPINS changes the AIS Status panel display.
•
•
•
ECPINS retains this setting, even if you restart it.
To ensure that the information displayed is up to date, choose > Setup >
Sensor Setup > AIS Setup > Request Own Ship Status Info.... This reads the
information stored on the AIS device.
Figure 3-25 Select AIS Status page
The status pages available depend on the
connected AIS device. In this example, the AIS
device is a Saab R4, the pages for which
include:
• Display Vessel Dynamic Data: See fig. 326.
• Display Ship Static Data: See fig. 3-27.
• Display Voyage Static Data: See fig. 3-28.
•
•
•
•
•
Display Channel Assignment: See fig. 329.
Display Data Port Status: See fig. 3-30.
Display External Alarm Status: See fig. 331.
Display LRF Status: See fig. 3-32.
Secure AIS is not available on all systems.
Figure 3-26 AIS Status page: Vessel Dynamic Data
•
•
46
This data is generated by the position
source to which the AIS is connected.
Pos Src/Acc: Indicates the source from
which the AIS is deriving the position it
broadcasts. By default, it uses an external
3 CHART DISPLAY
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
GPS (typically, the ship’s main position
source). If that source fails or is
inadequate, the AIS uses its internal GPS.
Accuracy (Acc) indicates the quality of the
position.
Figure 3-27 AIS Status page: Ship Static Data
•
•
You can set the ship’s static data through
ECPINS.
Pos Src: Indicates the source from which
the AIS is set to derive the position it
broadcasts.
•
•
Antenna #: The location of the position
source’s antenna in terms of distance from
the bow (A), stern (B), port beam (C), and
starboard beam (D).
DTE: Indicates if the AIS device has a
keyboard and display attached.
Figure 3-28 AIS Status page: Voyage Static Data
•
You can set the voyage’s static data
through ECPINS.
Figure 3-29 AIS Status pages: Channel Assignment
•
You can assign the channels through
ECPINS.
Figure 3-30 AIS Status page: Data Port Status
•
You can assign ports through ECPINS.
3 CHART DISPLAY
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
47
Figure 3-31 AIS Status page: External Alarm Status
•
“Ack” indicates that you have
acknowledged the alarm.
Figure 3-32 AIS Status page: LRF Status
•
48
You can adjust the filter.
3 CHART DISPLAY
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
•
AIS alarms also appear in the ECPINS
message line.
3.B.10
Conning screen layout
Note: This is an optional feature available on only some ECPINS systems.
This layout enables you to monitor information vital to the movement of the
ship such as its rate of turn, rudder positions, adherence to a route, depth
under the keel, and alarms [figure 3-33]. In ECPINS Setup, you can adjust
aspects of this layout, such as the number of rudders, shafts, and thrusters.
Figure 3-33 Conning screen layout
1
2
3
4
9
5
7
6
8
1
2
3
4
Route-up display: Enables you to track the
ship’s position relative to the active route
leg [8.A], represented by the red line in the
centre. ECPINS issues a warning if the own
ship strays beyond the cross-track limits
[8.C.1].
Heading indicator: The yellow line
indicates the own ship’s current position,
the blue the projected position.
Speed of the bow’s lateral movement to
port (or starboard, indicated on the
opposite side of the display)
Bow thruster (port and starboard): The
blue indicates the RPM, the yellow the
pitch. You can configure the number of
thrusters in ECPINS Setup by right-clicking
these symbols.
3 CHART DISPLAY
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
5
6
7
8
9
Stern thruster(s) (port and starboard): The
blue indicates the RPM, the yellow the
pitch. You can configure the number of
thrusters in ECPINS Setup by right-clicking
these symbols.
Speed of the stern’s lateral movement to
starboard (or port, indicated on the
opposite side of the display)
Propeller pitch and RPM. You can
configure the number of shafts in ECPINS
Setup by right-clicking this display.
Rudder angle, ordered and actual. You can
configure the number of rudders in ECPINS
Setup by right-clicking this display.
Active leg orientation: The arrow indicates
the orientation of the active leg relative to
the own ship. When the own ship is within
49
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
3.B.11
500 feet of the active waypoint, ECPINS
also displays the orientation of the next
leg (the arrow is split into two with the
bolder representing the active leg).
Wind: Relative speed and direction.
Right-click to change the display from
Relative to True or Red/Green.
Depth: Refer to 5.C, Depth.
Draft, Keel Clearance, Safety Depth: Refer
to 5.C.1, Safety limits.
Depth Profile: Refer to 3.B.11.A, Depth
profile.
Alarms: Refer to 3.B.11.C, Alarms panel.
HDG: Heading
COG: Course over ground
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
SOG: Speed over ground
RoT: Rate of turn. “Calc” indicates that
the RoT sensor is an ECPINS calculation
(not an actual RoT sensor).
Log: Speed through the water
Set & Drift: Refer to 5.E, Set and drift.
Lat/Lon/Sensor: Refer to 9.A.2, Position
source.
Active WP: Bearing to the active waypoint
in degrees to port (P) or starboard (S) of
the ship’s heading.
Next WP: Bearing to the waypoint after
the active waypoint in degrees to port (P)
or starboard (S) of the own ship’s heading.
Route: The active route [8.A]
Component displays
These displays appear as part of one or more screen layouts:
Depth profile (3.B.11.A)
Route Up display (3.B.11.B).
Alarms panel (3.B.11.C)
3.B.11.A
Depth profile
This display gives you a visual snapshot of the depths just passed relative to
the ship’s safe depth [figure 3-34]. This display is particularly useful when the
own ship is towing an object below the surface, such as towed array.
Figure 3-34 Depth profile
4
5
1
2
6
3
1
2
3
50
Safety depth [5.C.1]
Fixed depth scale: The maximum depth
displayed is 25 m. The depth units selected
for the system [3.C.5] determine this
scale’s units.
Fixed time scale in minutes.
3 CHART DISPLAY
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
4
5
6
Own ship symbol [4.A]
Depth of the last sounding passed
Profile of the sea bottom as determined by
the ship's depth sounder. This profile
stretches from the ship's centre to 3
minutes astern of the ship.
3.B.11.B
Route Up display
This display [figure 3-35] enables you to track the ship’s position relative to
the active route leg [8.A]. ECPINS issues a warning if the own ship strays
beyond the cross-track limits.
Figure 3-35 Route Up display
1
2
4
3
5
6
1
2
3
3.B.11.C
Active leg
Cross-track warning limit [8.C.1]. If the
own ship moves outside this limit, the
cross-track warning is activated.
Cross-track alarm limit [8.C.1]. If the own
ship moves outside this limit, the crosstrack alarm is activated.
4
5
6
Own ship
Directional guide. If the own ship is off the
display, you can find its position using the
guides.
Horizontal scale in meters. Measures the
own ship’s deviation from the active leg.
Alarms panel
This panel displays the source of alarms [5.F]. You can use the panel to
acknowledge a group of alarms by clicking it, or acknowledging all alarms by
clicking “ALL”.
Note: Information on each alarm is available in the message line in the top right of the screen
layout.
Figure 3-36 Alarms panel in the Alarms screen layout
•
•
•
•
All: Indicates that a warning or alarm is
active. Click to acknowledge all active
alarms. In this example, there are alarms
active (the indicator is red).
Primary Pos: Indicates a position-related
caution, or warning, or alarm. In this
example, a warning is active (the indicator
is orange). This tile also indicates an
automatic change in the primary position
source.
Zone Alarms: Indicates a warning or alarm
for Anchor Watch or Guard Zone [4.I] or
Exclusion Zone [9.B.3].
Radar: Indicates that the system is not
receiving radar image overlay information.
3 CHART DISPLAY
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
•
•
•
•
•
Waterspace: Indicates a warning or alarm
for a WSM area or Moving Haven.
Depth: Indicates a warning or alarm for
the depth under the own ship’s keel.
Indicators for Speed, Depth, Wind, and
Gyro sensors. A caution or warning
indicates that a sensor is not sending valid
data.
Anti-grounding: Indicates a warning or
alarm for the anti-grounding cone [4.F].
In this example, an alarm is active (the
indicator is red).
XTD: Indicates a warning or alarm for
cross-track distance.
51
If primary GPS is lost [5.F.7], the following events occur:
a
b
c
The GPS Position and GPS Velocity indicators change to red.
The All, Primary Pos, GPS Position, and GPS Velocity alarm indicators are
activated.
The own ship symbol dead reckons, but if the situation continues, the
own ship disappears from the display.
Figure 3-37 Alarms panel when primary position is lost
If the quality of the data is poor (the system might not be receiving the
minimum number of satellites) the GPS Quality indicator changes from a
caution to a warning. Except for the GPS Quality indicator, the GPS alarm
indicators function on time out due to loss of GPS data — they indicate
warning after a 10-second time out and an alarm after 30 seconds.
3.C
Display settings
In addition to major alterations of the screen layout, you can make changes
to global display settings, that is, specific settings that affect all ECPINS
screens, including screen colour schemes, measurement units, and the
coordinate system.
Note: The nominal viewing distance for the ECPINS display is one meter.
3.C.1
Setting the colour scheme
For optimal viewing in varying light conditions, ECPINS enables you to
instantly change the entire display’s colour scheme. ECPINS offers the
following choices:
52
a
IHO Day Bright: Displays IHO day colours at full intensity [figure 3-38]. Default.
b
IHO Day White: Displays IHO day colours at reduced intensity.
c
IHO Day Black: Displays IHO dark background colour set [figure 3-38].
d
IHO Dusk: Displays IHO Day Black colours that have been dimmed.
e
IHO Night: Displays IHO full night colours for night operations.
f
OSI Day HI: Displays OSI's customized day colours. In general, the “OSI” colour schemes
differ from the “IHO” schemes in that deep blue means deep water and the lighter the
shade the shallower the water.
g
OSI Night HI: Displays OSI's customized night colours for night operations.
3 CHART DISPLAY
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
h
OSI Night LO: Displays OSI's customized dimmed night colours.
Note: The mandatory ECDIS colour schemes are IHO Day White, IHO Dusk, and IHO Night.
Formerly, IHO Day Bright and IHO Day Black were included in the IEC standards; OSI continues
to support these older colour schemes for compatibility with prior ECPINS releases.
Figure 3-38 Colour scheme examples with radar image overlay, ARPA, and AIS
1
2
1
IHO Day Bright
2
IHO Day Black
Note: A colour scheme may or may not have an effect on any displayed raster charts. This is
because a raster chart is a static image of a paper chart. A darker colour scheme may dim a
displayed raster chart. However, some ARCS and BSB charts have a night version, which ECPINS
displays if you choose a “night” colour scheme.
To change the colour scheme:
1
Choose > Color Scheme…. A dialog [figure 3-39] displays a list of colour
schemes and a preview of the selected colour scheme.
2
Click the colour scheme.
or
3
Press Ctrl+Shift+C. The colour scheme changes to the next higher scheme
in the list.
Figure 3-39 Select Colour Scheme dialog
2
1
3
1
The selected colour scheme
3 CHART DISPLAY
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
2
Colour contrast preview. The selected
colour scheme appears here (in this
example, IHO Day White).
53
3
The black-level adjust shows a black
square and a centre dark grey square. If
the monitor's brightness and contrast
controls are properly adjusted, the centre
square is barely visible.
The colours displayed in each scheme are calibrated by an OSI technician as
per IHO S52 requirements. However, you may wish to check the colour
intensity.
To check that the colour schemes are displaying the correct colour intensity:
1
Choose > Chart Selection > Load Charts…. The Load Charts dialog appears
[figure 10-5].
2
In the Folder list, select “Chart 1” and load the chart “AA4C1X00 - ECDIS
Symbols” (this is a chart of symbols).
3
Use > Chart Selection > Change Chart Order… to bring “AA4C1X00 - ECDIS”
symbols to the top of the chart stack and thus displayed in the chart
display.
4
Use the chart display menu to change the chart mode to CC (chartcentred). A chart of symbols appears in the chart display.
5
In the chart display, zoom in on the colour-test squares (two squares with
a diagonal line).
In the colour-test squares the background colours are identical to the
different shades of water and land. Each diagonal line represents an
important line or symbol foreground colour.
Choose a colour scheme. Determine if all the lines are visible.
•
6
•
3.C.2
If one of the lines is not visible, the monitor may need to be recalibrated by
an OSI technician.
Adjusting the brightness and contrast
The brightness and contrast of the currently chosen colour scheme can be
adjusted. The adjusted brightness and contrast is only associated with the
current colour scheme. If the colour scheme is changed, the brightness and
contrast settings for the current colour scheme are retained for future use. If
the system is restarted, it remembers the last entered values for brightness
and contrast.
To adjust the brightness and contrast:
1
Choose > Setup > Display Setup > Brightness and Contrast…. The Adjust Display
dialog appears [figure 3-40].
2
Adjust Brightness or Contrast by moving the sliders left or right.
The default value is 50%.
Caution: Incorrect adjustment of brightness and contrast controls may inhibit visibility of
information, particularly when using night-colour settings.
•
54
3 CHART DISPLAY
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Figure 3-40 Adjust Display dialog
1
2
1
Colour scheme [figure 3.C.1] to which
these adjustments apply.
2
Slider: To increase or decrease the value,
click and hold on slider and drag it.
Any time that the brightness or contrast controls are changed, you should
test for black-level adjustment using the monitor’s controls.
Note: The IHO recommends that you adjust the colour scheme to ensure full visibility.
To test black-level adjustment:
1
Choose > Color Scheme…. The Select Colour Scheme dialog [figure 3-39]
[figure 3-39] displays the colour contrast of the selected colour scheme.
2
Using the monitor’s controls, set contrast to maximum and brightness to
minimum and observe the centre square on the dialog.
3
Adjust the brightness and contrast as necessary.
•
•
•
3.C.3
If the centre square is not visible, turn up the brightness until the centre
square just appears.
If the centre square is clearly visible, turn down the contrast control until the
centre square disappears. Turn the contrast back up until the centre square
is just visible again. The black level is now correctly set.
If the centre square persists in standing out from the black background, the
monitor may need to be recalibrated by an OSI technician.
Changing the cursor
The default cursor is an IMO-standard cursor [figure 3-41]. You can change
the cursor to an OSI cursor.
Figure 3-41 Cursor types
1
1
2
IMO cursor (default)
2
OSI cursor
To change the cursor type:
Choose > Setup > Display Setup > Use IMO Cursor.
•
This command toggles the cursor type. A dot by the command indicates IMO
Cursor is active.
3 CHART DISPLAY
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
55
3.C.4
Distance units
You can change the distance units that ECPINS displays. The available units
and the values at which they change are:
a
nautical miles: No changes
b
feet - nautical miles: Changes at 1 cable (0.1 nautical mile) to nautical miles.
c
yards - nautical miles: Changes at 1 nautical mile from yards to nautical miles.
d
feet - statute miles: Changes at 0.1 miles from feet to statute miles.
e
yards - statute miles: Changes at 1 statute mile from yards to statute miles.
f
feet - yards - statute miles: Changes at 0.1 statute miles from feet to yards; changes at 1
statute mile from yards to statute miles.
g
meters - nautical miles: Changes at 1 cable from meters to nautical miles.
h
meters - kilometers: Changes at 100 meters from meters to kilometers.
To change distance units:
1
Choose > Setup > Select System Units > Select Distance Units….The Select Distance
Units dialog appears [figure 3-42].
2
In the list, select a distance unit.
Figure 3-42 Select Distance Units dialog
1
1
3.C.5
The distance unit in use is indicated by
angle brackets.
Depth units
You can change the depth units that ECPINS displays. The available units are:
a
M: meters
b
Ft: feet
c
Fm: fathoms
To change depth units:
1
Choose > Setup > Select System Units > Select Depth Units….The Select Depth Units
dialog appears.
2
In the list, select a depth unit and click Select.
•
56
The depth unit in use is enclosed in angle brackets.
3 CHART DISPLAY
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
3.C.5.A
Depth units on a raster chart
On a raster chart, the depth units are fixed. When a raster chart is displayed
at the own ship’s location or it is the active chart, ECPINS displays the raster
chart’s depth units [figure 3-43]. When the active chart switches back to a
vector chart or the world index chart, ECPINS displays the depth units you
have chosen.
Figure 3-43 Adjacent vector and raster charts
1
2
3
1
2
3
3.C.6
Active chart: A raster chart with soundings
in meters. ECPINS displays the active
chart’s name in the chart-display title bar.
Inactive chart: A vector chart
Depth units: The depth unit for the active
chart; metres (M) in this case. You can
view the depth at the cursor location in
the Cursor text box. When the cursor is on
a raster chart, “Raster Data” is displayed
in this text box (in other words, no depth is
shown for the location at the cursor).
Speed units
You can change the speed units that ECPINS displays. The available units are:
a
kn: knots
b
mph: miles per hour
c
kph: kilometers per hour
To change speed units:
1
Choose > Setup > Select System Units > Select Speed Units….The Select Speed Units
dialog appears.
2
In the list, select a speed unit.
3 CHART DISPLAY
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
57
•
3.C.7
The speed unit in use is enclosed in angle brackets.
Date and time
ECPINS displays the date and time on most screen layouts [figure 3-44]. The
time zone and time source is also displayed.
Figure 3-44 Date and time
2
1
1
Time zone indicator: The time zone name,
for example, UTC or Loc.
2
Time Source Indicator: GPS or NTP for the
Network Time Protocol.
The time zone is expressed relative to UTC (Universal Time Coordinated,
which is Greenwich Mean Time or GMT updated with leap seconds). You can
choose the time zone in which to display times throughout ECPINS.
To choose the time zone:
1
Choose > Setup > Select System Units > Select Time Zone…. The Select Time Zone
dialog appears [figure 3-45].
2
From the list, choose the time zone.
Figure 3-45 Select Time Zone dialog
•
When UTC is selected, “UTC” appears in
all time displays.
•
When any time zone other than UTC is
selected, “Loc” appears in all time
displays.
ECPINS derives the time from the computer’s clock, which ECPINS sets to
either the GPS time or the Network Time Protocol (NTP) server time.
To choose the time source:
1
2
3
58
In ECPINS Setup, choose > Setup > Select Time Source…. The Select Time Source
dialog appears [figure 3-46].
Choose the Time Source.
If NTP is selected, choose one of your defined NTP Servers or select
Automatic.
3 CHART DISPLAY
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
The Automatic option automatically switches to a secondary NTP server if
the primary NTP server fails.
Click Apply.
•
4
Figure 3-46 Select Time Source dialog
1
1
3.C.8
The NTP Server field is only displayed
when the NTP time source is selected.
Bearings
By default, ECPINS uses true bearings. You can change the bearings used
throughout ECPINS to magnetic.
To change bearings:
1
Choose > Setup > Select System Units > Select Bearing Units….The Select Bearing
Units dialog appears.
2
In the list, select a bearing unit (True or Magnetic).
•
•
•
The bearing unit in use is enclosed in angle brackets.
If you choose Magnetic, the COG field (found on most screen layouts)
displays a value in “oM”.
If you choose True, the COG field displays a value in “oT”.
Note: When bearings are set to Magnetic, ECPINS uses the NGDC World Magnetic Model to
calculate them. ECPINS also applies this model to magnetic headings and magnetic bearings
used in fixing.
3 CHART DISPLAY
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
59
60
3 CHART DISPLAY
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
4
4
Own ship display
This chapter describes how to use ECPINS to display the own ship, and
information associated with the ship.
4.A
Own ship symbol
The own ship’s position is represented by a ship symbol [figure 4-1] or, at
larger chart display scales, a vessel shape [figure 4-2].
Figure 4-1 Own ship symbol
1
2
3
1
2
Vessel heading line
Symbol
3
Track
The vessel shape is a scaled outline customized for the ship it represents. To
adjust the shape, refer to Ap.E, Preparing the vessel shape. Offsets such as the
conning position, bow, stern, and sensor positions appear on the vessel
shape. You can position these offsets and control the display of a velocity
vector [4.B] for an offset.
4 OWN SHIP DISPLAY
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
61
Figure 4-2 Vessel shape
1
2
3
4
6
5
1
2
3
Track [4.D]
Vessel shape
Stern velocity vector [4.B]
4
5
6
Heading line
Velocity vectors
Wind vector
ECPINS varies the display of the own ship according to chart scale. You may
wish to have ECPINS always display only the own ship symbol.
To display the own ship symbol at all scales:
Choose > Setup > Vessel Setup > Ship Symbol until ON is selected.
•
4.A.1
This toggles between use of the vessel shape at appropriate scales (AUTO)
and use of the own ship symbol at all scales (ON).
Changing the vessel shape
Normally, the vessel shape displayed for the own ship is a shape custom-made
for the ship on which the ECPINS system is installed. You can have ECPINS
display a different shape; for example, when a portable ECPINS system is in
use. A qualified technician can create or change a vessel shape [Ap.E].
Note: When the vessel shape has been changed, on starting up, ECPINS may detect devices or
positions assigned to offset names that are no longer available on the new vessel shape. In this
case, ECPINS offers you the opportunity to reassign to available offsets.
4.B
Velocity vectors
ECPINS displays a velocity vector for the own ship [figure 4-3], for ARPA
[9.B.2] and AIS [9.C.1] contacts, and for offsets such as the bow and stern. The
bow and stern vectors are particularly useful for docking operations.
62
4 OWN SHIP DISPLAY
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Figure 4-3 Vessel velocity vector
5
6
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
Velocity vector
Own ship
Time marks: The own ship’s position
projected at one-minute intervals.
4
5
6
Bold time mark. Every 6th time mark is in
bold.
Heading line
Stabilization marks
By default, the velocity vectors are true. You can have the vectors associated
with ARPA contacts [9.B.2] display as relative, that is, a combination of the
contact and own ship vectors.
Figure 4-4 Velocity vectors — true versus relative
1
2
3
4
Velocity vectors set to True
1 Own ship velocity vector (always true).
2 Contact velocity vector
In this example, a collision between contact 16
and the own ship is imminent.
Velocity vectors set to Relative
3 Contact. In these examples, contact 16’s
heading is 45 degrees true at 16 knots.
4 Own ship. In these examples, the own
ship’s heading is 357 degrees true at 16.5
knots.
You can control aspects of the velocity vector display including the length of
the vector and its orientation.
4 OWN SHIP DISPLAY
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
63
To change the vector type and length:
1
Choose > Setup > Display Setup > Velocity Vectors…. The Velocity Vector Settings
dialog appears [figure 4-5].
2
Choose options.
Note: You can display or remove a velocity vector for an own ship offset, such as the bow or
stern [Ap.E].
Figure 4-5 Velocity Vector Settings dialog
Default values are shown.
• True orientation: The vector at the own
ship or contact shows its true direction.
• Relative orientation: The vector at a
contact shows the result of subtracting the
own ship’s velocity from the contact’s
velocity. If the relative vector crosses near
the own ship symbol, a potential collision
exists. (The own ship’s vector remains a
true vector.)
• Standard mode: Vectors are of a fixed
length in terms of display distance. Thus,
the displayed length is constant as you
zoom in and out on the display. Only the
number of time marks changes. Also
applies to wind vectors.
• Variable mode: Vectors are of a fixed time
length. Thus, the displayed length changes
4.C
•
•
•
with the zoom of the display (zooming in
causes the vector to increase in length).
Also applies to wind vectors.
Show Time Marks displays marks at the
own ship or contact’s projected position at
each future minute. When there are more
than 24 time marks to display, ECPINS
displays the vector without marks.
Show Stabilization displays an arrowhead
on each vector. By default, the arrowhead
is double, which indicates ground
stabilization (speed over ground). A single
arrowhead indicates water stabilization
(speed through the water).
Length: Sets the vector length ratio. Use
the cursor to drag the slider left or right.
Wind vectors
ECPINS displays wind direction and speed on most screen layouts [3.B] in text
form [figure 4-6]. If two anemometers are connected, ECPINS displays
information from the primary anemometer only.
64
4 OWN SHIP DISPLAY
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Figure 4-6 Wind information — Text box
1
2
3
1
Wind: Wind speed and the direction from
which the wind is coming
2
3
Wind direction type: R = Relative, T = True.
Identifies the active sensor.
ECPINS also displays a wind vector at the own ship [figure 4-7].
Figure 4-7 Graphical wind vectors
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
Own ship symbol [4.A]
Wind vector. The length of the line
indicates wind speed.
Wind speed indicator. Wind speed =10
knots. Each bar represents 10 knots of
4
wind, a half bar, 3 to 7 knots, a solid
triangle, 50 knots.
Wind speed indicator. Wind speed = 27
knots.
You can adjust the length of the vector. Also, you can remove the wind vector
from display.
To remove the wind vector:
Choose > Setup > Sensor Setup > Wind Vector until OFF is selected.
4.C.1
Wind vector type
By default, the wind vector displays the relative wind speed and direction,
that is, the apparent wind. A relative vector is the result of a vector
combination of the wind's speed and direction and the own ship's speed and
direction. You can have ECPINS display the wind’s true, that is actual, speed
and direction.
To change the type of wind vector:
Choose > Setup > Sensor Setup > Wind Vector TRUE or RELATIVE. The chosen type
is surrounded by angle brackets, for example <RELATIVE>.
•
In text displays [figure 4-6] a letter indicates Relative (R) or True (T) wind
direction.
4 OWN SHIP DISPLAY
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
65
4.C.2
Wind vector calibration
When the ECPINS system is first set up, it may be necessary to adjust the wind
vector to match the anemometer. You can do this by entering an offset.
To set the anemometer offset:
4.D
1
Choose > Setup > Sensor Setup > Set Anemometer Offset....
2
Type an Offset in degrees relative.
Vessel track
To facilitate monitoring of the own ship’s past progress, ECPINS displays a
vessel track for the own ship [figure 4-8]. By default, ECPINS shows the last 12
hours of progress and places time labels along the track at 15-minute
intervals. You can adjust the length of the track and the display of time
labels.
The accuracy with which ECPINS plots the vessel track diminishes over time.
For the most recent 6 minutes, ECPINS plots the track using the own ship's
position recorded at one-second intervals. For the last 7 to 360 minutes,
ECPINS plots the track between positions recorded at one-minute intervals
and for the last 6 to 72 hours, 15-minute intervals.
Figure 4-8 Vessel tracks
1
2
5
1
3
4
2
1
2
66
Primary vessel track
Primary track time label. The display of
time labels depends on the chart scale. As
the chart scale decreases so does the
number of labels.
4 OWN SHIP DISPLAY
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
3
4
5
Secondary vessel track
Secondary track time label
Own ship symbol [4.A]
To set vessel track display features:
1
Choose > Setup > Display Setup > Vessel Track…. The Set Track Parameters dialog
appears [figure 4-9].
2
Set parameters.
•
If Display Time Labels is checked:
• In the Time Label Interval box, enter a time period.
• In the Maximum Track Length box, enter a time period.
Figure 4-9 Setting vessel track display features
•
•
4.E
Display Time Labels: Displays labels on
both the primary and secondary (if shown)
vessel tracks.
Display Secondary Track: This track is
derived from the secondary position
source [9.A.2.B]. If this is checked, the
System settings summary describes it as
•
•
“enabled” [2.A.2]. (Available only if a
secondary position source is enabled.)
Time Label Interval: The interval must
evenly divide into 60 minutes. The default
interval is 15 minutes.
Maximum Track Length: Must be between
6 minutes and 3 days.
Ghost ship
You can have ECPINS display the own ship’s predicted position up to six
minutes in the future. The predicted position is displayed as a “ghost ship” —
a copy of the own ship symbol or vessel shape [figure 4-10].
Figure 4-10 Ghost ships
1
2
3
1
Ghost ship: Displayed in a colour (blue)
different from the own ship’s.
4 OWN SHIP DISPLAY
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
2
Ghost ship: Docking example.
67
3
Own ship (vessel shape): Displayed in
black.
To display the ghost ship:
Choose > Navigation Tools > Ghost Ship > Ghost Ship until ON is selected.
•
4.E.1
This toggles the ghost ship on and off.
Prediction time
You can vary the time into the future that ECPINS predicts the ship’s position.
To set the ghost ship’s prediction time:
4.E.2
1
Choose > Navigation Tools > Ghost Ship > Set Prediction Time…. The Set Prediction
Time dialog appears.
2
In the Prediction Time (sec) box, type the number of seconds — between 1
and 360 — and click OK.
Rate of turn
ECPINS uses a calculated rate of turn (derived from the moving average of
the gyro) to predict the ghost ship's position during a turn. You can have
ECPINS ignore rate of turn when displaying a ghost ship.
To have ECPINS ignore rate of turn for the ghost ship:
Choose > Navigation Tools > Ghost Ship > Use Rate of Turn until No is selected.
4.F
Anti-grounding cone
You can have ECPINS constantly scan an area around the own ship for
potential hazards. The area is known as an “anti-grounding cone” [figure 411].
Every 5 seconds, ECPINS examines the vector chart data within the antigrounding cone for potential hazards [Ap.D]. These include depth contours
less than the safety depth [5.C.1], unsafe soundings [figure 5-16], overhead
obstructions lower than the safety height, potentially hazardous objects or
areas [figure 10.D.8], and manual corrections you add to the chart [11.B].
ECPINS warns you [5.F.4] if the anti-grounding cone encounters a potentially
hazardous object or area, including clearing lines [8.E], and any other class of
object to which you have given custom alarm attributes [11.B.2.B]. ECPINS
examines all the data, even if the associated feature is not displayed.
68
4 OWN SHIP DISPLAY
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Figure 4-11 Anti-grounding cone
1
2
3
4
2
1
2
3
Anti-grounding cone: The cone is oriented
to the own ship’s COG.
Own ship
Route
4
Anti-grounding cone conforming to the
route (that is, it is “bending” around the
upcoming waypoint). This occurs if the
own ship is within the cross-track warning
zone.
If ECPINS detects a potential hazard, it notifies you via the Anti-Gr field in the
Sensor text box, which appears on many screen layouts. Also, a message
appears in the message line and ECPINS issues an audible alarm [2.B.4.C].
Warning: On a raster chart, ECPINS can only scan chart corrections [11.B]. On a raster chart, if
the anti-grounding cone has not encountered a hazardous chart correction, the Anti-Gr field
displays “OK”.
Warning: The reliability of the anti-grounding cone depends on the quality of the loaded
chart(s). If the best scale chart is not loaded, ECPINS displays a warning that “a better chart is
available” [10.B.1.A].
ECPINS displays the cone relative to own ship’s position — it moves with the
ship and changes position according the ship’s heading.
To activate anti-grounding:
Choose > Setup > Vessel Setup > Anti-Grounding until the setting is ON. ECPINS
displays the anti-grounding cone and scans it continuously.
4.F.1
Configuring the anti-grounding cone
You can adjust the length, size, and position of the anti-grounding cone. You
define the cone in relation to the own ship’s displayed position [figure 4-11].
4 OWN SHIP DISPLAY
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
69
To configure the anti-grounding cone:
1
Choose > Setup > Vessel Setup > Set Anti-Grounding…. The Set Anti-Grounding
dialog appears [figure 4-12].
2
Adjust the Extension and Look-Ahead settings by typing values.
Figure 4-12 Set Anti-Grounding dialog
Default values are shown.
• Extension settings (measured from the
vessel shape)
Port: Minimum width of cone to port side
of the own ship
Starboard: Minimum width to starboard
side
Bow: Minimum distance ahead of the bow
Stern: Minimum distance behind the stern
• Look-Ahead settings
Angle: Half-angle of the cone relative to
the own ship’s COG
4.G
•
Width: Width of the cone's head
Distance: Distance ahead of the own ship
Time: Time ahead that defines the cone's
length
Time Filter: Time-dependent objects
(TDOs) filters:
Search within time period: Only searches
IHO TDOs that are currently active.
Search all objects: Searches all IHO TDOs
that are on the chart data.
Compass rose and range rings
You can display a compass rose around the own ship. You can also display
range rings emanating from the own ship. ECPINS displays the distance of
each ring from the own ship in nautical miles (to facilitate comparison with
the chart display range menu) [figure 4-13].
Note: ECPINS displays the compass rose or range rings only when the chart mode [3.A.4] is
Relative Motion (RM) and the own ship is at the centre of the display.
70
4 OWN SHIP DISPLAY
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Figure 4-13 Compass rose and range rings
1
2
3
1
2
3
Compass rose
Range rings
Displayed Features list showing Compass
Rose and Range Rings. The compass rose
and range rings can be displayed
independently of each other.
To display a compass rose and/or range rings:
1
In the chart display menu, click Features. ECPINS displays the Feature Settings
dialog.
2
In the Category list, choose “Overlays”.
3
In the Available Features list, select “Compass Rose” and/or “Range Rings”.
4
Click ADD >>. The selected feature appear in the Displayed Features list
[figure 4-13].
5
In the chart display menu, choose RM as the chart mode.
•
Or centre-click and hold on the display until the chart mode changes to RM.
4 OWN SHIP DISPLAY
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
71
4.H
Anchorage
You can use ECPINS to monitor the own ship’s position when anchored
[figure 4-14] and watch for any contacts in the area.
Figure 4-14 Anchorage
1
2
3
1
2
Anchor position
Swing circle (maximum diameter of 10
nautical miles): Should a contact (ARPA or
AIS) enter the swing circle, ECPINS
generates an alarm [5.F.5], one for each
contact.
3
Drag circle (maximum diameter of 10
nautical miles): ECPINS generates an
alarm [5.F.5] if any portion of the own ship
moves outside this circle or if the circle
contains a potential hazard.
For an anchorage, you prepare an “anchor watch”: you position an “anchor”
and around this ECPINS draws a “drag circle” and a “swing circle”.
To position the anchor:
1
Choose > Navigation Tools > Zone Alarms > Set Anchor Position….
2
Click a location on the display. An anchor position appears [figure 4-14].
•
If you have previously entered values for the size of the swing
and drag circles, those circles appear.
To remove an anchor watch:
Choose > Navigation Tools > Zone Alarms > Clear Anchor Watch. The anchor
position is removed.
You can adjust the size of the swing and drag circles.
72
4 OWN SHIP DISPLAY
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
To adjust the size of the swing or drag circle:
1
Choose > Navigation Tools > Zone Alarms > Set Swing Circle… or Set Drag Circle…. A
dialog appears.
2
In the Radius box, type a value and choose a unit.
3
The maximum radius is 5 nautical miles.
Click OK. ECPINS displays the circle(s) around the anchor symbol [figure 414].
•
4.I
Guard zone
You can use ECPINS to monitor an area around the own ship for contacts
[figure 4-15].
Figure 4-15 Guard zones
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
Contact
Outer range of the guard zone
Contact inside the guard zone: “G” is
appended to the contact’s name and
contact turns red.
4
5
Inner range of the guard zone
Own ship
If a contact (ARPA or AIS) enters the guard zone, ECPINS generates an alarm,
one for each contact. These alarms appear on the alarms panel [3.B.11.C]
under Zone Alarms. When all contacts have left the guard zone, ECPINS clears
the alarm and a message to that effect appears in the message line.
Also, when a contact enters or exits the guard zone, a descriptive message
appears in the message line; for example, “ARPA target 3 inside guard zone”,
or “new contact inside guard zone”. Using the message line, you can review
any recent messages.
4.I.1
Creating a guard zone
To create a guard zone, you define an inner and outer boundary in terms of
distance from the own ship and boundary edges in terms of bearings relative
to the own ship. ECPINS draws the guard zone according to these parameters,
which generate an arc.
4 OWN SHIP DISPLAY
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
73
To set or change the guard zone:
1
Choose > Navigation Tools > Zone Alarms > Set Guard Zone…. The Set Guard Zone
dialog appears [figure 4-16].
2
Type values for Outer Range, Inner Range, Start Bearing, and End Bearing.
Figure 4-16 Set Guard Zone dialog
•
•
•
Outer Range: Defines the distance from
the own ship of the outer zone boundary.
Inner Range: Defines the distance from the
own ship of the inner zone boundary.
Start Brg: Defines one edge of the zone.
Relative to the ship’s heading. For a
•
complete circle, type 000.0 for the Start
Bearing and 359.9 for the End Bearing.
End Brg: Defines one edge of the zone.
Relative to the ship’s heading.
To clear the guard zone:
Choose > Navigation Tools > Zone Alarms > Clear Guard Zone.
74
4 OWN SHIP DISPLAY
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
5
5
Progress monitoring
This chapter describes how to use ECPINS to monitor the own ship’s position
and progress relative to a designated route.
5.A
Route display
ECPINS facilitates your monitoring of the own ship’s progress along a route
[8.A] by displaying information about the route [figure 5-1]. This information
includes the vessel’s planned track (the route) and the actual track.
Figure 5-1 Route display options
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
3
4
5
6
7
8
Wheel-steady point [8.C.2]
Waypoint: When you zoom out far enough
for waypoints to overlap, ECPINS may
display only one waypoint where several
overlap.
Wheel-over point [8.C.2]: Helm at this
point may also be displayed.
Route (the planned track) [8.A]
Planned course for the leg
Cross-track (XTD) corridor [8.C.1]
5 PROGRESS MONITORING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
9
10
11
7
8
9
Active waypoint
Wheel-over line
Distance-to-run marks [5.B.3]. A series of
marks at predefined distances from the
wheel-over point. Only three appear in this
example.
10 Planned speed [8.C.4] for the leg (and for
the turn immediately following the leg)
11 Vessel track
75
You can adjust these route-display options.
To change route-display options:
1
Choose > Setup > Display Setup > Route Display Options…. The Route Display Options
dialog appears [figure 5-2].
2
Check the features to display.
Figure 5-2 Route Display Options dialog
•
•
•
76
Wheel Over Line: The point at which the
ship should start its turn [8.C.2] on to the
next route leg. The line parallels the course
of the next leg. ECPINS displays the course
to steer on the next leg in the Next Crs
field on most screen layouts.
Speed and Course: Displays the planned
course and speed [8.C.4] for each leg
XTD Corridor: Displays the boundaries of
the cross-track alarm distance [8.C.1] on
each side of the leg. If the own ship
crosses these limits the XTD alarm is
triggered. For the XTD corridor to appear,
5 PROGRESS MONITORING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
the cross-track values must be greater
than zero.
• Tidal Stream Vector: If you specify a
predicted set and drift for a waypoint or
leg, ECPINS displays a vector at the
appropriate point on the leg or turn
[8.C.2].
• Estimated Time: Displays the planned
intended movement (PIM) for each leg
[8.C.6]. Based on the planned speed and
time of departure for each leg.
Default settings shown.
Figure 5-3 Wheel Over Line
3
2
1
1
2
Wheel-over line
Wheel-over point
3
Wheel-steady point
Figure 5-4 Tidal stream vector at a waypoint
1
2
3
1
A turn [8.C.2] curve at a waypoint (Victoria
pilot pickup)
5 PROGRESS MONITORING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
2
4
The turn curve at “Victoria pilot pickup”
modified by a predicted set at 345° and
drift of 1.8 knots.
77
3
4
5.B
Wheel-steady point
Tidal stream vector: The length of the
vector equals the distance the ship will
travel while traversing the turn curve (the
turn curve is corrected to account for the
drift). ECPINS displays the vector for a
waypoint at the wheel-steady point.
Monitoring the route
You can monitor the own ship’s progress relative to a route [8.A]. ECPINS
predicts the time of arrival for each leg and the entire route. The ETA is based
on the planned speed or speed over ground (SOG).
To take full advantage of ECPINS, you must designate one route as the
“active” route [5.B.1]. ECPINS displays the name of the active route and the
active leg in the Route text box [figure 5-5], which appears on several screen
layouts [3.B].
Figure 5-5 Route text box
1
1
•
•
•
5.B.1
The active leg
Route: Name of the active route
WP Brg: The bearing to the active
waypoint.
Crs/CTM: The course to steer on this active
leg and the course to maintain, which
takes into account set and drift.
•
•
•
DTG: Distance to go to the waypoint from
own ship (dynamic). This value is an “offtrack” DTG [5.B.4.A].
Dest ETA: The estimated time of arrival at
the active route’s final waypoint.
Next Crs: The course to steer on the next
leg of the route.
Setting the active route
You can set any route to be the active route. When you set a route to be
active, ECPINS selects the route leg closest to the own ship to be the active leg
and that leg’s end waypoint as the active waypoint.
To set the active route:
1
Choose > Routes > Select Active Route > Select Route with Cursor… or Select Route by
Name….
2
In the Select Route with Cursor dialog, click a route on the display to select it.
The name of the active route appears in the Route text box [figure 5-5].
If Select Route by Name… is chosen, a list of available routes appears
[figure 5-6]. Select the name of the route and click Select, or double-click a
route.
ECPINS displays the date and time the route was last scanned for dangers.
Click OK.
•
3
78
5 PROGRESS MONITORING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Figure 5-6 Setting the active route
1
2
1
5.B.2
List of displayed routes
2
Active route (angle brackets indicate the
active route)
Setting the active waypoint
By default, the active waypoint is the next waypoint along the active route
[5.B.1] toward which the own ship is travelling.
ECPINS switches the active waypoint to the next waypoint on the route when
the own ship crosses the wheel-over line. If the own ship is outside the crosstrack corridor [8.C.1], ECPINS resets the active waypoint to the end waypoint
of the active route’s leg nearest to the own ship.
You can change the active waypoint to any waypoint on any displayed route.
To set the active waypoint:
1
Choose > Routes > Select Active Route > Select Active Waypoint.... A dialog
requests the selection of a waypoint.
2
On the display, click a waypoint to select it. This waypoint becomes the
active waypoint.
•
•
•
•
5.B.3
When a waypoint is selected, the Select Active Route submenu displays
three extra items for the purposes of selecting other waypoints: Skip to Next
Waypoint, Skip to Previous Waypoint, and Exit Manual Waypoint Selection
Mode. The latter choice returns the submenu to its previous size and ECPINS
selects the leg closest to the own ship to be active and that leg’s end
waypoint as the active waypoint.
If the new waypoint is on the active route, ECPINS displays waypoint-related
data, such as WP Brg, DTG, and Dest ETA, in terms of the new active
waypoint; leg-related data, such as Crs/CTM and Next Crs [figure 5-5],
continues to be based on the current leg.
If a waypoint from a non-active route is selected, ECPINS sets this route to
be the active route and indicates the last time the route was scanned.
Setting an active route [5.B.1] cancels the selected active waypoint.
Distance-to-run marks
You can display marks along on the active leg, or every leg on the active
route [5.B.1], showing the distance to run to the next wheel-over point
[8.C.2], or, the next waypoint, where the leg has no wheel-over point
[figure 5-7]. By default, ECPINS displays 5 “countdown marks” evenly spaced
5 PROGRESS MONITORING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
79
over 1 nautical mile from the wheel-over point. You can change this by
adjusting the number of marks and the total distance.
Figure 5-7 Distance-to-run marks
1
2
3
1
2
Wheel-over point [8.C.2]
Distance-to-run marks. The labels are
optional.
3
Distance-to-run mark 1 nautical mile from
the wheel-over point at the waypoint
“Victoria pilot pickup”.
To display distance-to-run marks on the active route:
Choose > Setup > Display Setup > Distance to Run.... The Set Distance to Run
parameters dialog appears [figure 5-8].
Figure 5-8 Set Distance to Run parameters dialog
•
80
Display Distance to Run: Displays the
marks on the Active Leg or on every leg of
the Active Route.
5 PROGRESS MONITORING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
•
Use Default Parameters: Set marks at 1, 2,
3, and 5 cables, and one nautical mile. If
this box is not checked, ECPINS spaces the
marks evenly over the Total Distance.
•
•
5.B.4
Show Distance Labels: Displays at each
mark the distance to the wheel-over point.
Total Distance: The maximum distance
from the wheel-over point at which marks
appear. The maximum is 10 NM.
•
Countdown Marks: The number of marks
to be displayed, evenly spaced, over the
Total Distance. The maximum is 20.
Progress along the active route
You can monitor the progress of the own ship along the active route [5.B.1].
The active route is comprised of a list of waypoints and the legs between
them.
To display the active route's waypoints:
Choose > Routes > Display Route Monitor…. The Route Monitor appears [figure 59].
•
•
•
Or, press F11.
When the Route Monitor is displayed, you can continue to work on the
display and use the main menu.
To move the Route Monitor to a more convenient position on the screen,
click and hold on the title bar and “drag” it to a new location.
Figure 5-9 Route Monitor: waypoints
1
1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The active waypoint’s values are listed in
red.
Route: Select from a list of routes [8.A].
(By default, ECPINS displays the active
route.) The active route’s waypoints are
listed in order from top to bottom
according to the route direction [8.C.5]
assigned.
ETD: For entering a planned intended
movement (PIM) [8.C.6].
ETA: For entering a planned intended
movement.
Locate: Centres the display on the selected
waypoint (or, double-click on the
waypoint).
Legs: Displays information on the selected
route's legs [figure 5-10].
More: Increases the dialog size by one
waypoint entry.
Less: Reduces the dialog size by one
waypoint entry.
5 PROGRESS MONITORING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
The columns contain the following information:
• LAT: Latitude of the waypoint.
• LON: Longitude of the waypoint.
• BRG: Bearing of the waypoint from own
ship (dynamic)
• RADIUS: Turn radius
• DTG: Distance to go to the waypoint from
own ship (dynamic). This value is an “offtrack” DTG.
• ETA/TTG SPEED: The speed on which TTG
is based.
• TTG: Time to go to the waypoint
(dynamic). This value is an “off-track” TTG
[5.B.4.A]. As the TTG nears 0, you may
wish to look at the course to steer on the
next leg. ECPINS displays this course in the
Next Crs field on most screen layouts.
• ETA: Estimated time of arrival at waypoint
(dynamic). The current leg always displays
its ETA based on the actual SOG, even if
the speed is manually entered.
81
Figure 5-10 Route Monitor: Legs
1
1
The active waypoint’s values are listed in
red.
• Route: Select from a list of routes. The
active route is displayed by default. The
active route’s legs are listed in order from
top to bottom according to the route
direction assigned.
• Waypoints: Return to a view of
information on the selected route's
waypoints.
The columns contain the following information:
• FROM: Waypoint that specifies start of leg
• TO: Waypoint that specifies end of leg
• DST: Length of the leg
• COURSE: Bearing of the leg (at the leg’s
midpoint)
5.B.4.A
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
PORT ALARM: Port alarm parameter
PORT WARN: Port warning alarm
parameter
STARBOARD WARN: Starboard warning
parameter
STARBOARD ALARM: Starboard alarm
parameter
PLANNED SPEED: Speed planned for use
along the leg and in the turn immediately
following.
RECOM SPEED: Recommended speed
required to meet ETA. Displayed when a
planned ETA or ETD is set but not applied.
LEG TYPE: Leg type (Rhumb Line (RL) or
Great Circle (GC)
Off-track values
On various screen layouts, on the Route Calculator, and in the Route Monitor
[figure 5-9], ECPINS displays DTG and TTG to the next wheel-over line.
If the own ship is off the active route [5.B.1], these values are “off-track” in
that ECPINS calculates DTG and TTG based not on the planned route but on a
track from the own ship’s position to the active (next) wheel-over line
[figure 5-11]. The track runs parallel to the planned route.
82
5 PROGRESS MONITORING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Figure 5-11 Off-track value calculation
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Waypoint (active)
Route (active)
Wheel-over point (“WO”)
Wheel-over line
Leg (active)
Cross-track corridor boundary (XTD)
[8.C.1]
Off-track track: Runs between the own
ship and the wheel-over line. ECPINS uses
8
this distance to calculate DTG and TTG.
The off-track track as shown in this
example (coloured light green) and the
off-track distance line at the own ship
(light orange) are for demonstration only.
ECPINS does not display these.
Own ship
If the own ship is outside the cross-track corridor, ECPINS calculates the DTG
and TTG from the cross-track corridor boundary point nearest the own ship
[figure 5-12].
5 PROGRESS MONITORING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
83
Figure 5-12 Off-track value calculation — own ship is outside the cross-track corridor
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
5.C
Waypoint (active)
Route (active)
Wheel-over point (“WO”)
Wheel-over line
Leg (active)
Cross-track corridor boundary (XTD)
[8.C.1]
Off-track track: Runs between the wheelover line and the cross-track boundary
point nearest the own ship. ECPINS uses
this distance to calculate DTG and TTG.
8
9
The off-track track as shown in this
example (coloured light green) is for
demonstration only. ECPINS does not
display it.
Cross-track boundary point nearest the
own ship: The off-track distance line at the
own ship (coloured light orange) is for
demonstration only. ECPINS does not
display it.
Own ship
Depth
ECPINS displays the own ship’s depth sounding on the Vertical and Vertical
Detailed screen layouts on most screen layouts in the Depth field [figure 5-13].
You can also have ECPINS display safe depths [5.C.1].
Figure 5-13 Depth sounding
•
84
Depth: The distance to the bottom from
the depth sounder transducer. If the depth
5 PROGRESS MONITORING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
sounder is a newer model (that is, it sends
DPT rather than DBT strings), the value
displayed may be the distance to the
bottom from the bottom of the own ship’s
keel — because a DPT-sending sounder
5.C.1
includes the transducer’s offset distance,
ECPINS takes it into account.
Safety limits
ECPINS tracks vessel safety limits [figure 5-14] for use in safety depth contour
generation [5.C.1.A], route scanning [8.D.1], and the anti-grounding cone
[4.F]. The depth and height values are based in part on measurements you
set. ECPINS uses the following safety limits:
a
Safety Height: The safe vertical clearance plus the height (the height above the waterline
of the highest offset associated with the vessel shape [Ap.E] in use. ECPINS refers to the
safety height for a route scan, during which it will flag potential overhead obstructions
such as a powerline or bridge. As well, water level data can be incorporated into the safety
height.
b
Safety Depth: The under-keel clearance plus the own ship's draft plus squat [5.C.1.B] and
water level [5.C.1.C] for the active leg. ECPINS refers to the safety depth for a route scan
[8.D.1], for marking shallow water [10.D.6], for highlighting shallow dangers [10.D.8], and
for displaying a safety depth contour [5.C.1.A].
Figure 5-14 Safety limits
= Safety Height
+ Safe Vertical
Clearance
+ Height
+ Draft
+ Keel Clearance
= Safety Depth
To set safety limits:
1
Choose > Setup > Vessel Setup > Set Safety Depth…. The Set Safety Depth dialog
appears.
2
Enter the values and click OK.
Figure 5-15 Set Safety Depth dialog
1
5 PROGRESS MONITORING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
85
1
5.C.1.A
The current safety depth. The safety depth
must be less than 12,000 m. Safety depth
is a combination of Draft, Keel Clearance
and Squat [8.B.2.D].
•
•
Safe Vertical Clearance: A desirable
clearance above the Height.
Height: Set by ECPINS to the height above
the waterline of the highest offset
associated with the vessel shape in use.
Safety depth contour
On vector charts, the safety depth contour [figure 5-16] divides safe depths
from unsafe depths. Also, ECPINS uses colour to distinguish between safe
soundings and unsafe. ECPINS uses 30 m (98.4 feet) as the default safety
depth.
You can change the safety depth by setting new safety limits [5.C.1]. Once
you change the safety depth, ECPINS uses the last-entered value as the
default safety depth.
Figure 5-16 Safety depth contour and unsafe soundings
1
2
3
1
2
5.C.1.B
Unsafe sounding
Safety depth contour: If the safety depth
does not match a charted contour, the
safety depth contour is rounded to the
next deepest charted depth contour.
3 Safe sounding
ECPINS displays the safety depth contour only
on vector charts (as shown in this example)
[3.A.6].
Squat effects
Note: Squat effects may not be available on all ECPINS systems.
For a large vessel moving through shallow waters, squat can temporarily
increase the ship’s draft — the increase depends on the vessel’s speed. In
ECPINS, you can have the safety depth [5.C.1] take squat into account on the
active route leg and display the value in use.
When squat is affecting the safety depth, ECPINS displays the squat value on
the chart display along with the relevant speed and squat table. ECPINS also
displays this information in the message line.
86
5 PROGRESS MONITORING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Figure 5-17 Squat and water level information display
1
2
1
2
The own ship
Text display (in this example both Water
Level and Squat are enabled):
“STATION: SOOL / NET WL: N/A / SQUAT:
0.95 (m) / Squat Speed: 7.40 (kn) /SQUAT
TABLE: SSC TL Up two kn”
Squat affects the safety depth if the following are true:
a
b
c
Squat is enabled.
• To enable Squat, choose > Routes > Edit Route > Squat until ON is selected.
ECPINS preserves this setting if you restart the system.
You have applied squat data [8.B.2.D] to the active route leg.
• The squat data is derived from squat tables [Ap.E.4.B] associated with the
vessel shape in use.
• When squat is enabled, but the squat table associated with the active route
cannot be found, ECPINS displays a message in the message line.
The ship’s speed is within the speed values on the squat tables [Ap.E.4.B].
• If the ship’s speed exceeds the squat table values, ECPINS does not apply
squat effects and displays SQUAT as “N/A”; if you wish, you can apply a
squat value using Manual Entry.
The squat value ECPINS uses from the squat data depends on the own ship’s
speed. For this purpose, ECPINS considers the ship’s speed to be (in order of
priority):
a
b
c
5.C.1.C
Speed log reading
SOG
Active route leg’s planned speed [8.C.4]
Water level effects
Note: Water level information may not be available on all ECPINS systems.
Provided that your ECPINS system can receive the water level information
transmitted from gauge stations over AIS (IGLD-85), you can have the safety
depth and height take the local water level into account on the active route
leg and display the value in use.
When water level is affecting the safety depth, ECPINS displays the water
level value [8.B.2.E] on the chart display along with the relevant station.
ECPINS also displays this information in the message line.
Water level affects the safety depth if the following are true:
a
Water levels are enabled.
5 PROGRESS MONITORING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
87
To enable water level, choose > Routes > Edit Route > Water Level until ON
is selected. ECPINS preserves this setting if you restart the system.
You have associated a gauge station with the active route leg [8.B.2.E].
• When water levels are enabled, but the active route has no gauge station
associated with it, ECPINS displays a message in the message line.
The AIS [9.C] is receiving up-to-date water level information from the
relevant gauge station.
• If a station’s information is not available, ECPINS displays a message to that
effect — 900 seconds after the station stops transmitting or 60 seconds
after the AIS fails to receive it.
You accept the water level that ECPINS recommends for the active route
leg.
• When the route leg becomes active, ECPINS displays an Apply Water Level
dialog [figure 5-18]. If you click Reject, or do not respond to this dialog for 2
minutes (after which ECPINS removes it from display), ECPINS does not
apply the Net Water Level to the safety depth [5.C.1].
•
b
c
d
Figure 5-18 Apply Water Level dialog
•
•
5.D
Station ID and Station Name: The gauge
station from which the water level data is
derived.
Net Water Level: The value ECPINS applies
to the safety depth.
•
•
Accept: Enables ECPINS to apply the water
level to the safety depth for this leg.
Reject: Prevent ECPINS from applying the
water level.
Adjusting the own ship’s position
You can adjust the own ship position [figure 5-19] if it is known to be
incorrect because of poor positioning information [9.A.2]. If the true position
is known, you can adjust the own ship symbol to reflect the known true
position using the cursor, by specifying a range and bearing from the current
position, or by entering grid coordinates.
88
5 PROGRESS MONITORING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Figure 5-19 Own ship position adjusted
1
2
3
4
1
2
Own ship in original position
Own ship position adjusted
3
Vessel track [4.D] (includes the position
adjustment)
Own ship
4
Warning: Adjusting the own ship position can be dangerous. Use with extreme caution. Do not
use when the ship is equipped with GPS sensors. Position adjustment is only appropriate when
the ship is using a stable but imprecise position source such as LORAN-C or when using either
dead reckoning or automatic position fixes [6.D.4].
When you make a position adjustment, ECPINS displays a warning to that
effect in the bottom right of the chart display: “Manual Position Adjustment:
[Range] at [Bearing]” [figure 5-20].
Figure 5-20 Manual Position Adjustment warning
•
The warning text includes the range and
bearing between the original position and
the adjusted position
To make a position adjustment:
1
Choose > Setup > Position Adjustment > Adjust Position…. The Adjust Position
dialog appears [figure 5-21].
2
Enter values and click OK.
5 PROGRESS MONITORING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
89
or
1
Choose > Setup > Position Adjustment > Adjust Position with Cursor…. The Adjust
Position dialog appears [figure 5-21].
2
On the display, click the own ship’s current position.
Or click By Keyboard. In the Enter Position dialog [figure 8-5] choose a Grid
Type, type the position’s coordinates, and click OK.
Click a location for the ship’s adjusted position. The own ship is displayed
at the new location.
•
3
•
Or click By Keyboard. In the Enter Position dialog [figure 8-5] choose a Grid
Type, type the new position’s coordinates, and click OK.
Figure 5-21 Adjust Position dialog
•
Range: The range of the position from the
own ship’s current position.
•
Bearing: The bearing of the position
relative to the own ship’s current position.
To remove the position adjustment:
5.E
1
Choose > Setup > Position Adjustment > Clear Position Adjustment….
2
Follow the instructions and click.
Set and drift
Set and drift is the difference between the expected velocity (velocity thru
water) of the own ship and the actual velocity (velocity over ground).You can
view the set and drift values on the Nav Detailed screen layout [3.B.2].
By default, ECPINS derives the set and drift values from the own ship’s sensors
or, or Fix + EP(AUTO) mode, after each fix. You have a choice of sources for
the set and drift values to apply.
90
a
Ordered: You enter the values.
b
Computed Fix-to-Fix: The default source. Derived from the own ship’s sensors or after a
second manual fix [6.D.1].
c
Ordered (last computed): ECPINS enters the set and drift values it most recently
computed, which you can amend.
d
Computed Sensor: Derived from gyro, speed log, and gps input. ECPINS calculates this set
and drift every second based on the raw sensor data received over the previous 60
seconds. In some circumstances, you may wish to alter this time period: choose >
Navigation Tools > Set and Drift > Set Computed Set and Drift Interval....
5 PROGRESS MONITORING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
To enter set and drift:
1
Choose > Navigation Tools > Set and Drift > Enter Set and Drift…. The Enter Set and
Drift dialog appears [figure 5-22].
2
In the Source list, choose Ordered.
3
Type values and click OK.
•
Whenever you enter set and drift values, ECPINS places a fix on the display.
Figure 5-22 Enter Set and Drift dialog
•
5.F
Source: Choose from Ordered, Computed
Fix-to-Fix, Ordered (last computed), or
Computed Sensor.
•
•
Set: Must be between 0° and 360°.
Drift: Must be between 0 at and 99.9.
Alarm conditions
ECPINS alerts you to potentially dangerous conditions by issuing an alarm
[2.B.4.C]. While you can silence an alarm, visual indications are displayed as
long as the alarm conditions persist. ECPINS maintains alarm conditions for:
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
5.F.1
An interruption in data received from a sensor [5.F.1]
Poor GPS signal quality [5.F.2]
Not enough depth under the keel [5.F.3]
Unsafe areas and obstructions nearby [5.F.4].
The ship leaving its anchor position and encroaching contacts [5.F.5]
Excessive cross-track distances [5.F.6]
Primary position source change [5.F.7]
Autopilot malfunction [5.F.8]
Sensor data alarms
ECPINS monitors incoming data from sensors. When ECPINS fails to receive
incoming data the relevant fields display the last value received. The
following conditions trigger a warning or alarm:
a
Gyrocompass: After 10 seconds of no incoming data, the Hdg field displays a warning;
after 30 seconds, flashes an alarm.
b
/GPS/LORAN-C: After 10 seconds of no incoming data, the following fields flash a warning:
COG, SOG, Lat., and Lon.; after 30 seconds, an alarm.
c
Speed log: After 10 seconds of no incoming data, the Log field displays a caution; after 30
seconds, flashes a warning [figure 5-23].
d
Depth sounder: After 10 seconds of no incoming data, the Depth field displays a caution;
after 30 seconds, flashes a warning.
5 PROGRESS MONITORING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
91
e
Anemometer: After 10 seconds of no incoming data, the Wind field displays a caution;
after 30 seconds, flashes a warning.
Figure 5-23 Sensor alarm
•
5.F.2
Log: The warning indicates that data from
the speed log is no longer being received.
The field displays the last value received.
GPS alarms
ECPINS monitors GPS data input. The following conditions trigger a caution:
a
b
The minimum number (that is, 4) of GPS satellites for 3D reception is
currently in use.
HDOP value between 3 and 5.
The following conditions trigger a warning:
a
b
Fewer than 4 satellites are in use [figure 5-26].
HDOP value greater than 5.
The following conditions trigger an alarm [2.B.4.C]:
a
b
GPS reception is lost [figure 5-24]. The own ship's primary position, SOG,
and COG fields flash red. Also, several panels on the alarms panel are
activated [figure 5-25].
GPS information being received is not based on WGS84.
Figure 5-24 GPS alarm — Vessel text box when GPS position is lost
92
5 PROGRESS MONITORING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Figure 5-25 GPS alarm — Alarms panel when GPS position is lost
Figure 5-26 GPS warning — Sensor text box
1
2
1
5.F.3
Sensor: Flashes “Datum” in red if GPS
information being received is not based on
WGS84.
2
Sats: Displays a caution if only 4 satellites
are in use; flashes a warning if less than 4.
Depth alarm
ECPINS examines depth sounder readings. ECPINS issues a shallow depth
alarm when the depth under the keel [5.C] is less than the minimum value
you set [figure 5-27].
Figure 5-27 Depth alarm — Vessel text box
1
1
5.F.4
Depth: Flashes red when depth is less than
the Depth Monitoring value.
Anti-grounding alarm
ECPINS examines the anti-grounding cone [4.F] and issues an alarm [figure 528] if the cone encounters a charted sounding less than the minimum value
[5.C.1] or a potentially hazardous object or area [Ap.D].
5 PROGRESS MONITORING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
93
Figure 5-28 Anti-grounding caution — Sensor text box
•
5.F.5
Anti-Gr — Possible states:
OK = Anti-grounding cone is operational.
No hazards detected.
[Text] = Identifies an object or area within
the cone, for example, Traffic Separation
Zone, Anchorage Area. More detailed
information appears in the message line.
Calm = The anti-grounding cone is
operational. No hazards detected.
Event = The anti-grounding cone detected
an object or area, for example, Traffic
Separation Zone
Caution (solid yellow) = Identifies a
hazard within the cone, for example,
Caution Area, Seaplane Landing Area.
Alarm (flashing red) = Identifies a hazard
within the cone, for example, Safety
Contour Crossing (the safety depth
contour), Shallow Object, Dangerous
Object.
No data = No chart is loaded, only the
world chart is displayed.
OFF = You have turned anti-grounding off.
Zone alarms
ECPINS issues a zone alarm under the following conditions:
a
b
c
5.F.6
Any portion of the own ship moves outside the anchor watch’s [4.H] drag
circle.
The drag circle contains a potential hazard. Objects considered potential
hazards are the same as for the anti-grounding cone [4.F].
A contact — ARPA, AIS — enters the guard zone [4.I]; one alarm for each
contact.
Cross-track alarm
ECPINS issues a warning if the cross-track distance of the own ship exceeds
the Port or Starboard XTD Warning distance [8.C.1] on the active route
[5.B.1]. You set these distances for each route leg.
ECPINS issues an alarm if the cross-track distance of the own ship exceeds the
Port or Starboard XTD Alarm distance on the active route. You set these
distances for each route leg.
ECPINS displays a cross-track alarm in the Route text box [figure 5-29] and on
the XTD panel of the Conning screen layout [3.B.10].
Figure 5-29 XTD alarm in Route text box
94
5 PROGRESS MONITORING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Note: When the own ship moves outside the cross-track corridor, ECPINS automatically resets
the active leg to the leg nearest to the own ship [5.B.4.A].
5.F.7
Primary position source alarm
When “Automatic” is the Primary Position Source [9.A.2.A] and ECPINS
changes the position source according to circumstances, ECPINS issues a
specialized warning. This warning generates an audible alert, indicates a
warning on the GPS panel of the Conning screen layout [3.B.10], and
highlights the screen layout’s Lat and Lon fields in flashing orange [figure 530]. When you acknowledge the alarm (press F3), ECPINS immediately
removes all alarm indicators.
Figure 5-30 Primary position source changed
1
1
5.F.8
Indicates new position source (“POS3” in
this example).
Autopilot alarms
ECPINS issues an alarm when it disengages the autopilot [5.G]. “All” flashes
red on the alarm panel [3.B.11.C] and a message appears in the message line.
You can change the conditions under which ECPINS disengages the autopilot.
5.F.9
Audible alerts
You can prevent an audible alert from sounding when an alarm is triggered.
Warning: Alarms are critical to the own ship's safety. Turning off the audible alert is not
recommended.
To turn off the audible alerts:
Choose > Setup > Sound until OFF is selected.
5.F.10
UPS warning
If your system is equipped with an uninterruptable power supply (UPS), and
the UPS is operating on battery power, the ECPINS computer displays a
message containing an estimate of the time remaining until that power is
exhausted (at which time ECPINS will no longer operate). This message
appears at regular intervals as long as the UPS is operating on battery power.
Also, the UPS sounds an audible alarm. If your operator station is not in the
vicinity of the UPS, you may not be able to hear the audible alarm.
5 PROGRESS MONITORING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
95
5.G
Track Control
ECPINS can guide the own ship along a route, when the vessel is equipped
with an automatic steering device that is connected to ECPINS. When
engaged, Track Control directs the autopilot to follow the route as closely as
possible given the ship’s turning characteristics and the route’s changes in
direction. The autopilot monitors the own ship’s position and progress
relative to the active route.
There are two way of using Track Control in ECPINS. Track Control can use a
connected autopilot device to control the own ship's movement or Track
control can use a simulated autopilot device that provides sensor data for
ECPINS training and testing purposes.
5.G.1
Track Control using Raytheon NautoPilot 2025
Note: This section describes an optional ECPINS feature that is available only on some
systems.
When ECPINS is connected to the Raytheon NautoPilot 2025 (NP 2025) device
[figure 5-31], it can operate as a Track Control System that meets the IEC
62065, Category B Track Control Standards.
Note: The setup procedure for designating the autopilot device for use by the ECPINS system is
outlined in the Appendices [Ap.F].
Note: For instructions on how to use the NP2025 device, refer to the manufacturer’s
documentation.
Figure 5-31 Raytheon NautoPilot 2025
ECPINS engages the NP 2025 when Track Control is enabled in ECPINS and all
of the following engagement conditions are met:
a
b
c
d
e
f
96
The vessel has a valid position input.
One or more routes are defined and loaded in ECPINS.
The active route has the track corridor and turn radii defined.
The active route is scanned and saved.
The own ship is in the cross-track corridor.
The difference between the ships heading and the active route’s leg
direction must be less than 40 degrees.
5 PROGRESS MONITORING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
g
The NP 2025 device is turned on and is in Track Control.
If you attempt to turn on Track Control without all of the above conditions
met, a warning is displayed. The warning message identifies all of the
conditions that need to be resolved before Track Control can be started
[figure 5-32].
Figure 5-32 Track Control warning message example
To turn on Track Control:
1
2
3
4
5
The own ship’s steering must be in Heading Control.
• To verify, ensure the Autopilot Control Switch is set to “Auto” and the
ECPINS screen displays Hdg Control in the Steering field [figure 5-33].
Choose > Routes >Track Control... or press Ctrl +T. The Track Control dialog
appears.
In the Track Control list, select On.
If required, select the Take control at this workstation option.
• This option is always displayed when your system has more than one
workstation.
Click OK.
Figure 5-33 Track Control dialog
1
2
4
3
5
1
2
•
Autopilot Control Switch: A rotary switch
that changes the own ship’s steering from
Manual steering to the autopilot’s
Heading Control.
Track Control: Turns Track Control On and
Off.
Autopilot Master: Displays the name of
the machine that controls the autopilot.
5 PROGRESS MONITORING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
3
Take Control option is displayed on
systems with more than one workstation.
When selected, this workstation controls
the Track Control function. The
workstation name (in brackets), is
displayed on most of the screen layouts in
the Control field.
97
4
Name of the workstation controlling Track
Control.
5
The own ship’s steering is in Heading
Control.
Note: For ECPINS systems with multiple workstations, only one workstation at a time can
communicate with the autopilot device. To ensure synchronization of the Track Control and
autopilot device setting, ECPINS uses the “Enhanced” network settings. For more information
about ECPINS’ synchronized network refer to the ECPINS Technician’s Guide.
5.G.1.A
Track Control fields and screen indicators
Systems that are licensed to use the Track Control have modified screen
layouts. Most of the screen features are described in the Chapter 3, ”Screen
layouts” [3.B] section; however, the specific screen modifications for Track
Control are described in this section, as follows:
a
b
The Route Panel includes the Steering and Control fields [figure 5-34].
The Alarms Panel displays a Track Control alarm tile instead of the GPS
Velocity tile [figure 5-35] and the cross-track distance (XTD) tile is
relocated to the top row near the Track Control tile.
An Autopilot Control Switch is typically installed with the Raytheon
NautoPilot 2025 (NP 2025) device [figure 5-31]. This switch allows the
operator to disconnect quickly from the autopilot’s Heading Control or Track
Control for full manual control of the own ship’s steering.
The steering can be operated as described below:
a
b
c
d
Manual: The navigator manually steers the ship.
Heading Control (HDG Ctrl): The autopilot steers the ship according to the heading value
set by the navigator turning the autopilot unit’s heading knob and then pressing the
heading knob or the Set button.
Track Control (TRK Ctrl): ECPINS steers the ship following the active route.
Not Available (N/A): The autopilot device is not communicating with ECPINS.
Figure 5-34 Track Control fields
1
2
1
2
98
Track Control fields in the Nav and Nav
Detailed screen layouts.
Track Control fields in other screen
layouts.
5 PROGRESS MONITORING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
•
Steering or Steer: Displays the own ship’s
current, operational steering: Manual,
Heading Control (HDG Ctrl) Track Control
(TRK Ctrl), or Not Available (N/A).
•
Control or Ctrl: Displays the name of the
ECPINS workstation that controls the Track
Control function.
Figure 5-35 Track Control Alarm Panel
2
1
1
5.G.1.B
Track Control: Indicates warnings and
alarms when the autopilot is in Track
Control.
2
XTD: Indicates a warning or alarm for
cross-track distance.
Track Control alarms and messages
When ECPINS engages the autopilot, it displays a “Track Control: On”
message in the message line. While Track Control is engaged, a series of
warning and alarm states inform the navigator of each course change on the
route [figure 5-36]. The warnings must be acknowledge by the own ship’s
navigator or the alarm severity is elevated, as summarized in Table 5-1.
Figure 5-36 Example of Track Control alarms shown in the message line.
Table 5-1
Track Control alarms
Alarm Type
Alarm activation time
Alarm severity
without
acknowledgment
Alarm severity
when each alarm
is acknowledged
Early course change
1-5 minutes to
wheel-over line
Warning
Cleared
Course change
60 - 30 seconds to
wheel-over line
Warning
Cleared
Wheel-over line
0
Alarm
Cleared
5 PROGRESS MONITORING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
99
Table 5-1
Track Control alarms
Alarm Type
Alarm activation time
Alarm severity
without
acknowledgment
Alarm severity
when each alarm
is acknowledged
Navigator alarm
30 seconds after
wheel-over line
Alarm
Cleared
End of track
1-5 minutes to
end of track
Warning
Cleared
Track Control stopped
N/A
Alarm
Cleared
Note: To Acknowledge alarms press F3, choose > Acknowledge Alarms, or click the
appropriate Alarm Panel tile, such as the Track Control tile. For more information about alarm
indicators and alerts, refer to 2.B.4.C, Alarms.
Your system’s specific alarm activation times and other Track Control alarm
conditions are defined in the Set Track Control Options dialog.
To adjust Track Control alarm conditions:
1
2
In ECPINS Setup, choose > Setup > Vessel Setup > Set Track Control Options.... The
Set Track Control Options dialog appears [figure 5-37].
Choose options and click OK.
Figure 5-37 Set Track Control Options
•
•
•
Maximum ROT (deg/min): Limits the
change in heading requested by the
autopilot to no more than this rate of turn,
expressed in degrees per minute. The
default is 20.
Minimum speed: The speed at which a low
speed warning is activated.
Maximum heading deviation: The
maximum difference between the route
•
•
and the own ship’s heading, expressed in
degrees. When exceeded, a warning is
activated.
Early course change confirmation time:
The time (TTG to wheel-over line) at which
the first course change alarm is activated.
Course change confirmation time: The
time (TTG to wheel-over line) at which the
second course change alarm is activated.
You can turn off Track Control in ECPINS.
To turn Track Control off:
1
2
3
4
100
Choose > Routes >Track Control... or press Ctrl +T. The Track Control dialog
appears [figure 5-33].
In the Track Control field, select Off.
Click OK. A confirmation dialog appears.
In the Track Control dialog, click Yes.
5 PROGRESS MONITORING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
ECPINS displays the message “Track Control: Off” and then switches to
the autopilot’s Heading Control.
Track Control will also be turned off when any of the following conditions
occur:
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
Position sensor data is lost
Heading sensor data is lost
Speed sensor data is lost
Route ends
Vessel travels beyond the XTD
Vessel’s expected Rate of Turn (RoT) exceeds the Maximum RoT. This
occurs when the vessel’s speed is too high for the planned turn radius.
On the autopilot unit:
i Track Control is changed to another operating mode
ii The unit is disconnected from the ECPINS system
iii Power is lost
iv Heading or sensor data is lost
The rotary Control Switch is turned to manual [figure 5-33].
If Track Control is terminated in any of these ways, a warning alarm is
activated, a notification message is displayed [figure 5-38], and ECPINS
switches to Heading Control.
Figure 5-38 Track Control notification
5.G.2
Track Control using a simulated autopilot
Warning: This section describes the Track Control feature for simulation [Ap.F] purposes only; it
is not for navigational use.
Track Control engages the autopilot automatically on startup provided that
an autopilot is designated for use by the system [Ap.F] and all engagement
conditions are met.
To turn on Track Control:
1
2
3
Choose > Routes >Track Control... or press Ctrl +T. The Track Control dialog
appears.
In the Track Control list, select On.
Click OK.
When Track Control engages the autopilot, it displays a message in the
message line. When Track Control disengages the autopilot, it displays the
message “Track Control disengaged” (the message indicates potential
reasons for disengagement) and issues an event.
5 PROGRESS MONITORING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
101
Track Control disengages the autopilot under any of the following
conditions:
a
b
c
d
The active route does not have, for every waypoint, a turn radius set at
between 1 metre and 50 nautical miles.
The active route has not been scanned since any change was made to it.
The vessel is outside the cross-track corridor.
The vessel is in the “arrival circle”, that is, near the last waypoint of a
route.
After disengaging the autopilot, Track Control will re-engage it if all
engagement conditions are met. In ECPINS Setup, you can remove any of
these conditions or ensure that Track Control does not engage the autopilot
at all.
To adjust Track Control engagement conditions:
1
2
In ECPINS Setup, choose > Setup > Vessel Setup > Set Track Control Options.... The
Set Track Control Options dialog appears [figure 5-39].
Choose options and click OK.
Figure 5-39 Set Track Control Options
•
•
102
Look Ahead Distance: The distance down
the active route the autopilot attempts to
aim the ship. The default is 1 NM.
Maximum ROT: Limits the change in
heading requested by the autopilot to no
more than this rate of turn, expressed in
degrees per minute. The default is 20.
5 PROGRESS MONITORING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Engagement conditions:
• Require Route Scan: The autopilot will
engage only if the active route has been
scanned since any change was made to it.
• Require Turn Radius: The autopilot will
engage only if the active waypoint has a
turn radius set at between 1 meter and 50
nautical miles.
• Own ship must be in XTD Corridor: The
autopilot will engage only if the own ship
is inside the cross-track corridor.
6
6
Navigational assistance
This chapter describes how to use ECPINS to assist with navigation en route.
ECPINS provides you with tools to help monitor the location of fixed locations
relative to the own ship, to mark locations, to fix the ship’s position relative
to charted points, and to take local tides and currents into account.
6.A
Electronic bearing lines
You can create a variety of electronic bearing lines (EBL) and variable ranges
(VRM) on the display, such as a bearing line from the own ship to a fixed
object or hazard [figure 6-1].
Figure 6-1 Electronic bearing line display
1
2
1
2
3
3
5
4
EBL text box: Information on the active
bearing line
Bearing line end point
Range and bearing information
4
5
Range and Bearing line [6.A.6]
EBL/VRM selection: Displays the main
types of bearing lines available.
In general, you can create these lines by plotting them directly on the display
using the cursor or by entering precise coordinates using the keyboard. An
EBL persists on the display until you remove it. This enables you to work with
EBLs while conducting other route planning and monitoring operations.
6 NAVIGATIONAL ASSISTANCE
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
103
You can create up to three bearing lines and two hazard bearings for
simultaneous display. Several types of EBL are available to you:
a
b
c
d
e
f
Fixed electronic bearing line and variable range marker (6.A.3)
Offset EBL/VRM (6.A.4)
Range-and-bearing line (6.A.6)
Parallel index (6.A.5)
Offset Parallel index
Hazard bearings (6.A.8)
You can control the information displayed for all EBLs, including bearings as
true or magnetic.
6.A.1
EBL information
Information relevant to an EBL is displayed in the EBL text box [figure 6-2].
The EBL text box appears on several screen layouts [3.B].
Figure 6-2 EBL text boxes
•
•
•
•
•
Brg: Bearing of the end point
Rng: Range of the end point
Lat: Latitude of the end point.
Lon: Longitude of the end point.
EBL: Indicates the type of bearing
displayed:
Rng and Brg Line
Fixed
Offset EBL/VRM
Parallel Index
Offset Parallel Index
Hazard 1
Hazard 2
Man Overboard [6.C.2]
If more than one of a type is active, the
EBL is numbered(1,2, or 3).
The EBL displayed is — in order of priority
— the one with which you are in the act
of creating, or the last EBL selected for
display, or the most recently created.
You may wish to have the EBL text box display information about a particular
bearing.
To switch the EBL text box display:
1
Choose > Navigation Tools >.
2
From the submenu [figure 6-3], choose one of the EBLs currently
displayed (that is, one of the EBLs the status of which is ON or LOCK).
•
•
A dot marks the bearing displayed in the EBL text box.
If you choose the EBL currently displayed (marked by a dot), ECPINS changes
the status of that EBL (from ON to LOCK) or removes it from the display
(from LOCK to OFF or ON to OFF).
or
Press the function key associated with the EBL [6.A.2].
•
104
If you choose the EBL currently displayed (identified by the label in the EBL
text box), ECPINS changes the status of that EBL or removes it from the
display.
6 NAVIGATIONAL ASSISTANCE
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Figure 6-3 Navigation tools menu — bearing display
1
2
3
4
1
2
6.A.2
EBL displayed in the chart display.
EBL displayed in the chart display. Also,
this EBL’s end point is locked on the
display.
3
4
EBL displayed in the EBL text box and in
the chart display (indicated by a dot). This
EBL’s end point is locked on a location on
the display.
EBL not displayed.
EBL creation
ECPINS can display up to three EBLs of any type (plus one or two hazard
bearings). You can control each using the main menu or with a function key,
as follows:
a
F7: EBL/VRM 1
b
F8: EBL/VRM 2
c
F9: EBL/VRM 3
The function key enables you to create the EBL, lock its end point (for Fixed
EBL/VRM and Offset EBL/VRM), select it for data display, and remove it.
To create an EBL:
1
Position the cursor on the display at the intended EBL end-point location.
Exception: For an Offset EBL/VRM, position the cursor at the start or centre
point.
Press F# (the function key of the EBL — F7, F8, or F9). The Select EBL/VRM
dialog appears [figure 6-4].
•
2
If the cursor is not on the chart display, the dialog does not appear.
Click an EBL type. ECPINS creates an EBL of the selected type at the cursor
position. The EBL text box [figure 6-2] displays information on the newly
created EBL.
•
3
Or, use the up and down arrow keys to select a type and press Enter.
If you used the cursor to click an EBL type, the EBL is created at the cursor
position at the time the function key was pressed.
(Optional) Move the cursor to the desired bearing and range.
•
•
4
•
•
•
•
For a Range and Bearing line, ECPINS automatically locks the end point at
the cursor position.
For an Offset or Fixed EBL/VRM, you must move the cursor to create a range.
For an Offset EBL/VRM, press F# again to lock the end point at the cursor’s
location.
For a Fixed EBL/VRM, press F# again to lock the end point at the cursor’s
current range and bearing.
6 NAVIGATIONAL ASSISTANCE
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
105
•
For a Parallel Index, follow the dialog instructions. Right-click to set the
range and bearing. A parallel index has no LOCK status (it is always locked).
or
1
Position the cursor on the display at the intended EBL end-point location.
2
Choose > Navigation Tools > EBL/VRM 1, EBL/VRM 2, or EBL/VRM 3. The Select EBL/
VRM dialog appears [figure 6-4].
3
Click an EBL type. A dialog appears and ECPINS displays the EBL.
4
Follow the dialog instructions to set the desired bearing and range. The
EBL text box displays information on the newly created EBL.
To set the point precisely, click By Keyboard. A dialog appears where you can
enter coordinates in Lat./Lon. UTM/UPS. After typing a value followed by a
decimal point, press the space bar to enter degree/minute/second symbol.
• To plot the point precisely relative to a feature or contact, click By Name. The
Find Location dialog [10.G] appears where you can centre the display
window on a selected location and use that location to plot the point.
• For a Fixed or Offset EBL, selecting a locked position is optional. If the EBL is
not locked, the EBL’s end point moves with the cursor as you continue work.
The ECPINS menu indicates its status as ON.
Right-click to finish working with the EBL.
•
5
•
•
The ECPINS menu indicates the EBL just created as ON if the EBL is a Parallel
Index or a Fixed or Offset EBL/VRM that is not locked.
The ECPINS menu indicates the EBL just created as LOCK if the EBL is a
Range and Bearing Line or a Fixed or Offset EBL/VRM for which the end
point is locked.
Figure 6-4 Select EBL/VRM dialog
1
2
3
1
The selected type. Press Enter to create it
(or click your choice). Press the up or down
arrow keys to change the selection.
2
3
The number identifies the EBL/VRM to be
created.
Anchor EBL is available on some systems.
To remove an EBL/VRM:
Choose > Navigation Tools > EBL/VRM 1, EBL/VRM 2, or EBL/VRM 3 until OFF is
selected.
or
Press F# (the function key of the EBL — F7, F8, or F9). If the EBL’s status is
LOCK, that EBL is removed.
•
106
If an Offset or Fixed EBL/VRM’s status is ON, ECPINS changes it to LOCK and
locks the EBL’s end point at the cursor position. Press F# again to remove it.
6 NAVIGATIONAL ASSISTANCE
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
6.A.3
Fixed electronic bearing line and variable range marker
You can create an electronic bearing line (EBL) and a variable range marker
(VRM) centred on the own ship [figure 6-5]. The EBL/VRM’s centre point
moves with the ship.
You have the option of “locking” the EBL’s end point at a specified range and
bearing from the own ship. If not locked, the EBL’s end point moves with the
cursor as you continue work. You may find this technique useful for such
tasks as measuring the range and bearing of several different objects in
anticipation of a fix [6.D.3].
Figure 6-5 Fixed EBL/VRM
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
6.A.4
Lead mark
EBL label: Displays the range of the fixed
EBL/VRM point from the own ship and the
bearing. You can display the bearings as
True/Magnetic and/or Relative [3.C.8].
Fixed EBL/VRM point
Variable range marker (VRM)
5 Electronic bearing line (EBL)
6 Own ship
You can control the EBL/VRM features
displayed [6.A.9].
Information on this bearing is also displayed in
the EBL text box [figure 6-2].
Offset EBL/VRM
You can create an electronic bearing line (EBL) and a variable range marker
(VRM) centred on any location [see figure 6-6]. This centre point is fixed. This
is particularly useful for making a quick measurement of the distance
between two locations and their relative bearing.
You have the option of “locking” the Offset EBL/VRM’s end point at a
location. If not locked, the EBL’s end point moves with the cursor as you
continue work. You may find this technique useful for such tasks as
measuring the range and bearing from a location to several surrounding
vessels and objects.
6 NAVIGATIONAL ASSISTANCE
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
107
Figure 6-6 Offset EBL/VRM
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
6.A.5
Stern mark
Range marker
Centre point (fixed)
EBL
End point
Lead mark
7
Range and bearing: You can display the
bearings as True/Magnetic and/or Relative
[3.C.8].
You can control the EBL/VRM features
displayed [6.A.9].
Information on this bearing is also displayed in
the EBL text box [Figure 6-2].
Parallel index
You can draw an index line at a specified range from the own ship and
parallel to a specified bearing. This “parallel index” [figure 6-7] moves with
the own ship.
You can also draw a parallel index relative to a stationary point. You set this
“offset parallel index” line at a specified range from an origin and parallel to
a specified bearing; for example, parallel to the next leg of the active route.
This EBL is most useful for conducting “blind pilotage”.
108
6 NAVIGATIONAL ASSISTANCE
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Figure 6-7 Parallel indices
1
2
3
Parallel index
Parallel index’s centre point (its origin is
the own ship).
Range and bearing: You can display the
bearings as True/Magnetic and/or Relative
4
5
6
[3.C.8]. Information on this bearing is also
displayed in the EBL text box [figure 6-2].
Offset parallel index
Offset parallel index centre point
Offset parallel index origin
When a parallel index is displayed, you can adjust its location.
To adjust a parallel index:
1
Choose > Navigation Tools > Adjust Parallel Index #... (where # = 1, 2, or 3).
Adjust Parallel Index # is available only when one or more parallel indices
are displayed.
Adjust the origin’s range and bearing: Click a location at the desired
range from the own ship. Then, click a location at the desired bearing.
•
2
3
6.A.6
Right-click to complete the adjustment.
Range-and-bearing line
You can set up a range-and-bearing line between a location and the own
ship’s EBL/VRM Origin — typically located near the conning position [figure 68]. As the own ship moves in relation to the fixed location, the EBL (electronic
bearing line) adjusts.
6 NAVIGATIONAL ASSISTANCE
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
109
Figure 6-8 Range-and-bearing line
1
2
3
4
1
2
6.A.7
Range and bearing (updated
continuously). You can display True/
Magnetic bearings and/or Relative [3.C.8].
Information on this bearing is also
displayed in the EBL text box [figure 6-2].
Fixed end point (at a beacon)
3
4
Range-and-bearing line
Own ship (vessel shape). The bearing is
taken from the own ship’s EBL/VRM
Origin, typically assigned [Ap.E.4.E] to a
location near the conning position.
Anchor bearing
You can mark the ship’s Anchor Origin position as an anchor point [4.H] and
have ECPINS display a range and bearing line to that point from the own
ship’s Anchor Origin. As the own ship moves in relation to the anchor point,
the EBL adjusts [figure 6-9].
Note: If you do not assign the Anchor Origin to a reference point on the ship [Ap.E.4.E], it is
assigned by default to the Centre of Rotation.
Figure 6-9 Anchor bearing
1
2
3
4
1
2
110
Anchor Origin: The bearing is taken from
the own ship’s Anchor Origin, which you
can assign [Ap.E.4.E] to a location on the
vessel shape. Also, the anchor is initially
marked at this position.
Range-and-bearing line
6 NAVIGATIONAL ASSISTANCE
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
3
4
Range and bearing (updated
continuously). You can display True/
Magnetic bearings and/or Relative.
Information on this bearing is also
displayed in the EBL text box [figure 6-2].
Fixed end point (at anchor mark): Label
displays the time the anchor was marked.
To mark the anchor position and display an anchor bearing:
1
Choose > Navigation Tools > EBL/VRM #. The Select EBL/VRM dialog appears
[figure 6-4].
Or press F7, F8, or F9.
Choose Anchor EBL. ECPINS places an anchor marker at the own ship’s
position and displays a range and bearing line.
•
2
•
6.A.8
To remove the anchor bearing, choose > Navigation Tools > EBL/VRM # until
OFF is selected. Or press the same key used to create the EBL (that is, F7, F8,
or F9)
Hazard bearings
You can draw a range and bearing line to a hazard. ECPINS can maintain one
or two hazard bearings, in addition to up to three range-and-bearing lines.
Figure 6-10 Hazard bearings to known hazards
1
2
3
4
5
1
Range and bearing from the own ship to
the hazard point (updated continuously).
You can display the True/Magnetic
bearings and/or Relative [6.A.9].
Information on this bearing is also
displayed in the EBL text box [figure 6-2].
2
3
4
5
Hazard point (fixed)
The own ship’s EBL/VRM Origin, typically
assigned [Ap.E.4.E] to a location near the
conning position.
Hazard bearing lines
Hazard point (fixed)
To set a hazard bearing:
1
Choose > Navigation Tools > Hazard 1 or Hazard 2 until ON is selected.
2
On the display, click the location of the hazard point. The EBL text box
indicates Hazard #.
To remove a hazard bearing:
Choose > Navigation Tools > Hazard 1 <ON> or Hazard 2 until OFF is selected.
6.A.9
EBL/VRM display
You can adjust the display of information for the active bearing line or for all
bearing lines. By default, most information is displayed.
6 NAVIGATIONAL ASSISTANCE
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
111
To adjust the display of bearing lines:
Choose > Setup > Display Setup > EBL/VRM Display Options.... A dialog appears
[figure 6-11].
Figure 6-11 EBL/VRM Display Options
Default settings are shown.
• Bearing Label: Display the bearing in True
or Magnetic units, depending on the
system setting [3.C.8].
6.B
•
•
Rel Brg Label: Displays the bearing as
relative to the own ship’s heading.
Apply to: Apply the options to only the
Active EBL or to All EBLs.
Range and bearing
You can find the range and bearing from the own ship to locations and
contacts several different ways. You can also measure it precisely over large
distances using a calculator.
6.B.1
Range and bearing to the cursor
As you move the cursor on the chart display, ECPINS automatically calculates
the range and bearing from the own ship to the cursor’s position. It displays
this information in the Cursor text box on most screen layouts [3.B].
Figure 6-12 Cursor text display
2
1
1
112
Cursor text box: Displays information
relative to the own ship and the cursor’s
position.
6 NAVIGATIONAL ASSISTANCE
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
2
The cursor
6.B.2
Range and bearing calculator
You can use ECPINS to find a location given its range and bearing relative to a
known location or to calculate the range and bearing between any two
locations. ECPINS displays the result as track line pointing from the start point
to the end point [figure 6-13].
Figure 6-13 Range and bearing track line
1
3
2
1
Track line: Points to the end point. Bearing
and range are displayed on the Calculator.
The track line is removed when the
Calculator is closed. If you use the
Calculator a second time, the track line is
2
3
displayed again (according to the previous
set of values).
Start point
End point
To find a location given its range and bearing:
1
Choose > Navigation Tools > Calculator…. The Calculator appears [figure 6-14].
2
In the Find area, click End Point.
3
Click a Line Type (Great Circle or Rhumb Line).
4
On the display, click a location to set the start point. The coordinates for
the location appear in the Start Point area.
Or, in the Start Point area, type the coordinates in the Lat 1 and Lon 1 boxes.
Enter the range and bearing.
•
5
6
Click Calculate. ECPINS displays a track line pointing from the start point to
the end point, that is, the found location [figure 6-13].
6 NAVIGATIONAL ASSISTANCE
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
113
Figure 6-14 Calculator
1
1
•
•
•
•
An asterisk indicates the position you can
change by clicking a location on the
display.
Find: Your choice determines the fields
available on the rest of the calculator.
Datum: Selects a datum to apply to the
calculation. The default selection is WGE.
Track Line: Displays the range and bearing
of the End Point relative to the Start Point.
Lat/Lon: Enter Lat./Lon. coordinates in
degrees, degrees and minutes, degrees
and minutes and seconds, or any of these
with decimal digits (up to 10), for
example, 44.629º or 44º 37.7809'. Leave a
•
•
•
space between the unit values. To indicate
direction, use “N”, “S”, “E”, or “W”.
Reverse: Swaps the Start Point with the
End Point and recalculates other fields
accordingly.
Calculate: Click to recalculate based on
fresh input into the calculator fields.
If you enter extra decimal digits in one
field, all fields of that kind have the same
number of digits. For example, Bearing at
8 decimal digits, Rev. Brg will also contain
8 decimal digits. The calculator resets
decimal digits to the default when you
close it.
To calculate range and bearing between two points:
1
Choose > Navigation Tools > Calculator…. The Calculator appears [figure 6-14].
2
In the Find area, click Rng & Brg.
3
Click a Line Type (Great Circle or Rhumb Line)
4
On the display, click a location to set it as the start point. The coordinates
for the location appear in the Start Point area.
Or, in the Start Point area, type the coordinates in the Lat 1 and Lon 1 boxes.
On the display, click a location to set it as the end point. The coordinates
for the location appear in the End Point area.
•
5
Or, in the End Point area, type the coordinates in the Lat 2 and Lon 2 boxes.
ECPINS displays a track line pointing from the start point to the end
point, that is, the found location [figure 6-13].
•
6
•
114
If any values were entered or modified manually, click Calculate.
6 NAVIGATIONAL ASSISTANCE
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
6.C
Markers
You can place a marker at one or more points [figure 6-15]. You can also drop
a specialized event [6.C.3] or MOB marker [6.C.2] at the own ship’s position.
Finally, a printed summary of all markers displayed in ECPINS is available
[6.C.6].
Figure 6-15 Markers — active, inactive, and MOB
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
6.C.1
MOB marker [6.C.2]
Bearing line to the MOB marker from the
own ship’s EBL/VRM Origin, typically
assigned [Ap.E.4.E] to a location near the
conning position.
Standard marker (renamed) [6.C.4].
ECPINS numbers the markers
4
5
automatically as stn 1, stn 2, and so on.
You can rename a marker.
Own ship
Active marker [6.C.1]: The active marker
differs in colour (blue) from others.
Active marker
ECPINS designates one of the markers on the display as the active marker; it
differs in colour (typically, it is blue) from the other markers (orange)
[figure 6-15]. By default, the active marker is that which is closest to the own
ship. However, you can designate any marker as the active marker.
To designate the active marker:
1
Choose > Markers Choose > Markers > Active Marker Mode > Select Active Marker....
2
On the display, click a marker. ECPINS designates this marker as active.
•
•
The marker is active until you choose another, until you delete it, or until you
choose > Markers > Active Marker Mode > Closest Marker Active.
Since you can delete a marker designated as active, ECPINS may operate
with no active marker until you designate another or choose > Markers >
Active Marker Mode > Closest Marker Active.
6 NAVIGATIONAL ASSISTANCE
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
115
6.C.2
Man-overboard marker
You can drop a specialized marker at the own ship’s position to plot the
position of a man overboard relative to the own ship. This marker is labelled
“MOB” and stamped with the date and time. ECPINS draws a range and
bearing line between the MOB marker and the own ship.
To drop an MOB marker:
Press F6 or choose > Man Overboard. An MOB marker appears at the own
ship’s position.
6.C.3
Event marker
You can drop a specialized marker at the own ship’s position to plot the
position of an event [figure 6-16]. This marker is stamped with the date and
time only. You can rename it.
Figure 6-16 Event marker
To drop an event marker:
Choose > Markers > Drop Event Marker. An event marker appears at the own
ship position.
6.C.4
Standard marker
When you place a standard marker (that is, not a specialized event or MOB
marker), ECPINS displays a standard marker symbol and label, for which the
marker is numbered automatically. However, you can give a marker a name
and symbol more appropriate to its purpose [figure 6-17].
Figure 6-17 Standard markers
1
4
2
5
3
6
1
2
Standard symbol
Man Overboard symbol (ECPINS treats this
as a marker, not as the more specialized
MOB marker [6.C.2])
3
4
5
6
Anchor Watch [4.H] symbol
Selection
Buoy
Position
You can place a marker on the display by clicking a location, or by identifying
the location by grid reference, or by defining the initial location relative to a
grid reference (in terms of range and bearing or speed, direction, and time).
116
6 NAVIGATIONAL ASSISTANCE
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
To place a marker:
1
Choose > Markers > Create Marker…. The Create Marker dialog appears.
2
On the display, click a location to mark it.
•
•
•
•
•
To place the marker precisely by grid reference, click By Keyboard. For a
latitude coordinate, the numbers must be followed by “N” or “S”; for
longitude, an “W” or “E”.
To place the marker relative to a location, click By Keyboard, choose the Grid
Type “Range/Bearing” or “Speed/Time/Bearing”, type the relevant data
(where Time is the elapsed time of movement), enter the location (the
“offset”) by typing a grid reference (or clicking a location on the display),
and click OK.
To place the marker precisely at a feature or contact, including the own ship,
click By Name. The Find Location dialog [10.G] appears where you can
centre the chart display on a selected location and use that location to plot
the marker.
If necessary, choose a Datum other than WGE.
When finished, right-click on the display to stop adding markers.
To delete a marker:
1
Choose > Markers > Delete Marker….
2
On the display, click the marker to delete it.
To rename a marker:
1
Choose > Markers > Name Marker….
2
On the display, click the marker to select it. The Enter Marker Name dialog
appears.
3
Type a name and press Enter.
To move a marker:
6.C.5
1
Choose > Markers > Move Marker….
2
On the display, click the marker to select it.
3
Click a new location to place the marker there.
Marker sets
To facilitate the management of a large number of markers, ECPINS groups
markers into the following sets: “Markers” and “Man Overboard”. By
default, all sets are displayed.
To hide a marker set:
1
Choose > Markers > Markers…. The Markers dialog appears [figure 6-18].
2
Select a set and click Show / Hide Set. ECPINS changes the set’s Show status to
“OFF”.
•
To display a set the status of which is OFF, select it and click Show / Hide Set.
6 NAVIGATIONAL ASSISTANCE
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
117
Figure 6-18 Markers dialog
1
2
1
2
Show: Display status of the marker set: ON
or OFF.
A selected set.
•
•
Show/Hide Set: Toggles the display of the
selected marker set ON and OFF.
Edit Set...: Enables changes to any of the
markers in the set. Or, double-click the set.
Working with a set, you can create, modify, or delete any of the markers.
Modifications include changing the symbol from the standard symbol [see
figure 6-17].
To modify a marker:
1
In the Markers dialog, select a set and click Edit Set.... The Marker Set dialog
appears [figure 6-19].
Or, double-click a set.
Select a marker and click Edit.... The Edit Marker dialog appears.
•
2
Figure 6-19 Marker Set
1
1
•
•
•
118
A selected marker
Date: The date the marker was last
modified.
Add...: Creates a marker to add to this set
[figure 6-20].
Add From Chart...: Places a new marker by
copying the location of an existing feature.
6 NAVIGATIONAL ASSISTANCE
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
•
•
•
Locate: Highlights the selected marker on
the chart.
Edit...: Enables modification of the
selected marker [figure 6-20].
Delete: Deletes the selected marker.
Figure 6-20 Edit Marker
1
2
3
4
5
•
1
2
3
Name: Accept the default name or type a
new one.
Attributes: Assigns attributes to the
marker, or displays the attributes already
assigned. Attributes include:
Information: Text associated with the
marker. Appears when the marker is
queried.
Station Type: Controls the marker’s
symbol. Types include: Man Overboard,
Anchor Watch, Selection, Buoy, Position
[figure 6-17]. Station Type is not related to
the marker’s set.
The marker symbol and label as they will
appear on the chart.
Click the appropriate option to work with
one of the points that make up the marker
(a point):
4
5
•
•
Add: Adds a new marker location. Click on
the chart to generate the marker.
Move: Moves the marker. Click a new
position on the chart.
The location of the marker in latitude and
longitude.
Coordinates of the selected point. Click on
the chart to generate coordinates or enter
using the keyboard. Click Accept or OK to
accept the coordinates, which then appear
as the marker’s location.
Accept: Enters the coordinates in the
adjacent boxes as the marker’s location.
Cancel: Enables you to cancel all changes
and return the marker to its initial
location.
You can choose to display or hide a marker set, transfer sets between ECPINS
systems or copy sets for storage outside ECPINS.
To copy a marker set to ECPINS:
1
Choose > Markers > Copy Markers from Disk…. The Select Source Directory dialog
appears.
2
Double-click drives, folders, or directories until the desired folder is
selected and click Select.
3
A dialog lists the marker sets available in the selected folder.
4
Double-click the set(s) to be copied.
5
Click Copy.
To store a marker set:
1
Choose > Markers > Copy Markers to Disk…. A dialog lists the marker sets
available.
2
Double-click the set(s) to be copied and click Copy. The Select Destination
Directory dialog appears.
3
Double-click drives, folders, or directories until the desired folder is
selected and click Select.
6 NAVIGATIONAL ASSISTANCE
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
119
6.C.6
Marker summary
You can print a summary of all the markers displayed in ECPINS [figure 6-21].
Figure 6-21 Marker report
1
2
3
1
2
Man Overboard: List of all MOB markers
[6.C.2]
Fixed Points: List of all event [6.C.3] and
other markers [6.C.4]
3
Symbol: Indicates the type of marker
symbol, such as, marker, MOB, anchor
watch, buoy [figure 6-17].
To print a marker report:
6.D
1
Choose > Markers > Print Marker Report…. ECPINS displays the Print Setup
dialog.
2
Choose print settings and click OK. A dialog appears when printing is
completed.
Position fixing
When you use automatic position fixes (“Fix + DR(AUTO)” or “Fix +
EP(AUTO)”) as the primary position source [9.A.2], ECPINS computes the own
ship’s position by extrapolating from the most recent manual [6.D.1], sensor
[6.D.2], or operator fix [6.D.3] using heading and the speed log. If heading
and speed log are not available, ECPINS uses speed over ground and course
over ground. In Fix + EP(AUTO), ECPINS also takes into account set and drift
[5.E].
In ECPINS, you can get a position fix by setting a manual fix [6.D.1], using a fix
from a particular sensor [6.D.2], or deriving an operator fix from a variety of
lines of position [6.D.3].
6.D.1
Setting a manual fix
You can fix the own ship’s position by specifying a location [figure 6-22].
120
6 NAVIGATIONAL ASSISTANCE
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Note: When the primary position source is not Fix + DR or Fix + DR(AUTO), you use a different
method to adjust the own ship’s position [5.D].
Figure 6-22 Manual fixes
1
2
3
1
2
Time of the fix
Manual fix symbol (labelled with an “M”)
3
Set and drift [5.E] vector (drawn from the
previous estimated position).
To set a manual fix:
1
Choose > Navigation Tools > Fixing > Create Manual Fix….
2
Click By Keyboard to enter the fix location precisely. A manual fix marker
appears on the display.
Or, click a location on the display to set a fix at that position.
Or, to plot the point precisely, click By Name. The Find Location dialog [10.G]
appears where you can centre the chart display on a selected location and
use that location as the fix location.
Right-click on the display. ECPINS displays a fix marker surrounded by a
blue confidence ellipse.
•
•
3
4
In the Set Confidence Ellipse dialog [figure 6-23], type values and click Apply.
5
Click Exit. The fix is set.
•
If the primary position source is automatic position fixes [6.D.4], the Enter
Set and Drift dialog appears [figure 6-24]. Type values, and click OK. ECPINS
displays a set and drift vector to the fix position. The confidence ellipse
disappears.
Figure 6-23 Set Confidence Ellipse dialog: Manual fix
•
Designation: By default, ECPINS labels a
manual fix “M”. You can change the
designation to any two characters.
6 NAVIGATIONAL ASSISTANCE
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
•
Apply: Applies the values to the displayed
ellipse. ECPINS displays the ellipse in blue
surrounding the fix marker.
121
•
Exit: Closes the dialog. ECPINS logs [7.C]
the displayed confidence ellipse size.
Figure 6-24 Enter Set and Drift dialog: Setting a fix
•
6.D.2
Source: You can choose from Computed
Fix-to-Fix, Ordered, Ordered (last
computed), or Computed Sensor.
•
•
Set/Drift: The values are derived from
ECPINS [5.E] or you can enter them
directly here by changing the Source.
Error Type: Choices include Elliptical,
Circular, in knots, or as a percentage.
Setting a sensor fix
You can fix the own ship’s position by using the position indicated by an
enabled positioning sensor [9.A.2.D]. This is particularly useful when the
primary position source [9.A.2] is set to automatic position fixes or when a
sensor is only briefly or inconsistently available.
To set a sensor fix:
1
Choose > Navigation Tools > Fixing > Apply Sensor Fix…. The Select Sensor for Fixing
dialog appears.
2
Select a position source and click Select. ECPINS displays a fix marker
surrounded by a blue confidence ellipse.
3
Only enabled position sources appear in the list.
In the Set Confidence Ellipse dialog [figure 6-23], type values and click Apply.
4
Click Exit. The fix is set.
•
•
•
6.D.3
ECPINS labels a sensor fix “M” [figure 6-22].
If the primary position source is computed reckoning, the Enter Set and Drift
dialog appears [figure 6-24]. Type values, and click OK. ECPINS displays a
set and drift vector to the fix position. The confidence ellipse disappears.
Setting an operator fix
Setting an operator fix involves taking three or more measurements (ranges
or bearings) from one or more reference points [6.D.3.B]. When these
readings are entered, ECPINS displays lines of position (LOP) [6.D.3.C]. You
can fix own ship's position based on where the LOPs intersect [figure 6-25].
122
6 NAVIGATIONAL ASSISTANCE
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Figure 6-25 Operator fix
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
Reference point
Line of position (LOP): The shape of an
LOP depends on the fix type. For example,
for a visual fix or a transit, the LOP is a
straight line.
Own ship
4
5
Visual fix marker. Located inside the area
of estimated position (the triangular area
formed by the LOPs or “cocked hat”).
Stamped with the time of the fix.
Error tolerance for the LOP: Appears if you
have set measurement errors [6.D.3.A].
In ECPINS, an operator fix can be based on any combination of the following:
a
b
The bearing to a reference point on the display (usually a charted object
such as a light or a tower).
The range to a reference point, such as a light or a radar target on land.
To set an operator fix:
If desired, preset measurement errors [see 6.D.3.A].
If necessary, prepare a reference point group [see 6.D.3.B].
Display a reference point group.
•
•
1
A valid fix requires the use of at least one reference point.
Create a display of LOPs and set the fix [see 6.D.3.C].
•
2
•
6.D.3.A
A valid fix requires the use of at least three measurements and a marked
time for each.
Setting fix measurement errors
You can preset errors for the measurements used for an operator fix. Once
set, the measurement errors apply to all future fixes. Errors include the
following:
a
Alidade error: Adds an error tolerance to both sides of an LOP derived from a visual
measurement. The width of the error increases with the distance from the reference point,
creating a fan shape [figure 6-25].
6 NAVIGATIONAL ASSISTANCE
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
123
b
Radar Range Fix: Adds an error tolerance to both sides of a circle of position derived from
a radar range.
c
Operator Fix: A distance used as the default error for an operator fix.
d
Sextant: An error measurement in degrees, minutes, and seconds. The default is 0.05
degrees.
To set a fix measurement error:
1
Choose > Setup > Vessel Setup > Set Measurement Errors.... The Set Measurement
Errors dialog appears [figure 6-26].
2
In the Type box, choose a measurement type.
3
In the Error box, type an error measurement.
Figure 6-26 Set Measurement Errors dialog
•
6.D.3.B
Type: Choices include Alidade, Radar
Range Fix, Operator Fix, Sextant.
•
Error: Measurement depends on the Type
chosen.
Preparing reference points
For a fix, ECPINS uses a group of one to eight reference points. Typically, you
prepare a group of reference points in advance for use a specific locale where
a fix might be needed, such as a harbour or a channel passage. You can
activate only one reference point group at a time.
To activate reference points for a fix:
1
Choose > Navigation Tools > Fixing > Reference Points…. ECPINS displays the
Reference Points dialog [figure 6-27].
2
Select a group and click Set Active. ECPINS sets the indicator in the Show
column to “On”.
•
•
•
Reference points in the active group appear on the display. Each reference
point is automatically labelled by one or two letters of the alphabet, starting
with “A” (labels range from A to ZZ). The display of reference point labels is
controlled by the Important Text feature in the Text Groups category.
A reference point is one of the chart features that you can query.
To centre the display on a reference point, in the Reference Group dialog,
select the point and click Locate.
Reference points are organized into groups. A group can hold up to 702
reference points. You can add new reference points to a group while taking a
fix using that group [6.D.3.C] as well as adjust the position of an existing
reference point [figure 6-31].
To work with reference points:
Choose > Navigation Tools > Fixing > Reference Points…. ECPINS displays the
Reference Points dialog [figure 6-27].
124
6 NAVIGATIONAL ASSISTANCE
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Figure 6-27 Reference Points dialog
1
2
1
2
•
Active group: The Show column indicates
“On”.
The selected reference point group.
Set Active: Loads the selected group.
ECPINS displays the reference points in the
chart display (where the chart display
covers a point’s location). If the selected
group is loaded, ECPINS unloads it.
•
•
•
New Group...: Creates a new group to
which you can add new reference points.
Edit Group...: Enables you to add, change,
or delete reference points to the active
group.
Delete Group...: Deletes the selected
group and all its reference points.
When creating a reference point, you must add it to an existing group or
create a new group for it.
To create a reference point:
1
In the Reference Points... dialog, click New Group.... The New Reference Group
dialog appears. In the Group box, type a name and click OK. The Reference
Group dialog appears [figure 6-28].
Or, click Edit Group... to add a reference point to the selected group.
Click Add... The Add Reference Point dialog appears. On the display, click a
location to set a reference point there. Click OK.
•
2
Or, click Add From Chart.... The Select Point dialog appears [figure 6-30].
Click a charted point, such as a light or tower, and click Copy.
The new point appears in the Reference Group dialog.
•
3
Figure 6-28 Reference Group dialog
1
1
•
•
Selected reference point
Add...: Enables you to enter a point by
clicking a location on the display or by
entering the latitude and longitude.
Add from Chart...: Enables you to enter a
point by selecting a charted point.
6 NAVIGATIONAL ASSISTANCE
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
•
•
Edit...: Enables you to change the location
and attributes of the selected point
[figure 6-29].
Locate: Centres the display on the selected
point. If the group is active, ECPINS
displays the point.
125
•
OK: Closes the group and saves any
changes made to the reference points and
to the group.
•
Cancel: Closes the group without saving
any of the changes made.
•
Accept: Sets the location at the latitude
and longitude you enter in the adjacent
boxes.
OK: Enters the point (in this example, B)
into the active reference point group.
Next...: Creates a new reference point.
Attributes...: Enables you to assign
attributes to this reference point, such as
height.
Figure 6-29 Edit Reference Point dialog
You set the location of the reference point by
clicking a point on the chart or entering the
latitude and longitude.
• Information: A description.
• Latitude / Longitude: The co-ordinates of
the point you click on the chart. When
editing a point, click the box and then a
new location on the chart to move the
point.
•
•
•
Figure 6-30 Select Point dialog
You select a charted point by clicking it on the
display. ECPINS displays a red circle around the
point and displays its details in the dialog.
•
Copy: Enters the selected points (in this
example, a light) into the active reference
point group.
To edit a reference point:
1
In the Reference Group dialog, select the reference point and click Edit.... The
Edit Reference Point dialog appears [Figure 6-29].
2
Make changes to the point’s description, location, or attributes.
To change the point’s location, click the # / Latitude / Longitude space and
then click a new location on the display. A bearing line emanates from the
point’s current location until you choose the new location.
Click OK to save the changes.
•
3
You can transfer a reference point group between ECPINS systems or copy a
group to storage outside ECPINS.
126
6 NAVIGATIONAL ASSISTANCE
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
To copy a reference point group to ECPINS:
1
Choose > Navigation Tools > Fixing > Copy Reference Points from Disk…. The Select
Source Directory dialog appears.
2
Double-click drives, folders, or directories until the desired folder is
selected and click Select. A list of reference point groups appears.
3
Double-click the group(s) to be copied.
4
Click Copy.
To store a reference point group:
6.D.3.C
1
Choose > Navigation Tools > Fixing > Copy Reference Points to Disk….
2
Double-click the reference point groups to be copied and click Copy. The
Select Destination Directory dialog appears.
3
Double-click drives, folders, or directories until the desired folder is
selected and click Select.
Creating lines of position and setting the fix
With a set of reference points loaded, you are ready to create lines of
position (LOPs) on the display and use these to set the fix. The area where the
LOPs intersect, the “cocked hat”, gives the probable position of the own ship.
It is inside this area that you can locate the optimum position for the fix.
To create LOPs:
1
Press F5 or choose > Navigation Tools > Fixing > Create Operator Fix…. The
Operator Fix dialog appears [figure 6-31].
2
For each LOP, choose a Type, enter the Measurement, enter the Reference
point label, and click Mark. ECPINS draws the LOPs on the display.
•
•
If you take another measurement later, click Mark again in the appropriate
row. ECPINS advances the previously-drawn LOPs according to the elapsed
time and own ship's course and speed. ECPINS also displays a track
between the original reference point and its current advanced position
relative to the own ship.
You can adjust the position of an LOP’s reference point [figure 6-31].
Figure 6-31 Operator Fix dialog
1
General procedure for each LOP (limited to 8):
6 NAVIGATIONAL ASSISTANCE
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
1. Choose a Type.
127
1
•
•
3
2. Enter a reference point under Ref.
3. Enter a Measurement.
4. Click Mark.
Adjust a reference point: Click to adjust
the position of the LOP’s reference point
[6.D.3.B]. ECPINS adds a temporary
reference point.
Type: Choose the fix Type first. Choices
include:
Visual: Enter the reference and bearing.
Generates a line of position.
Radar: Enter the reference point and
range. Generates a circle of position.
Ref: Depending on the Type, you may
enter the reference point letter (A, B, C,
etc.) directly or ECPINS enters it when you
choose from a list of relevant points or
•
•
•
•
measurements. If you enter the letter of an
activated point, the letter appears in the
box.
Measurement: Adjusts according to the
Type of fix chosen. Depending on the type,
you may enter data directly or ECPINS
enters it when you choose from a list of
reference points.
Mark: Sets the time to the current time or
the time in the Time field.
Time: You can enter a time or click. Mark
to set the time to the current time.
Place Fix: Enables you to place a new
operator fix, the location of which is
influenced by the LOPs displayed.
Radar: Enter the reference point and
range. Generates a circle of position.
On the display, ECPINS places a fix marker in what it considers to be the
optimum location, which is usually inside the “cocked hat”.
If the fix meets the reference point and LOP criteria, ECPINS displays a fix
marker. The fix marker’s label indicates the dominant measurement type
used to create the fix; for example:
• “V” for visual
• “R” for radar
• If the fix does not meet the reference point and LOP criteria, ECPINS displays
an estimated position marker, labelled “EP”. This marker is for display
purposes only. ECPINS does not update the own ship’s position based on an
EP.
Click Place Fix. A dialog appears.
•
4
5
Right-click to accept the computed most probable position as the fix and
exit. The fix is set.
Or, click a location on the display to place the fix elsewhere.
The Set Confidence Ellipse dialog opens [see figure 6-32].
•
6
The confidence ellipse represents the area in which ECPINS calculates the
own ship is likely to be located and excludes areas where it is certain that
the own ship is not located (ECPINS computes the ellipse based on a
statistical combination of the errors of the individual LOPs).
Enter the values, click Apply. The fix marker is surrounded by a confidence
ellipse in blue.
•
7
8
Click Exit. The Enter Set and Drift dialog appears.
The primary position source must use automatic position fixes or dead
reckoning for the Enter Set and Drift dialog to appear.
Type values, and click OK. The set and drift vector appears.
•
9
10 Click Exit. The confidence ellipse and the LOPs disappear and the fix marker remains in
view.
•
128
When Exit is clicked, ECPINS logs [7.C] the confidence ellipse size along with
the fix.
6 NAVIGATIONAL ASSISTANCE
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Figure 6-32 Set Confidence Ellipse dialog
Initial values are those that ECPINS used to
generate the confidence ellipse associated with
the fix.
6.D.3.D
•
•
Apply: Applies the values to the displayed
ellipse. ECPINS displays the ellipse in blue
surrounding the fix marker.
Exit: Closes the dialog. ECPINS logs the
displayed confidence ellipse size.
Ordered course and speed
Ordered course and speed is used during the following activities:
a
When plotting LOPs in a running fix [6.D.3.E].
[9.A.2]To change the ordered course and speed:
When the primary position source is Fix + DR, choose > Navigation Tools >
Fixing > Change Ordered Course and Speed…. The Set Ordered Course and Speed
dialog appears.
6.D.3.E
Running fix
Where several reference points are not available, you can make several
measurements of one reference point at intervals (for example, every 6
minutes). The result is a running fix [figure 6-33].
In the course of creating the running fix, each time you create a new LOP,
ECPINS advances the previously-drawn LOPs according to the elapsed time
and own ship's course and speed.
Figure 6-33 Running fix
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
Transferred line of position: This LOP is
transferred from reference point A
according to elapsed time and the own’s
ship’s course and speed.
6 NAVIGATIONAL ASSISTANCE
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
2
3
Reference point track. This track parallels
that of the own ship (according to the
ordered course and speed).
LOP (transferred)
129
4
Visual fix marker: This appears when you
place the fix. You place the fix in the area
where the lines intersect (the “cocked
hat”).
5
6
LOP to the reference point: Since the fix
was placed at the time of measurement,
this LOP has not advanced.
Reference point
To create a running fix:
1
Load a reference point group [6.D.3.B].
2
Press F5 or choose > Navigation Tools > Fixing > Create Operator Fix…. The
Operator Fix dialog appears [figure 6-31].
3
Click Mark to mark the time of measurement.
4
In the next row:
In the Ref column, enter the reference point; for example, “A”.
b In the Type column, choose the type of measurement; for example, “Visual”.
c
In the Measurement column, enter the value for bearing or range to the
reference point.
Repeat step 4 for each measurement. LOPs appear on the display and a
track appears for the reference point.
a
5
6
Click Place Fix. On the display, click the optimum location for the fix, which
is where the LOPs intersect.
•
•
6.D.4
In Fix + DR, ECPINS displays a fix marker.
In Fix + CR, ECPINS displays a fix marker and a continuous track.
Position fixes with automatic positioning
When you use automatic position fixes (“Fix + DR(AUTO)” or “Fix +
EP(AUTO)”) as the primary position source [9.A.2], ECPINS computes the own
ship’s position by extrapolating from the most recent manual [6.D.1], sensor
[6.D.2], or operator fix [6.D.3] using heading and the speed log. If heading
and speed log are not available, ECPINS uses speed over ground and course
over ground. In Fix + EP(AUTO), ECPINS also takes into account set and drift
[5.E].
The first step is to select Fix + DR(AUTO) as the primary positioning sensor
and then fix the own ship's current position. (ECPINS marks the last GPS
position with a fix symbol labelled “G”.)
In Fix + DR(AUTO), ECPINS monitors the timing of fixes. If you do not take a
new fix within the fix interval, ECPINS issues a warning in the Sensor text box.
By default, the fix interval is 3 minutes. You can adjust the fix interval when
choosing Fix + DR(AUTO) as the positioning mode and change the fix interval
at any time thereafter.
To select Fix + DR(AUTO) and drop a fix:
1
Choose > Setup > Sensor Setup > Select Primary Position Source…. The Select Primary
Position Source dialog appears listing the different positioning sensors.
2
In the list, select “Fix + DR(AUTO)” or “Fix + EP(AUTO)”. The Set Fix Interval
dialog appears.
3
In the dialog, type a value for Fix Interval (minutes).
4
Click OK. A fix appears at the current position of the own ship.
•
130
ECPINS indicates the own ship’s position with the ship symbol [4.A] rather
than the vessel shape.
6 NAVIGATIONAL ASSISTANCE
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
•
•
6.D.5
To change the fix interval later, choose > Navigation Tools > Fixing >
Change Ordered Course and Speed….
In Fix + DR (AUTO), ECPINS applies the current set and drift values [5.E] to
calculate the own ship’s estimated position.
Removing fix symbols
To reduce clutter, you may wish to remove fix symbols from the display.
To remove fixes:
Choose > Navigation Tools > Fixing > Clear Fix History…. ECPINS clears from the
display all but the last visual fix marker, The time and label of which are
removed.
Note: ECPINS stores all fixes in the voyage data log [7.C], even those that are cleared from the
display.
6.E
Tides and currents
You can find out the predicted tide levels and current strength and direction
for selected locations at the present time or a times in the past or future. You
can also monitor conditions at selected stations.
Note: Tide and current information is available provided that a technician has installed a
source database for use by ECPINS [6.E.3].
Tide and current information is organized by reference station. To view and
monitor the information for a station, you must load that station [6.E.2].
When a station is loaded, ECPINS displays it [figure 6-34].
Figure 6-34 Tide and current station display
1
2
1
2
Tide station
Current station: The arrow points in the
direction of the predicted flow for the
present time.
•
If the Text Group “Other text” is a
displayed feature [3.A.6.A], ECPINS
displays the predicted current beside each
current station.
Note: Since location information for tide and current stations may only be accurate to the
minute of latitude or longitude, it is possible for a station to appear on land.
The display of tide and current stations is controlled by means of a feature
overlay [Ap.C] which you can control [3.A.6.A] for each screen layout. If
6 NAVIGATIONAL ASSISTANCE
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
131
ECPINS has a source of tide and current information, ECPINS displays the Tides
and Currents overlay and all relevant menu choices are available.
You can get detailed information about a station by querying it [10.E]. A
query yields precise values for tide height, current velocity, and current
orientation [figure 6-35].
Figure 6-35 Tide and current station query
2
1
1
Station type
2
Time: Local
You can also find out the tide level or current velocity predicted for a future
or past time.
To find out a future predicted tide level or current:
1
Choose > Navigation Tools > Tides and Currents > Get Prediction.... The Find Location
dialog appears.
2
Select a location and click OK. A dialog appears containing complete tide
and current information for the 24 hours following the present time
[figure 6-36].
To view the selected station’s location on the display, click Locate [10.G].
Use the buttons on the dialog to view information for past dates, future
dates, or a particular time frame.
•
3
132
6 NAVIGATIONAL ASSISTANCE
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Figure 6-36 Tide and current information
1
2
3
1
2
3
•
•
•
6.E.1
The station name, type, and location
The present time and conditions
Information spanning the next 24 hours on
the hour.
Configuration: Enables you to change the
nature of the information displayed: its
start time, the period covered, and the
intervals. Changes to the configuration are
not retained when the information dialog
is closed.
Daily Summary: Displays a summary for
today’s date only.
Plot Graph: Plots a graphical display of the
information for today’s date. This graph is
not subject to the ECPINS colour scheme,
•
•
•
•
•
so use caution when viewing in low-light
conditions.
Prev Month: Displays 24 hours of
information starting from the current time
of day one month ago.
Prev Day: Displays 24 hours of information
starting from the current time of day on
the day before today’s date.
Start Date: Displays information spanning
the next 24 hours.
Next Day: Displays 24 hours of
information starting from the current time
of day on the day after today’s date.
Next Month: Displays 24 hours of
information starting from the current time
of day one month in the future.
Monitoring conditions
You can monitor the state of the current and tide at one or more selected
stations. The monitor displays the present predicted conditions and the time
to the next high or low, that is, high water, low water, maximum ebb, or
maximum flood [figure 6-37]. If restarted, ECPINS recalls the stations
monitored.
Note: ECPINS updates all information displayed on tides and currents from the database every
30 seconds.
6 NAVIGATIONAL ASSISTANCE
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
133
Figure 6-37 Tides and Currents Monitor dialog
•
•
Add: Adds one or more loaded stations
[6.E.2] to the monitor.
Remove: Removes one or more stations
from the monitor, according to your
selection.
•
Close: Closes the monitor. The monitored
stations are retained for future
monitoring.
To monitor a tide or current station:
1
Choose > Navigation Tools > Tides and Currents > Monitoring.... The Tides and Current
Monitor dialog appears [figure 6-37].
2
Click Add to add a tide or current station for monitoring. The Add Tide and
Current Station dialog appears [figure 6-38].
3
Select a station from the Locations list and click Add.
4
When all desired stations are added, click Close. The Tides and Current Monitor
dialog reappears with the added stations displayed.
Figure 6-38 Add Tide and Current Station dialog
1
2
1
2
6.E.2
A selected station
A station being monitored (enclosed in
angle brackets). Double-click it to remove
it from monitoring.
•
Contains: Filters the Locations list by the
text entered.
Loading tide and current information
To use the information in a tide and current database [6.E.3], you must load
that information in ECPINS. While you can load all the information available,
we recommend that you preserve system memory by loading only stations in
regions relevant to immediate navigational needs. If restarted, ECPINS recalls
the stations loaded.
134
6 NAVIGATIONAL ASSISTANCE
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
To load tide and current information:
1
Choose > Navigation Tools > Tides and Currents > Load Data.... The Load Tides and
Currents Stations dialog appears [figure 6-39].
2
In the Regions list, select a region. A list of available stations appears under
Locations.
3
In the Locations list, select a tide or current station and click Load.
•
•
•
•
Or, double-click a station to load it.
To select more than one station at a time, press Ctrl and click on each.
To select all the stations for region, click Select All.
To unload a station, double-click it.
Figure 6-39 Load Tides and Currents Stations dialog
1
2
3
•
•
•
Regions: Lists regions for which tide and
current information is installed [6.E.3].
Locations: List the tide and current
stations in the selected region for which
information is available to load.
Type: Filters the Locations list by the type
chosen: Tide, Current, or Tide and Current
(all).
•
1
2
3
Contains: Filters the Locations list by the
text entered. The filter includes ID number,
Name, Lat, Lon., and Type fields.
A loaded tide station. Loaded stations are
enclosed in angle brackets.
A selected region.
A loaded current station
To unload tide and current information:
In the Load Tides and Currents Stations dialog, double-click a loaded station. It
is unloaded.
or
1
Choose > Navigation Tools > Tides and Currents > Unload Data.... The Unload
Regions dialog appears.
2
In the Regions list, select a region and click Unload. All the loaded tide and
current stations associated with that region are unloaded.
6 NAVIGATIONAL ASSISTANCE
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
135
Figure 6-40 Unload Regions dialog
•
6.E.3
Regions: Lists all the regions for which one
or more tide or current stations are
loaded.
•
Contains: Filters the Regions list by the
text entered.
Setting up a tide and current database
For tide and current information to be available in ECPINS, a tide and current
database must be installed on the same computer as ECPINS. ECPINS can use
one of several types of tide and current databases, including:
a
b
Nobeltec Tides and Currents® Pro for Windows Version 3.0 or greater.
Admiralty TotalTide® version 3.3 or greater
Follow the manufacturer’s procedures to install the database.
Once a database is installed, ECPINS detects it at next startup and you can
select it for use.
To select a tide and current database:
136
1
In ECPINS Setup, choose > Setup > Tides and Currents Setup....
2
In the Tide and Current Setup dialog, select one of the databases available
and click OK.
3
Shut down ECPINS and restart the computer. The selected tide and
current database is available for use.
6 NAVIGATIONAL ASSISTANCE
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
7
7
Voyage recording
This chapter describes how ECPINS keeps records of a voyage. ECPINS
automatically records voyage data in short-term and long-term logs. You can
add notes for inclusion in these automatic records. Should an important
event occur, you can also capture the situation displayed on the screen. You
can also have ECPINS automatically take screen captures at regular intervals.
7.A
Log book
ECPINS enables you to record notes in an electronic deck log [figure 7-1]. The
log book enables you to quickly choose common tasks. ECPINS accompanies
each entry with critical voyage data recorded at the time the entry is saved.
You can print one or more entries. You can view the most recent 120 entries.
ECPINS records all entries in the voyage log [7.C].
Figure 7-1 Log Book
1
2
7 VOYAGE RECORDING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
137
•
1
2
•
Date: ECPINS fills this field with the
current date and time in UTC (regardless
of the chosen time zone). You can replace
this time with a local time or any other
information.
Text space: Text of the log entry. Type in
this space. To move the cursor to the
desired box, click in the box or use the Tab
key. To paste text copied elsewhere into
the log book, move the cursor to the
desired box and press Ctrl + v or Shift +
Insert.
Date recorded at the time the entry is
created.
Subject: You can enter a subject or choose
one from the drop-down list, which
•
•
•
•
•
includes typical Emergency, Operational,
and Administrative situations.
Next: Saves the current entry and/or
creates a new entry. (This button is not
available if there are no following entries).
Previous: Displays the previous entry. (This
button is not available if there are no
previous entries.)
Clear: Deletes the displayed entry. You can
clear only the contents of the current
entry, not a previously saved entry.
Print...: Enables you to select one or more
entries for printing. Each data log entry is
printed separately.
Close: Saves the entry and closes the
dialog.
To work with the Log Book:
Choose > Navigation Tools > Log Book…. ECPINS displays the Log Book [figure 71].
•
•
7.B
Or, press Ctrl+L.
ECPINS opens the Log Book at a new entry.
Capturing the screen
You can capture the ECPINS screen at any moment of activity and review it
later. Using a sequence of screen captures, you can record a graphical history
of an event that unfolds during a voyage. Screen captures are also of use for
route planning and briefings.
Also, you can have ECPINS automatically store screen captures at specified
intervals. These screen captures provide a useful supplement to the automatic
voyage data recordings [7.C].
7.B.1
Capturing one screen at a time
You can capture the ECPINS screen at any time.
To make a screen capture:
Choose > Setup > Screen Captures > Create Screen Capture.
•
•
•
Or on the keyboard press Print Screen.
ECPINS displays the screen capture’s file name in the message line.
ECPINS saves the screen display as a Portable Network Graphic (PNG) file
with an alphanumeric name; for example, SC_2005_Apr_25_001.png. The
name describes the year, month, date and sequence number. The screen can
be viewed using any application that can read the PNG format.
You can copy screen captures to any connected storage device, such as a
network drive, a USB drive, or an optical drive.
138
7 VOYAGE RECORDING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
To copy one or more screen captures to storage:
1
Choose > Setup > Screen Captures > Copy Screen Captures to Disk…. The Copy Screen
Captures to Disk dialog appears.
2
Double-click the screen capture(s) to copy or click Select All.
3
Click Copy. The Select Screen Captures Backup Location dialog appears.
4
Double-click drives, folders, or directories until the desired folder is
selected and click Select.
•
A dialog indicates that the system is copying the file(s).
To print a screen capture:
1
Choose > Setup > Screen Captures > Print Screen Captures…. A list of screen
captures appears.
2
Double-click a screen capture to select it or click Select All.
3
Click Print.The Screen Capture Information dialog appears.
4
Use the dialog to title the screen capture or attach a comment to it, then
click OK. ECPINS displays the printer setup box.
For the best results, click Landscape.
Click OK.
•
5
To delete a screen capture:
7.B.2
1
Choose > Setup > Screen Captures > Delete Screen Captures…. A list of screen
captures appears.
2
Double-click each file to be deleted to select it or click Select All.
3
Click Delete.
Automatic screen captures
You can have ECPINS automatically take and store screen captures at a
specified regular interval over a period of up to 32 days.
Note: The number of screens ECPINS is able to capture may be limited by system storage
space. Each capture takes about 70 Kb to 200 Kb of disk space.
Automatic screen captures are not available in ECPINS for viewing or copying.
If you wish to view an automatic screen capture, a technician can retrieve and
decompress the file (refer to the ECPINS Technician’s Guide).
To have ECPINS capture the screen automatically:
1
Choose > Setup > Screen Captures > Screen Capture Recording Options…. The Screen
Capture Recording Options dialog appears [figure 7-2].
2
Check Enable Screen Capture Recording.
3
Choose parameters and click OK.
7 VOYAGE RECORDING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
139
Figure 7-2 Screen Capture Recording Options dialog
•
7.C
Days Retained: The number of days
ECPINS will retain the screen captures
before overwriting them with new screen
captures. The maximum possible is 32.
•
Interval: The time between automatic
screen captures. The minimum is 10
seconds.
Data logs
ECPINS automatically records voyage data from startup to shutdown. You can
play this data back [7.C.2], export it for storage [7.C.1], convert it to a
database format (refer to the ECPINS Technician’s Guide), or import it into an
ECPINS system [7.C.1].
Voyage data consists of all navigation data including: vessel shape, vessel
track, contacts, active route, sensor inputs, and significant events recorded in
the event box. Significant events include: chart loads, chart unloads,
warnings, and alarms.
Note: The data logs contain more information than is shown during playback [7.C.2]. For
example, during playback, ECPINS indicates the positioning mode and displays fixes but does
not display lines of position. Thus, the data logs, and not the playback, should be considered
the definitive voyage record.
ECPINS has two automatic data logs:
a
24-hour: This data log continuously records all received sensor and navigation data at onesecond intervals. A new data log is created each day at midnight (UTC). By default, ECPINS
saves five 24-hour data logs. When the fifth is filled, ECPINS overwrites the oldest data-log
file, that is, the first one.
b
90-day: This data log records all received sensor and navigation data at one-minute
intervals. ECPINS saves a maximum of 90 days of data logs. After 90 days the first day is
deleted.
ECPINS saves up to five 24-hour data logs — it continuously deletes the oldest
files. You can save more than five such logs by changing the number of logs
saved.
To change the number of 24-hour data logs saved:
140
1
Choose > Setup > Voyage Data Recording > Set Log File Size.... The Set Log File Size
dialog appears [figure 7-3].
2
In the Number of 24 hour log files box, type a value.
7 VOYAGE RECORDING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Figure 7-3 Set Log File Size dialog
•
7.C.1
Number of...: The minimum number of
logs is 2, the maximum number is 30, the
default is 5. When the specified number of
logs are filled, ECPINS starts overwriting
log files, beginning with the oldest.
Working with recorded voyage data
You can preserve recorded data beyond the 24-hour/90 day cycle by saving it
under a different name.
Warning: If an important event occurs during a voyage, we recommend that you preserve
recorded voyage data immediately.
To preserve recorded voyage data:
1
Choose > Setup > Voyage Data Recording > Save Recorded Data As…. The Enter Name
to Save Recorded Voyage Data As dialog appears.
2
In the box, type a name and press Enter. The Select Start and End Date dialog
appears.
ECPINS creates a folder with the name provided.
Set a Start Date and an End Date.
•
3
4
The lists contain only the dates for which recorded data is available.
Check Export All to copy all available data logs (that is, all 24-hour logs
present and the 90-day log), regardless of date.
Click OK. ECPINS copies the data logs to the named folder.
5
When the data is saved, a message appears to that effect.
•
•
You can export voyage data from the own ship to a different site for such
purposes as storage or analysis. You can export data recorded between
specific dates. ECPINS compresses the files to facilitate storage.
To export recorded voyage data:
1
Choose > Setup > Voyage Data Recording > Export Recorded Data to Disk…. The
Select Recorded Voyage Data dialog appears [figure 7-4].
2
Select the data log and click Select. The Select Start and End Date dialog
appears.
3
Set the dates or check Export All. Click OK. The Select Destination Directory
dialog appears.
4
You can choose an optical drive as a destination.
Double-click drives, folders, or directories until the desired folder is
selected and click Select. The Enter Name... dialog appears.
5
Type a name for the log and press Enter.
6
The data is copied and the Export Recorded Data to... dialog appears.
•
7 VOYAGE RECORDING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
141
If an optical drive is selected and more than one disc is required to
accommodate the selected logs, the dialog indicates the number of discs
required.
Right-click to exit.
•
7
Figure 7-4 Select Recorded Voyage Data dialog
•
This list is sorted alphabetically.
You can import voyage data to ECPINS for the purpose of playback.
To import recorded voyage data from a disk:
1
Choose > Setup > Voyage Data Recording > Import Recorded Data from Disk…. The
Select Source Directory dialog appears.
2
Double-click drives, folders, or directories until the desired folder is listed,
then select the folder.
3
Click Select.
4
If you selected a disk drive, a dialog asks for the disk to be inserted.
5
Insert the first disk of the set and click. When importing of the files is
completed, ECPINS displays a dialog in which to enter a name for the data
log.
If the recorded data was saved on more than one disk, ECPINS recognizes
the order of the disks.
Type a name and press Enter. Another dialog displays the data-log name
and the message that importing is complete.
•
6
You can delete voyage data from the ECPINS hard drive. This deletion is
permanent.
Note: You can only delete logs you have saved.
To delete a voyage data log:
1
Choose > Setup > Voyage Data Recording > Remove Recorded Data from System…. A
dialog asks for a data log to be selected.
2
Select the data log and click Select. A dialog advises when the deletion is
completed.
•
7.C.2
Or, double-click the file name to select it.
Playing back voyage data
You can play back any voyage data saved on the ECPINS hard drive.
142
7 VOYAGE RECORDING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Note: Do not play back voyage data during a voyage. Using the playback mode during a
voyage can be dangerous because ECPINS is no longer being used for route monitoring and the
playback display could be confused with the chart display of the current voyage.
By default, ECPINS plays back every recorded input sentence. You can control
the playback speed.
During a playback, most ECPINS features and commands are available; for
example, you can zoom in on the display and make screen captures [7.B].
Some commands, such as those dealing with sensor setup, are not available;
for example, commands controlling the gyro, anemometer offset, and DGPS.
Finally, some menu choices are not available; for example, Select Vessel Shape
and Assign Offset.
To play back a data log:
1
Choose > Setup > Voyage Data Recording > Playback Recorded Data…. A dialog
asks for a data log to be selected.
2
Select the desired data log and click Select. ECPINS displays the Playback
Mode dialog [figure 7-5].
Or double-click on the data-log label.
Click Start.
•
3
•
Playback stops ECPINS and plays back the data log.
Note: Playback begins with the first own ship position or AIS contact recorded, (that is,
Playback searches forward from the Start Time to find the start of data recording).
Note: While ECPINS is playing back a data log, its title bar continues to display the current
time.
Figure 7-5 Playback Mode dialog
1
6
2
3
7
4
8
5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7.C.3
Time: Displays the point in time at which
the playback will start (the time at the
slider position)
Slider: Indicates the point in time
displayed.
Start Time: Displays the playback time
frame.
Playback start time
High Speed: Increases the speed of
playback by a factor of four.
Decreases the time frame. Time frames
vary and depend upon the size of the data
log.
7
8
•
•
•
Increases the time frame
Time frame end time
Start: Starts the playback at the point in
time show in the title line (1).
Stop: Ends the playback and restores
ECPINS to its normal operating mode.
Pause: To start the playback at a selected
point, click Pause and move the slider. Use
the buttons to increase or decrease the
time interval.
Monitoring the disk space
The disk space used for storing voyage data and charts is monitored and
recorded at a regular interval.
7 VOYAGE RECORDING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
143
ECPINS monitors the disk space on the hard drive containing the ECPINS
“\data” directory, which stores screen captures, voyage data logs, routes,
charts, and other user data files. On an hourly basis the remaining disk space
status is logged in the message line (the drop-down list in the top right of the
screen layout). When the disk space becomes less than the specified minimum
of unused space, a warning message dialog box will continuously appear at
the warning interval defined for your system.
To configure the disk space monitoring:
1
2
3
4
Choose > Setup > Set Disk Space Monitor.... The Set Disk Space Monitor dialog box
appears [figure 7-6].
Choose to monitor the percentage or size of remaining disk space.
Enter the Minimum Unused Space and Warning Interval.
• The Warning Interval determines how often the ECPINS Warning dialog box
appears on your display. The warning message persists until the disk space is
greater than the Minimum Unused Space value.
Click OK.
Figure 7-6 Set Disk Space Monitor dialog box
If the Minimum Unused Space warning appears on your system. You should
notify your ECPINS system administrator.
Caution: When the unused space becomes too low, it is an indication that you may need to
upgrade your disk drive to handle a larger data capacity.
144
7 VOYAGE RECORDING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
8
8
Passage planning
This chapter describes how to plan a passage by laying out a route for use by
the own ship and preparing related passage-assistance features.
8.A
Routes
You can create one or more routes on the display. Routes have features that
assist you in the navigation of the own ship, such as cross-track corridor
[8.C.1], planned speed [8.C.4], action points [8.C.3], and wheel-over points
[8.C.2].
You can save a variety of routes for different purposes and locales, and
display any number at once. However, only one route can be “active” [5.B.1]
at any given time; that is, ECPINS calculates and displays a variety of
information pertaining to the own ship relative to that route. You can also
save routes for future use or for transfer to another ECPINS system.
A route in ECPINS consists of a series of “legs”. The start and end of each leg
is a location known as a “waypoint”. Thus, a route must have at least one leg
defined by two waypoints [figure 8-1]. A leg can be either a rhumb line or a
great circle.
8 PASSAGE PLANNING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
145
Figure 8-1 Route
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
8.A.1
Cross-track corridor [8.C.1]
Waypoint (wp 5). Since the route is locked,
all waypoints in this example display a
padlock symbol.
Leg (waypoint 4 to waypoint 5)
Own ship’s heading
Active route [5.B.1] and active leg. The
active route is distinguished from other
6
7
8
9
displayed routes by a thick red line on the
active leg (Kahala Point to wp 4)
Planned speed [8.C.4] for the leg and in
the turn immediately following the leg.
Planned course for the leg
A named waypoint (you can rename any
waypoint)
Own ship’s track [4.D]
Displaying a route
You can display one or more routes. When only one route is displayed, it is
the active route (provided an own ship is also active) [5.B.1]. When more than
one route is displayed, the active route is the route you designate as such or
the first route selected for display.
To display a route:
1
Choose > Routes > Select Route to Display…. The Select Route to Display dialog
appears [figure 8-2].
2
In the list, select the route(s) to be displayed.
Double-click a route to select it (or deselect it) for display. A selected route is
enclosed in angled brackets.
Click Display.
•
3
146
8 PASSAGE PLANNING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Figure 8-2 Select Routes to Display dialog
1
2
1
2
The displayed routes (enclosed by angle
brackets)
A saved route that is not displayed.
•
Contains: To refine the list of routes, type
all or part of a route name. If this box has
no text, all saved routes appear in the list.
You can remove routes from the current display.
To remove a route from display:
1
Choose > Routes > Remove Route…. The Remove Route dialog appears listing
the routes selected for display.
2
Select the route(s).
3
Click Remove. The route is removed from the display.
•
•
8.B
Or double-click the route to remove it from the display.
If the active route is removed from display, ECPINS deactivates it and
chooses another route to be the active route.
Preparing a route
You prepare a route by plotting it out on the display and saving it. Once the
route is created, you can adjust the plotting, name points, and assess and
review the route’s characteristics.
8.B.1
Plotting a route
You create a route on the display by plotting a series of waypoints. ECPINS
draws the legs between the waypoints [figure 8-3]. By default, ECPINS draws
each leg as a rhumb line. You can change the nature of one or more legs to a
great circle.
8 PASSAGE PLANNING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
147
Figure 8-3 Plotting a route
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
First waypoint for this route
First leg on this route (between wp 1 and
wp 2). By default, a new leg is a rhumb
line.
Second waypoint
Bearing line to cursor position
Cursor position. By clicking at this
location, you can plot the route’s third
waypoint. The cursor’s coordinates appear
in the Cursor text box on most screen
layouts. This text box also displays the
6
•
•
time to go (TTG) from the own ship to the
cursor’s location.
Range and bearing to cursor position from
previous waypoint.
By Keyboard: Plots the third waypoint’s
position precisely using coordinates. The
Enter Position dialog appears [figure 8-5].
By Name: Locates [10.G] a feature or
contact, the location of which you can use
to plot a waypoint.
To create a route:
1
Choose > Routes > Create Route…. The Enter Route Name dialog appears
[figure 8-4].
2
Enter a Name and Default Speed and click OK. The Create Route dialog appears.
3
Click a location on the display to add the first waypoint. A bearing line
with a range and bearing box appears, originating from the newly
created waypoint.
4
Once a waypoint is created, you can edit that waypoint. Thus, for example,
you may wish to plot a rough route and then adjust the position of selected
waypoints using precise measurements.
Click a second location on the display to add the second waypoint.
5
Continue adding waypoints as desired [figure 8-3].
6
When the route is complete, right-click on the display.
•
Figure 8-4 Enter Route Name dialog
•
148
Name: A route name can have up to 255
characters, including blank spaces.
8 PASSAGE PLANNING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
•
Default Speed: ECPINS uses the Default
Speed to calculate the TTG. Once the route
is created, you can adjust the default
speed [8.C.4] for each leg. ECPINS initially
sets the speed to 10 knots; you can
change this.
Figure 8-5 Enter Position dialog
•
•
8.B.2
Lat./Lon. coordinates can be entered in
decimal degrees, decimal minutes, and
decimal seconds.
Datum: You can also choose a Datum,
including WGE (WGS84), WGC (WGS72),
AUA (Australian Geodetic Datum), and
•
GEO (New Zealand Geodetic Datum). This
horizontal datum transformation
facilitates entering data from an older
publication that predates GPS.
Grid Type: Choose from the available
formats — Lat/Lon, or UTM/UPS.
Editing a route
Once a route is plotted, you can adjust it by adding, moving, inserting, and
deleting waypoints. You can also rename waypoints, which are automatically
numbered.
Note: For any task involving the movement of waypoints you can enter precise coordinates by
keyboard or use the cursor, the coordinates of which are displayed in the Cursor text box on
most screen layouts [figure 2-3]. This text box also displays the time to go (TTG) from the own
ship to the cursor’s location.
Caution: Editing an active route during the voyage can have serious consequences.
To add a waypoint to either end of a route:
1
Choose > Routes > Edit Route > Add Waypoint….
2
On the display, click one of the route’s two end points.
3
Click a location on the display to add the waypoint. ECPINS draws a new
leg from the end point to the new waypoint and renumbers the
waypoints accordingly.
To move a waypoint:
1
Choose > Routes > Edit Route > Move Waypoint….
2
Click a waypoint on the display to select it. ECPINS highlights the selected
waypoint and draws bearing lines from the adjacent waypoints to the
cursor position [figure 8-6].
3
Click a location on the display to move the waypoint there. ECPINS
realigns the affected legs.
•
ECPINS also recalculates any values based on the length of the route, such
as TTG and ETA/ETD, where applicable.
8 PASSAGE PLANNING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
149
Figure 8-6 Moving a waypoint
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Selected waypoint. You have selected this
waypoint to move.
Current leg (between Race Passage and
West Race).
Cursor location. By clicking at the cursor
location, you can plot the waypoint’s new
location. The cursor’s coordinates appear
in the Cursor text box, available on most
screen layouts.
Leg extension: This EBL extends the route
legs to the cursor position from the
waypoints adjacent to the selected
•
•
waypoint. You can use these lines to align
a route leg with a reference point such as
a light [figure 8-7].
By Keyboard: Enables you to plot the
waypoint’s new position precisely using
coordinates. The Enter Position dialog
appears [figure 8-5].
By Name: Locates [10.G] a feature or
contact, the location of which you can use
to plot a waypoint.
Figure 8-7 Moving a waypoint by leg extension
1
2
3
1
2
Cursor location
Selected waypoint
3
Leg extensions: In this cursor position, the
EBLs serve as lead lines to convenient
reference points: the two lights.
To delete a waypoint:
150
1
Choose > Routes > Edit Route > Delete Waypoint….
2
Click a waypoint on the display to delete it. ECPINS realigns the affected
route legs and renumbers the waypoints accordingly.
8 PASSAGE PLANNING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Rather than adjust waypoints, you can shift the position of an entire leg.
During such a move, the leg maintains its bearing but not necessarily its
length.
To move a route leg:
8.B.2.A
1
Choose > Routes > Edit Route > Move Leg….
2
Click a route leg on the display. It is selected (the leg and its two
waypoints are highlighted).
3
Click a new location on the display. ECPINS places the leg in the new
location parallel to its previous location and lengthens or shortens the leg
so that the previous and next legs intersect the new leg.
Dividing a route
Once a route is plotted, you can insert additional waypoints as needed. When
plotting a longer route, you may find it more efficient to place start and end
waypoints, change the leg to a great circle, and then insert waypoints as
needed.
To insert a waypoint into a leg:
1
Choose > Routes > Edit Route > Insert Waypoint….
2
Click a leg on the display. ECPINS highlights the leg’s waypoints and
draws bearing lines from those points to the cursor position.
3
Click a location on the display to insert a waypoint there. ECPINS draws
two new legs and renumbers the waypoints accordingly.
You can divide a selected leg into several rhumb lines of equal length or with
a standard course change at each waypoint. This is particularly useful for a
longer route, such as trans-oceanic passages where a great circle [figure 6-13]
is the shortest route.
To divide one leg into several:
1
Choose > Routes > Edit Route > Subdivide Leg….
2
Click a leg on the display. The Subdivide Leg dialog appears [figure 8-8].
3
Enter the desired Segment Length, Number of Segments, or Course Change and
click OK. ECPINS divides the selected leg into rhumb lines and displays new
waypoints.
•
You cannot undo the subdivision. However, you can delete one or more
waypoints and change the leg type from rhumb line to great circle.
Figure 8-8 Subdivide Leg dialog
•
You can subdivide the selected Leg Length
by several segments of equal length by
8 PASSAGE PLANNING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
setting the Segment Length or the Number
of Segments.
151
•
8.B.2.B
Course Change: If the selected leg is a
great circle, ECPINS divides the route into
rhumb lines where the course change at
the end of each is that specified. This
enables you to steer the ship as close to
the great circle route as desired.To confirm
the course change at a waypoint, you can
view its Advance and Transfer settings
[8.C.2].
Naming a waypoint
ECPINS automatically numbers waypoints in a route sequentially along the
forward direction of the route, as in “wp 1", “wp 2", and so on. As you edit a
route (by adding, deleting, or inserting waypoints), ECPINS renumbers and
renames the waypoints accordingly.
If you reverse the route direction [8.C.5], ECPINS does not alter the waypoint
numbering. Moreover, ECPINS does not change a waypoint name you have
assigned.
To name a waypoint:
1
Choose > Routes > Edit Route > Name Waypoint….
2
On the display, click a waypoint. ECPINS highlights the waypoint and
displays the Enter Waypoint Name dialog.
3
Type a name for the waypoint and press Enter.
•
•
•
8.B.2.C
To return the waypoint name to an automatic number, name the waypoint
appropriately; for example, “wp 5”.
ECPINS will reject a waypoint name identical to that of another waypoint on
the same route; names are case-sensitive.
ECPINS will reject a waypoint name identical to that of the own ship (that is,
the vessel shape [Ap.E] name).
Waypoint and leg details
ECPINS provides you with a detailed summary of a route’s waypoints and legs.
This is particularly useful for viewing precise waypoint coordinates and leg
bearings.
To check a waypoint's coordinates:
1
Choose > Routes > Display Route Monitor…. The Route Monitor appears [figure 821].
2
Choose a Route. A list of the route’s waypoints appears.
•
•
8.B.2.D
ECPINS displays the active route by default.
To view information on the route’s legs, click Legs.
Squat data
To have ECPINS safety limits take squat into account on the active leg, you
must associate squat data with that leg.
To associate squat data to a route leg:
152
1
Choose > Routes > Edit Route > Set Squat....
2
On the display, click a first waypoint and then another on the same route.
All the legs between these waypoints are considered selected and the Set
Squat dialog appears [figure 8-9].
3
Click Squat Table and choose a Table to apply.
8 PASSAGE PLANNING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
4
Or click Manual Entry and type a Squat value.
Check Apply Squat.
5
Click OK.
•
Figure 8-9 Set Squat dialog
1
1
•
•
8.B.2.E
The waypoints that define the leg to which
squat is to apply.
Apply Squat: Check to have ECPINS apply
the specified squat effects [5.C.1.B].
Uncheck to preserve settings, yet
disassociate them from the route leg.
Mode: Choose a Squat Table [Ap.E.4.B] or
Manual Entry to type in your own squat
value.
•
•
•
Table: Choose from tables associated with
the current vessel shape [Ap.E].
Planned Speed: ECPINS derives this value
from the route leg.
Squat: ECPINS derives this value from the
selected Table based on the Planned
Speed [8.C.4].
Water level data
To have ECPINS safety limits take the local water level into account for the
active leg, you must associate a water level gauge station with that leg.
Note: ECPINS takes into account and can differentiate between net water level or gross water
level broadcasts from Water Stations.
To associate water level gauge station with a route leg:
1
Choose > Routes > Edit Route > Set Water Level Station....
2
On the display, click a first waypoint and then another on the same route.
All the legs between these waypoints are considered selected and the Set
Water Level dialog appears [figure 8-10].
3
Click Water Level Station and choose the Station ID to apply.
4
Or click Manual Entry to type in a Net Water Level.
Check Apply Water Level.
5
Click OK.
•
8 PASSAGE PLANNING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
153
Figure 8-10 Set Water Level
1
1
•
•
8.B.3
The selected waypoints for the leg(s) of
the route (in this case, wp 1 to wp 5).
Apply Water Level: Uncheck to preserve
the settings, yet disassociate them from
the route leg.
Mode: Choose a Water Level Station or
Manual Entry to type in your own water
level value [5.C.1.C]. Water Level values
entered must be between -99.9 and 99.9
m.
•
•
•
•
Station ID: Choose from a list of station
(derived from AIS reception). We
recommend that you choose the Station
closest to the route leg.
Water Level: The latest value received via
AIS.
Datum: The station’s base elevation.
Net Water Level: The difference between
Water Level and Datum. ECPINS applies
this value to the safety depth.
Plotting a search-and-rescue or patrol pattern
You can use ECPINS to quickly prepare a route for the specific purpose of
search-and-rescue (SAR) or patrol activities [figure 8-11]. You can use one of
three “SAR patterns” as the basis for the route: parallel legs, expanding
square, and sector search. ECPINS can plot the route to compensate for set
and drift in the search area. After laying out the SAR pattern as a route, you
can modify it if necessary.
Figure 8-11 Search and rescue (SAR) patterns
1
2
154
3
2
1
Parallel legs
Expanding square
8 PASSAGE PLANNING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
3
Sector search
To lay out a search-and-rescue pattern:
1
Choose > Routes > SAR Patterns > Add SAR Pattern > Add Parallel Legs…, or Add
Expanding Square, or Add Sector Search…. A dialog appears [figure 8-12].
2
Type a Name and click OK.
3
Click a location on the display to plot a starting position. ECPINS displays
a dialog for entering the search-pattern parameters.
4
Type values and choose units.
5
In the Direction box, choose Left or Right.
6
Click OK. ECPINS creates a route.
•
•
•
You cannot change the dialog values once OK is clicked.
Since a SAR pattern is a specialized kind of route, you can work with it as
with any other route, for example, move waypoints [8.B.2], remove it from
display [8.A.1], delete it [8.D.4], make it active [5.B.1], hide it [8.A.1], and
assign it attributes [8.C].
ECPINS sets the speed for each leg to 10 knots.
Figure 8-12 Parallel Legs dialog
•
•
•
•
Bearing: True
Leg Length: The minimum value is 5
meters.
Leg Spacing: The minimum value is 5
meters.
Legs: The maximum number is 200. Every
leg (the route between two waypoints) is
counted.
8 PASSAGE PLANNING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
•
Direction (L/R): The direction of the first
turn in the search pattern.
For Sector Search:
• Diameter minimum is 5 meters.
For Expanding Square:
• Leg length minimum is 5 meters.
• Total Length minimum is 5 meters.
155
Figure 8-13 SAR pattern modified by set and drift
1
2
1
Expanding square SAR pattern
2
The same expanding square SAR pattern
plotted taking into account a westerly
current
You can modify a SAR pattern route.
To modify a search-and-rescue pattern route:
1
Choose > Routes > SAR Patterns > Edit SAR Pattern…. The Edit SAR Pattern dialog
appears.
2
On the display, click a SAR pattern route to edit it. The Edit SAR Pattern
dialog appears (appropriate to the type of pattern).
You can edit only SAR pattern routes created in ECPINS version 5.0.3 or
greater.
Change parameters and click OK.
•
3
8.C
Route features
Once a route is created, you can add and adjust features to increase its
usefulness.
156
8 PASSAGE PLANNING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
8.C.1
Cross-track corridor
For any route, you can set up a cross-track corridor, that is, two boundaries or
lateral distances on each side running parallel to the route. You set each
distance in terms of distance from the route. Should the ship exceed the
cross-track warning distance (XTD Warning), ECPINS issues a warning. Should
the ship exceed the cross-track alarm distance (XTD Alarm), ECPINS issues an
alarm [5.F.6]. You can set different cross-track distances for each leg or for
several legs at once.
To set up a cross-track corridor:
1
Choose > Routes > Edit Route > Leg Properties….
2
On the display, select a leg, or a sequence of legs, by clicking a first
waypoint and then a last. All the legs between the selected waypoints are
considered selected and the Set Leg Properties dialog appears [figure 8-14].
3
In the dialog, type distance values for Port XTD Alarm, Port XTD Warning,
Starboard XTD Alarm, and Starboard XTD Warning.
Figure 8-14 Set Leg Properties dialog
1
2
1
2
•
8.C.2
XTD Alarm: Alarm distance must be less
than or equal to 50 nautical miles. The
default value is 0.
XTD Warning: Cross-track warning
distance must be equal to or less than XTD
Alarm distances. The default value is 0.
Planned Speed: [8.C.4] Sets the “default
speed” for the selected legs and the turn
immediately following each. ECPINS uses
this speed to determine ETA. The default
value is 10 knots.
•
Leg Type: A Rhumb Line (the default
choice) gives a constant heading to the
line connecting two waypoints. A Great
Circle is the shortest distance between the
leg’s waypoints; the heading changes
continuously. You can subdivide [8.B.2.A]
a great circle leg into several rhumb lines
with a specified course change at each
waypoint.
Changes to Leg Properties affect all selected
legs. When more than one leg is selected,
ECPINS displays the properties of the first leg.
Turns
You can draw a turn curve at points on the route where the heading changes
(that is, at one or more waypoints) [figure 8-15]. ECPINS draws a wheel-over
point at the start of the turn curve and a wheel-steady point at the end. The
planned speed [8.C.4] along the turn curve is equal to that of the
approaching leg. You can modify the turn curve using predicted set and drift.
8 PASSAGE PLANNING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
157
Figure 8-15 Turn curve
1
2
3
4
1
2
Waypoint to which the turn radius applies.
Wheel-over point at the start of the turn
3
4
Route. Curved according to the turn
radius.
Wheel-steady point at the end of the turn.
Figure 8-16 How ECPINS draws a turn curve based on the Turn Radius
1
5
4
5
2
10
0
10
0
m
2
m
3
3
1
2
3
Waypoint to which the turn radius applies.
Route leg
Turn Radius value (in this example, 100 m)
4
5
Resulting turn curve drawn by ECPINS.
Resulting wheel-over and wheel-steady
points.
To set a turn curve:
1
Choose > Routes > Edit Route > Set Turn Radius….
2
On the display, click a first waypoint and then another on the same route.
All the waypoints (and legs) between the selected waypoints are
considered selected and the Set Turn Radius dialog appears [figure 8-17].
If the turn radius is to apply at only one waypoint, select the same waypoint
for the first and last.
In the Turn Radius box, type a value and choose a unit. ECPINS draws a turn
radius at each turn on the selected leg(s) [figure 8-16].
•
3
•
158
The maximum turn radius is 50 nautical miles.
8 PASSAGE PLANNING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Figure 8-17 Set Turn Radius dialog
•
Planned Speed: The speed you set for the
leg approaching the selected waypoint.
•
Planned RoT: Calculated by ECPINS as the
Planned Speed [8.C.4] divided by the Turn
Radius.
You can also set a turn curve at each waypoint.
To set a waypoint’s turn curve:
1
Choose > Routes > Edit Route > Waypoint Properties....
2
On the display, click the waypoint. The Waypoint Properties dialog appears.
3
In the Turn Radius box, type a value and choose a unit. ECPINS draws a turn
radius at the selected waypoint [figure 8-16].
Note: The turn curve is not displayed if the previous or next leg is too short to fit the turn
curve.
8.C.3
Action points
You can designate points along a route where, when the route is active and
the own ship passes, ECPINS takes a specified action [figure 8-18]. Possible
actions are:
a
Arrival Alert: ECPINS sounds an alert.
b
Chart Zoom: ECPINS zooms the display to a preset scale.
c
Note: ECPINS displays a custom note that you must acknowledge.
An action point has an active direction. A forward action point is only
triggered if the vessel passes the point while travelling in the route’s forward
direction [8.C.5]. To have the same action occur regardless of the own ship’s
direction of travel, you must create two action points, one for each direction.
ECPINS takes the action when the own ship passes the action point even if the
own ship is off the route. ECPINS draws a line (which it does not display) from
the own ship to the route at right angles to the route; where the line meets
the route is considered the own ship’s position (or “footpoint”) for the
purpose of triggering an action point.
8 PASSAGE PLANNING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
159
Figure 8-18 Action points
1
2
6
3
7
4
5
1
2
3
4
An Arrival Alert action point for an own
ship arriving in the route’s reverse
direction.
A Chart Zoom action point for an own ship
arriving in the route’s reverse direction.
A waypoint
A Chart Zoom action point for an own ship
arriving in the route’s forward direction.
5
An Arrival Alert action point for an own
ship arriving in the route’s forward
direction.
6 A Note action point.
7 A sample note as it appears over the chart
display. You must click OK to close it.
Action point labels may not be displayed if the
labels are too close to other labels or the chart
scale is too small.
To set an arrival alert point:
1
Choose > Routes > Action Points > Add Arrival Alert > Forward… or Reverse….
2
Click a location on the route to add the action point.
To set a display zoom point:
1
Choose > Routes > Action Points > Add Chart Zoom Point > Forward... or Reverse.... A
list of chart display scales appears in a submenu.
2
From the submenu, choose a chart scale.
3
Click a location on the route to add the action point.
To display a note at a point:
1
Choose > Routes > Action Points > Add Note > Forward... or Reverse....
Or, choose > Routes > Action Points > Edit Note... to change the text of an
existing note.
Click a location on the route to add the action point. The Enter Comments
dialog appears.
•
2
3
Type a note and click OK.
To move an action point:
1
Choose > Routes > Action Points > Move Action Point….
2
Click an action point on the display to select it.
3
Click a location on the route to move the action point there.
To remove an action point:
160
1
Choose > Routes > Action Points > Remove Action Point….
2
Click an action point on the display to remove it.
8 PASSAGE PLANNING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
8.C.4
Planned speed
To calculate ETA and TTG (which appears in the Route Monitor [figure 8-21]
and on the screen layout), ECPINS uses either an entered value (“planned
speed”) or SOG. However, ECPINS always uses SOG to calculate ETA and TTG
for the current leg. ECPINS displays “N/A” for the TTG and ETA when the last
waypoint is passed. Planned speed applied to a leg also applies to the turn
immediately following that leg.
To select planned speed or SOG:
Choose > Routes > ETA/TTG Speed. Angle brackets enclose the selected type
of speed, that is, either <PLANNED> or <SOG>. The menu choice toggles the
two options.
To enter or change a planned speed:
8.C.5
1
Choose > Routes > Edit Route > Leg Properties….
2
On the display, select a leg, or a sequence of legs, by clicking a first
waypoint and then a last. The Leg Properties dialog appears.
3
In the Planned Speed box, type a value.
Route direction
The active route has a direction — forward or reverse — associated with it.
This affects the information displayed concerning progress along the route,
such as the active leg, or the ETA [8.C.6], and which action points are
triggered.
As an alternative to setting a direction, you can have ECPINS automatically set
the direction of the active route to match that of the own ship.
To set route direction:
1
Choose > Routes > Set Route Direction…. The Select Route Direction dialog
appears.
2
In the list, select a setting:
Forward: The route information is always presented [figure 5-9] in reference
to the next waypoint in the forward route direction. Only forward action
points are active. This is the default setting.
• Reverse: The route information is always presented [figure 5-9] in reference
to the next waypoint in the reverse route direction, for example, wp3 to
wp2. Only reverse action points are active.
• Automatic: ECPINS automatically sets the direction of the route to match the
direction of the own ship. ECPINS automatically detects action points based
on the direction of the route.
Click Select.
•
3
•
8.C.6
Or, double-click the setting.
Planned intended movement
If you enter an estimated time of departure (ETD) and estimated time of
arrival (ETA) for a route, ECPINS displays planned intended movement
8 PASSAGE PLANNING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
161
information (PIM) at each of the active route’s waypoints [figure 8-19].
ECPINS can also calculate and display the recommended speed for each leg.
Figure 8-19 Planned intended movement display
1
2
1
2
3
4
3
Planned intended movement (PIM)
information for waypoint “Victoria Pilot
Pickup”. Displays the date and estimated
time of arrival (ETA). Time is local time. At
the first waypoint on a route, the PIM
displays the date and Estimated Time of
Departure (ETD).
Waypoint
Course to steer (Crs) on this leg, also
known as the planned COG or track.
Planned speed [8.C.4] for the leg
4
5
5
PIM for waypoint #6. The asterisk (*)
indicates that you have specified a wheelover point ETA or ETD at this waypoint.
You can remove PIM information from display
using the Route Display Option “Estimated
Time” [5.A].
As you decrease the chart display scale, the
PIMs for some waypoints (particularly those
close to each other) may not be displayed.
To apply planned intended movement to a route:
1
Choose > Routes > Display Route Monitor…. The Route Monitor dialog appears.
2
Click either ETD or ETA. The Planned Intended Movement dialog appears
[figure 8-20].
3
Do either or both of the following:
Check Use Planned ETD and in the Planned ETD box type a date and time.
Check Use Planned ETA and in the Planned ETA box type a date and time.
Check Apply PIM to Route and click OK. The Route Monitor dialog appears with
a planned intended movement.
a
b
4
or
Use the Route Calculator [8.C.6.B].
Figure 8-20 Planned Intended Movement dialog
•
162
Use Planned ETD: Enables ECPINS to
calculate an ETA for each of the route’s
waypoints according to the planned speed
[8.C.4] and the Planned ETD you type.
8 PASSAGE PLANNING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
•
Use Planned ETA: Enables ECPINS to
calculate an ETA for each of the route’s
waypoints according to the planned speed
and the Planned ETA for the last waypoint
you typed.
•
•
ECPINS chart display. Until this option is
checked and OK clicked, the PIM
calculations are speculative only, that is,
they appear only in the Route Monitor
[figure 8-21]. Display of PIM information
along the route is controlled by the Route
Display Options [5.A].
When both Planned ETD and Planned ETA
are checked and entered, ECPINS
calculates a Recommended Speed for each
leg. This speed is listed in the Route
Monitor [figure 8-21].
Apply PIM to Route: ECPINS applies PIM
calculations to the route shown on the
Figure 8-21 Route Monitor with planned intended movement
•
•
•
•
ETD: (Estimated Time of Departure) Enters
an ETD. Not available when the route is
locked [8.D.2] by ECPINS. ECPINS uses ETA
and ETD to calculate the recommended
planned speed for the legs.
ETA: (Estimated Time of Arrival) Enters an
ETA. ECPINS uses ETA and ETD to
calculate the recommended planned speed
for the legs.
PIM DTG: Cumulative distance to go to
each waypoint.
PLANNED SPEED: Speed used for
calculating TTG. This is used to calculate
the ETA. To use a manually entered speed
•
•
•
instead of speed over ground (SOG).
“LOW” indicates a speed less than 0.5
knots. “HIGH” indicates a speed greater
than 500 knots.
RECOM SPEED: Recommended speed
required to meet ETA. Displayed when a
planned ETA and ETD is specified but not
applied.
PIM TTG: Cumulative time to go to the
waypoint.
PIM ETA: Estimated time of arrival at a
wheel-over point or, in its absence, a
waypoint.
Figure 8-22 Route Monitor: Legs
Waypoints: Return to a view of the active
route's waypoints.
The columns contain the following information:
• FROM: Waypoint that specifies start of leg
• TO: Waypoint that specifies end of leg
• DST: Length of the leg
• COURSE: Bearing of the leg
• PORT ALARM: Port cross-track alarm
distance
• PORT WARN: Port cross-track warning
distance
8 PASSAGE PLANNING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
•
•
•
•
•
STARBOARD WARN: Starboard cross-track
warning distance [8.C.1]
STARBOARD ALARM: Starboard crosstrack alarm distance [8.C.1]
PLANNED SPEED: Speed planned for use
along the leg and in the turn immediately
following.
RECOM SPEED: Recommended speed
required to meet ETA. Displayed when a
planned ETA or ETD is specified but not
applied.
LEG TYPE: Leg type (Rhumb Line (RL) or
Great Circle (GC)
163
8.C.6.A
Stopovers enroute
On a route to which a planned intended movement is applied, you can assign
stopovers to one or more waypoints. You do this by setting a length of time
to stop at each waypoint or by changing the ETD for the wheel-over point.
To set a stopover time at a waypoint:
1
Choose > Routes > Edit Route > Waypoint Properties....
2
On the display, click the waypoint. The Waypoint Properties dialog appears
[figure 8-23].
3
In the Stopover box, enter a length of time.
•
Or, check Set Wheel Over ETD and enter an estimated time of departure later
than the estimated time of arrival (ETA). ECPINS calculates the length of the
Stopover.
Figure 8-23 Waypoint Properties dialog
•
•
•
•
8.C.6.B
Name: Enable you to change the
waypoint’s name.
Turn Radius: [8.C.2]Can also be set for all
waypoints on the route at once.
Stopover: The length of time of the
stopover.
Set Wheel Over ETA: Applies the Waypoint
ETA you set. For the first waypoint on a
route, this option is Set Waypoint ETD. As
long as this option is checked, an asterisk
appears on PIM information for this
waypoint [figure 8-19]. The asterisk
indicates the ECPINS will preserve this set
ETD, even if changes are made to the route
•
•
that would otherwise automatically alter
the ETA.
Set Wheel Over ETD: Applies the Waypoint
ETD you set. ECPINS calculates the length
of the Stopover. For the last waypoint on a
route, this option is Set Waypoint ETA. As
long as this option is checked, an asterisk
appears on PIM information for this
waypoint. The asterisk indicates the
ECPINS will preserve this set ETD, even if
changes are made to the route that would
otherwise automatically alter the ETD.
OK: Applies the settings to the waypoint.
ECPINS adjusts the planned intended
movement for the route accordingly.
Enroute and speculative PIM calculation
ECPINS provides you with the means to plan an itinerary between any two
waypoints on a route or from the own ship to any waypoint on the active
route. For example, by entering a proposed speed, you can calculate a time of
arrival; or, by entering a desired time of arrival, you can calculate the
necessary speed.
If the calculations are satisfactory, you can apply the speed, ETDs, and ETAs to
the legs and waypoints along the route under consideration.
Note: Because of their similar purpose in adjusting planned intended movement, you cannot
use the Route Monitor [figure 8-21] and the Route Calculator at the same time.
164
8 PASSAGE PLANNING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
To calculate planned intended movement based on the own ship’s position:
1
Choose > Routes > Route Calculator.... The Route Calculator appears in Monitor
mode [figure 8-24].
The calculator appears in Monitor mode only when the own ship’s position
is displayed.
• The Route Calculator is available only when one or more routes are
displayed.
• In circumstances where the position of the own ship is not displayed (for
example, during pre-voyage planning or for simulation purposes), the
calculator appears in Sub-Route mode.
Type a speed in the Calculate SOA column. ECPINS calculates the ETA (in the
Calculate ETA column).
•
2
•
•
•
•
Or, type an ETA. ECPINS calculates the SOA.
ECPINS displays calculated data in red.
If desired, click Apply to apply the calculations to the route as planned
intended movement.
If desired, choose a different Destination waypoint.
Figure 8-24 Route Calculator: Monitor Mode
1
2
3
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Route: The route along which ECPINS is
making its calculations. By default, this is
the active route.
Origin: The next waypoint, which is the
start of the sub-route.
Destination: A selected waypoint, which is
the end of the sub-route. The planned
intended movement calculations apply to
the sub-route.
DTG: Distance to go, that is, the distance
along the route from the own ship to the
next waypoint.
SOA: For the active leg (the first row), the
own ship’s current speed over ground
(SOG); for other legs, the planned speed.
ECPINS excludes stopover times from its
speed calculations.
TTG: Time to go, that is, DTG divided by
SOA.
ETD: Estimated time of departure
ETA: Estimated time of arrival, that is, ETD
plus TTG. Click ETA to set the selected
field to the current time. The format is as
8 PASSAGE PLANNING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
shown in the example, that is, YYYY MMM
DD HH:MM:SS; for example, “2005 Aug
22 10:00:00”.
1 First row: Displays information on the
route from the own ship to the Origin.
2 Second row: Displays information on the
route from the Origin to the Destination.
3 Third row: A summary of rows one and
two. SOA is the weighted average of the
SOA in the first and second rows.
• Mode: Planned enables you to apply
calculations to set the planned intended
movement for the route. Monitor is
available only if the own ship’s position is
displayed (that is, there is an active vessel
and position sensor input).
• Calculate: Forces a recalculation. Not
available when the Origin waypoint is the
same as the Destination waypoint.
• Apply: Applies the calculations to the
route. To save the new PIM with the route,
you must save the route.
ECPINS updates its calculations every second.
165
You can calculate planned intended movement between the active waypoint
and any portion of the active route ahead.
To calculate planned intended movement between the active waypoint and
the route ahead:
1
Choose > Routes > Route Calculator.... The Route Calculator appear.
2
Under Mode, click Planned [figure 8-24].
3
For Destination, choose any waypoint ahead.
4
Type either an SOA (in the Calculate SOA column) or an ETA (in the Calculate
ETA column). ECPINS calculates the remaining data.
•
•
ECPINS displays calculated data in red.
If desired, click Apply to apply the calculations to the route as planned
intended movement [8.C.6].
Figure 8-25 Route Calculator — Planned Mode
You can calculate planned intended movement between any two waypoints
on a route.
To calculate planned intended movement between two waypoints:
1
Choose > Routes > Route Calculator.... The Route Calculator appears.
2
Under Mode, click Sub-Route [figure 8-25].
3
For Origin, choose a waypoint.
4
For Destination, choose a waypoint.
5
Click the column head of the value to be calculated, that is, Calculate SOA,
Calculate ETD, or Calculate ETA.
6
Type one of the other two values, that is, either an SOA, ETD, or ETA.
7
Click Calculate. ECPINS calculates the desired value (chosen in step 5).
•
•
166
ECPINS displays calculated data in red.
If desired, click Apply to apply the calculations to the route as planned
intended movement.
8 PASSAGE PLANNING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Figure 8-26 Route Calculator — Planned mode, two waypoints
•
•
Calculate SOA: Click to have this value
calculated.
Calculate ETD: Click to have this value
calculated.
•
•
Calculate ETA: Click to have this value
calculated.
Calculate: Click to calculate the chosen
value.
You can also use the Route Calculator as an alternative way [8.C.6.A] to set a
stopover at a waypoint.
To set a stopover time at a waypoint:
1
Choose > Routes > Route Calculator.... The Route Calculator appears.
2
Under Mode, click Planned and check Sub-Route [figure 8-25].
3
For the Origin and Destination, choose the same waypoint, that is, the
waypoint to which the stopover is to apply. The Calculate Stopover column
appears with a calculated stopover time.
4
A stopover time is not available for the first or last waypoint on a route.
If an ETA and ETD are not visible, enter an ETA and ETD.
Click the stopover time to change it.
The format is hh:mm:ss.
Click Calculate Stopover. ECPINS calculates the stopover time.
5
Click Apply. ECPINS applies the stopover time to the waypoint.
•
•
•
•
Figure 8-27 Route Calculator — Planned mode, stopover
•
Route: The route along which ECPINS is
making its calculations. By default, this is
8 PASSAGE PLANNING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
the active route. You can select any
displayed route.
167
•
8.D
Calculate Stopover: Appears when the
Origin and Destination are the same
waypoint and that waypoint has an ETD and
ETA. The format is seconds (ss), minutes
(mm:ss), or hours (hh:mm:ss).
Working with routes
To facilitate the preparation of routes for different areas, vessels, and
circumstances, ECPINS enables you to save one or more routes [8.D.3], and
duplicate, store, and copy them from one system to another [8.D.5]. Before
using any route for navigation, you should scan it [8.D.1] for potential
dangers and perhaps lock it against changes. Finally, you can print out [8.D.7]
the details of a route for review or briefings, for which screen captures [7.B]
are also useful.
8.D.1
Scanning a route
Before using a route for navigation, you can scan a route for potential
dangers.
In a scan, ECPINS examines the cross-track corridor [8.C.1] around each route
leg for potential dangers and unsafe depths. Unsafe depths and overhead
clearance are based on safety limits [5.C.1].
Warning: Before scanning, ensure that values for draft and under-keel clearance are correct for
the own ship [5.C.1].
To scan a route:
1
Choose > Routes > Scan Route…. A list of displayed routes appears.
2
Select the route to be scanned. The Scanning Route dialog reports scanning
progress [figure 8-28].
ECPINS automatically loads the charts required for the route being scanned
if chart auto-loading [10.B.3] is on. ECPINS retains these charts in memory
during the scan. If more memory is required during loading, ECPINS
automatically removes those charts that are no longer needed.
When the scan is completed, a Result for Route dialog displays a list of
potential dangers [figure 8-29].
•
3
•
•
168
Upon closing the scan results, ECPINS gives you the option to save the
results. If you choose to save the results, ECPINS saves the route along with
the scan date and time. ECPINS refers to the date and time of the last scan
when you set a route as the active route.
ECPINS ignores time-limited dangers [11.B.2.B] that are not active at the
time of the scan.
8 PASSAGE PLANNING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Figure 8-28 Scanning Route dialog
1
2
1
Name of route being scanned.
2
Legs being scanned (ECPINS scans one leg
at a time).
Figure 8-29 Result for Route dialogs
2
1
4
6
5
3
1
2
3
4
5
Name of route scanned
Safety depth applied to this scan.
Scanned legs where potential dangers
found (only legs with potential dangers
are listed). Double-click to view the
results.
# Results Found: Number of potential
dangers on this leg
List of potential dangers for a selected leg.
When you select a result, ECPINS centres
the display on the danger and highlights it
in flashing red (you may have to zoom in
6
•
•
•
to view the highlighted danger). The
information may contain a chart note
[10.F].
Types of results. You can refine a long list
of results by choosing to display only one
type.
Select: View the selected result (or,
double-click the result).
Back: Return to the list of legs (1).
Upon clicking Exit, ECPINS gives you the
option of saving the results of the scan.
You can choose to scan one or more route legs as opposed to the entire
route.
8 PASSAGE PLANNING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
169
Note: We recommend you rescan any route or leg that has been modified.
To scan a route leg:
8.D.2
1
Choose > Routes > Edit Route > Scan Route Legs….
2
On the display, select a leg, or a sequence of legs, by clicking a first
waypoint and then a last. ECPINS starts scanning the leg(s) between the
selected waypoints.
3
A Result for Route dialog displays a list of potential dangers.
Locked route
To prevent unwanted or inadvertent changes to a route, you can lock it.
When a route is locked, ECPINS can use it for navigation but you cannot
change its plotting and features. ECPINS indicates a locked route on the
display with a padlock symbol beside each of its waypoints [figure 8-1].
ECPINS indicates its locked routes by preceding the name with an asterisk.
To make changes to a locked route, you can save it under a different name.
8.D.3
Saving a route
You can save a route for future use or make a copy of an existing route.
To save a route:
1
Choose > Routes > Save or Delete Route > Save Route… or Save Route As….
2
If saved under a new name, the original route is retained. This is a useful
way to create alternative variations of a route.
Click a route on the display to select it.
3
Type a name and press Enter.
•
8.D.4
Deleting routes
You can permanently remove a route from ECPINS.
To delete a route:
1
Choose > Routes > Save or Delete Route > Delete Route from System…. The Delete
Route from System dialog displays the available routes.
2
Select the route and click Delete.
•
•
8.D.5
Or, double-click the route.
You cannot delete a locked route.
Copying routes
You can transfer a route between ECPINS systems or copy a route to storage
outside ECPINS.
Note: A route copied to ECPINS overwrites any route with the same name. If an overwritten
route is currently displayed, no change in the route is observed. However, if that route is
removed from the display, the overwritten route — and any changes to that route — is lost.
170
8 PASSAGE PLANNING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
You can avoid losing the displayed route by saving it under a different name (choose > Routes
> Save or Delete Route > Save Route As…).
To copy a route to ECPINS:
1
Choose > Routes > Save or Delete Route > Copy Routes from Disk…. The Select Source
Directory dialog appears.
2
Double-click drives, folders, or directories until the desired folder is
selected and click Select. Routes available in the selected folder are listed.
3
Double-click the route(s) to be copied.
4
Click Copy.
To store a route:
8.D.6
1
Choose > Routes > Save or Delete Route > Copy Routes to Disk…. The Select
Destination Directory dialog appears.
2
Double-click drives, folders, or directories until the desired folder is
selected and click Select. A list of route available to copy appears.
3
Double-click the route(s) to be copied.
4
Click Copy.
Exporting and Importing NMEA routes
You can import or export NMEA routes to transfer your route data in and out
of ECPINS.
To import a route into ECPINS:
1
Choose > Routes > Save or Delete Route > Import NMEA Routes from Disk…. The
Select Source Directory dialog appears.
2
Double-click drives, folders, or directories until the desired folder is
selected and click Select. Routes available in the selected folder are listed.
3
Double-click the NMEA route(s) to be imported or click Select All.
4
Click OK.
To export a route from ECPINS:
8.D.7
1
Choose > Routes > Save or Delete Route > Export NMEA Routes to Disk…. A list of
route available to export appears.
2
Double-click the route(s) to be exported or click Select All.
3
Click OK. The Select Destination Directory dialog appears.
4
Double-click drives, folders, or directories until the desired folder is
selected and click Select.
Printed route report
Once a route is prepared, you can print out the details in the form of a report
[figure 8-30]. This facilitates formal review and approval of the route.
You determine the information in the report. A route report can contain the
following sections:
a
Route Plan: This offers an overview of the route and its parameters [figure 8-30].
b
Route Execution: This offers a route ETA breakdown [figure 8-31].
8 PASSAGE PLANNING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
171
c
Route Turn: This offers the details of the planned turn at each waypoint [figure 8-32].
Note: In the route report, all estimated times are based on the entered planned speed. In the
Route Monitor box [figure 8-22], the current leg gives ETA and TTG based on SOG.
Figure 8-30 Route report — Route Plan section
1
1
Route name
Figure 8-31 Route report — Route Execution section
1
1
172
Route name
8 PASSAGE PLANNING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Figure 8-32 Route report — Route Turn section
1
1
Route name
To print a route report:
1
Choose > Routes > Print Route Report…. A dialog appears with a list of routes.
2
Select the route to be printed and click Print. The Select Attributes to Print
dialog appears [figure 8-33].
3
Check the optional information to be included in the printed report and
click OK. The Print Setup dialog appears.
4
Click OK. The Enter Route Direction and Start Time dialog appears [figure 8-34].
5
Click a Route Direction.
6
Click OK.
Figure 8-33 Select Attributes to Print dialog
Route Plan Report
• Lat/Lon: Latitude and Longitude of each
waypoint.
• Planned Speed: The planned speed for
each leg [see 8.C.4].
8 PASSAGE PLANNING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
•
•
•
Speed Limits: The maximum and minimum
speeds for each leg.
XTD Limits: Cross-track warning and alarm
distances [8.C.1]
Leg Type: RL = rhumb line; GC = great
circle
173
•
Turn Radius: The turn radius at each
waypoint [8.C.2].
Route Execution Report
• Leg Course or Crs/CTM: To next waypoint
• Leg Distance: To next waypoint
• Cumulative Distance: Between waypoint 1
and every other waypoint
• Planned Speed: Transit time, Cumulative
Time, and ETA are based on the planned
speed entered for the route or leg [see
8.C.4].
• Transit Time: TTG to next waypoint
• Cumulative Time: Between waypoint 1
and every other waypoint
•
ETA: The ETA takes into account the
entered start time of the voyage [figure 834].
• Stopover Time: At each waypoint
Route Turn Report
• DTNC and Course Change: Distance to
next course change (typically at the wheelover point); course change at the point.
• Advance and Transfer: From the course
change point.
• Planned Helm: From the course change
point.
• Planned Speed: From the course change
point.
Figure 8-34 Enter Route Direction and Start Time dialog
•
8.E
Start Time: Optional. The current time
appears by default.
Clearing lines
Among the corrections you can add to a chart are clearing lines. ECPINS
displays a clearing line on the chart labelled by its name and clearing bearing
[figure 8-35]. The anti-grounding cone [4.F] issues a crossing alarm when it
detects a clearing line.
174
8 PASSAGE PLANNING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Figure 8-35 Clearing line
1
2
3
1
2
A clearing line
A clearing line label: NLT = not less than;
NMT = not more than.
3
Point at which ECPINS has clipped the
next line.
As with other corrections [11], you can create and store sets of clearing lines
and display each when needed. ECPINS facilitates the drawing of a clearing
line by enabling you to use a charted point as one end of the line. While
drawing is in progress, ECPINS displays a “corridor” around the line at a
width you set. Also, you can draw a set of overlapping lines and have ECPINS
automatically “clip” each line where it intersects with the next.
When creating a clearing line, you must add it to an existing set or create a
new set for it.
To create a clearing lines set:
1
Choose > Navigation Tools > Clearing Lines > Clearing Lines.... The Clearing Line Sets
list appears [figure 8-36].
2
Click New Set.... ECPINS displays the New Clearing Lines Set dialog.
3
Enter a name for the set and click OK. The named clearing line set dialog
appears [figure 8-37].
8 PASSAGE PLANNING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
175
Figure 8-36 Clearing Lines Sets list
1
2
1
2
•
•
Check to select all the sets at once.
A selected set: Click the square to select or
de-select. Press Ctrl and click to select
two or more sets.
Show: Display status of the set (that is, if
display of this set is On or Off)
Chart: The chart(s) to which the set
applies. Clearing lines apply to all charts.
•
•
•
Set: Set name
Show/Hide Set: Toggles the display of the
selected set on and off.
Edit Lines...: Changes the lines that make
up this set. Or, double-click a set to edit its
lines.
Figure 8-37 Named clearing line set
1
2
1
2
•
•
Check to select all the lines at once.
A selected clearing line: Click the square
to select or de-select. To select more than
one, press Shift and click each.
Add...: Enables you to draw a line with
two points, starting with the target point.
Add From Chart...: Enables you to draw a
line toward a charted point feature.
•
•
•
Edit...: Changes the selected line.
Locate: Centres the display on the selected
line.
Move up / Move down: Changes the
position of the selected line in the list. On
the display, ECPINS may clip the lines
differently as a result of these changes.
When drawing a set of clearing lines, you should draw one or more lines in
order down the proposed route starting from the beginning of the route.
Each line is drawn from a target point backward to a bearing point. This
procedure enables ECPINS to clip the lines and display arrowheads
appropriately.
176
8 PASSAGE PLANNING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
To draw a clearing line:
1
In the Clearing Line Sets dialog, select a set and click Edit Lines.... The named
clearing line set dialog appears.
Or double-click the set.
Click Add.... The Edit Clearing Line dialog appears [figure 8-38].
•
2
3
Click a point on the display toward which the clearing line should point.
The Edit Clearing Line dialog appears and a dashed clearing line appears on
the display between the target point and the cursor.
Or, click Add from Chart.... The Select Reference Point from All dialog appears.
Click a charted point feature (such as a beacon or a landmark). The feature
appears in the dialog.
c
Select it and click Select. The Edit Clearing Line dialog appears with the first
point entered.
Use the cursor to adjust the clearing line to a suitable bearing.
a
b
4
ECPINS displays a corridor for your reference while drawing the line. If
necessary, you can adjust the width of the corridor by entering a Corridor
Width.
Click a point on the display. The location is set as the point from which
the clearing line should originate.
•
5
Figure 8-38 Clearing line drawing and Edit Clearing Line dialog
7
8
9
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
2
3
4
Clearing line’s target point.
The clearing line being drawn.
Corridor (see Corridor Width): For your
reference while drawing the line.
Point at which ECPINS will clip the line
being drawn.
Current cursor position
A clearing line drawn previously.
Click the appropriate option to work with
a point:
Add: Adds a new point. Click on the
display to generate the point.
5
8
9
8 PASSAGE PLANNING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
6
Insert: Inoperable. Since a clearing line
consists of only two points, no points can
be inserted.
Delete: Deletes a selected point. Click the
point on the display or double-click the
point in the list.
Move: Moves a selected point. Select the
point from the list and click a new
position.
The points that make up an object. Each
has a number and latitude and longitude.
A clearing line consists of two points.
Coordinates of the selected point. Click on
the display to generate coordinates or
177
•
•
enter using the keyboard. Click Accept or
OK to accept the coordinates, which then
appear in the list of points.
Name: Type a name. If added from the
chart, ECPINS fills in a name derived from
the target point.
Category: Available categories include:
NMT (not more than), NLT (not less than),
and undefined.
•
•
•
•
•
Corridor Width: The width of the corridor
that ECPINS displays on each side of the line
being drawn.
Accept: Enters the coordinates in the
adjacent boxes as a point.
Next: Starts another clearing line.
Next From Chart: Starts another clearing
line where you can use a charted point
feature as the target point.
OK: Saves the line and closes the dialog.
Available only when the line is valid.
You can transfer clearing line sets between systems.
To copy a clearing line set from another system:
Choose > Navigation Tools > Clearing Lines > Copy Clearing Lines to Disk.....
To copy a clearing line set to another system:
Choose > Navigation Tools > Clearing Lines > Copy Clearing Lines from Disk.....
178
8 PASSAGE PLANNING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
9
9
Sensor integration
This chapter describes how ECPINS integrates data from a variety of
shipboard sensors and how you can display and supplement this information.
Integrated sensors include:
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
Positioning system(s) (usually GPS or DGPS)
Anemometer
Compass(es) (gyro and magnetic)
Speed log
Depth sounder
Automatic Identification System (AIS)
Automatic Radar Plotting Aid (ARPA)
Radar
NAVTEX
Note: The sensors supported depend on the ECPINS system installed and its configuration.
9.A
Sensor sources
Sensors are connected to an ECPINS system, configured, and tested by a
qualified technician (for information on connecting sensors, refer to the
ECPINS Technician’s Guide). Once set up, a sensor is available for use in ECPINS
as a “sensor source”.
9.A.1
Selecting a sensor source
While it is the technician’s task to select sensor sources, you may find it
necessary to do so.
9 SENSOR INTEGRATION
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
179
To select a sensor source:
1
Choose > Setup > Sensor Setup > Select Sensor Source…. A dialog lists the
available types of devices [figure 9-1].
2
In the list, select a sensor device and click Select. A Select [Sensor] Source
dialog appears, which lists the available devices of the type selected
[figure 9-2].
•
Or, double-click the source.
Figure 9-1 Select a Device Type dialog
1
1
Sensor sources available (varies by system)
Figure 9-2 Select [Sensor] Source dialog — Depth
1
2
1
2
9.A.1.A
Selected depth sensor (enclosed in angle
brackets)
One of the possible sources may be
“MANUAL” [9.A.1.A].
•
For some devices, such as ARPA, you can
select more than one source.
Manual sensor source
For some sensor sources, you have the option of having ECPINS use a
“manual” reading, that is, a value you enter and maintain. This is particularly
useful in circumstances where a particular type of sensor is operating but not
connected to the ECPINS system.
180
9 SENSOR INTEGRATION
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
To enter a manual sensor reading:
1
Choose > Setup > Sensor Setup > Select Sensor Source…. A dialog lists the
available types of devices [figure 9-1].
2
Select a sensor device and click Select. A Select [Sensor] Source dialog appears.
3
In the list, double-click “MANUAL”. A Manual [Sensor] dialog appears
[figure 9-3].
4
Type values and click OK. In the Select [Sensor] Source dialog, the “MANUAL”
source is selected.
When you enter a wind sensor reading [4.C.2], ECPINS disables the
anemometer offset.
Click Exit.
•
5
Figure 9-3 Manual [Sensor] dialogs — Speed and Heading
The dialog for each sensor type is unique.
• Error: Enables you to have ECPINS factor
in potential error in its positioning
calculations.
9.A.2
•
ToV: Time of validity. The time from which
this heading applies. If you enter a past
time, ECPINS incorporates the time
elapsed into any calculation of position
that uses the heading.
Position source
ECPINS uses a position source to display the position of the own ship. If the
own ship has more than one position source, you can designate one as the
“primary” [9.A.2.A]. Or, you can have ECPINS automatically choose the best
position source from those you have enabled [9.A.2.D].
9.A.2.A
Primary position source
ECPINS displays positioning information and the own ship’s position based on
the primary position source. This sensor is the “active” sensor. Even if other
position sources are available, ECPINS displays the information from the
active position source in the Sensor text box on various screen layouts [3.B].
The position source provides the following information for display: Lat., Lon.,
SOG, and COG. In the Sensor field, ECPINS identifies the position source type,
for example, “GPS”, or “3D DGPS” [figure 3-16].
You can select as a position source the available shipboard position sensors,
including a GPS, a second GPS, a LORAN-C device, and dead reckoning
(automatic).
When the primary position source is no longer available, ECPINS issues an
alarm [5.F.1], which appears in the Sensor text box. If the position source is set
to Automatic [9.A.2.C], ECPINS shifts to the next best source. If the position
9 SENSOR INTEGRATION
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
181
source is not set to Automatic, you can switch to another position source, if
available.
Note: If the primary position source you select is not providing the most accurate position of
those enabled, ECPINS displays the following text in the bottom right corner of the chart
display: “Better Positioning Source Available”. To correct this deficiency, set the primary
position source to Automatic or select a better primary position source.
To select the primary position source:
1
Choose > Setup > Sensor Setup > Select Primary Position Source…. ECPINS displays
the Select Primary Position Source dialog [figure 9-4].
2
In the list, select a position source and click Select. The selected source is
enclosed in angle brackets.
•
•
Or double-click the source.
On most screen layouts, the active position source is named in the Sensor
field [figure 3-16].
Figure 9-4 Select Primary Position Source dialog
1
1
9.A.2.B
Selected position source (enclosed in
angled brackets)
Secondary position source
For the purposes of displaying a secondary vessel track [4.D], you can
designate one position source as “secondary”. If you choose to display the
secondary vessel track, it appears as a grey line.
To select the secondary position source:
1
Choose > Setup > Sensor Setup > Select Secondary Position Source…. A dialog with
the available position source(s) appears.
At least two position sources must be configured by the technician for Select
Secondary Position Source… to appear in the menu.
In the list, select a position source and click Select.
•
2
•
9.A.2.C
If selected in the Select Primary Position Source dialog, the secondary
position sensor can become the active position sensor.
Automatic position source
“Automatic” is the default primary position source. In this mode, ECPINS
automatically chooses the best position source from those enabled (these
appear in the Select Primary Position Source dialog).
182
9 SENSOR INTEGRATION
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
If a position source is no longer viable, for example, if the GPS signal is lost,
ECPINS will shift to the next best source. If all electronic sources are lost,
ECPINS shifts to Fix + DR(AUTO) [6.D.4]. When a position source is no longer
viable, ECPINS issues an alarm [5.F.1], which appears in the Sensor text box.
After 30 seconds, ECPINS shifts to the next best source.
Note: When “Automatic” is the Primary Position Source, any manually selected secondary
source is ignored.
Note: When “Automatic” is the Primary Position Source and ECPINS changes the position
source according to circumstances, ECPINS issues a specialized alarm [5.F.7].
9.A.2.D
Enabled position sources
For a position source to be available for automatic use by ECPINS, you must
enable it.
To enable a position source for automatic selection as the primary position
source:
1
Choose > Setup > Sensor Setup > Enable Position Sources…. The Enable Position
Source for Auto-selection dialog appears [figure 9-5].
2
In the list, select a position source and click Enable. The sources enabled for
auto-selection are enclosed in angle brackets.
Figure 9-5 Enable Position Source for Auto-selection dialog
1
1
9.A.2.E
Sources enabled for auto-selection
(enclosed in angle brackets)
GPS
A key position source on most ships is a GPS receiver. You can view
information about the quality of the GPS position on the GPS Data screen
layout [3.B.6], including the number of satellites acquired. If the GPS is the
primary position source, the Sensor field on most screen layouts displays one
of the following:
a
GPS: The GPS receiver has acquired less than 4 satellites. The own ship’s position can be
considered accurate to within 100 meters. This condition triggers an alarm [5.F.2].
b
3D GPS: Four or more satellites acquired, which means that elevation is included in
positioning calculations. Considered accurate to within 65 meters.
c
DGPS: ECPINS is calculating the position based on GPS with less than 4 satellites acquired
and DGPS with at least one beacon [9.A.2.F] acquired. Considered accurate to within 15
meters.
9 SENSOR INTEGRATION
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
183
d
9.A.2.F
3D DGPS: GPS with four or more satellites and DGPS. Considered accurate to within 5
meters.
DGPS beacon
Depending on the location, the own ship can receive transmissions from one
or more DGPS radio beacons. Normally the Differential GPS receiver will
automatically acquire the optimum beacon. Typically, the DGPS takes 5 to 10
seconds to process a beacon’s transmission. ECPINS displays the Rate of delay
on the GPS Data screen layout [3.B.6].
To select a DGPS beacon:
1
Choose > Setup > Sensor Setup > DGPS Beacon > Select DGPS Beacon…. The Select
Active Beacon dialog appears [figure 9-6].
2
In the list, select a beacon and click Select. The DGPS receiver now uses the
selected beacon.
•
•
Select “Automatic” to return to automatic DGPS-beacon selection mode.
Select “No Beacon” to disable DGPS.
Figure 9-6 Select Active Beacon dialog
1
2
1
Beacon name
2
Beacon frequency
Note: A good practice is to select the DGPS beacon closest to the own ship position. This
beacon is most likely to give a strong signal and the most accurate corrections. However, due to
signal interference encountered during a voyage, it may be necessary to select a different
beacon.
To select the DGPS beacon by name or frequency:
184
1
Choose > Setup > Sensor Setup > DGPS Beacon > Enter Beacon Name or Frequency….
A dialog appears requesting the beacon name.
2
In the box, type part or whole of the beacon's name or its frequency.
3
Press Enter. ECPINS lists those stations sharing the letters or numbers.
4
In the list, select a station. The DGPS receiver now uses the selected
beacon.
9 SENSOR INTEGRATION
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
If the GPS receiver has manual mode, you can add, edit or delete a DGPS
beacon.
To add a DGPS beacon:
1
In ECPINS Setup, choose > Setup > Sensor Setup > DGPS Beacon > Add DGPS
Beacon.... A dialog appears with a list of parameters that must be filled for
the beacon [figure 9-7].
2
Enter the required values.
3
Click OK. ECPINS adds the beacon to the list.
Figure 9-7 Add DGPS Beacon dialog
•
•
Beacon name: You can enter any name.
Lat: The latitude of the beacon’s location.
•
Lon: The longitude of the beacon’s
location
To edit a DGPS beacon:
1
In ECPINS Setup, choose >Setup > Sensor Setup > DGPS Beacon > Edit DGPS
Beacon.... The Select DGPS Beacon to Edit dialog appears containing a list of
beacons.
2
Select the beacon name and click Select. The Edit DGPS beacon dialog appears
with a list of parameters for the beacon.
3
Change the values and click OK.
To delete a DGPS beacon:
9.A.2.G
1
In ECPINS Setup, choose >Setup >Sensor Setup > DGPS Beacon > Delete DGPS
Beacon.... The Select DGPS Beacon to Delete dialog appears, with the beacon
list.
2
Select the beacon name and click Select.
Antenna offsets
Antenna offsets can be adjusted for the DGPS or LORAN-C. Choose > Setup >
Vessel Setup > Vessel Shape Editor... [see Ap.E].
9.A.3
Heading source
If the own ship has more than one heading source connected to ECPINS, you
can select one or have ECPINS automatically choose the best available
[9.A.2.C]. ECPINS supports gyro and compass devices. Or, you can enter a
“manual” heading.
9 SENSOR INTEGRATION
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
185
ECPINS indicates the heading source in use in the “Hdg” field on most screen
layouts [figure 9-8].
Figure 9-8 Heading source indicated
1
1
Heading source (“HDG1”) — ”M”
indicates a manual heading.
To select the heading source:
1
Choose > Setup > Sensor Setup > Select Sensor Source…. The Select Heading Source
dialog appears, listing the available types of sensors [figure 9-9].
2
In the list, select a heading sensor and click Select. The selected source is
enclosed in angle brackets. With a heading source selected, the heading
can be set.
•
•
Or, double-click the source.
By selecting “Manual”, you can set the own ship’s heading [figure 9-3].
Figure 9-9 Select Heading Source dialog
1
1
Selected heading source (enclosed in
angle brackets).
To calibrate the own ship heading with the compass heading:
1
Choose > Setup > Sensor Setup > Set Gyro Heading…. The Set Gyro Heading dialog
appears. It displays the current gyro heading value for the own ship
symbol.
2
In the Heading box, type the gyro heading of the own ship as read from
the compass.
To correct a known gyrocompass error:
9.A.3.A
1
Choose > Setup > Sensor Setup > Set Gyro Error…. The Set Gyro Error dialog
appears.
2
In the Error box, type a compensating value for the error.
Magnetic compass as heading source
ECPINS can use a magnetic compass as a heading source.
A gyro compass provides a true heading. When a NMEA Magnetic Compass
(HDG) is the heading source, ECPINS converts magnetic headings to true as
follows:
186
9 SENSOR INTEGRATION
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
a
If the compass is of a type that transmits magnetic variation and/or
deviation, ECPINS processes the sensor’s input to derive a true heading.
b If the compass is of a type that does not transmit magnetic variation, then
ECPINS will apply magnetic variation according to the NGDC World
Magnetic Model 2010-2014.
c If the compass is of a type that does not transmit its own magnetic
deviation, you can apply a specified magnetic deviation.
Caution: If the own ship’s magnetic compass is calibrated, you should update the Magnetic
Deviation settings.
To set magnetic deviation:
1
With a magnetic compass as an enabled heading source, choose > Setup >
Sensor Setup > Set Magnetic Deviation…. The Set Magnetic Deviation dialog appears
[figure 9-10].
This menu choice appears only if the magnetic compass connected to
ECPINS is a NMEA Magnetic Compass (HDG).
Ensure the deviations displayed correspond with those on the compass’s
card.
•
2
Figure 9-10 Set Magnetic Deviation dialog
9.A.3.B
Automatic heading source
If “Automatic” is selected for the heading source, ECPINS automatically
selects the best available heading source. However, the heading sources must
first be enabled for automatic use.
To enable the heading sources for automatic selection:
1
Choose > Setup > Sensor Setup > Enable Heading Sources…. The Enable Heading
Source for Auto-selection dialog appears [figure 9-11].
2
In the list, select a heading source and click Enable. Enabled heading
sources are enclosed in angle brackets.
•
Or, double-click the source.
9 SENSOR INTEGRATION
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
187
Figure 9-11 Enable Heading Source for Auto-selection dialog
1
1
9.A.4
Enabled heading source(s) (enclosed in
angle brackets)
AIS source
If the own ship has more than one AIS device, you can select the AIS source.
ECPINS displays the AIS contacts [9.C.1] received by the AIS source on the
chart display. Also, ECPINS provides a screen layout dedicated to AIS
information [3.B.9]. Finally, you can view and adjust the AIS settings,
including own ship static and voyage data [9.D].
Note: In general, if the AIS device is one for which ECPINS is a certified equivalent MKD
(Minimum Keyboard Display), more settings are available. An MKD provides at least three lines
of text consisting of bearing, range and name of a contact. ECPINS 5000 6.0 is a certified
equivalent MKD for the following devices: Saab R4 and Saab R4S.
To select the AIS source:
1
Choose > Setup > Sensor Setup > Select Sensor Source…. A dialog displays a list
of available device types.
2
Select AIS and click Select. The Select AIS Source dialog appears listing
available AIS devices.
3
Select an AIS device and click Select.
•
Or, double click the AIS device.
If more than one AIS device is connected to ECPINS, you can display contacts
received by those devices in addition to the contacts from the AIS source.
Where a contact is received on more than one device, ECPINS displays only
the contact from the AIS source.
To display contacts from an additional AIS device:
1
Choose > Setup > Sensor Setup > AIS Setup > Select AIS Source for Display.... A list of
connected AIS devices appears.
All AIS sources are listed.
Double-click the AIS device or highlight a device and click Select.
•
2
A device is selected when it is enclosed with angle brackets.
You can select as many devices as are connected.
Click Exit.
•
•
3
188
9 SENSOR INTEGRATION
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
9.A.5
Radar source
When two or more radars are available, ECPINS provides a menu option to
select the active radar for displaying the radar image overlay [9.E.1].
Depending on your configuration, one of the following menus is provided.
ECPINS systems that use a radar switch will see the Active Radar menu option.
To set the active radar:
Choose > Setup > Radar > Active Radar A [or] B.
• Angle brackets enclose the selected radar, for example, Active Radar <A>.
• ECPINS saves the radar settings for each of the two radars. Thus, when the
operator switches radars, ECPINS also switches RIO settings.
• If the own ship has one radar, or a radar switch is not installed, Active Radar
A B, does not appear in the menu.
ECPINS systems that use a network connection to the radars will see the Select
Radar Source... menu option.
To set the active radar source:
1
2
9.B
Choose > Setup > Radar > Select Radar Source.... The Select Radar Source dialog
appears.
Select the Radar source and click OK.
• Angle brackets enclose the selected radar.
Contacts
On the display, ECPINS displays the position of ARPA contacts [9.B.2] sensed
by one or more ARPA devices, AIS contacts [9.C.1],. The colour and shape of
the contact’s symbol indicate its nature. You can change the name [figure 913].
To enable you to monitor potential collision threats, ECPINS displays each
contact’s closest point of approach (CPA) to the own ship and the course of
interception, that is, the course for a potential collision [figure 9-16]. You can
also calculate contact intercepts [9.B.3].
9 SENSOR INTEGRATION
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
189
Figure 9-12 ARPA contact display, with AIS contact and radar image overlay
1
2
3
1
2
Radar image overlay [9.E]
AIS contact [9.C.1]
3
ARPA contact [9.B.2]
Figure 9-13 Contact display
2
5
3
1
4
6
1 Sea Surface contact
Displayed features may include:
2 Velocity vector: Indicates contact’s speed
and direction [4.B].
3 Time marks
4 Name: Unique; default name is a number.
9.B.1
Changes to the contact symbol include:
5 Contact in the process of being acquired
6 Lost contact: A contact the ARPA source
has indicated to be “lost”.
• Should the contact enter a guard zone
[4.I], the symbol is coloured red and a “G”
is appended to its name.
Contact symbol display mode
When several contacts are shown on your chart display, you can reduce the
clutter by simplifying the contact symbols. In the simplified mode the contact
symbols are changed as follows:
a
b
c
Contact symbols are displayed at half the default size.
Track information is not displayed.
Velocity vectors and vessel names are not displayed.
The other contact attributes such as the affiliation [9.B] remain displayed
[figure 9-14].
190
9 SENSOR INTEGRATION
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
To change the contact symbols display mode:
Choose > Contacts > Contact Symbols DEFAULT <SIMPLE>. Click to toggle
between the default and simple mode.
• The selected mode appears in brackets beside the menu item.
• ECPINS keeps this Contact Symbol setting the next time the system is
started.
Figure 9-14 Contact symbols — Default and Simple
2
1
3
Default mode
1
2
Simple mode
Operator contact symbol in default mode.
Operator contact symbol in simple mode.
3
Operator contact with military symbology
and a neutral contact affiliation.
When displaying contacts in simple mode, a selected contact is shown in the
default symbol size for the duration that the contact is selected.
9.B.2
ARPA contacts
ECPINS displays ARPA (Automatic Radar Plotting Aid) contacts on the chart
display [figure 9-15]. Position information for ARPA contacts is derived from
the ARPA device sources connected, of which there can be more than one,
and more than one can be active.
Figure 9-15 ARPA contact display
1
2
3
1
2
•
ARPA contact
Contact name: The name is a contact
number; for example, “(02)”. The ARPA
sensor source name is prepended.
If a text name is available, ECPINS
prepends it; for example, “Wanderer
(02)”.
9 SENSOR INTEGRATION
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
•
3
If a contact is lost, an “L” is appended; for
example, “Wanderer (02L)”.
Velocity vector: Indicates contact’s speed
and direction [4.B].
191
If ECPINS does not receive a position update for a contact for 20 seconds,
ECPINS removes the contact from the display.
To remove ARPA contacts from the display:
Press Ctrl+A (toggles the display of ARPA contacts on and off).
•
•
This affects all chart displays, if more than one is visible in the screen layout.
On the ARPA screen layout [3.B.8], contact information appears in the ARPA
Targets area, even though the contacts are not displayed.
or
1
From the chart display menu, choose Features.... The Feature Settings dialog
appears.
2
In the Category list, choose Overlays.
3
In the Displayed Features list, select ARPA.
4
Click Remove.
•
9.B.2.A
Or, double-click the selected feature to move it between lists.
Contact information
ECPINS can display CPA and other details about an ARPA or operator contact.
To display information about an ARPA or operator contact:
1
Choose > Contacts > Contact Info.... A dialog requests the selection of a
contact.
2
Or, press F4.
On the chart display, click a contact. The Contact Information dialog appears
[figure 9-16].
3
Click Cancel to close the dialog.
•
Figure 9-16 Contact (ARPA) information dialog
1
1
ARPA source name followed by the
contact identification. May also indicate
the age of the contact, that is, the time
since information on this contact was last
received.
ECPINS updates the information in the dialog
every five seconds.
192
9 SENSOR INTEGRATION
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
ECPINS removes the contact 20 seconds after
the last message is received.
• Contact column: Information concerning
the contact
• Bearing: True bearing to the contact at its
current position.
• CPA column: Information related to the
closest point of approach.
•
Range at CPA, Bearing: The range and
bearing (True) to the contact calculated
from the own ship's position at CPA.
•
•
Lat. at CPA, Lon. at CPA: The latitude and
longitude apply to the own ship at CPA.
Rel Brg. at CPA: Relative bearing to the
contact at closest point of approach.
You can also have ECPINS display detailed information on all ARPA contacts
at once [figure 9-17]. This information is presented in the ARPA Targets list on
the ARPA screen layout [3.B.8]. If ECPINS has more than one ARPA source, you
can switch this display between sources: choose > Setup > Sensor Setup >
Select ARPA Screen Index.
Figure 9-17 ARPA screen layout Targets display
1
2
3
1
9.B.2.B
Sensor source for these ARPA targets:
Where more than one ARPA device is
connected as a sensor, you can choose the
source from which the ARPA Targets
displayed are derived: choose > Setup >
Sensor Setup > Select ARPA Screen Index.
2
3
This contact is a potential collision threat.
ECPINS displays the CPA and TCPA.
This contact is not a potential collision
threat. The CPA has “Passed”.
ARPA Target Tracking
Note: This section describes an optional ECPINS feature that is available only on some
systems.
ECPINS systems that use an RTI, RIBNet, RIBNet Server, or Ethernet compatible
Raymarine radar can acquire ARPA contacts from the radar image overlay on
the ECPINS chart display.
To acquire ARPA contacts from the radar image overlay:
1
Choose > Contacts > Target Tracking > Acquire ARPA Contact....
2
On the display, click a potential target location where the radar return is
displayed. If the target is acquired,ECPINS places the contact symbol and
ARPA Name on the chart over the selected radar return [figure 9-18].
3
Select additional contacts as required.
Warning messages are displayed if you select an ARPA contact that is
already acquired or you click a chart location that is not close enough to the
radar return of a contact.
Right-click to close the Acquire ARPA Contact dialog.
•
4
9 SENSOR INTEGRATION
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
193
Figure 9-18 Acquired ARPA Contacts
1
2
3
1
2
An acquired ARPA contact.
An ARPA contact that is being acquired.
The dashed circle symbology is only visible
when the contact is detected and in the
process of being acquired.
3
A lost ARPA contact.
Lost contacts remain on the chart display
until they are manually cancelled.
To cancel acquired ARPA contacts:
1
Choose > Contacts > Target Tracking > Cancel ARPA Contact....
2
On the display, select an acquired contact to cancel.
3
If required, cancel additional contacts.
4
Right-click to close the Cancel ARPA Contact dialog.
To cancel all acquired ARPA contacts:
1
2
Choose > Contacts > Target Tracking > Cancel All ARPA Contacts....The Cancel All
ARPA Contacts dialog appears.
Click Yes to cancel all contacts.
Note: If your system displays ARPA contacts from multiple sensor sources, you will only be
able to cancel the ARPA contacts that were acquired using ECPINS Target Tracking. The sensor
source is indicated in the ARPA name, for example, the 3 in ARPA3.
Target Tracking can automatically acquire contacts that enter an acquisition
zone relative to the own ship’s position. As contacts move into the acquisition
zone they are automatically acquired by ECPINS and displayed as ARPA
contacts. As these contacts leave the zone they retain their ARPA contact
status until they are manually cancelled.
To automatically acquire ARPA contacts:
194
1
Choose > Contacts > Target Tracking > Auto ARPA Acquisition. The Set Auto
Acquisition Zone dialog appears [figure 9-19].
2
Set the Auto Acquisition field to ON.
3
Set the range and bearing fields, and then click OK.
9 SENSOR INTEGRATION
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Figure 9-19 Auto Acquisition Zone for ARPA contacts
2
1
3
1
2
Acquisition zone boundary.
An ARPA contact that is being acquired.
The dashed circle symbology is temporarily
3
displayed as the contact is being
processed.
Own ship
Note: Up to 100 contacts can be acquired. When any of acquired ARPA contacts are cancelled,
their assigned ARPA ID becomes available and can be reassigned to a contact.
The Target Tracking settings can be configured by your ECPINS system
technician using the ECPINS Setup mode.
Note: The Target Tracking settings that are defined in the ARPA Setup dialog, only apply to
systems using RIBNet Server or an Ethernet compatible Raymarine radar.
To configure the Target Tracking settings:
1
2
In ECPINS Setup, choose > Contacts > Target Tracking > ARPA Setup.... The ARPA
Setup dialog appears [figure 9-20].
Define the settings as required, and then click OK.
• All of the setting will take effect immediately, except the Samples Per Radial
setting which requires ECPINS to be restarted.
9 SENSOR INTEGRATION
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
195
Figure 9-20 ARPA Setup dialog
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
196
Tracking Threshold: Minimum radar signal
amplitude value for acquiring contacts.
(Values 0-255). For example, if the value is
200 all radar signals below 200 are
excluded from acquiring a contact.
Filter Tolerance: Filters out noise. The
minimum size of a return along a radial
that will be displayed. Auto acquire
ignores radar return segments in a radial
that are less than or equal to this filter
tolerance.
To track at very small ranges, this
parameter should be set to 0.
Miss Proximity (samples): Distance that a
contact can vary from the estimated
position before being identified as a
missing contact. The sample distance =
radar range divided by samples per radial.
Minimum Area (m2): Minimum area for a
radar return to be considered as a contact.
Minimum Area Auto (m2): Minimum area
for a radar return to be considered as an
auto acquired contact.
Maximum Area (m2): Maximum area for a
radar return to be considered as a contact.
Velocity Smoothing: Uses historical
velocity data to display smoother ARPA
velocity changes, Smoothing values range
from 0.0 (no smoothing) to 0.99 very
smooth. A 0.91 value means the
calculated velocity is derived from 91%
historical velocity and 9% current velocity.
9 SENSOR INTEGRATION
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Samples Per Radial: The number of
samples processed during one ARPA radial
sweep. A higher number will require more
memory and processing time. (Values
512-4096)
Maximum Speed: Expected maximum
speed of any contact.
Target Retention Range: For systems using
RibNet Server, this value is the range from
own ship where auto acquired targets are
always retained regardless of the radar
range and viewing setting that you are
using.
When other radars are used, this value
should be set to 0.500 NM.
Closest Auto Acquire Distance: The closest
(minimum) distance between an existing
contact and a radar return that is a
potential new contact. If the contacts are
too close together, the potential contact
will be ignored.
Minimum Auto Acquire Depth: Auto
acquire will ignore radar returns found in
an area where the maximum contour
depth is less or equal to the defined value.
Suppress Land Auto Acquire: Turn ON to
prevent auto acquiring contacts on land.
Remove Auto Targets on Land: Turn ON to
delete auto acquired contacts that stray on
to land.
9.B.3
Intercepting a contact
You can use ECPINS to calculate the time at which the own ship’s course will
intercept that of a contact.
To calculate the interception time of a contact’s course:
1
Choose > Contacts > Contact Intercept…. A dialog appears.
2
Click the contact on the display. The Contact Intercept dialog appears
[figure 9-21].
3
If necessary, adjust the Speed, Course, or Own Ship Speed.
4
Click OK. The Contact Intercept results boxes displays intercept information
[figure 9-22].
•
Figure 9-21 Contact Intercept dialog
•
•
•
Name: Contact’s name
Speed: Contact’s speed
Course: Contact’s course
•
•
Own Ship Speed: The ship’s current speed
appears by default.
OK: Generates the Contact Intercept
results box.
Figure 9-22 Contact Intercept results box
•
9.C
This dialog appears if the own ship’s
course intercepts the contact’s course.
AIS
ECPINS displays AIS (Automatic Identification System) and UAIS (Universal
AIS) contacts [9.C.1]. Information for these contacts is derived from the own
ship's AIS transponder [9.A.4], which processes information transmitted by a
contact ship’s AIS transponder at specified intervals. An AIS transponder
transmits via VHF and is subject to that frequency’s range limits, typically
about 30 nautical miles.
9 SENSOR INTEGRATION
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
197
The amount of information available for an AIS contact depends on the
contact ship’s transponder. In general, the information received includes the
contact ship’s ID, its course and speed, and its position.
An AIS transponder can broadcast a large range of information about the
contact ship, including the ship specifications, dynamic information on the
ship’s movement, and information concerning the ship’s current voyage.
Caution: Not all ships are equipped with an AIS transponder; a ship may have its AIS
transponder turned off; a ship’s transponder may broadcast erroneous position or other
information.
The AIS capabilities available to you in ECPINS depends on the AIS device in
use and how it is set up. Most enable you to receive messages, reply to these,
and send your own messages to all ships or a specific one.
9.C.1
AIS contacts
On the display, ECPINS marks the position of an AIS contact with a symbol
[figure 9-23]. If the vessel’s transponder provides vessel shape information, at
large display scale, ECPINS displays the vessel’s shape rather than the symbol.
Caution: The accuracy of an AIS contact’s position relies on the quality of the transmitting AIS
device’s position source. Thus, in circumstances that demand accuracy, it may be useful to
correlate an AIS contact’s position with visual bearings or a corresponding ARPA contact [9.B.2]
or an object on radar image overlay [9.E].
Figure 9-23 AIS contacts
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
Velocity vector: Reflect’s the contact’s
projected course over ground. Emanates
from the ship’s reference point. ECPINS
considers this point to be the ship’s
position. If the heading is not available,
ECPINS uses COG to display the vector.
Contact label: The vessel’s MMSI number
and, if provided by the transponder, its
name. The label also identifies the AIS
source; for example “AIS2” [9.A.4].
3
4
5
Ship symbol: A triangle represents the
ship.
Vessel shape: At large display scale, if the
vessel’s transponder provides the vessel
shape, ECPINS displays it.
Lost contact: Indicates that ECPINS has
not received position information for this
contact for at least half the ”time-out
interval”. You can adjust the time-out
interval [see 9.C.1.A].
To display AIS contacts:
Press Ctrl+I. This toggles the display of AIS contacts on and off.
198
9 SENSOR INTEGRATION
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
or
1
From the chart display menu, choose Features. The Feature Settings dialog
appears.
2
In the Category list, choose Overlays.
3
In the Available Features list, select AIS.
4
Click Add.
To turn the display off, from the Displayed Features list, select AIS. Click
Remove.
•
ECPINS provides a screen layout dedicated to the display of AIS contact
information and own ship AIS information: choose > Screen Layout > AIS [3.B.9].
You can also display a heading for each contact, its direction of turn, and
predict a contact’s path based on its rate of turn [figure 9-24].
Figure 9-24 AIS contact display options
1
2
3
1
2
Direction of turn indicator (to starboard)
Heading line: Indicates the ship’s heading.
3
Velocity vector [4.B] with path predictor
enabled: Projects the contact’s future
position.
To adjust AIS contact display:
Choose > Setup > Sensor Setup > AIS Setup > AIS Display Options....
9.C.1.A
Lost AIS contacts
After a “time-out” interval, ECPINS considers a contact “lost”. If ECPINS does
not receive data for half this time-out interval, or the data is faulty, ECPINS
indicates the contact is lost and marks its last known position [figure 9-23]. If
these conditions persist for the full time-out interval, ECPINS “clears” the
contact from display.
The length of the time-out interval depends on the transmitting vessel’s
speed and class (refer to Table 9-1 and Table 9-2). In general, the greater the
speed and the larger the vessel, the shorter the interval.
Table 9-1
Class A (large vessel) contact timeouts
Minimum speed
(knots)
Contact indicated lost after
(seconds)
Contact cleared from display after
(seconds)
23.0
30
60
14.0
36
72
0.0
60
120
Moored/At anchor
1080
2160
9 SENSOR INTEGRATION
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
199
Table 9-2
9.C.1.B
Class B (miscellaneous small craft) contact timeouts (continued)
Minimum speed
(knots)
Contact indicated lost after
(seconds)
Contact cleared from display after
(seconds)
23.0
180
360
14.0
180
360
2.0
180
360
0.0
1080
2160
AIS contact information
You can have ECPINS display detailed information on an AIS contact.
To display information on an AIS contact:
1
Choose > Contacts > Contact Info…. A dialog requests the selection of a
contact.
Or press F4.
To facilitate locating contacts, you can use > Navigation Tools > Locate...
[10.G] and for Show, choose “AIS”.
On the chart display, click a contact. Contact information appears in a
dialog [figure 9-25].
•
•
2
•
•
If ECPINS has not received a message 5 broadcast from the selected contact,
ECPINS requests that information from the contact via an “AIR”
interrogation request.
Vessel information may be available in the dialog.
Figure 9-25 AIS contact information
1
1
200
Title bar: Contains the vessel’s MMSI
number. If provided, may also contain the
vessel’s name and call sign. “Age”
indicates amount of time since
9 SENSOR INTEGRATION
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
•
•
information was last received from this
contact.
Last seen: Time this information received.
Draft: Maximum possible displayed
reading is 25.5m.
•
9.C.2
Voyage: Information about the vessel’s
current voyage. In general, the AIS
receives updates every 6 minutes.
•
Static: Information about the vessel. In
general, the AIS receives updates every 6
minutes.
AIS messages
Most AIS transponders can receive two kinds of messages: Safety Related and
Long Range. You can reply to both. You can also send a message to a
particular ship or broadcast it.
9.C.2.A
Safety Related Messages (SRM)
When the AIS transponder receives a Safety Related Messages (SRM), ECPINS
displays it [figure 9-26]. You can reply directly to the ship that sent the
message.
Figure 9-26 AIS message received
•
Turn off popup messages: When selected,
new messages are displayed in the
message line at the upper-right corner of
the screen display.
•
Reply: Enables you to compose and send a
reply to the ship that sent this message.
ECPINS saves all messages received until you delete them. You can review the
messages received and reply to any.
To view received safety messages:
1
Choose > Contacts > AIS Messaging > Display Received Safety Messages…. A list
appears [figure 9-27].
2
Select a message and click Select to view it.
•
•
To delete a safety message: choose > Contacts > AIS Messaging > Delete
Received Safety Messages….
To reply to the message, click Reply.
9 SENSOR INTEGRATION
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
201
Figure 9-27 Display Received Safety Related Messages
1
2
1
9.C.2.B
List of messages: Double-click a message
to view it.
2
Message
Long-Range Messages (LRM)
Note: This feature is available only if the connected AIS device is a Saab R4 or Saab R4s, for
which ECPINS is a certified equivalent MKD.
Some AIS devices are capable of receiving interrogations that arrive over long
distances via satellite systems such as Immarsat C. This kind of “long-range
message” requests information about your ship.
You can set ECPINS to reply automatically to every long-range message
received. Your reply provides the information requested unless you filter
specified pieces out. Or you can choose to reply to each long-range message
when it arrives and select the information to include at that time.
To set your long-range message reply policy:
1
Choose > Setup > Sensor Setup > AIS Setup > Set AIS Long Range Response Filter....
The Set Long Range Response Filter dialog appears [figure 9-28].
2
For LRF mode, choose one of “Automatic” or “Manual”.
3
Check the information you want to include in your replies.
•
202
ECPINS displays a summary of your filter settings on the AIS screen layout
[figure 3.B.9].
9 SENSOR INTEGRATION
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Figure 9-28 Set AIS Long Range Response Filter
1
•
LRF mode: Choose one of:
“Automatic”: ECPINS replies to the
message. It includes the pieces of
information checked where they are
requested by the message. When ECPINS
replies automatically to a long-range
message, it displays a message in the
message line and records it in a list.
1
“Manual“: ECPINS displays each message
when it arrives. You can choose to reply
and select the information to include in
that reply.
Checked piece of information: ECPINS
provides a checked piece of information
only if the message requests that piece.
To view long-range messages and responses:
Choose > Contacts > AIS Messaging > Display AIS Long Range Requests. The Long
Range Requests dialog appears [figure 9-29].
•
To delete a message, select it and click Delete.
Figure 9-29 Long Range Requests list
1
3
4
2
1
2
3
Message received: Information includes
date and sender’s MMSI.
Pieces of information requested.
No reply made to this message.
4
•
Reply made to this message: Indicates the
pieces of information included in the reply.
Delete: Deletes any record of the selected
message and response.
When you set the long-range message reply policy to “Manual”, ECPINS
displays each long-range message when it arrives.
9 SENSOR INTEGRATION
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
203
To reply to a long-range message “manually”:
1
In the Long-Range Interrogation Request dialog [figure 9-30], check the
information that you want to include in your reply.
2
Click Reply.
Figure 9-30 Long Range Interrogation Requests
1
2
3
1
2
3
9.C.2.C
Sender’s MMSI.
Information to include in your reply.
Information to exclude from your replay.
•
Each message lists only the pieces of
information requested by the message.
Sending a message
You can broadcast a message to all AIS-equipped ships within range or send it
to a specific ship. When sending a message ECPINS takes the security
operation mode [9.D.4.D] into consideration and displays the five most
recently used MMSI contacts at the top of the distribution list, to create a
shortlist [figure 9-31].
Figure 9-31 Shortlist example
1
2
1
Click to display the list of available
contacts.
2
Line separating the shortlist at the top
from the other contacts.
Depending on your currently assigned AIS security mode, the list of available
contacts is displayed as follows:
a
204
Normal: Only Neutral contacts (Green) are listed.
b
Silent: Does not allow messages to be sent.
c
Tactical: Only Friendly contacts (Blue) are listed.
d
Hybrid: Neutral and Friendly contacts are listed. All Friendly contacts are included in the
shortlist.
9 SENSOR INTEGRATION
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Your AIS messages can be selected from a list of predefined messages or can
be typed into the message field when sending.
To send an AIS message:
1
Choose > Contacts > AIS Messaging > Send AIS Message…. The Send AIS Message
dialog appears [figure 9-32].
2
In the To field, choose an AIS contact. The five most recently used MMSI’s
are listed at the top of the list.
Or type the recipient’s MMSI.
Or if operating in Tactical or Hybrid Mode [9.D.4.D], you can send to “All
Secure Contacts”.
Type the Message or choose a predefined message.
•
•
3
If a new message was entered, you can create a user-defined message by
select the Add to List option.
Click Send.
•
4
Figure 9-32 Send AIS Message dialog
•
•
To: Choose a ship from the list of AIS
contacts, type a ship’s MMSI, or choose
“All Secure Contacts”.
Message: Choose a message from the list
or type a new one.
•
•
Add to List: Adds a new user-defined
message to the bottom of the message
list.
Send: The transponder sends the message
immediately.
To broadcast an AIS message:
1
2
3
Choose > Contacts > AIS Messaging > Broadcast AIS Message…. The Broadcast AIS
Message dialog appears [figure 9-33].
Type the Message. Optionally, select the Add to List check box to add the
message to the list of user-defined messages.
• Or choose a predefined message from the list.
Click Send.
Figure 9-33 Broadcast AIS Message dialog
9 SENSOR INTEGRATION
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
205
ECPINS saves all messages sent until you delete them. You can review the sent
messages.
To view sent messages:
Choose > Contacts > AIS Messaging > Display Sent Safety Messages…. The Messages
list appears.
•
•
9.D
Or double-click a message to view it.
To delete a sent safety message: choose > Contacts > AIS Messaging >
Delete Sent Safety Messages….
AIS settings
For operation appropriate to the purpose, it may be necessary to adjust the
settings of your connected AIS device.
Note: These instructions apply to both an AIS-equipped ship, boat, or
stationary operations centre.
Note: The settings available to you depend on the connected AIS device. This
manual identifies any settings specific to a device.
Note: ECPINS stores your AIS setup with the vessel shape in ECPINS, but on the
AIS Status pages it displays information that it reads from the AIS device.
Should someone change the setup at the AIS device (that is, not through
ECPINS) or replace the AIS device entirely, you can use ECPINS to reapply the
AIS setup saved in ECPINS to the AIS device. If no AIS setup information is
stored in the vessel shape, ECPINS displays information that it reads from the
AIS device.
Note: On a ship/boat/ops centre equipped with more than one ECPINS
workstation, a Transponder Switch may determine which station, or the AIS
device’s keyboard, controls the AIS device.
You can:
a
206
Set static ship/boat/ops centre information such as call sign and name:
choose > Setup > Sensor Setup > AIS Setup > Set AIS Ship Static Data....
• Call Sign and Ship Name are derived from the vessel shape in use.
• Int. antenna: The AIS’s antenna location is displayed in terms of distance
from the bow (A), stern (B), port beam (C), and starboard beam (D). If the
the External GPS’s position is inadequate, ECPINS uses this position to
generate an accurate ship/boat/ops centre position for broadcast.
• External GPS: The position source (typically, a GPS) the AIS uses to plot the
ship/boat/ops centre’s position. ECPINS uses the information to generate an
accurate ship/boat/ops centre position for broadcast. The primary position
source is the default choice; you can also choose the secondary position
source. The location is displayed in terms of distance from the bow (A), stern
(B), port beam (C), and starboard beam (D).
• Since ECPINS can maintain several positions at once, this facilitates
rapid switching to the most desirable source for the circumstances.
• DTE: Data terminal equipment. Indicates if the AIS device is equipped with
its own keyboard and display; choose “Unknown” if it is not.
9 SENSOR INTEGRATION
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
b
c
d
Set static voyage information such as vessel type and draft, destination,
and ETA: choose > Setup > Sensor Setup > AIS Setup > Set AIS Voyage Static Data....
• Vessel Draft is derived from the vessel shape in use.
Add channel management regions: choose > Setup > Sensor Setup > AIS Setup
> Add AIS Channel Management Region....
Edit management regions: choose > Setup > Sensor Setup > AIS Setup > Edit/
Display AIS Channel Management....
• Double-click a channel to view its details or edit it.
With Administrator access, you can also:
e
f
Start the AIS device transmitting (if stopped): choose > Setup > Sensor Setup
> AIS Setup > AIS Administration > AIS Radio Transmission until ON is selected.
Set transponder identification: choose > Setup > Sensor Setup > AIS Setup > AIS
Administration > Set AIS Transponder Identification....
• MMSI: Displays the Mobile Marine Service Identifier stored
with the vessel shape in use. If necessary, type the ship/boat/
ops centre’s number. This information is required.
• IMO Number: Displays the IMO Number stored with the vessel
shape in use. If necessary, type the ship/boat’s number.
•
Password: The default password is “user”. Your system may use
an alternate password.
Set data port rates: choose > Setup > Sensor Setup > AIS Setup > AIS
Administration > Set AIS Data Port Rates....
• To ensure that communication with the AIS device is
maintained, you are unable to change the Pilot, ECDIS, and
MKD ports.
•
g
The AIS Transponder information (such as Call Sign, MMSI, IMO Number,
Cargo type, etc.) and the AIS settings stored in ECPINS must match. If ECPINS
detects any mismatch, the AIS Setting Synchronization dialog will appear
[figure 9-35]. This dialog gives you the option of synchronize the two systems
using either the Transponder's settings or the ECPINS settings.
Note: A mismatch of the AIS settings is typically detected upon ECPINS startup or when
changes are made by another ECPINS system that is connected to the same AIS transponder.
Figure 9-34 AIS Setting Synchronization dialog
•
Update Transponder: Updates the
transponder with the ECPINS settings.
9 SENSOR INTEGRATION
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
•
Update ECPINS: ECPINS will update its
memory with the transponder settings.
207
Note: The value for the ship/boat’s draft is always taken from the ECPINS setup.
9.D.1
AIS administration
Your access to some AIS settings may be restricted. Log in as an Administrator
to have full access to AIS administrative settings.
9.D.2
AIS device alarms
The connected AIS device may generate alarms pertaining to its own
operation; for example, a failed receiving channel. When this kind of alarm
occurs, ECPINS displays it in two locations (but it does not generate an
audible alarm):
a
b
In the ECPINS message line
On the External Alarm Status page on the AIS screen layout.
To acknowledge an AIS device alarm:
Choose > Setup > Sensor Setup > AIS Setup > Acknowledge AIS Alarms....
You can review all past alarms.
To review AIS device alarms:
Choose > Setup > Sensor Setup > AIS Setup > Display AIS Alarm/Status.... A list
appears [figure 9-35].
Figure 9-35 Display AIS Alarm/Status dialog
•
9.D.3
“Ack” indicates that the alarm was
acknowledged.
AIS transmission interruption
You have the option of stopping transmissions by the AIS device, which
typically is set to transmit.
To stop AIS transmissions:
Choose > Setup > Sensor Setup > AIS Setup > AIS Administration > AIS Radio
Transmission until OFF is selected.
208
9 SENSOR INTEGRATION
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
•
•
•
Or press the Pause key.
To restart stopped AIS transmission: choose > Setup > Sensor Setup > AIS
Setup > AIS Administration > AIS Radio Transmission until ON is selected or
press the Pause key.,
• To restart transmission, you must have Administrator access to AIS
settings.
If the operating mode is Tactical or Silent [9.D.4.D], you cannot turn on
transmission.
You can view the time periods during which the connected AIS device was
not transmitting. Reasons for these outages might include: no power to the
AIS, VHF set to receive only, transmission stopped by a user.
To view AIS non-transmitting periods:
Choose > Setup > Sensor Setup > AIS Setup > Display AIS Non-Functioning Time....
9.D.4
Secure AIS communications
Provided that each system is equipped with a secure-capable AIS device, you
can ensure that all communications via AIS between two or more systems (a
“secure group”) are encrypted. For example, a mothership or operations
centre can set up secure communications between itself and its two RHIBs. All
three units in this secure group (or all units in any secure group) must have
the following conditions present:
a
b
c
d
e
The ship/boat/ops centre is equipped with an ECPINS system connected to
a secure-capable AIS device (such as the Saab R4s).
Secure channel settings are identical [9.D.4.A].
The AIS transponder Secure ID is set [9.D.4.B].
The Secure Keys are identical [9.D.4.C].
The AIS transponder’s operation mode is Tactical or Hybrid [9.D.4.D].
Note: If your ship/boat/ops centre is secure AIS capable, you can view the secure AIS settings
in ECPINS on the AIS screen layout in the Status display.
Note: On the chart display, ECPINS displays AIS contacts received via secure communications
in blue (rather than green).
9.D.4.A
Secure channel settings
Secure communications take place on the AIS’s channel C. All transponders in
the secure group must have the same channel and bandwidth settings set for
the “secure channel” (channel C).
To set up the secure channel:
1
Choose > Setup > Sensor Setup > AIS Setup > Set AIS Radio Parameters. The Enter
Radio Parameters dialog appears [figure 9-36].
2
Set the Secure Channel to a number between 0 and 2088.
3
Set the Secure Channel BW to Wide or Narrow.
4
For the Password, type “user”.
9 SENSOR INTEGRATION
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
209
The default password is “user”. Your system may use an alternate
password.
Click OK.
•
5
Figure 9-36 Set AIS Radio Parameters dialog
Position reporting on the secure channel you can set how the AIS broadcasts
its position on the secure channel. Each system in the secure group can have a
different setting. Specifically, you can:
a
Set the reporting rate to Automatic [see Table 9-1]: choose > Setup > Sensor
Setup > AIS Setup > Secure AIS > Set Secure Channel Reporting Rate... and select
Automatic.
Table 9-1
b
c
210
Automatic position reporting rate
Ship’s dynamic conditions
Nominal reporting interval
Ship at anchor or moored and not moving faster than 3 knots
3 minutes
Ship at anchor or moored and moving faster than 3 knots.
10 seconds
Ship 0-14 knots
10 seconds
Ship 0-14 knots and changing course
3.3 seconds
Ship 14-23 knots
6 seconds
Ship 14-23 knots and changing course
2 seconds
Ship > 23 knots
2 seconds
Ship > 23 knots and changing course
2 seconds
Set the reporting rate to every 10 seconds: choose > Setup > Sensor Setup >
AIS Setup > Set Secure Channel Reporting Rate... and select Every 10 seconds.
Disable position reporting on the secure channel: choose > Setup > Sensor
Setup > AIS Setup > Set Secure Channel Reporting Rate... and select No Reports.
9 SENSOR INTEGRATION
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
9.D.4.B
Secure ID
On a secure-capable AIS you must set a Secure ID (identifies the individual
transponder within the secure group) and an Organization ID (identifies the
secure group).
To set a secure ID:
1
Choose > Setup > Sensor Setup > AIS Setup > Secure AIS > Set Secure Identification....
The Set Secure Identification dialog appears [figure 9-37].
2
Set the Secure ID to a number between 0 and 65535.
This number must be unique to this system among those in the secure
group.
Set the Organization ID to a number between 0 and 7.
•
3
This number must match that of the other systems in the secure group.
For the Password, type “user”.
•
4
The default password is “user”. Your system may use an alternate
password.
Click OK.
•
5
Figure 9-37 Set Secure Identification dialog
9.D.4.C
Secure key
Within the secure group, all AIS transponders must use the same encryption
key. This “Secure Key” is generated by software provided by the AIS
manufacturer [see , “Saab AIS secure key generation”]. The key has an
effective start and end date. You can load more than one key into ECPINS,
however their effective dates cannot overlap.
To view the Secure Keys loaded in ECPINS:
1
Choose > Setup > Sensor Setup > AIS Setup >Secure AIS > Display Secure Key Info....
The Display Secure Key Info dialog appears.
2
Enter the requested Password and click OK. The secure key information is
displayed [figure 9-38].
Figure 9-38 Display Secure Key Info dialog
9 SENSOR INTEGRATION
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
211
To load a Secure Key:
1
Choose > Setup > Sensor Setup > AIS Setup >Secure AIS > Input Secure Key.... The
Input Secure Key dialog appears [figure 9-39].
2
Enter the appropriate information.
3
Click OK. ECPINS confirms that it has accepted the key.
Figure 9-39 Input Secure Key dialog
•
Key ID: Type a number between 1 and 127
(the maximum number of keys it is
possible to load). This number must be
unique among the secure group.
•
Key: Copy the encryption key generated by
the AIS manufacturer’s software. Type the
•
key or paste a copied key string into this
field (press Shift + Insert).
Password: Type the password provided by
the AIS manufacturer. The default
password is “user”.
Saab AIS secure key generation With its Saab R4S transponder, Saab provides
software that enables you to generate cryptographic encryption keys. Once
you have installed this software on any Windows XP computer, you can use it
to generate a secure key for use with ECPINS.
Note: For detailed installation and key generating instructions, refer to Saab’s Secure AIS Key
Generator Operator’s Manual.
Note: The application requires the use of an ISO-7816-compatible smart card reader, which
must be connected to a USB port on the computer on which the application is installed.
To generate a secure key:
1
Disconnect the Windows computer from any and all network connections.
Insert the Saab smart card (provided with the transponder) into the
reader (chip side up, chip first)
2
On the computer, run the application Saab Secure ID Generation.
3
Enter PIN (code number) associated with the card.
•
•
The default PIN is “1234”.
Note: After three unsuccessful attempts to enter the correct PIN, the card will be locked,
preventing further use of the card.
4
Set the following key generation parameters:
Required fields:
Number of keys: You can generate more than one key in a batch.
Valid period (hours): Choose a period between 1 and 720 hours (30 days).
Start date UTC
Valid until UTC
Optional fields:
•
•
•
•
•
•
212
Reporting rate (msg/10 min.): We recommend using the default value.
Channel: Choose a channel between 0 and 2088.
9 SENSOR INTEGRATION
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
5
Organization ID: In circumstances where you have different groups using
keys, you can assign an ID number to each, between 1 and 7.
• Key batch ID: You can assign an ID number to the batch of keys for your own
reference, between 1 and 4000000000.
Click Add. This adds the requested keys to a list.
6
Check Export to Files.
7
Click Generate to generate all keys in the list. The generator creates one
file (with the extension .skey) for each key on the computer’s root folder,
that is, at “c:\”.
8
Copy these keys for use in ECPINS.
•
9.D.4.D
Mode
A secure-capable AIS has several possible modes of operation:
a
Normal: The transponder broadcasts and receives messages on both standard open AIS
channels. The secure channel is not active in this mode.
b
Silent: The transponder does not broadcast messages and does not respond to
interrogation messages from other transponders. The transponder receives standard AIS
messages; if a secure channel is configured, the secure messages are received and
decrypted.
c
Tactical: The transponder receives standard and secure messages on the secure channel.
All messages, such as position, status reports, and user messages, are only sent over the
secure channel. Interrogation messages are not responded to.
d
Hybrid: Like the Tactical mode, standard and secure messages are received on the secure
channel. However, the transponder sends standard messages over the open AIS channel
and secure messages on the secure channel.
To set the Secure AIS mode:
Choose > Setup > Sensor Setup > AIS Setup > Secure AIS > Set Secure Mode....
The default mode at startup (when the unit is powered on) for the Saab R4S
is Silent. You can change the startup mode.
Note: You cannot assign a default mode that is currently being used. For example, if your
Secure AIS mode is currently set to Tactical and you want to set the Secure AIS default mode to
Tactical, you must choose another mode for your current setting (as described above), prior to
assigning the default to Tactical.
To set the Secure AIS default startup mode:
Choose > Setup > Sensor Setup > AIS Setup >Secure AIS > Set Default Secure Mode....
9.D.5
St. Lawrence Seaway messages
ECPINS can receive and display reports from the St. Lawrence Seaway
Authority regarding weather, water level and flow, and lock schedules.
To display a Seaway weather report:
1
Choose > Contacts > Seaway Weather Info >
2
Choose one of following:
9 SENSOR INTEGRATION
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
213
•
•
•
•
Wind Information Report…
Weather Station Report…
Water Level Report… [figure 9-40]
Water Flow Report…
Note: These menu choices appear only after ECPINS receives a message from the Seaway
Authority. Once the menu choices appear, they remain available until ECPINS is shut down.
Figure 9-40 Seaway Water Level Report
•
Station ID: Choose a station from list.
To display a Seaway lock report:
1
Choose > Contacts > Seaway Lock Info >
2
Choose one of following:
•
•
9.E
Lock Schedule Report…. Select a Lock Station to view its schedule.
Estimated Lock Time Report…. Select a Lock Station to view the estimated
time for the own ship.
Radar
ECPINS can display the image from the ship's radar as a “radar image
overlay” (RIO) on the electronic chart [figure 9-41]. Also, you can export
ECPINS data for display on a radar system.
For information on connecting a radar to ECPINS, refer to the ECPINS
Technician’s Guide.
9.E.1
Radar image overlay
Warning: Radar image overlay is not a replacement for the primary radar display. Since only a
small portion of its resources are dedicated to RIO, ECPINS cannot match the image quality,
precision, and control of a dedicated radar set.
By enabling you to overlay a dynamic radar image on the electronic chart
[figure 9-42], RIO offers you a convenient and quick method of handling
some important tasks, including the following:
a
214
Confirm the vessel’s position. On a vessel that depends on sensors such as GPS/
DGPS for its primary position, you can verify the accuracy of that position
9 SENSOR INTEGRATION
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
using a different sensor: the radar. Instead of taking a radar fix, you
compare the RIO with charted land areas [figure 9-42]. This is a direct
position comparison derived from two completely different devices. Any
discrepancy [9.E.1.F] may offer clues to a problem that otherwise may be
hard to determine, such as a gyrocompass misalignment.
b Determine a target’s position. While radar excels at indicating the position of a
target relative to the own ship, it does not plot the target’s actual
position relative to the surroundings. By turning on RIO, you can
effectively plot the actual position of a target relative to the own ship as
well as all charted objects, such as a boundary line, a shoal, or a
recommended track (a radar with ARPA output enhances this function).
You can also use RIO to verify the position of navigation aids.
c Improve radar target discrimination. RIO can also be used to assist with radar
target discrimination (such as navigation aids and small craft). By
comparing RIO with charted objects, you can quickly infer which targets
are potential hazards [figure 9-42]. For example, a stationary target on or
near a buoy symbol is likely to be a buoy whereas a similar target on the
move far from any charted object may be a small craft.
Caution: “Radar image overlay” does not refer to the radar as a system. Rather, the term is
used for displaying the image from the ship's radar on an electronic chart. In practice, control
settings for radar image overlay are usually quite different from those for the ship's radar.
Figure 9-41 Radar image overlay — overview
1
2
1
2
Radar image (green) overlaid on the
electronic chart. You can change the
colour [9.E.1.D].
No radar image in these areas. ECPINS can
display the radar image from 0.10 nautical
9 SENSOR INTEGRATION
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
miles to 96 nautical miles from the own
ship (the maximum range depends on the
radar's maximum operating range).
215
Figure 9-42 Radar image overlay — close-ups
To display the radar image:
Press F2.
•
•
9.E.1.A
Or choose > Setup > Radar > Radar Image <ON>.
Or, in the chart display menu, click Features. In the Feature Settings dialog
[figure 3.A.6.A] move “Radar Image” to the Displayed Features list.
Radar image enhancement
Sensitivity to radar echo can be affected by gain, sea clutter, or rain clutter.
Note: For optimum results when adjusting RIO, set both the radar unit and ECPINS to a range
of 3 nautical miles and set the RIO transparency [9.E.1.B] to 50%.
To enhance the radar return, try any of the following:
a
Adjust the radar gain: This increases the sensitivity to radar echo and thus increases the
display of radar echo (that is, more is displayed on the screen). In general, Gain should be
adjusted with Sea and Rain set to 0.
b
Adjust the sea clutter filter: This filters clutter near the ship.
c
Adjust the rain clutter filter: This filters the effects of rain, hail, or snow squalls.
Note: Most radar controls do not affect the ECPINS RIO. However, some radars, particularly
Sperry and JRC units, may affect RIO. In these cases, you should be sure that the radar is
displaying a good image before adjusting RIO.
Note: Radar pulse width may affect the ECPINS RIO.
216
9 SENSOR INTEGRATION
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
To enhance the radar image:
1
Choose > Setup > Radar > Radar Settings…. The Radar Settings dialog appears
[figure 9-43].
2
Adjust the settings for Gain, Sea, or Rain.
3
Turn the interference rejection (IR) filter on or off.
Note: If the radar unit is displaying a good image, then setting Gain to 50, Sea and Rain to 0,
and IR to “ON” should produce a good RIO.
Figure 9-43 Radar Settings dialog
1
1
Slider: To adjust, click and hold on the
slider and drag it, or click on points on the
scale, or press the keyboard's arrow or
PGDN and PGUP keys.
•
IR: Interference rejection filter.This reduces
the effects of radar system noise and
interference from other radars. For best
performance, IR should be set to On.
Note: Some radars use the terms “STC” (Sensitivity Time Control) for sea-clutter control and
“FTC” (Fast-Time Constant) for rain-clutter control.
9.E.1.B
Image transparency
You can adjust the transparency of the radar image from almost opaque
(10%) to almost transparent (90%).
To set radar image transparency:
1
Choose > Setup > Radar > Set Transparency…. The Set Transparency dialog appears
[figure 9-44].
2
Adjust the Transparency percentage.
Figure 9-44 Set Transparency dialog
1
1
9.E.1.C
Slider: Ranges from 10% to 90%. To
adjust, click and hold on the slider and
drag it, or click on points on the scale, or
press the keyboard's arrow or PGDN and
PGUP keys.
Blank radar sectors
Note: This section describes an optional ECPINS feature that is only available on systems using
a Raymarine RD418HD or RD424HD radar.
9 SENSOR INTEGRATION
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
217
You can assign up to two sectors of the radar image to be displayed as blank.
To set blank sectors:
1
2
3
Choose > Setup > Radar > Set Blank Sectors…. The Set Blank Sectors dialog
appears [figure 9-45].
Set Sector 1 and/or Sector 2 to On.
Set the bearing values for each sector.
Figure 9-45 Set Blank Sectors dialog
1
1
9.E.1.D
Brg Type: Sectors can be displayed as
Relative (bearing relative to the own ship
heading) or True (bearing relative to True
North).
Radar colour
ECPINS offers a choice of four colours for the radar image.
To select a radar colour:
Choose > Setup > Radar > Color > Light Green,
or Dark Green
or White
or Black.
9.E.1.E
Radar information
A summary of radar image and radar information is available for viewing.
To view radar image information:
Choose > Setup > Radar > Radar Information…. The Radar Image Overlay Information
display appears [figure 9-46].
218
9 SENSOR INTEGRATION
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Figure 9-46 Radar Image Overlay Information display
•
•
•
•
•
9.E.1.F
Status: Indicates that RIO is enabled or
disabled.
Settings: Shows the current values for
Gain, Sea, Rain, IR, and Transparency.
Resolution: If the radar interface board
(RIB) is a CORECO, this may indicate a
scale mismatch between the own ship's
radar and ECPINS which could degrade
the resolution of the radar image overlay.
Signals: Shows two possible conditions for
Trigger and Azimuth: OK, or an indication
that ECPINS has detected a problem with
one of these signals.
Radar PRF: Radar Pulse Repetition
Frequency in hertz.
•
•
•
•
•
Communications status: Useful for
diagnosing hardware problems.
RIB Status: Radar interface board. Useful
for diagnosing hardware problems.
MDSP Status: (Multi Digital Signal
Processor) If a CORECO radar interface
board is installed, this indicates if it is
initialized.
ACTIONS REQUIRED suggests corrective
actions such as “Change ECDIS or radar
scale for a better match” or “Check radar
signals”.
OK: Closes the display. Input is not
possible on this display.
Radar image mismatch
Ideally, the radar image matches perfectly with the chart display. Given this
condition, you can have increased confidence in the own ship's position and
the position of other vessel traffic and hazards.
Caution: Use radar image overlay with caution. Mismatches between the RIO and the chart
display will occur. During operations, an apparent discrepancy should engender increased
vigilance on your part. The cause of the discrepancy should be sought only when it is safe to do
so.
Potential mismatch causes There are many potential causes of a mismatch
between the RIO and the chart display. The following list identifies known
causes and suggests potential remedies.
Operational circumstances
a
Water level: The shape of the shoreline and the location of hazards detected by radar may
vary from the chart display as the water level changes.
9 SENSOR INTEGRATION
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
219
b
Topography: For example, the radar may detect as a shoreline a tree line far behind a
shallow sloping beach, which has no radar return. Or, ice buildup in front of a breakwater
may appear to be the breakwater.
c
Navigation aid movement: For example, at low tide, the current may drag a buoy far out of
its charted position.
d
Range difference: When radar image overlay is used, the display range on ECPINS should
always be similar to the ship's radar range. Changing the display range in ECPINS or the
ship's radar can cause an error. An extra ring of spurious radar data may appear on the
ECPINS display. This spurious radar data appears far away from the own ship's position.
The reason could be the difference in range between the ECPINS display and the ship's
radar display. For example, the display range on ECPINS may be set to 48 nautical miles
while the Radar range is set to 1.5 nautical miles. The solution is to bring both ranges
closer together in values. The RIO may not be displayed at 96 NM range if the vessel is
offset away from the display centre.
e
Target reflection properties: Take into account.
f
Target masking or shadowing: Take into account. For example, radar does not detect a
buoy that is close to the ship.
Chart-related problems
g
Overscale or underscale error: The wrong scale chart is being used [3.A.2.A]. Find a better
scaled chart. Check if auto-loading is enabled [10.B.3].
h
Out-of-date chart: Locate and apply any chart updates or new charts [12].
i
Incorrect chart correction: Another operator may have made an incorrect correction to the
chart [11.B].
j
Datum shift: The electronic chart was not properly shifted to WGS84 datum when it was
created. Or, a manual datum shift applied to the chart (check the chart-display title bar for
a datum shift warning).
k
Survey error: The chart has mistakes or omissions. Check if a more recent electronic chart
or update is available from the distributor.
Equipment problem
l
Radar is not properly tuned: Adjust the gain setting, etc., on radar.
m Radar antenna offset is not correct: Correct the offset in ECPINS.
220
n
RIO improperly calibrated: To verify, compare the range and bearing from ECPINS to a
fixed object and from the radar to the same fixed object [9.E.1.A].
o
RIO improperly tuned: Tune RIO using the ECPINS menus.
p
GPS position incorrect: Verify. Change primary position source to another sensor.
q
GPS antenna offset incorrect: Correct the ECPINS offset [Ap.E] for the GPS antenna.
r
GPS is outputting a non-WGS84 position: Check output settings on the GPS.
s
Gyro error: Check gyro. Recalibrate it with ECPINS. Refer to the ECPINS Technician’s Guide.
t
Mismatch between the radar’s heading and that of ECPINS: Have the radar technician
correct its heading.
u
Radar range or bearing errors: Verify. RIO range and bearing calibration is conducted by
service technicians.
9 SENSOR INTEGRATION
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
To check for a mismatch between the radar image and the electronic chart:
1
Locate a radar-conspicuous feature.
2
Take a range and bearing [6.A] from the own ship's main radar to the
feature.
Before proceeding, check the accuracy of this range and bearing against a
paper chart.
Compare (step 2) with the feature's range and bearing derived from the
ECPINS RIO.
•
3
To correct a mismatch between the radar image and the electronic chart:
1
In ECPINS Setup, choose > Setup > Radar > Calibrate Radar…. The Calibrate Radar
dialog appears [figure 9-47].
2
Adjust the settings.
Figure 9-47 Calibrate Radar dialog
1
Azimuth Offset: Rotates the radar image.
2
Radial Offset: Expands or contracts the
radar image horizontally.
or
1
In ECPINS Setup, choose > Setup > Radar > Calibrate Radar with Cursor….
Instructions appear.
2
Click an object displayed on the radar image.
3
Click the location on the electronic chart at which that object should be
located. ECPINS adjust the radar image accordingly.
•
ECPINS adjusts the radar images’s Azimuth Offset and Radial Offset, which
you may wish to fine tune.
Note: If there is a persistent mismatch, and the cause cannot be determined, OSI Maritime
Systems staff may be able to assist. Send a description of the problem and screen captures [7.B]
to support@osimaritime.com.
9.F
NAVTEX
NAVTEX is an international service that broadcasts local maritime safety
information from shore stations to ships within approximately 300 nautical
miles. The service operates using Radio Telex in the Medium Frequency radio
band just above and below 500 kHz. Major areas of NAVTEX coverage include
the Mediterranean Sea, the North Sea, around Japan, and areas around
North America.
A ship’s NAVTEX receiver receives and prints messages automatically. If the
own ship is equipped with a NAVTEX receiver and that device is connected to
9 SENSOR INTEGRATION
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
221
ECPINS (refer to the ECPINS Technician’s Guide), ECPINS can receive and
display text messages from NAVTEX stations.
To view a NAVTEX message:
1
Choose > Navigation Tools > NAVTEX Message Manager.... The NAVTEX Message
Manager dialog appears [figure 9-48].
2
Select the message and click View. ECPINS displays the full text of the
message.
•
Or, double-click the message.
Figure 9-48 NAVTEX Message Manager dialog
1
1
Message identifier: The first character
identifies the transmitter, the second the
type of message; for example, B identifies
a meteorological warning.
•
•
View: Displays the selected message.
Delete: Deletes the selected message from
ECPINS.
NAVTEX messages are classified by type. While the NAVTEX receiver cannot
reject messages concerning Navigational Warnings, Meteorological
Warnings, and Search And Rescue information, you can filter any type out of
the ECPINS display.
To filter out a NAVTEX message type from ECPINS display:
1
Choose > Navigation Tools > NAVTEX Setup.... The NAVTEX Setup dialog appears
[figure 9-49].
2
Remove the check mark from the message type.
Figure 9-49 NAVTEX Setup
1
1
222
Message type code: Each type is identified by a letter code, which appears in each message’s
identifier.
9 SENSOR INTEGRATION
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
9 SENSOR INTEGRATION
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
223
224
9 SENSOR INTEGRATION
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
10
10
Chart viewing
Once a chart is installed and processed, that chart is available for you to view.
To display a chart of a geographical area, ECPINS “loads” a chart for that
area. The number of charts ECPINS can have loaded at any given time is
limited by the computer’s resources.
You can load and unload charts “manually” — that is, one by one — or have
ECPINS do this automatically. In the latter case, ECPINS automatically selects
and displays the best charts for the given navigation situation.
With automatic loading, for any given point on the display ECPINS
determines which chart to display using a “chart order” of precedence. You
can then adjust the chart order and load additional charts manually.
All chart types (vector and raster) are loaded the same way. While each chart
type may display different data at different scales, all are fused into the
single display.
The appearance and content of a displayed chart varies by chart type. While
raster charts appear as facsimiles of paper charts, vector charts offer the
navigator some flexibility as to the information presented. On most charts,
you can consult chart notes and Notice to Mariners.
10 CHART VIEWING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
225
10.A Chart coverage
When multiple charts cover the geographical area displayed, ECPINS displays
a chart index, that is, colour-coded outlines of the charts [figure 10-1].
Figure 10-1 Chart index
1
2
1
•
A magenta outline indicates an installed
chart (available to load).
A green outline indicates a loaded chart.A
grey outline indicates the boundary of a
chart. When the Load Charts dialog is
open, a grey outline indicates an installed
chart not available to load or a chart not
installed but available to install (usually on
a disk in the drive).
If the display is zoomed out to a scale so small
that the charts are not displayed:
• A red outline (not shown) indicates a
loaded S57 or other vector chart.
• A yellow outline (not shown) indicates a
loaded raster chart.
To remove the chart index:
1
In the chart display menu, choose Features. The Feature Settings dialog
appears [Figure 10-2].
2
In the Category list, choose Overlays.
3
In the list of Displayed Features, select Chart Index.
4
Click << REMOVE to move Chart Index to the Available Features list.
•
•
Or, double-click Chart Index to move it between the lists.
To display the Chart Index from display, move it back to the Displayed
Features list.
Note: If the chart index is turned off, it still appears when the Load Charts dialog [figure 10-5]
is displayed. When you close the dialog, the chart index disappears again.
226
10 CHART VIEWING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Figure 10-2 Features Settings dialog — Chart Index displayed
10.A.1
Getting information about a chart
Information similar to the legend found on a paper chart can be displayed for
a selected chart.
To display the chart information panel for a chart:
1
Choose > Chart Selection > Display Chart Information Panel.... A list of loaded
charts appears.
2
Select the desired chart and click Select. A Chart Information Panel appears
[figure 10-3].
•
•
Or, double-click the desired chart.
To view the history log for the chart, for example, when it was installed and
updated, scroll to the bottom of the Chart Information Panel.
Figure 10-3 Chart Information Panel
The information displayed in the chart
information panel depends on the selected
chart and its format. The information might
include:
• Chart number
• Chart name
10 CHART VIEWING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
•
•
•
Source scale
Navigational purpose; for example,
Approach, Harbour, or Overview.
Source chart datum (or horizontal datum);
for example WGS84.
227
•
•
•
•
10.A.2
Edition number and issue date
Vertical and sounding datum
Last update date
SENC Generation: The date on which
ECPINS processed this chart for use by the
system.
•
•
•
•
Update history, including warnings if chart
lacks a catalog file and other related
history
Installation date
Producer
Depth and height units
Unofficial chart areas
If the display has any chart data [12.A] that is not derived from an official
chart from a recognized authority, ECPINS displays a warning. This warning
appears at the bottom right of the chart display and reads “Unofficial Data Refer to Paper Chart”. If the own ship enters an “unofficial data” area, the
own ship text box displays a “U” [figure 10-4].
Figure 10-4 Unofficial data indicator
2
1
1
A “U” in own ship text box indicates
unofficial data
2
Minimum and maximum depths (in
fathoms) at the own ship’s location
Official chart types are as follows:
a
b
c
d
S57 from an official producer (that is, a government agency)
HCRF (ARCS, Seafarer RNC, NZMariner)
BSB from the NOAA or the Canadian Hydrographic Service
C-MAP ENC and Jeppesen PRIMAR ENC
All other chart types are unofficial, including:
a
b
c
10.A.3
OSL (NTX)
C-MAP Professional+ and C-Map Professional
GBRMP RZC and WA DPI: Do not use for navigation. Also, ensure that
information from these chart types is not displayed over top of official
chart information for an area.
Unknown datum
When an S57 chart is displayed and that chart uses a datum other than
WGS84, ECPINS displays in the chart display title bar the warning “Unknown
Datum”. S57 charts are required to use WGS84. However, in the rare case that
an S57 chart does not use WGS84, ECPINS’s display of the area covered by that
chart may be inaccurate.
228
10 CHART VIEWING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
10.B Loading charts
By default, you must load a chart for ECPINS to display it. Using this “manual”
method [10.B.1], you can load enough charts to cover the necessary
geographical area.
As an alternative to, or in addition to, loading charts manually, you can have
ECPINS load the necessary charts automatically [10.B.3].
Note: Your system administrator sets a chart memory limit of up to 128 MB of computer RAM.
This allows both automatic and manual chart loading to use RAM up to the defined limit. For
example, if the chart memory limit is set to 80 MB of RAM, ECPINS can automatically load as
many charts as 80 MB of RAM permits; similarly, users can manually load charts until 80 MB is
reached.
For more information about setting the chart memory limit, refer to the ECPINS Technician’s
Guide.
10.B.1
Loading charts manually
You can load any installed chart [12] on the ECPINS system.
Any manually loaded chart is kept loaded, even if you view a completely
unrelated geographical area (whereas auto-loaded charts would be
unloaded). When it is restarted, ECPINS loads all charts that were manually
loaded.
When you manually load a chart, it is subject to ECPINS chart display priority
[10.B.4] and the manual chart memory limit of up to 128 MB of computer
RAM.
To load a chart:
1
Choose > Chart Selection > Load Charts…. The Load Charts dialog displays a list
of charts available in ECPINS [figure 10-5].
2
In the Folder list, select a folder of charts by clicking its name.
3
In the Chart list, select a chart. Click Load. The chart is loaded and angle
brackets appear around its name.
•
•
Or, double-click the chart’s name.
To unload a loaded chart, double-click its name.
10 CHART VIEWING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
229
Figure 10-5 Load Charts dialog
1
2
3
1
2
3
•
A folder of charts
A chart available to load [figure 10-9]. For
S57 chart numbers, the first two digits
identify the country of coverage.
A loaded chart, which is indicated by
angle brackets.
Contains: Find charts in the selected folder
by entering all or part of a chart’s name or
number and clicking Search. Charts
•
matching the search criteria, as well as all
loaded charts, are listed.
Refresh: Examines the charts stored on the
system and refreshes the list of charts in
the selected folder. It also makes all charts
available for automatic loading [10.B.3],
even if they were excluded [10.B.5]. The
Refresh action may take a few minutes if
you have many charts installed.
Note: On occasion, you may wish to locate or view one of the charts listed. To do so: choose
chart centred (CC) mode then change the chart display priority so that the desired chart is at the
top of the list. The chart display centres on the loaded chart.
10.B.1.A
Better Scale Chart Available
If the manually loaded chart is not the best-scaled chart available, ECPINS
advises “Better Scale Chart Available”. This message appears in the bottom
right-hand corner of the chart display. The message also appears if the format
is not the best available format. You can remove this warning from the
display by having ECPINS load charts automatically [10.B.3].
10.B.2
Unloading charts
You can unload any loaded chart “manually”, that is, one at a time. A chart
unloaded manually remains available to ECPINS. You can load it or make it
available for automatic loading [10.B.3].
If a chart that was loaded automatically is unloaded manually, that chart is
“excluded” [10.B.5] from automatic loading. If a chart that was loaded
manually is unloaded manually, it is not excluded from automatic loading.
To unload a chart:
1
Choose > Chart Selection > Remove Charts….
2
Select a chart from the displayed list.
3
Click Remove.
•
230
When a chart is unloaded, ECPINS also unloads any chart corrections [11]
associated with that chart.
10 CHART VIEWING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
10.B.3
Loading charts automatically
You can have ECPINS automatically load and display the best charts for the
given navigational situation. ECPINS loads as many charts as 128 MB of
computer RAM permits (to change the defined chart memory limit, consult
the ECPINS Technician’s Guide). Depending on its size and type, one chart can
occupy from 1 MB to 15 MB of memory. Typically, the number of charts
loaded ranges between 10 to 40. Charts no longer needed are automatically
unloaded to make room for others.
To have ECPINS load charts automatically:
Choose > Chart Selection > Auto Chart Loading ON <OFF>. This toggles automatic
chart loading On and Off.
•
•
The state appears beside the menu item in brackets, for example, “Auto
Chart Loading <ON>”.
ECPINS keeps this Auto Chart Loading setting the next time the system is
started (provided ECPINS is shut down normally).
Note: While ECPINS automatically unloads charts no longer needed, ECPINS may reach its
chart memory limit before all the charts for the given situation are loaded. In this case, ECPINS
will automatically compare the remaining unloaded charts to the loaded charts to ensure that
higher priority charts replace lower priority loaded charts [10.B.4]. Automatically loaded charts
can be manually unloaded to free up memory capacity and are disqualified for automatic
loading [10.B.5].
Note: While ECPINS is set to load charts automatically, you can also load one or more charts
manually [10.B.1].
10.B.3.A
Chart loading coverage
When set to load charts automatically, ECPINS loads the charts necessary to
cover the following (in order of priority [10.B.4]):
a
b
c
10.B.3.B
The own ship’s current position
The anti-grounding cone [4.F]: If the anti-grounding cone is enabled,
ECPINS loads vector charts that cover the area within the cone. Only
vector charts are loaded because ECPINS can search these for potential
hazards.
The area beneath the chart display(s): ECPINS loads the best charts for the
entire visible area.
Chart loading priority
When set to load charts automatically, ECPINS loads the “best” installed chart
for a given area of coverage. ECPINS determines the best chart based on the
following criteria (in order of priority):
a
b
c
Scale: The chart with the largest scale for the geographic coverage.
Coverage: The chart that provides the most coverage of the necessary
area(s) [10.B.3.A].
Source: An official chart from a recognized authority [10.A.2].
d
Chart date: The chart with the most recent date.
10 CHART VIEWING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
231
e
Chart type: In general, vector takes priority over raster (ECPINS loads the
raster chart only if there is no vector chart that covers an area).
• For example, ECPINS would give very high priority to loading an installed
S57 chart at a large scale and covering the entire window.
The default order of priority is:
i
S57
ii NZMariner (HCRF)
iii Seafarer RNC (HCRF)
iv ARCS (HCRF)
v BSB
vi C-MAP
vii OSL format (NTX)
The chart type order of priority — used by ECPINS when it is set to load
charts automatically — can be resorted, as described and shown below
[figure 10-6].
To change the chart type order of priority:
1
Choose > Chart Selection > Auto Chart Loading Setup…. The Auto Chart Loading Setup
dialog appears [figure 10-6].
2
Move a chart type up or down, as desired.
a
b
Click a chart type to select it.
Click the up or down button to adjust the selected chart type’s place in the
order.
Figure 10-6 Auto Chart Loading Setup dialog — default setting
1
2
3
1
2
3
•
10.B.4
A selected chart type (click to select or
deselect it).
Click to move the selected chart type up.
Click to move the selected chart type
down.
Default: Reorders the list to the ECPINS
default.
•
•
OK: Saves the current order of priority and
applies it when ECPINS is set to
automatically load charts.
Cancel: Discards any changes to the order
made since the dialog was opened.
Chart display priority
All loaded charts [10.B] are eligible for display. ECPINS places loaded charts
into a “display stack”. For a given area of display coverage, ECPINS displays
the top-most chart in the stack. Thus, in the chart display you may see several
232
10 CHART VIEWING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
overlapping charts of various scales and types; ECPINS is displaying the best
available chart for every point.
The chart display title bar shows the chart name of the top-most chart at the
own ship’s position or the centre of the display (when the own ship is not
within the displayed view) [figure 10-7].
Figure 10-7 Chart name displayed in the chart display title bar
1
1
Top-most chart name
ECPINS stacks the charts according to scale, from the largest scale on the top
of the stack to the smallest scale at the bottom. You can view the position of
charts in the stack.
Note: When a chart is loaded with the same scale as other loaded charts, ECPINS places the
new chart at the top of the stack of charts with the same scale if the new chart is officially
approved chart data from a recognized authority; if the new chart is unofficial [10.A.2], ECPINS
places it at the bottom.
You can manually change a chart’s position in the display stack of loaded
charts and thus give it display priority.
To change the order of a loaded chart:
1
Choose > Chart Selection > Change Chart Order…. The Change Chart Order dialog
appears [figure 10-8].
2
Select a chart.
3
Click Up. The selected chart moves up a step in the list of charts.
Or, double-click the chart.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to arrange the charts in the desired order.
•
4
Figure 10-8 Change Chart Order dialog
1
2
1
10.B.5
The topmost chart. If the chart display is
chart-centred (CC), this chart is centred.
2
Each chart’s scale is listed along with its
number and name.
Excluding charts from automatic loading
If an automatically-loaded chart [10.B.3] is manually unloaded [10.B.2],
ECPINS no longer recognizes the chart as being available for loading. The
10 CHART VIEWING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
233
chart is “excluded” and considered unwanted until you reinclude it, even if
ECPINS is restarted.
You can also designate charts, and folders of charts, to be excluded. Excluded
charts display a grey outline in the chart index.
To exclude a chart from automatic loading:
1
Choose > Chart Selection > Load Charts…. The Load Charts dialog [figure 10-10]
displays a list of charts available in ECPINS.
2
In the Folder list, select a folder of charts by clicking its name.
3
Click the symbol beside a chart’s name to exclude it. The symbol changes
to an empty square and the chart is unloaded.
•
•
Or, click the symbol beside a folder’s name to exclude all the charts in that
folder. The charts are unloaded.
The symbols indicate the status of the chart or folder [figure 10-9]
[figure 10-10].
Figure 10-9 Load Charts dialog symbols
Folders
Charts
All charts in this folder are available for
automatic loading
Some charts in this folder are excluded
from automatic loading
All charts in this folder are excluded
from automatic loading
Click the symbol to change its status.
This chart is available for automatic
loading
This chart is excluded from automatic
loading
This chart is
loaded.
Figure 10-10 Load Charts dialog example
4
1
5
6
2
3
1
2
3
234
A folder with all charts available
A folder with all charts excluded
A folder with some excluded charts. This
folder is also selected (that is, its charts
appear in the Charts list).
10 CHART VIEWING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
4
5
6
An available chart that is loaded (angle
brackets indicate loaded charts).
An available chart
An excluded chart
To re-include a chart excluded from automatic loading:
1
Choose > Chart Selection > Load Charts…. The Load Charts dialog [figure 10-10]
displays a list of charts available in ECPINS.
2
In the Folder list, select a folder of charts by clicking its name.
3
Click the symbol beside a chart’s name to make the chart available for
automatic loading. The symbol changes from an empty square to a
square with a dot [figure 10-9].
•
10.B.6
Or click Refresh. ECPINS refreshes the list of charts and makes all available
for automatic loading.
Loading a chart with an expired license
Each time a chart is loaded, ECPINS checks for a valid license for that chart. If
an ARCS or Seafarer RNC chart does not have a valid license installed, the
chart does not load and one of the following warnings may appear:
a
ARCS 08: Warns that the license for a chart expires in a month.
b
ARCS 09: Warns that the license has expired; appears for a month after the expiry date.
The chart is displayed but cannot be updated.
c
ARCS 10: Warns that the license has expired and the ARCS chart will not be displayed until
the license is renewed [figure 10-11]. “HCRF 10" appears on the chart title-bar. Applies
only to ARCS charts.
Figure 10-11 ARCS license expiration warning
1
1
HCRF10: Indicates that the chart license
has expired. Click this item to display the
warning message.
10.C Raster charts
The appearance and content of raster charts closely match paper charts
[figure 10-12].
10 CHART VIEWING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
235
Figure 10-12 Raster chart
•
Compare this chart to the vector chart that
covers the same area [figure 10-14].
When the own ship is on a raster chart, the own ship text box displays the
legend “RCDS Mode” (Raster Chart Display System) [figure 10-13]. Raster
charts include ARCS, Seafarer RNC, NZMariner, and BSB formats.
Figure 10-13 Raster chart indicator — Own ship text box
1
1
Raster chart indicator: “RCDS Mode”. A
“U”, indicating unofficial data [10.A.2],
may be appended.
10.D Vector charts
The appearance and content of vector charts differ somewhat from paper
charts [figure 10-14].
236
10 CHART VIEWING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Figure 10-14 Vector chart
•
Compare this chart to the raster chart that
covers the same area [figure 10-12].
When a vector chart is displayed, you can adjust the amount of information
displayed by that type of chart. Vector charts include S57, C-MAP, and OSL
vector formats.
10.D.1
Traditional versus simplified symbols
ECPINS uses IHO's traditional symbols for S57 charts. You can choose to have
ECPINS display simplified symbols [figure 10-15]. The traditional symbols are
closely matched to paper-chart symbols.
Figure 10-15 Two buoys — traditional symbols and simplified symbols
3
1
4
2
1
2
3
Spar buoy (traditional)
Installation buoy with yellow light
Special purpose buoy (simplified)
10 CHART VIEWING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
4
Installation buoy/mooring buoy with
yellow light
237
Symbols do not have a one-to-one relationship. One simplified symbol can
represent two buoys, each of which has a different function. Traditional
symbols can also differ from original paper-chart symbols.
To use simplified symbols:
Choose > Setup > Display Setup > Use Traditional Symbols until no dot is displayed
before this menu command.
10.D.2
S57 chart legend
You can review all standard symbols used on S57 charts by displaying the
chart legend. The legend, called “Chart 1” [figure 10-16], is on a special set of
charts that contain one example of each symbol — line, area, or point.
Two convenient uses for the S57 legend are:
a
b
Find the meaning of a symbol: Scan the charts for the symbol and query it
(press F12).
Find the group to which a chart feature belongs: Display a chart and
experiment with adding and removing chart features [3.A.6.A].
Figure 10-16 S57 Chart 1
1
2
1
Charts: Each of the 11 charts contains
different sets of symbols. Zoom in to see
the individual symbols
2
Symbol: To get more information on a
symbol, query it (that is, press F12 and
click on the symbol).
To display the S57 chart legend:
238
1
Choose > Chart Selection > Load Charts…. The Load Charts dialog appears
[figure 10-5].
2
In the Folder list, select “Chart 1”. Load all the charts in the folder.
10 CHART VIEWING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Or ensure that the Chart 1 folder is available for automatic loading and
remove all other chart folders.
Use the chart display menu to change the chart mode to CC (chartcentred). ECPINS centres the display on the Chart 1 charts.
•
3
a
b
c
d
10.D.3
Or, choose > Navigation Tools > Locate… (or press Ctrl+F). The Find Location
dialog appears [figure 10-29].
In the Contains box, enter “Chart 1".
In the Locations list, select a chart.
Click Locate. The chart display is centred on the selected chart.
Traditional versus simplified boundaries
ECPINS displays simplified boundaries on vector charts. You can have ECPINS
display traditional, paper-chart boundaries [figure 10-17]. Simplified
boundaries cause less clutter; however, to find out the associated caution or
restriction, you must query the boundary.
Figure 10-17 Traditional and simplified boundaries
1
2
1
Traditional boundary for area where
anchoring is prohibited
2
Simplified boundary for area where
anchoring is prohibited. You must query
the boundary to find out its purpose.
To use traditional boundaries:
Choose > Setup > Display Setup > Use Traditional Boundaries. A dot before the
command indicates that traditional boundaries are displayed.
•
10.D.4
For simplified boundaries, repeat the step. The dot disappears.
Chart text
On S57 and other vector charts, you can control the volume of chart text
displayed. Chart text is organized by type [figure 10-18], any or all of which
may be displayed [3.A.6.A].
10 CHART VIEWING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
239
Figure 10-18 Feature Settings dialog — chart text display
•
•
•
Category: Choose from the drop-down list.
Available Features in the selected
category. The Displayed Features are
selected from Available Features.
Displayed Features: Some text features are
selected for display.
•
•
•
<< REMOVE: Moves a feature selected in
Displayed Features to Available Features. Or,
double-click the feature.
ADD >>: Moves a feature selected in
Available Features to Displayed Features. Or,
double-click the feature.
Standard: Automatically sets the Features
to the IMO Standard Display.
To control the amount of chart text displayed:
1
From the chart display menu, choose Features. The Feature Settings dialog
appears [figure 10-18].
2
In the Category list, choose Text Groups. Chart text types available to display
appears in the Available Features and Displayed Features lists.
3
Select features for inclusion in the Displayed Features list by clicking a
feature and using the << Remove or Add >> buttons.
•
•
•
10.D.5
Or, double-click a feature to move it between the lists.
Since the chart adjusts as features are moved between the lists, you are able
to observe the effect of changes immediately.
A list of IHO abbreviations used on S57 charts is available in Ap.A, INT-1
abbreviations.
Depth shades
S57 and other vector charts display five shades for depth [figure 10-19]. You
can choose to have only three shades displayed.
240
10 CHART VIEWING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Figure 10-19 Depth shades: IHO Day Bright colour scheme on an S57 chart
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
White: Deepest, safe
Light grey*: Safe
Light blue*: Unsafe
4
Dark blue: Unsafe.
Under the IHO Day Black colour scheme,
this appears as grey-blue.
5 Green: Shallowest, foreshore
* Available only when 5 shades are displayed
To display only 3 shades of depth:
Choose > Setup > Display Setup > Show Five Depth Shades until no dot appears
beside the menu choice.
10.D.6
Shallow water patterns
On S57 and other vector charts, you can have ECPINS display a pattern of
cross-hatches to indicate shallow water [figure 10-20]. In the IHO night-colour
schemes, this light grey pattern helps to distinguish safe from unsafe water.
The shallow water area is determined by the value entered for unsafe depth
[5.C.1].
Figure 10-20 Shallow water pattern (cross-hatching)
10 CHART VIEWING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
241
To display shallow water patterns:
Choose > Setup > Display Setup > Show Shallow Water Pattern until a dot appears
by the menu choice. Cross-hatching appear in the areas you have defined
as unsafe depth.
10.D.7
Isolated dangers
On S57 and C-MAP charts, ECPINS always displays isolated dangers [figure 1021]. An isolated danger is a shallow danger of a depth less than the safety
depth [5.C.1] where that danger is located in safe water (that is, where the
depth is greater than the safety depth).
Figure 10-21 Isolated danger highlighting
1
2
1
10.D.8
Isolated danger marker on an underwater
rock (a point feature). The isolated danger
is in safe water. At small chart display
scales, ECPINS may remove shallow
2
danger markers from display (along with
other point features).
Safety depth contour (encloses unsafe
water).
Shallow dangers
On S57 and C-MAP charts, you can have ECPINS mark the location of any
shallow danger [figure 10-22]. Shallow dangers are Obstructions, Wrecks, and
Underwater Rocks the depth of which is less than the safety depth [5.C.1] or
unknown. Where the danger is a line or area, ECPINS marks the centre of the
area.
Figure 10-22 Shallow danger highlighting
2
1
3
1
2
242
No shallow dangers highlighted
Shallow dangers highlighted
10 CHART VIEWING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
3
Shallow danger marker on an underwater
rock (a point feature).
To mark shallow dangers:
Choose > Setup > Display Setup > Highlight Shallow Dangers until a dot appears by
the menu choice. ECPINS marks dangers.
•
10.D.9
At small chart display scales, ECPINS may remove shallow danger markers
from display (along with other point features).
Light sectors
On S57 charts, ECPINS displays partial light sectors. You can extend the light
sectors to the full nominal range of the light. Full light sectors appear as
extended lines of dashes [figure 10-23].
Figure 10-23 Light sectors
2
1
1
Partial light sectors
2
Full light sector showing its range.
To display full sector lights:
Choose > Setup > Display Setup > Full Light Sectors.
•
•
When Full Light Sectors is active, a dot appears by the menu choice.
When inactive, the dot does not appear beside the choice, and the display
shows partial-light sectors.
10.E Querying a chart feature
You can query (that is, get detailed information on) a feature on a vector
chart, a correction [11.C] on any type of chart, and dynamic chart features
placed by ECPINS.
To query a chart feature:
1
Press F12. ECPINS displays the Feature Info dialog [figure 10-24].
Or, choose > Navigation Tools > Query Chart Features….
On chart areas crowded with overlapping features, you can limit the
potential selection to a particular type of feature. In the Feature Info box,
click the type of feature, that is, Area, Line, or Point (or All of these).
On the chart, click the feature. That feature is highlighted in flashing red.
In the Feature Info dialog, the feature's attributes are highlighted.
•
•
2
10 CHART VIEWING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
243
Figure 10-24 Feature Info dialog
1
2
6
3
4
7
5
1
2
•
•
3
4
10.E.1
The point being queried (a buoy)
Highlighting around the point (a red circle)
By Keyboard: Enter a feature's coordinates
instead of clicking it on the chart. In the
coordinates dialog, when the cursor is on
a feature, the feature’s coordinates are
displayed.
By Name: Locates [10.G] a feature or
contact, the location of which you can
query.
Feature types: For the query location,
limits the features listed to the selected
type: Area, Line, or Point. When All or Area
is chosen, the areas are listed in order of
area size, the smallest area first.
The point being queried. All its
information is highlighted. The
information may contain a chart note
[10.F].
5
6
7
•
Another feature (in this example, the light
atop the buoy). Double-click on the text to
query this feature.
Chart name: The name of the chart on
which the listed features are located. At
the location of the query, ECPINS may
have more than one chart loaded. You can
select a chart other than the one
displayed.
Chart selectors: Enables you to show
information on the features at the query
location on a chart other than the one
displayed. This is particularly useful when
the chart displayed is a raster chart (does
not provide any query information) or
transparent chart and a vector chart is also
loaded for the query location.
Right-click on the chart to close the
Feature Info display.
Displaying symbol information
When querying features, you have the option of displaying a generic
description of the symbol used to represent the feature [figure 10-25].
244
10 CHART VIEWING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Figure 10-25 Area Feature Info dialog
1
3
2
1
2
No symbol information displayed.
Symbol information displayed (for the
same area as 1).
3
Chart note [10.F]: Double-click the file
name — in this case “CAE73245.HTM”
— to view a text description (TXTDSC)
associated with this feature.
To have symbol information displayed:
Choose > Setup > Display Setup > Show Symbol Info on Query. The dot beside the
command indicates that it is active.
10.F Chart notes
Most charts have additional information attached in the form of “chart
notes”. Some chart notes are general, others are attached to a charted
feature. A chart note may be in text or pictorial form, or both. You can view
any of the chart notes for any loaded chart.
Chart notes display such textual information as tidal stream tables, tidal
levels, and datum shifts. Chart notes are available on some vector (S57 and
C-MAP) [figure 10-26] and raster (HCRF and BSB) charts [figure 10-27].
10 CHART VIEWING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
245
Figure 10-26 Display Chart Notes dialog and sample note — vector chart
1
2
1
A list of chart notes for the selected chart.
2
The selected chart note displayed in the
ECPINS Browser.
Figure 10-27 Display Chart Notes dialog and sample note — raster chart
2
1
1
2
A list of chart notes chart notes for the
selected chart.
The selected chart note displayed. This
example is from a raster chart, on which a
note is an image of the text on the
corresponding paper chart.
To display chart notes for any loaded chart:
1
Choose > Chart Selection > Display Chart Notes….
2
Select a chart from the list and click Select. A Display Chart Notes dialog
appears with a list of available notes [figure 10-26].
3
Highlight a title and click Select. The information associated with the title
appears in a Display Chart Notes box.
Or, double-click a title.
Chart note may appear in the ECPINS Browser, a built-in web page reader.
Repeat for more information or click Exit.
•
•
4
246
10 CHART VIEWING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
You can also view the chart note for a particular feature when that feature is
listed in a query [10.E] result, route scan results [8.D.1], or an S57 update
review [12.F.1]. In these cases, the chart note appears as a file name
embedded in the feature information; for example, “CAE73245.HTM”. These
chart notes are only available for some features on S57 charts.
To view a chart note in chart feature information:
Double-click the file name. ECPINS displays the chart note in the ECPINS
Browser.
•
ECPINS can display the following file types: .TXT, .HTM [figure 10-28],
.HTML, .TIF, .JPG, .JPEG, .BMP, .PDF, .AVI, .MPG, .MPEG.
Figure 10-28 Chart note — file name
1
1
Chart note: Double-click the file name to
view it.
10.G Locating chart and ECPINS features
You can recentre the chart display on a selected location. Locations include
waypoints, ports and harbours, contacts, markers, the own ship, routes,
manual corrections, and tide or current stations.
To centre the chart display on a location:
1
Choose > Navigation Tools > Locate…. The Find Location dialog appears
[figure 10-29].
Or press Ctrl+F.
The Find Location dialog also appears throughout ECPINS when By Name is
clicked; for example, when querying a chart feature.
In the Locations list, double-click a name. The chart display is centred on
the location.
•
•
2
•
Or, select a name and click Locate.
10 CHART VIEWING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
247
Figure 10-29 Find Location dialog
•
Show: Several types of locations are
available, including:
AIS: AIS contacts [9.C]
ARPA: ARPA contacts [9.B.2]
Corrections: Manual chart corrections
[11.B]
Currents: Loaded current stations
Markers: All markers [6.C]
Own ship: The location of the own ship
Ports: Charted ports and harbours.
Routes: Waypoints from all displayed
routes. The waypoint name is followed by
its route’s name.
Tides: Loaded tide stations [6.E].
All: All of the above listed at once.
•
Locations: List of locations. Double-click a
location to centre the chart on that
location.
• Contains: Filters the list by the text
entered. If the Contains box is empty, the
Locations list shows all locations of the
type in the Show box.
• Locate: Centres the chart on the selected
location.
• OK: Uses the selected location as a plotted
location for another procedure. Available
where the Find Location dialog is part of
another procedure, such as moving a
waypoint.
In other procedures, you generate this dialog by
clicking By Name. For example, when querying
a chart feature [10.E].
10.H Notice to Mariners
Chart-update information contained in Notice to Mariners issues (on ARCS,
NZMariner, and Seafarer RNC charts) can be reviewed at any time.
To display information from available Notice to Mariners issues:
248
1
Choose > Chart Selection > Display General T&P Notice to Mariners…. A dialog
displays a list of Notices to Mariners.
2
Select the desired notice and click Select. A dialog appears with the
information found in the selected Notice to Mariners [figure 10-30].
10 CHART VIEWING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Figure 10-30 Information on the selected Notice to Mariners
10.I Shifting a chart’s datum
Shifting the chart to match a known, correct position is called a “manual
datum shift”. You can apply a manual datum shift to any type of chart
displayed by ECPINS. However, the probability is that only charts whose
source data is suspect need a datum shift.
When ECPINS displays a chart with a shifted datum, it displays a “Datum
Shift” warning [figure 10-31].
Warning: Shifting the chart may affect the accuracy of the chart and compromise safe
navigation. Proceed with great caution.
Figure 10-31 Evidence of a datum shift
1
2
1
Datum Shift warning: Indicates that the
datum of the chart at the centre of the
chart display is shifted.
10 CHART VIEWING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
2
A gap between adjacent charts may
indicate a datum shift.
249
To shift the chart to match the known offset:
1
Choose > Chart Selection > Enter Manual Datum Shift for Chart….
2
Select the desired chart(s) from the displayed list and click Select. The Enter
Manual Chart Datum Shift dialog appears [figure 10-32].
3
Enter values for latitude and longitude coordinates. Click Enable Manual
Datum Shift.
4
Click Apply. The chart shifts by the entered offset.
•
A datum shift warning appears in the chart-display title bar [figure 10-31].
Figure 10-32 Enter Manual Chart Datum Shift dialog
•
Shift Chart: Values must be less than 60
minutes.
Note: If you uninstall a chart with a datum shift applied to it, ECPINS automatically clears the
datum shift. If the chart is reinstalled and loaded, the datum-shift value is again displayed in
the datum-shift dialog. However, the shift does not take effect until it is activated.
250
10 CHART VIEWING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
11
11
Chart correction and
enhancement
You can augment the value of a chart by creating chart features or updating
existing chart features one by one. Such changes are known as “manual” or
“chart corrections”. This distinguishes them from chart updates and chart
features from hydrographic offices (refer to Chapter 12, ”Chart installation
and updating”). Examples of a manual correction include a comment, a
navigational reminder, a new position for a charted buoy, a revised sounding,
an exercise area.
ECPINS offers you two means of making a correction: a “quick” method
[11.A] for adding objects to the chart and a complete method [11.B] where
the full range of chart features and their attributes are available and the
corrections are organized into sets. Using the complete method, you can
apply a correction to all charts that cover the corrected point or area, or
restrict the correction to one specific chart. Note that you can apply a
correction to any type of chart; indeed, corrections offer a means of adding
deeper information to a raster chart.
Where a manual correction appears on the display, you can query it for more
information. You can assign this kind of additional information to many types
of corrections. Finally, you can save corrections for storage or for use on other
ECPINS systems.
11.A Making a quick correction
In circumstances that call for the prompt addition of a common feature for
display on all charts, ECPINS enables you to make a “quick correction”. (To
correct existing chart features, or to make a correction with complete access
to all features and attributes, use a “chart correction” [11.B].)
11 CHART CORRECTION AND ENHANCEMENT
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
251
To add a feature to the chart (quick method):
1
Choose > Chart Corrections > Quick Corrections…. The Quick Corrections dialog
appears [figure 11-1].
2
Click Add.... The Add Object dialog appears [figure 11-2].
3
Click a symbol to choose that type of feature.
4
Add a point(s) to the display to define the object’s location.
Figure 11-1 Quick Corrections dialog
1
1
•
•
A selected correction
Add...: Creates a chart feature.
Locate: Centres the chart-display on the
selected correction.
•
•
Edit...: Changes the selected correction.
Delete: Deletes the selected correction.
Figure 11-2 Add Object (quick correction)
1
2
3
4
5
•
1
2
252
Name: Accept the default name or type a
new one.
Correction objects: Click an object to
choose it. Types include areas, lines,
points, and text. Use the scroll bar to view
all.
Click the appropriate option to work with
a point:
Add: Adds a new point. Click on the
display to generate the point.
Insert: Inserts a new point. Click on the
display or double-click a point in the list to
11 CHART CORRECTION AND ENHANCEMENT
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
3
4
insert a point midway between that point
and the next one.
Delete: Deletes a selected point. Click the
point on the display or double-click the
point in the list.
Move: Moves a selected point. Select the
point from the list and click a new position
on the display.
The points that make up an object. Each
has a number and latitude and longitude.
A selected point.
5
Coordinates of the selected point. Click on
the display to generate coordinates or
enter using the keyboard. Click Accept or
OK to accept the coordinates, which then
appear in the list of points.
•
•
•
Accept: Enters the coordinates in the
adjacent boxes as a point.
Keyboard: Enables you to enter or modify
the latitude and longitude of the selected
point.
OK: Saves the correction.
Note: ECPINS organizes all quick corrections into the set “QUICK MIOs”, which you can use to
manage, edit, and display them. For a quick correction to be visible, the correction set “Quick
Corrections” must be displayed [figure 11-3].
11.B Making a chart correction
In ECPINS, manual corrections (also known as an “MIO” or Mariner
Information Object) are grouped into sets. Thus, to create a chart feature or
correct a chart feature, you begin with the list of correction sets.
To work with correction sets:
Choose > Chart Corrections > Manual Corrections…. ECPINS displays a list of
correction sets [figure 11-3].
•
ECPINS maintains the set “QUICK MIOs” for storing quick corrections
[11.A].
Figure 11-3 Corrections dialog
1
2
1
2
•
•
•
•
Check to select all the sets at once.
A selected set: Click the square to select or
de-select. Press Ctrl and click to select
two or more sets.
Show: Display status of the correction set
(that is, if display of this set is On or Off)
Chart: Name of the chart(s) to which the
correction set applies. If no chart is listed,
the set applies to more than one chart.
Correction Set: Set name. The set “QUICK
MIOs” contains all “quick corrections”
[11.A].
Show/Hide Set: Toggles the display of the
selected correction set on and off.
11 CHART CORRECTION AND ENHANCEMENT
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
•
•
Rename/Reassign Set...: Changes the
chart(s) to which this set applies. Enables
you to rename the set.
Merge: Combines the two sets of
corrections into one. If one of the sets
contains a chart correction associated with
a particular chart, a warning appears to
the effect that any association between a
deleted or modified feature and the
particular chart is lost. In effect, the
merged set contains corrections, but not
always the original, deleted or modified
feature.
253
11.B.1
Creating a manual correction set
When creating a manual correction, you must add it to an existing set or
create a new set for it. On creating a set, you can have the set apply to all
charts or to one specific chart. If the correction set applies to one chart, and
that chart is unloaded [10.B.2], ECPINS also removes from display any chart
correction sets associated with that chart.
To create a correction set:
1
Choose > Chart Corrections > Manual Corrections…. ECPINS displays the
Corrections dialog.
2
Click New Set…. ECPINS displays the New Correction Set dialog [figure 11-4].
3
In Correction Set Name box, enter a name.
4
Click Chart or All.
If Chart is clicked, you must select a chart from the list of loaded charts.
After the set is created, this option can be changed. Click the Rename/
Reassign Set... button in the Corrections dialog.
Click OK. The named correction set dialog appears [figure 11-5].
•
•
5
Figure 11-4 New Correction Set dialog
1
1
•
A selected chart
All: Enables the corrections in the set to
apply to any chart containing the
correction’s coordinates. Only added
features can apply to all charts.
Figure 11-5 Named correction set dialog
1
2
1
254
Check to select all the corrections at once.
11 CHART CORRECTION AND ENHANCEMENT
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
•
Chart: Applies the corrections to a selected
chart (select a chart from the list). Choose
this if the corrections include
modifications or deletions.
2
•
•
11.B.2
Selected corrections: Click the square to
select or de-select. To select more than
one, press Ctrl and click each.
Add...: Creates a chart feature to add to
this correction set.
Add From Chart...: Corrects an existing
chart feature or to create a new feature by
copying an existing feature.
•
•
•
•
Merge: Merges any selected area
corrections into one correction. Not
available if corrections other than areas
are selected.
Locate: Centres the display on the selected
correction and highlights it.
Edit...: Changes the selected correction.
Creating a chart feature
You can create a new chart feature by adding a new manual correction to an
existing or new correction set.
To create a manual correction:
1
Choose > Chart Corrections > Manual Corrections….
2
From the Corrections dialog [figure 11-3], select a correction set and click
Edit Corrections....
Or, double-click the correction set.
Or, create a new correction set by clicking New Set....
In the correction set dialog [figure 11-5], click Add…. ECPINS displays the
Add Object dialog [figure 11-6].
•
•
3
4
Choose a Set, Type, and Class (in that order).
5
Enter a Name.
6
Add point(s) to the display to define the object’s location.
7
To accept the default correction object and its default attributes, click OK.
•
Or, to create the correction object and assign attributes [11.B.2.B], clear the
Use Default Attributes box and click Attributes....
Figure 11-6 Edit Object dialog
1
2
3
4
•
•
Class: The classes available depend on the
chosen Set and Type.
Set: Correction classes are available in
sets:
S57: This set contains S57 objects.
11 CHART CORRECTION AND ENHANCEMENT
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Navigation: This set is a collection of
objects useful for navigation purposes
such as route planning and monitoring.
The correction classes available to you
vary by set. For example, text corrections
255
•
•
•
1
2
11.B.2.A
are available only in Navigation, and
soundings are available only in the S57
sets.
Type: Available types include:
Area: Places any traced polygon.
Line: Places any shape of line.Point: Places
a point on the chart.
Text: Places text on the chart; for example,
a navigator’s note.
Sounding: Places a sounding on the chart.
Name: Accept the default name or type a
new one.
Use Default Attributes: Clear to adjust the
correction’s attributes — its shape,
appearance, text, and other features.
A preview of the correction symbol
Click the appropriate option to work with
a point:
Add: Adds a new point. Click on the
display to generate the point.
Insert: Inserts a new point. Click on the
display or double-click a point in the list to
insert a point midway between that point
and the next one.
Delete: Deletes a selected point. Click the
point on the display or double-click the
point in the list.
Move: Moves a selected point. Select the
point from the list and click a new position
on the display.
Move Handle: Adjusts the position of the
selected area’s handle, that is, its selection
point used to move the entire area (see
3
4
•
•
•
•
Move Object). Select the handle’s position
in the list and click a new position on the
display This may be useful when several
areas overlap.
Move Object: Adjusts the position of the
entire area. Select the area’s position in
the list and click a new position on the
display.
The points that make up an object. Each
has a number and latitude and longitude.
Coordinates of the selected point. Click on
the display to generate coordinates or
enter using the keyboard. Click Accept or
OK to accept the coordinates, which then
appear in the list of points.
Accept: Enters the coordinates in the
adjacent boxes as a point.
Next: For area types, enables you to
combine shapes to expand or reduce the
initial area; for example, to create a donut
shape. Click Previous to return the other
shape(s).
Attributes…: Assigns attributes to the
object, or to view the attributes already
assigned. ECPINS displays an Attributes
dialog [figure 11-8]. This button is not
available if the correction class has no
attributes or if Use Default Attributes is
checked.
OK may not be available if, as a result of
editing the correction, the correction is not
valid.
Modifying a correction
You can locate and modify corrections on a chart.
To modify a correction:
1
In the named correction set dialog [figure 11-5], select the correction to
be modified and click Edit.... ECPINS displays the Edit Object dialog
[figure 11-6].
2
Modify the points that make up the correction.
•
•
•
•
256
If the correction is a point, click the single point and click a new location on
the display (or enter the latitude and longitude). An orange square indicates
the new position.
If the correction is an area or line, Add, Insert or Move points as necessary.
When a point is selected and the cursor is on the display, a electronic
bearing line (EBL) appears between the point’s current location and the
cursor location.
If, as a result of modifying points, the area becomes invalid, you cannot save
the changes (the Edit Object dialog’s OK button is not available).
11 CHART CORRECTION AND ENHANCEMENT
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Figure 11-7 Modifying a correction
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
11.B.2.B
Cursor position
Electronic bearing line between cursor and
the selected point (in this example, a point
correction).
3
4
5
Selected point — a buoy
The Move option is chosen.
Selected point (in this example, the
correction has a single point).
Choosing correction attributes
Each correction class may have visible attributes and information attributes;
that you are able to adjust [11.B.2.B]. For example, for a beacon correction
class, you are able to set characteristics such as the beacon’s colour, its height,
and its elevation. Some attributes are informational, in that they appear only
when you query [10.E] the correction.
Caution: Since you are able to adjust the attributes associated with a class and save the new
attributes as defaults, it is suggested that you scrutinize an unfamiliar correction class before
applying it to a chart.
Figure 11-8 Attributes dialog
1
2
4
3
1
2
3
•
Name of the manual correction
Attribute category. Choose a category to
view the available attributes. A correction
class may have several categories of
attributes, any or all of which you can
apply.
Attributes. Click to select. For some classes
and categories, you can select more than
one attribute.
Load Defaults: Applies the saved default
11 CHART CORRECTION AND ENHANCEMENT
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
4
•
Appearance of the manual correction on
the display [3.A.6.A]. The image changes
according to the category and attribute(s)
selected. Some attributes (such as
Category) control the display of other
attributes.
Save Defaults: Saves the selected
attributes as default selections for the
category.
selections to category.
257
Default attributes Attributes selected for a correction can be saved as
default attributes for that correction class. Any time you create a new
correction based on that correction class, the saved default attributes are
applied to the new correction.
Caution: Use default attributes with caution. Other users of the ECPINS system may not be
aware of unusual default settings and accept an incorrect default unknowingly.
Time-dependent attributes Some S57 correction classes (such as Caution
Area) enable you to assign to the correction a start and end date. Two types
of time periods are available: specified and periodic. A periodic time is where
the start and end dates recur over a given period; for example, the opening
day of Spring and the last day of Summer for a given duration of three years.
Attribute display The display of a correction’s attributes may depend on the
features that ECPINS is set to display.
Annotating Some correction classes have no attributes that enable you to
add additional information to the correction; for example, the Navigation
“Danger area” class. To annotate such a class, we recommend that you create
another correction, namely a “Mariner's Note “from Navigation “Text” type,
at the same point.
11.B.3
Correcting a chart feature
You can correct a chart feature [3.A.6] that exists on a vector chart. The
corrected chart feature is considered a manual correction. The original chart
feature remains on the display but is “crossed out”, that is, it has an orange
line through it. [figure 11-9]
258
11 CHART CORRECTION AND ENHANCEMENT
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Figure 11-9 Chart correction — moved chart feature
1
3
4
2
1
2
Charted feature: Flashing yellow light on a
breakwater
New coordinates of feature
3
4
Original position deleted (“crossed out”
by the orange line)
Correction indicator (the moved feature)
To correct a vector chart feature:
1
In the correction set dialog [figure 11-5], click Add From Chart…. ECPINS
displays the Select Object dialog [figure 11-10]. The dialog shows a list of
the chart features at the chart location selected.
2
Click the type of feature to be corrected: Area, Line, Point, or All (all of these)
and click on the display. A list of features appears in the box.
3
In the list, select the desired feature and click Modify. ECPINS displays the
Edit Object dialog [figure 11-6].
4
Edit the object.
•
When editing is complete, the list of corrections may display two entries: a
deleted feature (State = DEL) and a moved feature (State = MOV).
Note: Before correcting a chart feature, display all available chart features. This ensures that
non-visible features are not moved in error.
11 CHART CORRECTION AND ENHANCEMENT
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
259
Figure 11-10 Select Object dialog
•
11.B.4
Modify: Modifies the selected feature.
Available only if the correction set is
associated with one specific chart.
•
Delete: Deletes the selected feature.
Available only if the correction set is
associated with one specific chart.
Deleting a chart feature
You can delete a chart feature on a vector chart. The chart feature remains
on the display but is “crossed out”, that is, it has an orange line through it
[figure 11-11]. Deleting an original chart feature is reversible.
Figure 11-11 Deleted chart features
3
1
4
2
1
2
3
A deleted Point Buoy (“crossed out”)
Deletion indicator (an orange line)
A maritime boundary
4
Deletion indicator for the maritime
boundary
To delete a chart feature:
1
In the correction set dialog [figure 11-5], display or create a correction
set.
The correction set must apply to a specific chart.
Click Add From Chart…. ECPINS displays the Select Object dialog [figure 11-10].
The dialog shows a list of the chart features at the chart location selected.
•
2
3
Click the type of feature to be deleted: Area, Line, Point, or All (all of these)
and click on the display. A list of features appears in the box.
4
In the list, select the desired feature and click Delete. In the Correction Set
dialog, the State of the feature is “DEL” and on the display, the feature is
crossed out.
•
260
To reverse the deletion, select the feature and click Delete.
11 CHART CORRECTION AND ENHANCEMENT
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
11.C Viewing a correction
On the display, a manual correction (that is, a corrected or created chart
feature) is marked with a correction indicator [figure 11-12]. The correction
indicator warns you that the chart feature [3.A.6] is modified.
Note: You can view all of a correction’s information by querying the correction.
Figure 11-12 Corrected chart features
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
Corrected feature
Correction indicator.
A deleted feature
Deletion indicator
Under certain conditions, the correction
indicator is displayed even when the corrected
feature is not.
Figure 11-13 Correction display example 1
1
2
1
S57 correction class for Underwater/
Awash Rock point.
2
Correction indicator
3
4
Correction indicator
Orange circles are displayed along the line
when the correction is selected.
Figure 11-14 Correction display example 2
1
2
3
4
1
2
Correction class for an Underwater Danger
/Underwater Hazard area.
When the accuracy of the depth is
uncertain, the correction shows a question
mark.
Several conditions determine if ECPINS displays a correction:
a
Daymark with
name “bn 234"
b
The status of the correction set must be ON. To view or change the status
of a correction set, open the Corrections dialog [figure 11-3] by choosing >
Chart Corrections > Manual Corrections….
That type of feature must be set to display. To view or change displayed
features, open the Feature Settings dialog. For example, for the S57
11 CHART CORRECTION AND ENHANCEMENT
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
261
c
d
e
correction class “Daymark” to be displayed, ECPINS must be set to display
the Viewing Group “Daymarks and Topmarks”.
If the correction class has attributes, the features associated with those
attributes must be displayed. For example, for the S57 correction class
“Daymark”, you can enter a name as an attribute. To display that name,
ECPINS must be set to display the Text Group “Object Names”. The display
of some name attributes is controlled by Viewing Groups rather than Text
Groups.
If the correction applied to only one chart, that chart must be loaded.
If the correction class is subject to a minimum scale requirement
(SCAMIN), the display must be at that scale or larger (SCAMIN applies on
S57 charts).
Some attributes can determine not only which symbol is displayed for a
correction, but also which Viewing Group controls the display.
11.D Deleting a correction
You can delete any or all manual corrections. Deleting a correction is
permanent.
To delete a correction:
Delete the correction:
a
b
c
d
Choose > Chart Corrections > Manual Corrections…. ECPINS displays the
Corrections dialog.
Select the correction set from which the manual correction is to be deleted.
Click Edit Corrections…. ECPINS displays a list of the corrections in the set.
Select a correction and click Delete.
or
Delete the correction’s correction set:
a
b
In the Corrections dialog, select a correction set and click Delete.
Click Yes. All the corrections belonging to the selected correction set are
removed from the display.
11.E Copying corrections
You can transfer corrections between ECPINS systems or copy them for
storage outside ECPINS.
262
11 CHART CORRECTION AND ENHANCEMENT
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
To copy manual corrections from ECPINS:
1
Choose > Chart Corrections > Copy Corrections to Disk…. The Select Source Directory
dialog appears.
2
Double-click drives or folders until the desired folder is selected and click
Select. A list of correction sets available in the selected folder appears.
3
Select a correction set (double-click on the set) and click Copy.
To copy manual corrections to ECPINS:
1
Choose > Chart Corrections > Copy Corrections from Disk…. A list of available
correction sets appears [figure 11-15].
2
Select a correction set (double-click on the set) and click Copy. The Select
Destination Directory dialog appears.
3
Double-click drives or folders until the desired folder is selected and click
Select.
Figure 11-15 Copy Corrections dialog
1
1
11.E.1
A selected correction set (marked by an
asterisk)
Converting OSI corrections
Corrections created in earlier versions of ECPINS can be updated to the
current manual correction format. These earlier corrections are recognized by
the current version of ECPINS as “OSI corrections”.
Note: Converting OSI corrections should be done prior to a voyage to avoid disrupting system
operation.
To convert OSI chart corrections to correction format:
1
Choose > Chart Corrections > Import OSI Corrections….
The files to be imported can be stored on any local or network drive.
Follow instructions (press the left button) to start the conversion. When
the conversion is completed a message box indicates the number of files
converted.
•
2
•
OSI corrections apply only to those charts that were specifically updated and
not to all charts that share the update.
11 CHART CORRECTION AND ENHANCEMENT
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
263
11.F Summary of chart corrections
You can print out a summary of any or all the correction sets on an ECPINS
system [figure 11-16].
Figure 11-16 Chart Corrections Report example
•
Latitude/Longitude: The location of the
points that make up the chart feature. A Line
feature, such as a depth contour, may have a
large number of such points.
•
Date: The printout lists the corrections in
order of date made.
To print out a summary of chart corrections:
1
Choose > Chart Corrections > Print Chart Corrections Report.... The Print Chart
Corrections dialog appears.
2
Select (double-click) the correction sets to print out and click Print. The
Print Setup dialog appears.
3
Choose a printer and click OK. The printer prints the summary.
•
264
When you print more than one correction set, ECPINS starts each set on a
new page.
11 CHART CORRECTION AND ENHANCEMENT
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
12
12
Chart installation and
updating
ECPINS depends on electronic nautical charts for its geographical information
display. Making a chart available for use in ECPINS is a three-step process:
installation, processing, and loading [10.B] for viewing. Installation involves
copying the chart files to folders accessible to ECPINS. Before ECPINS can use
a chart file, it must prepare the chart for use by processing the data. Once a
chart is processed, ECPINS can load it for display on the screen.
For safe navigation, it is critical for you to keep installed charts up to date.
Updates are distributed regularly by the chart issuing authorities. The
updating procedure differs for each type of chart.
Note: To perform the procedures outlined in this chapter, the Maintenance Kit must be
connected to the ECPINS ACT system; otherwise, you will not see the menu options to perform
these tasks or have access to the external media.
12.A Data types
You can display the following types of spatial data in ECPINS:
a
Vector charts
i
S57 ENCs (electronic nautical chart): ECPINS uses the IHO's (International
Hydrographic Organization) S52 Edition 6.0 with Edition 3.4 Presentation
Library for colours and symbols and S57 Edition.3.1, 3.1.2 chart data.
ECPINS can also display S57 charts encrypted using S63 encryption. Includes
the following types:
• Seafarer ENC, from the Australian Hydrographic Service (AHS)
ii Admiralty Information Overlay (AIO) — Displays temporary and preliminary
notices on S57 charts that are unencrypted or encrypted with a GB Data
Server ID permit. Display or hide the AIO data using the Features Settings
(Viewing Groups > Admiralty Information Overlay) on the chart display
12 CHART INSTALLATION AND UPDATING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
265
menu [3.A.6.A]. AIO objects only appear if the associated chart (ENC
Affected chart) is loaded.
iii C-MAP (CM-93/3 format) [12.J]: For this format to be available, support
software must be installed on the ECPINS system. ECPINS integrates the
C-MAP SDK 4.5.
iv ESRI shapefile format
v Controlled Image Base (CIB) 1m, 5 m, and 10 m satellite imagery
vi National Geospatial-Intelligence Agency (NGA) data products:
• Digital Terrain Elevation Data (DTED)
• Compressed ARC Digitized Raster Graphics (CADRG) maps
• VMap and Urban Vector Map (UVMAP) products
• Feature Foundation Data (FFD) product
b
c
Raster charts — HCRF (Hydrographic Chart Raster Format)
i
ARCS, from the United Kingdom Hydrographic Office (UKHO)
ii NZMariner, navigational charts from Land Information New Zealand (LINZ)
iii Seafarer RNC (raster nautical chart), from the Australian Hydrographic
Service (AHS)
iv GBRMP RZC (Great Barrier Reef Marine Park Raster Zoning Charts)
v WA DPI (Western Australia Department for Planning and Infrastructure)
Raster charts — Maptech/BSB format
i
BSB [12.I] issued by the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration
(NOAA) and the Canadian Hydrographic Service (CHS)
For the purposes of a ECPINS system, this spatial data is packaged and
processed in the form of a “chart”. You must make charts available to ECPINS.
Figure 12-1 Examples of chart types displayed in ECPINS
266
S57
ARCS
AIO
Seafarer
NZMariner
C-MAP
12 CHART INSTALLATION AND UPDATING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
12.B Installing charts
Charts can be installed from an optical drive, network, or from a hard disk
drive.
Note: It is advisable to install the desired charts before starting a voyage. Installing can take
from several minutes to several hours, depending on the number of charts required for the
voyage.
Before installing your chart, review the following precautionary notes.
Caution:
i
If installing ARCS or Seafarer RNC charts, we recommend the permits for these charts
be installed BEFORE the charts [see 12.D, “ARCS/Seafarer/NZMariner chart
administration”].
ii Check that there is sufficient disk space on the hard drive before installing the desired
charts. If too many charts are installed at one time, the system may not operate
correctly because of insufficient disk space. Each full CD of charts requires about 1 GB
of disk space. (As a rough guide, a 1 MB chart requires 2 MB because of processing.)
To verify your disk space, see 7.C.3, “Monitoring the disk space”.
iii Do not install more than one copy of the same chart file. Always uninstall a chart
before installing a newer copy of the same chart. Having more than one copy in the
same format can cause undesired results when applying chart updates (ECPINS
updates only the first instance encountered). Problems can occur even if the charts are
saved in different folders.
iv Applying an S57 update or ARCS update can result in a new edition of the chart being
automatically installed.
To install charts:
If installing charts from a removable medium (CD, DVD, USB stick), place the
device into the optical drive or USB port.
Choose > Chart Selection > Chart Install > Install Charts…. The Install Charts dialog
appear [figure 12-2].
•
1
2
In the Select Source Folder list, find the folder that contains the desired chart
files.
If a lot of charts are available to install, we recommend that you choose a
Type of Chart; this refines the list.
From the Select Target Folder list, choose or create a target folder [see
12.B.1].
•
3
4
In the Select Charts list, select charts.
5
Click Install Charts. A dialog advises when installation is completed.
6
If a permit is not present on the ECPINS system for a chart designated for
installation, a message appears to that effect.
Click OK. A dialog advises that the system is updating the chart index.
When the chart index is updated, another dialog advises that ECPINS is
reloading any updated charts.
•
12 CHART INSTALLATION AND UPDATING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
267
Figure 12-2 Install Charts dialog
1
•
•
268
Select Source Folder:
Click a drive letter to open it. Drives,
including available network drives, are
given by a letter, for example, the system’s
main drive is usually c:, the CD drive d: or
e:.
Click a folder to open it.
Click Up to move back up the path. For
example, if the current path is
F:\Data\Charts, clicking Up returns
the current directory to F:\Data.
Search for Charts: Lists, in the Selected
Charts list, the chart files available in the
Selected Source Folder.
12 CHART INSTALLATION AND UPDATING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
•
1
•
•
•
Type of Charts: Restricts ECPINS’s search
for charts to the type chosen. To view CMAP charts, you must choose “C-MAP”.
Selected chart: To select several different
charts at once, hold down the Ctrl key (or
Shift) and click each chart. Any chart that
is completely contained within the new
chart-display area is automatically
selected.
Select Visible: Of the Selected Charts,
selects those charts that are visible in the
area covered by the ECPINS chart display
[10.A].
Create New: Creates a new target folder.
Select All: Selects all the charts in the list.
During installation, ECPINS updates its display to reflect the status of the
charts [figure 12-3].
Figure 12-3 Coloured chart outlines
1
2
1
12.B.1
Grey outline: Indicates the geographical
areas contained in the charts available on
the CD or disk but not as yet installed.
Also indicates a chart excluded from
automatic loading [see 10.B.5]. The chart
name is displayed inside the outline if the
2
chart-display scale is large enough
(zoomed in). Grey outlines are displayed
when the Install dialog is active.
Magenta outline: Indicates a previously
installed chart that is not currently loaded.
Target folders
When installing charts, you must choose a target folder into which to place
the data files [figure 12-2]. We recommend you create a separate folder for
each type of chart and area of coverage (which is often associated with a
numbered CD or edition); for example: “ENC-Hawaii”, “ARCS-RC8”. This type
of organization facilitates updating and the exclusion [10.B.5] of certain
types of charts from loading.
12.B.2
Installing ARCS, Seafarer RNC, and NZMariner charts
ARCS, Seafarer RNC, and NZMariner charts are distributed on CD [figure 124]. For copyright security and data integrity, these charts require a valid
license.
12 CHART INSTALLATION AND UPDATING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
269
Figure 12-4 ARCS chart CD
The type of ARCS license used in ECPINS is known as a “Navigator” license.
The number associated with this license is also used to order charts. Installing
the license is a once-only activity. The license is installed when you first install
permits from disk.
Each ARCS, Seafarer RNC, and NZMariner chart has a chart-specific license-touse or permit. For a chart to be displayed, its permit must first be installed in
ECPINS [12.B.2.B]. Permits must be renewed. Permits are distributed on disks.
12.B.2.A
Obtaining an ARCS or Seafarer RNC license
You obtain a license for an ARCS or Seafarer RNC chart from the issuing
authority; for example, UKHO. To provide a license, the authority needs the
ECPINS system’s user permit. You can send a copy of the user permit.
To find a system’s user permit:
12.B.2.B
1
Choose > Chart Selection > Licenses > ARCS/Seafarer/NZMariner > Display License
Info…. The Select HCRF Data Producer dialog appears.
2
Select the type of chart and click Select. A dialog displays license
information [figure 12-7].
3
Record the User Permit number.
Installing ARCS, Seafarer RNC, and NZMariner chart permits
A chart permit must be installed before a chart can be loaded. You can install
a chart permit from disk or by entering the permit using the keyboard.
Note: It is good practice to install all permits before installing charts.
Note: ECPINS automatically installs NZMariner chart permits when installing and updating
NZMariner charts.
To install a permit:
1
Choose > Chart Selection > Licenses > ARCS/Seafarer/NZMariner > Install New Permit
from Disk….
2
Follow the instructions to insert the permit disk in the disk drive. Press the
left button. When ECPINS has finished reading the permits, a dialog lists
all the chart permits on the disk.
If new chart permits were installed, a dialog indicates the number of permits
installed or any errors that occurred.
Click OK to continue.
•
3
270
12 CHART INSTALLATION AND UPDATING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
or
1
Choose > Chart Selection > Licenses > ARCS/Seafarer/NZMariner > Install New Permit
from Keyboard….
2
Follow instructions in the dialog [figure 12-5] to enter the chart permit
and click OK.
Figure 12-5 Enter New Permit From Keyboard dialog
•
12.B.3
Enter Permit: Enter the permit; for
example: 2001
++++907777a2d6148d78a3999dff17555
6b
Installing encrypted S57 charts
For copyright security and data integrity, some S57 charts are encrypted
(using S63 encryption). To load an encrypted chart, an ECPINS system requires
a license-to-use or “permit” for that chart. An S57 permit is for a specific
chart on a specific ECPINS system for a specified time period.
Note: You can install an encrypted S57 chart without a chart permit. However, a message will
appear to that effect. You can install the chart permits after installing the charts.
12.B.3.A
Obtaining an S57 chart permit
You obtain a permit for an S57 chart from the issuing authority; for example,
UKHO, Primar, IC-ENC. Each authority issues a unique permit; thus, one
ECPINS system with two copies of the same encrypted chart from two
different authorities would need a different permit for each chart.
To provide a permit, the authority needs the ECPINS system’s user permit. You
can send a copy of the user permit.
To find a system’s user permit:
12.B.3.B
1
Choose > Chart Selection > Licenses > S57 > Display User Permit.... The Display User
Permit dialog appears.
2
Read or copy (select the text and press Ctrl+C) the code in the User Permit
box.
Installing an S57 chart permit
A chart permit must be installed before a chart can be loaded. You can install
a permit from disk or by entering the permit using the keyboard.
Note: It is good practice to install all permits before installing charts.
To install a chart permit:
1
Choose > Chart Selection > Licenses > S57 > Install New Permit from Disk….
2
Use the dialog to select a folder that contains permit files. Click Select.
12 CHART INSTALLATION AND UPDATING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
271
3
If new permits were installed, a dialog indicates the number of permits
installed or any errors that occurred.
Click OK. The Installed Permits dialog appears.
4
Review the list and click Close.
•
or
12.B.4
1
Choose > Chart Selection > Licenses > S57 > Install New Permit from Keyboard….
2
Follow instructions in the dialog to enter the user permit and click OK. The
Installed Permits dialog appears.
3
Review the list and click Close.
Summary of installed charts
You can print out a list of all the charts of any given type installed on an
ECPINS system.
To print out a summary of installed charts:
1
Choose > Chart Selection > Print Chart Summary Report.... The Print Chart Summary
Report dialog appears.
2
Select the chart types to print out and click OK.
3
•
•
If applicable, use the Select All or Deselect All button.
•
When you choose to print more than one chart type, the list of chart type
starts at the top of a page.
If any of the selected chart types are not installed on the system, a message
appears to that effect.
In the Print Setup dialog choose a printer and click OK. The printer prints the
summary.
12.C Uninstalling charts
You can uninstall unwanted charts from ECPINS. Typically, you do this to free
up disk space for new charts.
To uninstall charts:
1
Choose > Chart Selection > Chart Install > Uninstall Charts…. The Uninstall Charts
dialog appears listing folders and their charts [see figure 12-6].
2
In the Folder list, choose a folder.
3
In the Select charts to uninstall list, select charts.
4
Click Uninstall. A dialog asks for confirmation.
5
Click OK. When uninstalling is complete, the selected charts are now
erased and the chart index is updated.
6
Click Exit. A dialog advises that the system is updating the chart index.
•
272
When the updating process is short, the dialog may appear only briefly.
12 CHART INSTALLATION AND UPDATING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Figure 12-6 Uninstall Charts dialog
12.D ARCS/Seafarer/NZMariner chart administration
You can use ECPINS to check the currency of HCRF charts (which includes
ARCS, Seafarer RNC, and NZMariner), get chart license and permit status, and
verify the integrity of the chart data. This information is particularly useful
for troubleshooting should ARCS, Seafarer RNC, or NZMariner data not
display properly.
12.D.1
Checking data
You can verify the integrity of HCRF charts installed in ECPINS and generate a
report on them. Among other things, the report enables you to see which
charts have been updated and when and which charts are cancelled.
To verify that the HCRF chart data is current:
Choose > Chart Selection > Licenses > ARCS/Seafarer/NZMariner > List and Verify HCRF
Charts.... ECPINS checks each HCRF chart type in turn. When verification for
each chart type is complete, ECPINS displays a List and Verify Chart Data dialog
for each chart type. This dialog includes the following information:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Chart: Chart number
FID: File issue date
Permit to: Year and month of expiry date
Checksum Status: Verification status
Latest Update: (year/month/day) The most recent update applied to this
chart
Latest NTM: Notice to mariners — year and update number
Source CD: CD number
12 CHART INSTALLATION AND UPDATING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
273
12.D.2
Displaying license information
You can check that the license is the correct type and licensed to the correct
vessel.
To display license information on HCRF charts:
1
Choose > Chart Selection > Licenses > ARCS/Seafarer/NZMariner > Display License
Info…. The Select HCRF Data Producer dialog appears.
2
Select the type of chart and click Select. A dialog displays license
information [figure 12-7].
Figure 12-7 ARCS License Information
•
12.D.3
User Permit: Unique to the system on
which it is used.
•
License Type: The type of ARCS license
used in ECPINS is known as a “Navigator”
license.
Displaying permit information
You can use ECPINS to view a list of valid chart permits currently installed and
their expiry date.
To display a list of valid chart permits:
1
Choose > Chart Selection > Licenses > ARCS/Seafarer/NZMariner > Display Permit
Information for Charts…. ECPINS checks for permits for — in order — ARCS,
Seafarer RNC, WA DPI, GBRMPA, and NZMariner charts. When
verification is completed, a dialog appears with a list of installed permits
[figure 12-8].
2
Click OK to display the next 1000 permits.
Or, scroll through the list of installed permits using the scroll bar.
To exit, click Cancel.
•
3
•
274
If the dialog with the final list of charts is displayed, Cancel is greyed out.
Click OK to exit.
12 CHART INSTALLATION AND UPDATING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Figure 12-8 Installed ARCS Chart Permits dialog
12.D.3.A
Checking for invalid chart permits
A valid chart permit is one that has not expired or is specific to a chart that is
not cancelled. An invalid permit is one whose expiry date has passed, or its
chart was cancelled. You can view a list of invalid chart permits and delete
them from the system.
Caution: If an ARCS permit has expired for more than a month, the related chart cannot be
displayed.
To remove invalid permits:
1
Choose > Chart Selection > Licenses > ARCS/Seafarer/NZMariner > Verify Permits…. A
dialog asks for confirmation.
2
Press the left button. A dialog appears when verification is complete. It
lists all charts that are no longer valid [figure 12-9].
3
Click Remove to delete the listed unusable permits.
•
•
The dialog displays only 1000 permits at a time.
If there are more than 1000 invalid permits, ECPINS deletes the permits and
displays a new list of 1000. Click OK to delete those permits. When all
permits are deleted, the dialog closes.
12 CHART INSTALLATION AND UPDATING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
275
Figure 12-9 Dialog listing all invalid chart permits
12.D.3.B
Backing up chart permit files
A working copy of the permit files should be made for use, and the original
disk saved. If the permit files copied to ECPINS are corrupted or destroyed,
the working copy can be used to restore the files.
To back up permit files:
1
Choose > Chart Selection > Licenses > ARCS/Seafarer/NZMariner > Backup Permit Files
to Disk….
2
Follow instructions and insert a disk in the disk drive. Press the left
button. When copying is completed, a dialog advises that permits are
backed up.
To restore backed up permit files to ECPINS:
1
Choose > Chart Selection > Licenses > ARCS/Seafarer/NZMariner > Restore Permit Files
from Disk….
2
Follow instructions and insert the working copy of the permit files into
the disk drive. Press the left button. A dialog advises when restoration is
completed.
12.E Encrypted S57 chart administration
You can use ECPINS to check the currency of encrypted S57 charts (using S63
encryption), get user permit and chart permit status, and verify the integrity
of the chart data. This information is particularly useful for troubleshooting
should encrypted S57 data not load properly.
276
12 CHART INSTALLATION AND UPDATING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
12.E.1
Displaying S57 chart permit information
You can view information for all of the S57 chart permits that are currently
installed on your system.
To display information on S57 chart permits:
1
Choose > Chart Selection > Licenses > S57 > View S63 Permits…. The View Permits
dialog appears with a list of installed permits [figure 12-11].
2
Filter the list, as needed, using the Scheme Administrator, Status, and Contains
fields.
Figure 12-10 View Permits dialog
1
1
•
•
12.E.1.A
Chart permits and expiry date
Scheme Administrator: Displays all charts
or charts from a specific scheme
administrator.
Status: Displays valid, invalid or all
permits.
•
•
Sort: Sorts the permit list by cell ID or
expiry date.
Search: Filters the list by the text entered
in the Contains field. The filter scans the
chart names.
Checking for valid S57 chart permits
You can use ECPINS to view a list of valid S57 chart permits currently installed.
The list shows each chart permit’s expiry date.
To display a list of valid chart permits:
Choose > Chart Selection > Licenses > S57 > Display Permit Information for All
Charts…. ECPINS checks for permits for encrypted S57 charts. When
verification is completed, a dialog appears with a list of installed permits
[figure 12-11].
Figure 12-11 View Chart Permit Information dialog
1
2
1
2
Chart name
Chart permit expiry date
12 CHART INSTALLATION AND UPDATING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
•
Search: Filters the list by the text entered
in the adjacent box. The filter scans the
chart names.
277
12.E.1.B
Checking for invalid S57 chart permits
A valid chart permit is one that has not expired or is specific to a chart that is
not cancelled. An invalid permit is one whose expiry date has passed, or its
chart was cancelled.
To check for invalid permits:
12.E.1.C
1
Choose > Chart Selection > Licenses > S57 > Verify S63 Permits….
2
The Verify Permits dialog appears when verification is complete. It lists all
charts that are no longer valid.
3
Click Remove to delete the listed unusable permits.
Removing S57 chart permits
You can view information for all of the S57 chart permits that are currently
installed on your system.
To remove S57 chart permits:
1
Choose > Chart Selection > Licenses > S57 > Remove S63 Permits…. The Remove
Permits dialog appears with a list of installed permits [figure 12-12].
2
Filter the list, as needed, using the Scheme Administrator, Status, and Contains
fields.
3
Click to select one or more permits from the list.
4
Selected permits are displayed in yellow text.
5
Click Remove. A confirmation dialog with a list of the selected permits
appears [figure 12-13].
6
In the confirmation dialog, click Remove.
7
Click Close to close the Remove Permits dialog.
Figure 12-12 Remove Permits dialog
1
1
Remove: Removes the selected permits.
Figure 12-13 Remove Permits confirmation dialog
278
12 CHART INSTALLATION AND UPDATING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
12.E.1.D
Backing up S57 chart permit files
A working copy of the chart permit files should be made for use, and the
original disk saved. If the permit files copied to ECPINS are corrupted or
destroyed, the working copy can be used to restore the files.
To back up chart permit files:
1
Choose > Chart Selection > Licenses > S57 > Backup Permits to Disk….
2
Designate the disk drive or removable media.
•
When copying is completed, a dialog advises that permits are backed up.
To restore backed up chart permit files to ECPINS:
1
Choose > Chart Selection > Licenses > S57 > Restore Permits from Disk….
2
Designate the disk drive or removable media.
•
12.E.2
A dialog appears when the restoration is successfully completed.
Maintaining the S57 digital certificate public key
A public key is issued by an issuing authority such as PRIMAR. OSI distributes
public keys by installing a current set with ECPINS software. When ECPINS
loads an encrypted S57 chart (S63), it attempts to match the chart’s digital
certificate to a public key.
To install a new public key:
1
Choose > Chart Selection > Licenses > S57 > Install New Public Key from Disk….
If an existing key with the same name is on your system, a warning dialog
appears. Click Yes to continue.
In the Enter Public Key Info dialog, accept the default names or enter a new
SA Name [figure 12-14]. Click OK.
•
2
3
When the public key is successfully installed, the S63 SA Public Key Install
dialog appears. Click OK.
•
You must restart your system for the new public key to take effect.
Figure 12-14 Enter Public Key Info dialog
Should ECPINS warn of a failed S57 chart digital certificate authentication
process, you may be asked by the issuing authority to confirm the public key
in use by the ECPINS system to authenticate encrypted S57 chart digital
certificates.
To confirm the public key(s) in use:
Choose > Chart Selection > Licenses > S57 > Display Public Keys…. A dialog
appears listing the issuing authorities for which ECPINS has public keys.
If required, the public keys can be removed.
12 CHART INSTALLATION AND UPDATING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
279
To remove a public key:
1
Choose > Chart Selection > Licenses > S57 > Remove Public Keys…. A dialog
appears listing the issuing authorities for which ECPINS has public keys.
2
Select a Scheme Administrator and click OK.
3
In the dialog displaying the public key, click Remove. A warning dialog
appears.
4
Click Yes to remove the public key.
5
In the confirmation dialog, click OK.
When public keys are removed, they are copied to the
“\data\licenses\S57\Deleted” directory. A user with the appropriate ECPINS
privileges can recover the public keys from this directory.
To recover removed public keys:
1
Choose > Chart Selection > Licenses > S57 > Recover Removed Public Keys…. A
dialog appears listing the public keys found in the
“\data\licenses\S57\Deleted” directory.
2
Select a public key file and click Select.
3
In the Enter Public Key Info dialog, enter a new SA Name and SA Name
Abbreviation [figure 12-14]. Click OK.
4
When the public key is successfully installed, the S63 SA Public Key Install
dialog appears. Click OK.
12.F Updating S57 charts and AMLs
S57and AML updates are normally issued on a disk or a CD.
Caution: Do not use two sources of updates at the same time, for example, a disk and a CD.
ECPINS recognizes only one source of updates at any given time. In fact, the disk containing
updates has priority over the CD with updates. So if a disk and a CD are inserted in the system,
ECPINS only recognizes the disk.
To update S57 charts and AMLs:
1
Choose > Chart Corrections > Update Charts…. A dialog lists the types of charts.
2
Select”S57”. A dialog asks for the update disk or optical disc to be
inserted.
3
Follow instructions and insert the update disk in the drive. A dialog
indicates that the system is searching for S57 charts to update. This
activity can take several minutes.
Another dialog indicates that the system is generating a new System
Electronic Navigational Chart (SENC). Generation of a new SENC ensures
that the update is successfully installed.
If there are any update problems, for example, edition or producers
mismatch, a dialog appears with the information.
After generating the updated SENC(s), ECPINS displays an Updating Session
Summary Report [figure 12-15]. Click OK.
•
4
280
12 CHART INSTALLATION AND UPDATING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
•
•
If the updates caused a chart to be cancelled, ECPINS displays a dialog
containing a list of cancelled charts (entitled “The following charts have
been cancelled”). Click OK to uninstall the cancelled charts. You may wish
to retain cancelled charts for use by ECPINS; in this case, click Cancel.
After updating is complete, ECPINS may display the Install Charts dialog. In
the dialog, ECPINS offers to install any charts found on update CD that are
not installed on the system.
Note: We recommend you rescan [8.D.1] the routes after updating the charts.
Figure 12-15 Updating Session Summary Report
12.F.1
Reviewing S57 updates
After updating, you may choose to review each update on an S57 chart.
To review updates on an S57 chart:
1
Display the chart(s) for review (choose > Chart Selection > Load Charts…).
2
Choose > Chart Corrections > Review Chart Updates…. A list of loaded charts
appears.
3
From the list, select the chart for review and click Select. ECPINS displays
the Update Log for Chart dialog [figure 12-16].
4
Select the update for review and click Select. ECPINS displays the Updated
Features Summary dialog for the selected feature [figure 12-17], for
example, “1. DELETED Depth area”.
5
Select an update action and click Select. ECPINS displays the Updated Feature
Detail dialog for the selected feature. On the display, ECPINS highlights
the updated feature in red [figure 12-18].
12 CHART INSTALLATION AND UPDATING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
281
Figure 12-16 Update Log for Chart dialog
1
2
1
The name of the updated chart (in this
case, CA273094).
Figure 12-17 Summary of updated features
282
12 CHART INSTALLATION AND UPDATING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
2
An update
Figure 12-18 Updated area feature highlight and detail
1
2
1
The extent of the updated area (in this
example, a deleted depth area).
If the chart scale is not large enough, only
the highlighting appears at the centre of
the chart display. To see the update,
increase the chart scale by zooming in.
Zooming in too far on a line update can
result in the line update not being
2
displayed within the chart display. Other
chart features can disappear as well when
zoomed in too far (beyond the minimum
scale).
Detailed information about the selected
updated feature (1. DELETED Depth Area).
The information may contain a chart note.
12.G Updating ARCS, Seafarer RNC, and NZMariner
charts
ARCS, Seafarer RNC, and NZMariner chart updates are distributed on CD
[figure 12-19]. Updating should be performed when an update CD is received
or you download the files from the internet. Update CDs are cumulative.
Installing the latest update provides a complete update even if an earlier
update CD was not used.
Note: An Admiralty Updating Service (on-line service) is also available to subscribers of the
Admiralty digital chart services. This service provides access to the latest digital chart updates
over the Internet, either directly or via and e-mail service.
12 CHART INSTALLATION AND UPDATING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
283
Figure 12-19 ARCS update package
1
1
A CD with weekly updates
An ARCS update package may include a disk containing permits. These
permits are required when replacing outdated charts by their updated
version. We recommend ARCS permits be loaded from the disks immediately
on receiving them.
Caution: Permits on the disk must be installed [12.B.2.B] before the chart-updating step.
Otherwise, some charts will be unavailable for use by ECPINS. The reason is that if the permits
are not installed, ECPINS does not install the updated charts.
Warning: Failure to install permits on the disk before the chart updating step may render some
already installed charts unavailable for use by ECPINS. This is because ECPINS takes updated
charts from the CD and replaces the corresponding outdated chart in ECPINS. If the permit
(which comes on the disk) for the updated chart is not installed in ECPINS, ECPINS will not
install (and thus display) that chart.
To update ARCS, Seafarer RNC, and NZMariner charts (already installed):
1
If the update package includes a disk, install the permits from this disk.
2
Some update packages do not include a disk with permits. Permits are only
necessary to install a replacement, that is updated, version of a chart.
• During installation of chart permits, some permits for charts previously
installed may be replaced or cancelled.
Choose > Chart Corrections > Update Charts…. A dialog lists the types of charts.
3
Choose ARCS/Seafarer/NZMariner. A dialog with instructions appears.
4
Insert the update CD in the CD drive and press the left button. When
updating is completed, a dialog lists the updated charts.
•
A warning appears if an update is more than two weeks old (ARCS), or more
than 90 days old (Seafarer RNC). If a date warning appears, check to see if a
more recent update disk is available.
• If there are no charts updated, a message is displayed.
• If the updates caused a chart to be cancelled, ECPINS displays a dialog
containing a list of cancelled charts (entitled “The following charts have
been cancelled”). Click OK to uninstall the cancelled charts. You may wish to
retain cancelled charts for use by ECPINS; in this case, click Cancel.
Click OK. ECPINS displays a message box that it is updating the chart
index. When reloading is completed, a message box advises that
reloading of the charts is completed.
•
5
•
284
If the updates have already been installed, a dialog informs you that the
update CD has been installed.
12 CHART INSTALLATION AND UPDATING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
•
While updating charts, ECPINS may request the CD containing the latest
version(s) of any outdated chart(s). The label for the CD varies according to
chart region.
To update an outdated chart:
1
Remove the update CD and insert the requested CD for the region, for
example, latest version of “RC7 CD”. Press the left button. When the
outdated charts have been replaced, a dialog asks for the update CD.
2
Insert the update CD in the CD drive and press the left button. When
updating is completed a dialog advises that the system is reloading the
updated charts. When reloading is completed, ECPINS displays a dialog
listing the charts that were updated or replaced.
3
Click OK. A dialog lists the updates that were done.
4
Click OK. A dialog advises that the system is reloading the updated charts.
When reloading is completed, a dialog advises that reloading of the
charts is completed.
12.H Reviewing raster chart updates
You can examine updated areas on loaded raster charts.
12.H.1
Highlighting updated chart areas
You can have the updated areas on ARCS, NZMariner, BSB, or Seafarer RNC
charts highlighted.
To highlight updated areas:
1
Ensure that the chart(s) to be examined is loaded [10.B].
2
Choose > Setup > Display Setup > Highlight Raster Updates. On the chart, raster
updates are enclosed in an orange rectangle [figure 12-20].
•
•
Information on the specific update contained in the orange rectangle is not
available.
To turn off the highlighting, choose Highlight Raster Updates again.
12 CHART INSTALLATION AND UPDATING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
285
Figure 12-20 Highlighted raster update
1
1
12.H.2
The raster update is highlighted by an
orange rectangle.
Reviewing an updated location
You can view a list of a chart's updates. Also, you can examine any location
on a chart that has been updated.
To examine a specific chart update:
1
Ensure that the chart to be examined is loaded [10.B].
2
Choose > Chart Corrections > Review Chart Updates…. A list of loaded charts
appears.
3
Select a chart from the list and click Select. ECPINS displays a list of updates
for the selected chart.
4
Select an update from the list. On the chart, ECPINS highlights the
location of the update in red [figure 12-21] [figure 12-22].
•
•
286
Some BSB charts also display an inset of the original area in Source-Up
(SUP) mode before the area was updated. For NCE and CHT patches, the
inset area is identical to the updated patch.
If you have also chosen to highlight raster updates [12.H.1], an orange
rectangle may appear around the updated area.
12 CHART INSTALLATION AND UPDATING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Figure 12-21 ARCS chart update with inset and red highlight example 1
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
Update highlighted
Red highlight
Inset of original location in SUP mode
12 CHART INSTALLATION AND UPDATING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
4
Orange rectangle. The orange rectangle
appears because you have also chosen to
highlight raster updates
287
Figure 12-22 BSB chart update with inset and red highlight example 2
12.I BSB charts
An ECPINS system can display BSB charts under the following conditions:
a
a
b
The chart CD is registered [12.I.1] with Maptech or, in Canada, Digital
Ocean.
The chart CD is registered for use on the ECPINS system [12.I.2].
The charts are installed [12.I.3].
To keep BSB charts current, you can get updates via the Internet.
Note: Setting up BSB chart usage requires access to the file system on the ECPINS system;
such access may only be available to a qualified technician [Ap.G].
12.I.1
Registering a BSB edition 4 chart CD
In order to use a BSB edition 4 chart CD, the purchaser must register it with
the producer, Maptech. You will need the following information:
a
b
A Product ID: Provided with the chart CD.
An Installation ID: This identifies the computer. It does not change.
When a CD is registered, Maptech provides an Activation Code.
288
12 CHART INSTALLATION AND UPDATING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
You can register a BSB edition 4 chart CD during the process of activating the
CD [12.I.2].
12.I.2
Activating a BSB edition 4 chart CD on an ECPINS
system
You must activate a BSB edition 4 chart CD for use on a particular system.
To activate a BSB edition 4 chart CD:
1
Insert the BSB edition 4 chart CD into the computer. An installation
“wizard” appears.
If no wizard appears: In Windows, on the chart CD, locate and run the file
“Register” [12.I.1]. A Chart Installation and Registration dialog
appears. Click Register Chart CD.
Follow the instructions presented.
•
2
If a Check Registration dialog appears, click OK.
In the Welcome dialog, choose ON THIS COMPUTER.
•
3
Choose ON THIS COMPUTER USING AUTOMATED INTERNET REGISTRATION
only if a MapTech Account is not set up at www.maptech.com.
• Choose ON A DIFFERENT COMPUTER to register the chart CD for use on
another computer.
On the next dialog, enter the registration information requested.
•
4
Of the registration information required (Product ID, Installation ID, and
Activation Code), the Activation Code is provided by Maptech when the CD
is registered.
Follow instructions to complete the wizard.
•
5
•
12.I.3
For a Digital Ocean BSB edition 4 chart CD, skip installation of other
software.
Installing BSB edition 4 charts
With BSB charts registered, you can install BSB charts using the same
procedure [12.B] as other chart types.
12.I.4
Updating BSB edition 4 charts
Once BSB charts are registered and installed, you can keep them up to date
by getting chart updates from Maptech by Internet and installing the
updates in ECPINS.
To get BSB edition 4 chart updates:
1
In a Web browser, go to “http://www.maptech.com/”.
2
Click Registration.
3
Sign in to a Maptech account.
4
Locate the product to be updated and click Download.
5
Check the updated charts desired and click Download Selected Charts.
6
Save the file (a.zip file) to a disk. The file contains a set of updated BSB
chart files.
12 CHART INSTALLATION AND UPDATING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
289
If possible, save the zip file to a folder on the ECPINS system.
Unzip the contents of the zip file (double-click it and copy the contents)
to a folder on the ECPINS system.
•
7
•
The default location is “C:\ChartKit\BSBChart”.
To install BSB edition 4 chart updates:
1
In ECPINS, choose > Chart Selection > Chart Install > Install Charts…. The Install
Charts dialog appears.
2
In Type of Charts, choose “BSB”.
3
In the Select Source Folder list, locate and select the folder that contains the
unzipped, updated BSB chart files.
4
Click Search for Charts.
5
Click Select All. ECPINS selects all the charts.
6
From the Select Target Folder list, choose the folder that contains the
outdated chart files.
7
Click Install Charts. A dialog advises when installation is completed.
8
Click OK. ECPINS updates the chart index.
After completing the update process, it is acceptable to delete the zip file
and the folder containing the unzipped, updated chart files.
Caution: If the updated chart files are installed in a folder other than the one that contains
outdated chart files, ECPINS may display the outdated charts.
•
12.J C-MAP charts
An ECPINS system can display C-MAP charts when all of the following
conditions are met:
a
b
c
d
C-Map utility software is installed on the ECPINS system.
A C-MAP chart database is installed on the ECPINS system.
Licenses for the C-MAP charts are installed in ECPINS using an eToken.
You have installed the C-MAP charts in ECPINS and ECPINS has processed
and loaded the charts.
To set up an ECPINS system to use C-MAP charts, do the following in strict
order:
1
Decide which chart licensing eToken (32k or Java) you will use, but do not
install it [12.J.1].
2
Uninstall prior versions of the C-MAP program [12.J.2].
3
Install the C-MAP utility software on the ECPINS system computer [12.J.3].
4
Install a C-MAP chart database [12.J.4].
5
Register the C-MAP chart database so that licensing applies to it [12.J.5].
6
Install chart licenses to the database:
Non-dynamic licensing [12.J.6]
Dynamic Licensing [12.J.7]
Install C-MAP charts [12.J.8].
•
•
7
290
12 CHART INSTALLATION AND UPDATING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Once you have C-MAP charts installed and displayed on the system, you can
keep them up to date using one of several methods, including getting
updates via the Internet.
Caution: Setting up C-MAP chart usage requires access to the file system on an ECPINS system;
such access may only be available to a qualified technician.
12.J.1
C-MAP chart licensing
In preparation for using C-MAP charts, you must determine which C-MAP
license you have: C-Map eToken 32k or C-MAP eToken Java. This information
is imprinted on the eToken as PRO 32k or PRO 72k (JAVA). Your eToken
System ID name also identifies the license type as eT (32k) or JeT (Java).
The eToken license is a hardware “eToken” from C-MAP that plugs into the
computer’s USB port. The computer must be running Windows 2000 or
Windows XP. You must provide the eToken number to C-MAP to purchase
chart licenses. C-MAP provides licenses as files with the extension “.usr”.
These licenses must be copied to a location connected to the computer (such
as the computer’s hard disk or a network drive) for you to install them.
Connect the eToken to the USB port only at the step indicated in the
following instructions.
Warning: You must install a C-MAP chart database BEFORE installing a chart license. It is your
responsibility to obtain chart licenses from C-MAP. Before doing so, you should ensure that
C-MAP utility software is installed on the system on which the licenses are to be used.
12.J.2
Uninstalling C-Map program files
Caution: This procedure is only for systems with prior installations of the C-Map program files.
Before installing the C-Map Utilities, any old version of C-Map program and
eToken Run Time Environment 3.66 (or prior releases) must be uninstalled.
To uninstall C-Map program files:
1
2
3
4
5
6
On the ECPINS client computer, ensure that all applications are shut
down.
In Windows Explorer, choose Start > Control Panel > Add or Remove Programs.
Select C-Map Professional SDK Runtime <#.#>.
Click Remove.
When asked "Would you like to keep the C-Map databases, updates and
licenses that are already installed and being used?", click No.
When asked "Do you really want to remove all user data?", click Yes.
12 CHART INSTALLATION AND UPDATING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
291
Now you uninstall the eToken PKI Client.
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
12.J.3
In Windows Explorer, choose Start > Control Panel > Add or Remove Programs.
Select eToken PKI Client 5.1 SP1.
Click Remove.
When asked “Are you sure you want to remove eToken PKI Client 5.1 SP1
from your computer?", click Yes.
In the confirmation dialog box stating “Continue with the uninstallation.
When uninstallation is complete, you must restart the computer.”, click
OK.
When asked "Would you like to save the eToken PKI Client settings on
this computer?", click No.
Restart your computer to finish uninstalling the C-Map programs.
Installing C-MAP utility software
For an ECPINS system to display C-MAP charts, C-MAP Utilities must be
installed on that system. These utilities, made by C-MAP and redistributed by
OSI Maritime Systems, are available on the ECPINS Software optical disc.
To install C-MAP Utilities:
Caution: Before proceeding, ensure that all application are closed and that there is no C-MAP
eToken connected to the computer. Connect the eToken only at the step indicated in this
installation procedure.
1
2
3
Insert the ECPINS Software optical disc into the ECPINS system.
• If the ECPINS installation window appears, cancel the process and close the
window.
• Make a new directory called “CMAP install 4.5” on your local hard drive.
• Copy files located in the folder “Utilities\CMAP” on the ECPINS Software
optical disc to the newly created directory “CMAP install 4.5” on your
local hard drive.
Navigate to the “CMAP install 4.5” directory on your hard drive and
double-click the Setup.exe file.
A Setup dialog box appears. Insert the C-MAP eToken into the USB port
and click Yes.
Figure 12-23 eToken Setup dialog box
292
12 CHART INSTALLATION AND UPDATING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
After inserting the eToken, a Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box will
open asking "Can Windows connect to Windows Update to search for
software?". Click Cancel.
The C-Map Professional SDK Runtime 4.5 Setup dialog box [figure 12-24]
appears. Click Install.
•
4
Figure 12-24 C-Map Professional SDK 4.5 Setup dialog box
5
In the dialog box [figure 12-25], identify your eToken type by selecting
either the eToken PRO(Java) or eToken PRO(32k) button.
Figure 12-25 eToken Run Time Environment dialog box
6
The C-Map Professional SDK Runtime 4.5 Setup Wizard [figure 12-26]
appears. Click Next.
Figure 12-26 C-Map Professional SDK Runtime 4.5 Setup dialog
7
The dialog box [figure 12-27] now prompts for the destination of the
program to be installed in. Click Next.
12 CHART INSTALLATION AND UPDATING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
293
Figure 12-27 Setup dialog box prompting for location
•
8
9
The folder field is filled in with a default
location.
The setup program is now ready for installation. Click Install to begin the
installation and copying of files.
The installation program now prompts for the screen dimensions
[figure 12-28]. This screen calibration value is not required, so just click OK
to continue.
Figure 12-28 Calibrate the Screen dialog
10 When the SDK Runtime dialog completes its installation, click Finish.
11 The next dialog box is the C-Map Professional SDK 4.5 Setup Wizard
[figure 12-29]. This SDK does not need to be installed, so just click Cancel.
294
12 CHART INSTALLATION AND UPDATING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Figure 12-29 C-Map Professional SDK 4.5 Setup Wizard
12 When asked "Are you sure you want to cancel C-Map Professional SDK
4.5 installing?", click Yes.
13 Click Finish to exit the SDK Setup Wizard.
14 The original Setup dialog box appears. Verify that steps 1 and 2 have
check marks [figure 12-30] and then click Exit.
Figure 12-30 C-Map Professional SDK 4.5 Setup Status
Caution: If the check marks are not displayed by steps 1 and 2, uninstall the C-MAP program
files [see 12.J.2] and repeat this installation process [see 12.J.3].
12.J.4
Installing a C-MAP chart database
C-MAP charts are available from a database. C-MAP issues several types of
databases, each of which contains a large collection of charts. Of the several
types of databases C-MAP issues, ECPINS supports “Jeppesen PRIMAR”,
“ENC”, “Professional+”, and “Professional” (formerly named “World”). You
can install any or all types.
Note: ECPINS recognizes C-MAP ENC as “official” chart data.
12 CHART INSTALLATION AND UPDATING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
295
To install and automatically register a C-MAP chart database (Jeppesen
PRIMAR, ENC, Professional+, or Professional):
Using Windows Explorer, create a new folder on the computer’s hard drive
to hold the C-MAP chart databases; for example, “D:\C-MAPDB”.
Insert a C-MAP database CD/DVD into the computer’s CD/DVD ROM drive.
•
1
2
In ECPINS, choose > Chart Selection > Licenses > C-MAP.... The C-MAP Chart
Manager dialog appears. Select the Databases tab to display the Databases
page [figure 12-31].
Figure 12-31 C-MAP Chart Manager dialog: Databases page
•
•
Registered databases: Lists the registered
databases available.
Search automatically: Searches for C-MAP
databases on a given drive.
•
Register manually: User has to manually
enter the path of the C-MAP database for
Chart Manager to register it.
Set as Default: To make the selected
database the default database.
3
Click Register manually. A Browse for Folder dialog appears.
4
Select the source C-MAP database in the CD/DVD.
a
b
296
•
Expand the CD/DVD ROM drive (click the “+”).
If it’s a Professional+ database, select subfolder CM93_3 folder. If it’s an ENC
database, select subfolder C93_ROOT folder [figure 12-32].
12 CHART INSTALLATION AND UPDATING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Figure 12-32 Browse for Folder dialog with subfolder selected
1
1
The database is recognized by the system
after selecting the subfolder in the CD/
DVD ROM drive.
In the Browse for Folder dialog, click OK.
d A dialog appears asking “Would you like to copy the database to a local
hard drive?”. Click Yes. A Browse for Folder dialog appears.
Choose a destination for the database on the computer’s hard drive:
c
5
Expand the “[D:]” folder (click the “+”).
b In the [D:] folder, select the folder you created: “C-MAPDB” or “C-MAP”.
c
Click OK.
The database is copied from the C-MAP CD/DVD to the hard drive.
a
The copying process may take some time.
When copying is complete, a message displays “Database registration was
successful”. Click OK. The C-MAP Chart Manager dialog refreshes with the
copied database in the Registered databases list [figure 12-33].
•
6
Figure 12-33 C-MAP Chart Manager with installed databases
7
Click Close to exit.
12 CHART INSTALLATION AND UPDATING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
297
12.J.5
Registering a C-MAP database
For the charts in a C-MAP database to be available for installation in ECPINS,
you must register the database.
When you first install a database, C-MAP Chart Manager registers it
automatically. You can register only one of each type of database (ENC,
Professional+, Professional, Jeppesen PRIMAR) at a time. If you would like to
register another database of a particular type, you must first unregister any
existing databases of that type.
To register a database:
1
In ECPINS, choose > Chart Selection > Licenses > C-MAP.... The C-MAP Chart
Manager dialog appears. Select the Databases tab to display the Databases
page [see figure 12-31].
2
Click Register manually. A Browse for Folder dialog appears.
3
Select the source C-MAP database.
a
b
Expand the selected drive (click the “+”).
If it’s a Professional+ database, select subfolder CM93_3 folder. If it’s an ENC
database, select subfolder C93_ROOT folder.
• If there is no subfolder, select the main database folder
[figure 12-34].
Figure 12-34 Browse for Folder dialog with main database folder selected
1
1
The system recognizes the database after
selecting the main database folder when
there is no subfolder within it.
c
d
e
298
Click OK in the Browse for Folder dialog.
A dialog pops up asking “Would you like to copy the database to a local
hard drive?”. Click No.
• If the database is already located on the local hard drive, this pop up
will not be displayed.
When registration is complete, a message displays “Database registration
was successful”. Click OK. The C-MAP Chart Manager dialog refreshes with the
copied database in the Registered databases list [figure 12-33].
12 CHART INSTALLATION AND UPDATING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
To unregister a database:
•
12.J.6
In C-MAP Chart Manager’s Databases page, select the database’s entry in
the Registered databases list [figure 12-33]. Click Unregister database.
C-MAP Chart Manager removes the database entry from the list.
Installing C-MAP chart licenses
While a C-MAP chart database contains many charts, ECPINS can display only
those charts for which licenses are installed. A chart license permits a
particular computer system to display one C-MAP chart area. An area
contains between one and several hundred charts.
With C-MAP 4.5, ENC and Jeppesen PRIMAR charts can be licensed in two
ways:
a
b
Non-dynamic (regular licensing)
Dynamic Licensing [12.J.7]
To install C-MAP chart licenses (includes non-dynamic licensing):
1
In ECPINS, choose > Chart Selection > Licenses > C-MAP.... The C-MAP Chart
Manager dialog appears. Ensure that Licenses tab is selected to display nondynamic licensing page [figure 12-35].
Figure 12-35 C-MAP Chart Manager’s License page
1
2
1
2
Selected database: The database that the
licenses applies to.
Licenses list: No licenses have been
applied to the selected database.
•
•
Add manually: To add a license by
manually typing.
Import from file: To add a license by
selecting the “.usr” file.
2
Choose the database that you want to add licenses to in the Selected
database drop-down menu.
3
Click Import from file. A dialog is displayed with a list of folders [figure 1236]. Navigate to the location of the license file for the database selected.
12 CHART INSTALLATION AND UPDATING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
299
Figure 12-36 Select a license file dialog
1
2
1
A C-MAP chart license file
2 The selected folder
As an alternative, you can type the license number: click Add License
[figure 12-37].
• The license file can be stored on the system, disk drive, network drive or a
USB drive.
Select the license file (such as “password.usr”) and click Open. A
confirmation message appears.
•
4
A C-MAP license file has the extension “.usr”.
A license file grants access to a specified area of charts in one type of
C-MAP database.
License list is refreshed with licenses installed for that database [figure 1238].
•
•
5
6
Click Close to exit.
Figure 12-37 Add License Manually dialog
•
300
Add License: Adds the manually entered
license into the License list. Ensure that
12 CHART INSTALLATION AND UPDATING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
the Dataset and License string you type
match your source material exactly.
Figure 12-38 C-MAP Chart Manager’s Licenses page with licenses installed
1
2
1
12.J.7
Selected database: The database that the
licenses applies to.
2
License list: The list of zones/areas that are
licensed.
Dynamic Licensing
Dynamic Licensing applies only to C-MAP ENC or Jeppesen PRIMAR charts.
C-MAP charges for the charts that you have installed.
To use Dynamic Licensing, you have to inform C-MAP to activate Dynamic
Licensing with the zones/areas of interest. C-MAP will then provide credits
based on your request. The number of credits deducted depends on how
many C-MAP ENC charts are installed.
Reporting, done via updating (12.J.10.A, Updating C-MAP charts), is
mandatory and has to be done within the next report date. Otherwise, access
to the non-reported C-MAP ENC or Jeppesen PRIMAR charts will be blocked.
When reporting is overdue, no further C-MAP charts can be installed.
Once a chart has been reported, it is usually given a license valid for three
months, depending on what is allowed by the Hydrographic Office that has
issued the chart. Both real-time updating and file based updating can be used
for reporting.
The reporting interval is usually set to a maximum of two weeks. If the credit
limit has exceeded, no further C-MAP charts can be installed. To renew
credits, C-MAP has to be notified.
Dynamic Licensing is currently not available for bridge systems using
duplicate eTokens.
The C-MAP database has to be stored locally on the hard drive for Dynamic
Licensing to work. Once a C-MAP database has been registered, it is advised
to run an update to activate Dynamic Licensing.
Caution: Dynamic Licensing cannot be run together with non-dynamic licensing. To switch from
one licensing to another, the C-MAP ENC or Jeppesen PRIMAR database has to be unregistered
and re-registered again.
12 CHART INSTALLATION AND UPDATING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
301
To use Dynamic Licensing:
1
In ECPINS, choose > Chart Selection > Licenses > C-MAP.... The C-MAP Chart
Manager dialog appears. Select Dynamic Licensing tab to display the Dynamic
Licensing page [figure 12-39].
2
Check Enable Dynamic Licensing check box.
3
Follow the instructions in 12.J.5, Registering a C-MAP database, to:
Unregister the C-MAP ENC or Jeppesen PRIMAR database.
b Re-register the C-MAP ENC or Jeppesen PRIMAR database.
Follow the instructions in 12.J.10.A, Updating C-MAP charts, to send a
report to C-MAP.
a
4
Figure 12-39 C-MAP Chart Manager’s Dynamic Licensing page
3
1
4
5
2
1
•
•
•
2
12.J.8
Enable Dynamic Licensing: This check box
has to be checked to enable Dynamic
Licensing.
Credit Rest: Credit remaining
Next Report Date: Date when reporting is
due by updating charts.
Confirmation Date: Date when the charts
were updated last.
Reported datasets: List of charts that have
been updated. The expiry column displays
the license expiry dates of the charts.
3
4
5
Available Databases: List of databases
that Dynamic Licensing is activated.
Available Collections: List of zones/areas
of which you have requested with C-MAP
for Dynamic Licensing.
Non-reported datasets: List of charts that
have been installed but not updated. Date
of first use column display the dates when
each chart was first installed.
Installing C-MAP charts
With a C-MAP chart database and licenses installed, and a chart database
registered, you can install C-MAP charts.
Caution: If Dynamic Licensing is enabled, installing any C-MAP ENC or Jeppesen PRIMAR charts
will use credits. The number of credits deducted depends on how many charts have been
installed. If there is insufficient credits or reporting (via updating) is overdue, no C-MAP ENC
charts can be installed.
Note: We recommend installing the charts on drive D. This ensures that the charts are
preserved during a system upgrade (refer to the ECPINS Technician’s Guide).
302
12 CHART INSTALLATION AND UPDATING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Note: We recommend installing the desired charts before starting a voyage. Installing can take
from several minutes to several hours, depending on the number of charts required for the
voyage.
To install charts:
1
Choose > Chart Selection > Chart Install > Install Charts…. The Install Charts dialog
appears [figure 12-40].
2
For Type of Chart, choose “C-MAP”.
Note: To view C-MAP charts, you must choose “C-MAP” for Type of Chart.
3
In the Select Source Folder list, select the folder that contains the desired
chart files, for example, World, ENC, Professional+, or Jeppesen PRIMAR.
Figure 12-40 Install Charts dialog: C-MAP
•
Select Source Folder:
Click a drive letter to open it. Drives,
including available network drives, are
given by a letter, for example, the system’s
main drive is usually C:, the CD/DVD drive
D: or E:.
Click a folder to open it.
Click Up to move back up the path. For
example, if the current path is
•
•
F:\Data\Charts, clicking Up returns
the current directory to F:\Data.
Search for Charts: Lists, in the Selected
Charts list, the chart files available in the
Selected Source Folder.
Type of Charts: Restricts ECPINS’s search
for charts to the type chosen.
4
From the Select Target Folder list, choose or create a target folder.
5
In the Select Charts list, select charts [figure 12-41].
6
Click Install Charts. A dialog advises when installation is completed.
7
If a permit is not present on the ECPINS system for a chart designated for
installation, a message appears to that effect.
Click OK. A dialog advises that the system is updating the chart index.
When the chart index is updated, another dialog advises that ECPINS is
reloading any updated charts.
•
Caution: Check that there is a sufficient disk space on the hard drive before installing the
desired charts. If too many charts are installed at one time, the system may not operate
correctly because of insufficient disk space. Each full CD of charts requires about 1 GB of disk
space. (As a rough guide, a 1 MB chart requires 2 MB because of processing.)
12 CHART INSTALLATION AND UPDATING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
303
Caution: Do not install more than one copy of the same chart file. Always uninstall a chart
before installing a newer copy of the same chart. Having more than one copy in the same
format can cause undesired results when applying chart updates (ECPINS updates only the first
instance encountered). Problems can occur even if the charts are saved in different folders.
Figure 12-41 Install Charts dialog
1
1
To select several different charts at once,
hold down the Ctrl key (or Shift) and click
each chart. Any chart that is completely
contained within the new chart-display
area is automatically selected.
•
•
•
Select Visible: Of the Selected Charts,
selects those charts that are visible in the
area covered by the ECPINS chart display.
Create New: Creates a new target folder.
Select All: Selects all the charts in the list.
During installation, ECPINS updates its display to reflect the status of the
charts [figure 12-42].
Figure 12-42 Coloured chart outlines
1
2
304
12 CHART INSTALLATION AND UPDATING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
1
12.J.9
Grey outline: Indicates a chart excluded
from automatic loading. When the Install
dialog is active, indicates the geographical
areas contained in the charts available on
the CD or disk but not as yet installed. The
2
chart name is displayed inside the outline
if the chart-display scale is large enough
(zoomed in).
Magenta outline: Indicates a previously
installed chart that is not currently loaded.
Updating C-MAP charts
You can update the C-MAP charts installed on an ECPINS system by any of the
following methods:
a
b
12.J.10
Replacing the C-MAP chart database
Updating C-MAP charts
Replacing the C-MAP chart database
You can replace the entire database of C-MAP charts with a new version.
To replace the C-MAP chart database:
1
Follow the instructions in 12.J.4, Installing a C-MAP chart database, to:
Copy the new database to the computer’s hard disk.
b Unregister the old database.
c
Register the new database.
Follow the instructions in 12.J.6, Installing C-MAP chart licenses, to:
a
2
Add licenses from the applicable “password.usr” file for the new database.
In ECPINS, choose > Chart Corrections > Update Charts.... The Chart Updates
dialog appears.
a
3
4
In the list of chart types, select “C-MAP”. The Chart Updates: C-MAP Updating
dialog appears.
5
In the list, select “Refresh Database Version” and click Select. ECPINS
refreshes the C-MAP database, reprocesses all installed C-MAP charts, and
reloads any C-MAP charts currently loaded.
Note: After replacing a chart database, we recommend that you also proceed to update all
charts. This is because updates may be available for the charts in the new database.
12.J.10.A
Updating C-MAP charts
Instead of replacing an entire chart database, you can update only licensed
C-MAP charts. Two updating methods are available:
a
b
By e-mail
By Internet
After updating a chart, you can review each update made to a particular
chart.
Updating C-MAP charts by e-mail: You generate and send an update order to
C-MAP via e-mail. In response, C-MAP sends an update via e-mail, which you
install on the ECPINS system.
12 CHART INSTALLATION AND UPDATING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
305
To update a C-MAP chart by e-mail:
1
In ECPINS, choose > Chart Corrections > Update Charts.... The Chart Updates dialog
appears.
2
In the list of chart types, select “C-MAP”. The Chart Updates: C-MAP Updating
dialog appears.
3
In the list, select “Updating” to bring up the C-MAP Chart Manager. Ensure
that Updates tab is selected to display the Updates page [figure 12-43].
Figure 12-43 C-MAP Chart Manager’s Updates page with applied updates
1
2
1
2
•
•
Selected database: The database that the
updates applies to.
Updates: List of updates applied to the
selected database.
View available updates: Displays a list of
updates that are available for the selected
database.
Update via Internet: To update the
selected database using real-time
updating.
•
•
Update from file: To update the selected
database using “.ans” files that were sent
by C-MAP via e-mail.
Create update order: Creates an order file
for the selected database.
Review updating log: Displays the most
recent updates that have been applied to
the selected database.
4
Choose the database that you want to update in the Selected Database
drop-down menu.
5
Click Create update order to bring up the Save Update Order dialog [figure 1243].
•
•
•
•
•
306
•
Check the All available zones check box or select the zones of interest. Press
the > button to enter the zones into the Selected zones list.
Select the e-mail size.
Press Save to bring up the Browse For Folder dialog.
Select the destination of the order file and click OK.
The order file (the file has the extension “.ord”) is written to the chosen
destination.
12 CHART INSTALLATION AND UPDATING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Figure 12-44 Save Update Order dialog
1
2
3
4
1
2
6
Zones Available: List of zones/areas that
could be selected.
Zones Selected: List of zones/areas that
have been selected.
3
4
All available zones: When this has been
selected, the Zones Available and Zones
Selected lists are greyed out.
Select e-mail size: Selects the maximum
size of the “.ans” file from C-MAP.
Send the update order file as an attachment to the following e-mail
address: “updates@c-map.no”.
E-mail to updates@c-map.no is handled automatically. The subject line and
body are irrelevant.
• Send each update order file as a separate e-mail message.
When a reply is received from C-MAP, save the attached update answer
files (files with the extension “.ans”) to the hard drive or removable
media, for example, CD, DVD, or USB.
•
7
Typically, C-MAP sends a reply within 15 minutes.
Typically, in response to an update order, C-MAP sends a set of update
answer files. The files are named in a sequence, for example,
“u001x009.ans, u002x009.ans, u003x009.ans”. You should apply these
updates in order.
• The size of each “.ans” files is dependent on the Select e-mail size chosen in
the update order.
In C-MAP Chart Manager’s Licensing page, choose the database that you
want to update in the Selected Database drop-down menu.
•
•
8
9
Click Update from file to bring up the Browse For Folder dialog.
•
•
Navigate the folders to select the update file and click OK.
C-MAP Chart Manager will process the update and display a pop-up saying
“Updating succeeded”. Click OK.
Note: C-MAP Chart Manager does not prompt for the next update file. You will have to repeat
this step for every update file you have received.
10 Click Close in C-MAP Chart Manager dialog to exit. ECPINS reloads any C-MAP
charts currently loaded.
Updating C-MAP charts via the Internet: Where an ECPINS system is
connected to the Internet, you can update installed C-MAP charts in “real
time”, that is, immediately, at any time.
12 CHART INSTALLATION AND UPDATING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
307
To update C-MAP charts via Internet:
1
In ECPINS, choose > Chart Corrections > Update Charts.... The Chart Updates dialog
appears.
2
In the list of chart types, select “C-MAP”. The Chart Updates: C-MAP Updating
dialog appears.
3
In the list, select “Updating” to bring up the C-MAP Chart Manager. Ensure
the Updates tab is selected to display the Updates page [figure 12-43].
4
Choose the database that you want to update in the Selected Database
drop-down menu.
5
Click Update via Internet to display real-time updating dialog [figure 12-45].
Figure 12-45 Update via Internet dialog
6
ECPINS connects to the C-MAP server via the Internet.
It may take several minutes for ECPINS to establish a connection. ECPINS
displays notices such as “Connecting to host computer”, “9 updates were
received from 9 sent by server. 7kb transferred”.
When the transfer of updates is complete, click Close in Update via Internet
dialog.
•
7
8
Click Close in C-MAP Chart Manager dialog. ECPINS processes the updates,
reprocesses the relevant C-MAP charts, and reloads any C-MAP charts
currently loaded.
•
12.J.10.B
Unlike some other chart types, only some C-MAP updates can be reviewed.
Reviewing chart updates
After updating, you may choose to review each update on a C-MAP chart.
308
12 CHART INSTALLATION AND UPDATING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
To review updates on a C-MAP chart:
1
Display the chart(s) for review (choose > Chart Selection > Load Charts…).
2
Choose > Chart Corrections > Review Chart Updates…. A list of loaded charts
appears.
3
From the list, select the chart for review and click Select. ECPINS displays
the Update Log for Chart dialog.
4
Select the update for review and click Select. ECPINS displays the Updated
Features Summary dialog for the selected feature, for example, “1. INSERTED
Wreck”.
5
Select an update action and click Select. ECPINS displays the Updated Feature
Detail dialog for the selected feature. On the display, ECPINS highlights
the updated feature in red.
12 CHART INSTALLATION AND UPDATING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
309
310
12 CHART INSTALLATION AND UPDATING
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Appendices
Ap.A, INT-1 abbreviations
Ap.B, Licensing ECPINS software
Ap.C, Chart display features
Ap.D, Objects detected by the anti-grounding cone
Ap.E, Preparing the vessel shape
Ap.F, Setting up an Autopilot
Ap.G, Operating system security
Ap.H, Vessel simulation
APPENDICES
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
311
Ap.A INT-1 abbreviations
This section contains a list of IHO abbreviations used on S57 charts.
Text
Nature of seabed
Light description
bn — beacon (INT1)
By — buoy
Clr — overhead clearance
Clr cl — clearance closed
Clr op — clearance open
Deg — degrees
kn — knots (INT1)
Sf clr — safe clearance
No — number (INT1)
Plt — pilot
Prod — offshore production (INT1)
LtV — light vessel (INT1)
Varn — magnetic variation
Ch — communication channel
NMT — not more than «CLEARING
BEARING»
NLT — not less than «CLEARING
BEARING».
Cb — cobbles
Cy — Clay
Co — coral
G — gravel
M — mud
P — pebbles
R — boulder, rock, or lava
S — sand
Sh — shells
Si — silt
St — stones
Dir — directional
Aero — aeronautical
F — fixed
Fl — flashing
LFl — long-flashing
Q — quick-flashing
VQ — very quick-flashing
UQ — ultra quick-flashing
Iso — isophased
Oc — occulting
IQ — interrupted quick-flashing
IVQ — interrupted very quick-flashing
IUQ — interrupted ultra quick-flashing
Mo — morse
FFl — fixed/flash
Fl+Fl — flash/long-flash
AlOc Fl — alternating occulting/flashing
FLFl — fixed/long-flash
AlOc — alternating occulting
AlLFl — alternating long-flash
Al — group alternating
Q+LFl — quick-flash plus long-flash
VQ+LFl — very quick-flash plus long-flash
UQ+LFl — ultra quick-flash plus long-flash
Al — alternating
AlF Fl — alternating fixed and flashing
W — white
R — red
G — green
Y — yellow
Occas — occasional
Temp — temporary
Priv — private
Exting — extinguished
m — meters
M — nautical miles
312
APPENDICES
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Ap.B Licensing ECPINS software
The ECPINS software is protected from unauthorized use. For ECPINS to be
fully functional on a computer, you must license the software.
You can license the software using either one of two methods:
a
b
Attach a hardlock (Ap.B.1).
Obtain a license (Ap.B.2)
Without either of these software protection devices, ECPINS will either not
run or run in a restricted state. Also, some chart licenses (such as ARCS) refer
to ECPINS license.
Caution: An ECPINS system will run with both a hardlock and a license. However, if both
devices are available, we recommend that you detach the hardlock and use only the license.
Caution: A major software upgrade (for example, 5.0 to 5.1) on a system requires a new ECPINS
5000 license for that system. A software patch (for example, 5.0.3 to 5.0.4) does not require a
new license.
Ap.B.1
Attach a hardlock
You can license the software by attaching a hardlock to the system — also
known as a “dongle”. The hardlock is obtained directly from OSI Maritime
Systems with the purchase of the software. A hardlock may be purchased to
fit a parallel port or USB port.
We recommend that you attach the hardlock after the software is installed.
After attaching the hardlock, restart the system.
Warning: Attach a parallel-port hardlock to the system’s parallel port. Attaching the hardlock to
a multi-port serial expansion unit (SEU) can damage the equipment.
Ap.B.1.A
Hardlock drivers for notebooks
When ECPINS software is installed, the software drivers that enable the
hardlock to operate are also installed. However, on some systems, notebook
computers in particular, you may have to install different drivers.
To install the hardlock drivers on a Windows 2000 or XP notebook:
1
Insert the ECPINS Tools & Utilities Disc into the system’s drive.
The file is also available from http://www.aladdin.com/support/.
Uninstall any existing drivers:
•
2
3
In Windows, choose Start > Run. The Run dialog box appears.
b In the Open box, type “d:\dongle\W2K_WXP\hlinst.exe -remove”.
c
Click OK. The drivers are removed.
In Windows, choose Start > Run. The Run dialog box appears.
4
In the Open box, type “d:\dongle\W2K_WXP\hlinst.exe -install”.
5
Click OK. The drivers are installed and Windows is ready to run ECPINS.
a
•
The driver files installed are “hardlock.sys” and “hardlock.dll”.
APPENDICES
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
313
Ap.B.2
Obtain a license
You can license the software by obtaining a license to run ECPINS on that
computer. Without a license, ECPINS will run in a restricted state: some menu
items are not available and ECPINS does not receive sensor input.
A software license, issued directly by OSI, entitles the purchaser to run ECPINS
on one, identified computer. The computer is identified by its “hardware
key”. The software license controls the software features available and the
software expiry date.
Caution: Since the license is associated with a hardware key, any changes to the computer’s
hardware components may negate the license. You may have to obtain (not necessarily
purchase) a new software license. The same is true of changes to the software, such as a reinstallation or upgrade.
To view license information:
In ECPINS, choose > Setup > About.... The About ECPINS dialog box appears
[figure Ap-1].
Figure Ap-1 About ECPINS box example
•
•
ECPINS: Software type and version
number.
Size: The size in bytes of the ECPINS
executable file (eng.exe).
•
•
Product ID: A unique identifier of the
software installed on the computer.
Chart Library: A list of display standards
that ECPINS is capable of using.
Note: If the software license’s expiry date is less than a month away, ECPINS displays a
warning to that effect when the software is started.
Caution: When a software licence expires, ECPINS will run with limited features the next time it
is started up.
To license a computer to run ECPINS:
314
1
Record the computer’s hardware key (Ap.B.2.A)
2
Obtain a software license (Ap.B.2.B)
3
Install the software license (Ap.B.2.C).
APPENDICES
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Ap.B.2.A
Record the computer’s hardware key
OSI Maritime Systems identifies a computer by a hardware key, a unique
identifier based on the number, type, and configuration of the computer’s
hardware components.
To find and record a computer’s hardware key:
In the ECPINS window, choose > Setup > Software Licenses > Display Hardware
Key.... The Display Hardware Key dialog box appears. Copy the key string or
write it down.
•
Ap.B.2.B
Or, insert a disk in the computer’s drive and choose > Setup > Software
Licenses > Export Hardware Key.... The hardware key is saved to the disk in
the file “EcpinsHwKey.cfg”.
Obtain a software license
You use the hardware key to request from OSI Maritime Systems a software
license for the computer. After examining the hardware key and its customer
records, OSI Maritime Systems issues a software license.
To obtain a software license from OSI Maritime Systems:
1
Send a license request to OSI Maritime Systems by e-mail to
support@osigeospatial.com. The request should include the Product ID and
hardware key.
Include the hardware key in the e-mail or attach the hardware key file
exported to disk (EcpinsHwKey.cfg).
• For assistance, call OSI Support: 1-877-432-7467 (toll-free in North America,
24 hours).
In response to a license request, OSI Maritime Systems will send a
software license by e-mail.
•
2
A key is a character string. If sent as a file, the license file name is
“license.cfg”.
• You can open the license file and read or copy the string; the license is
encrypted but the string is in plain text.
Caution: Tampering with the license file may invalidate the license.
•
Ap.B.2.C
Install the software license
An ECPINS software license issued by OSI Maritime Systems corresponds only
to the computer for which it was issued. You should record the license (or
store the file safely) before installing it.
To install a software license on a computer:
1
In the ECPINS window, choose > Setup > Software Licenses > Install Software
License.... The Software License dialog box appears. Locate the software
license file (“license.cfg”) on a disk or on the network.
Or, choose > Setup > Software Licenses > Install Software License from
Keyboard.... The Software License dialog box appears. Enter the license key
received from OSI Maritime Systems.
Click OK.
•
2
3
Shut down ECPINS and restart the computer. ECPINS runs normally with
all the features purchased.
APPENDICES
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
315
•
To confirm that a particular feature is available, choose > Setup > Software
Licenses > Display Enabled Features.... A dialog box lists all the features
enabled by the installed license.
While a newly installed license overwrites a previously installed license, you
may wish to remove a license outright, for example, when a license is faulty
or expired.
To remove a software license from a computer:
Choose > Setup > Software Licenses > Uninstall Software License....
316
APPENDICES
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Ap.C Chart display features
The following tables describe the standard optional feature layers available
in ECPINS. The layers in each category also may vary according to the type of
charts loaded.
Note: To get more information on a feature, or to view the features that belong to each group,
consider loading and scanning the S57 chart legend [10.D.2].
Table Ap-1
Overlays
Feature
Description
AIS
Automatic Identification System symbols [see 9.C, “AIS”]
ARPA symbols
Refer to 9.B.2, “ARPA contacts”.
Chart Index
Refer to 10.A, “Chart coverage”.
Constructs
Compass Rosea
For an example, see figure 4-13. Displayed only in RM mode [see
3.A.4].
EBL/VRM labels
Refer to 6.A, “Electronic bearing lines”.
IHO Scale Filter
Helps control clutter on the display.
S57 objects are displayed at display scales larger than their minimum
scale (SCAMIN). S57 charts have a minimum scale (SCAMIN) that
determines the visibility of layers of objects. Different objects on a
chart can each have a different SCAMIN value. This minimum scale
value is set by the data producer. You may choose to not have the IHO
Scale Filter. When the IHO Scale Filter is off, ECPINS's own scale filter is
used. To see the SCAMIN value for a feature, choose Query Chart
Features... or press F12. Ensure that Show Symbol Info on Query is
enabled.
IHO Time Filter
Displays time-dependent objects (TDOs) only at the appropriate times.
Some S57 features are time dependent, that is, they are valid for a
specific time period. ECPINS refreshes the display once per minute if
any S57 charts containing TDOs are currently loaded. This process
ensures that the display of TDOs is valid. The IHO Time Filter display
feature controls the display of TDOs. If the IHO Time Filter is listed in
Displayed Features, ECPINS displays any TDO for the duration of its
time period. If IHO Time Filter is listed in Available Features, the timedependent control is absent and TDOs are displayed continuously.
Markers
Refer to 6.C, “Markers”.
Range Rings
For an example, see figure 4-13. Displayed only in RM mode [3.A.4].
Radar Image
Refer to 9.E, “Radar”.
Tides and Currents
Displays the location of loaded tide and current stations [see 6.E]. If
the Text Group “Other text” is a displayed feature, ECPINS displays the
predicted current beside each current station.
a. Features in this grey font are not part of the Standard display [see 3.A.6.A, “Displaying and hiding features”].
APPENDICES
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
317
Table Ap-2
Text Groups
Feature
Description
a
Berth Number
Geographic Names
The method of removing geographic names varies with the chart
data producer. For some charts, removing Geographic Names
from the list removes location names from the chart. For other
charts, location names are removed only when Important Text is
removed.
Important Text
For example, clr 9.0 for a vertical clearance of 9 m for a bridge.
Lights Description
Magnetic Variation/Swept
Nature of Seabed
Notes on Chart Data
Object Names
Other Text
Miscellaneous text, including the reference point labels [6.D.3.B].
a. Features in grey are not part of the Standard display [see 3.A.6.A, “Displaying and hiding features”].
Table Ap-3
Viewing Groups
Viewing Group
Description
Administrative Areasa
For example, administrative area, contiguous zone, continental shelf
area, custom zone, exclusive economic zone, free port area, fishery
zone, harbour area (administrative), territorial sea area, straight
territorial sea baseline.
Admiralty Information Overlay
Buoyage System
Chart boundary that indicates whether a chart follows the IALA “A”
or IALA “B” convention. For example, navigational system of marks.
Cautionary Areas
For example, caution area, fairway, ferry route (area), military
practice area, sea-plane landing area, submarine transit lane,
offshore production area, restricted area.
Conspicuous Landmarks
For example, dyke, fence/wall, landmark, slope topline, built-up
area, building-single, fortified structure, production/storage area,
silo/tank.
Contour Labels, Depth
Displays the depth value on submarine contours.
Contour Labels, Safety
Displays the depth value on the safety depth [5.C.1] contour,
rounded to the nearest charted depth contour.
Contours and Tide data
For example, tide and tidal stream information, water turbulence,
depth area (line), depth contour, current.
Daymarks and Topmarks
Fog Signals
318
For example, fog signals, retro-reflector.
APPENDICES
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Table Ap-3
Viewing Groups (continued)
Viewing Group
Description
Information about Chart Data
This feature focuses on the quality of the chart data in an area, also
known as a “zone of confidence”.
Zone of confidence symbols (indicate the quality of S57 chart data)
1
1
2
3
4
2
3
4
A1: Accuracy within 5m with full sea floor; assessed chart
data
D: Unreliable chart data
B: Accuracy within 50m from standard survey based on
continuous sounding
U: Chart data not assessed (‘unsurveyed”)
Information Attributes
Symbols indicating objects with special “information” attributes.
Information Areas
For example, anchorage area, anchor berth, cable area, cargo
transshipment area, dumping ground, fishing ground, incineration
area, marine farm/culture, pipeline area.
Lights
Low-Accuracy Symbols
Magnetic data
Non-gravitational, local magnetic anomalies, magnetic variations.
Major Coastal Features
For example, causeway, dam, dyke, gate.
Natural Features
For example, lake, rapids, river, sloping ground, tideway vegetation,
slope topline, waterfall, land elevation.
Port Features
For example, berth, checkpoint, crane, dry dock, gridiron, harbour
facility, mooring/warping facility, distance mark, gate.
Radar Info
For example, radar reflector, radar transponder beacon.
Scale Areas / Boundaries
For example, boundary lines between chart areas with different
compilation scales.
Sea / Land Areas
For example, land region.
Seabed and Obstructions
For example, fishing facility, obstruction, seabed area, weed/kelp,
wreck, submarine cable, pipeline, spring, underwater/awash rock.
Services (Pilots, Signal
For example, pilot boarding place, signal station - traffic, signal
station - warning.
Services (Radio, Coast Guard
For example, coast guard station, radar station, radio station, rescue
station.
Shore Features
For example, airport/airfield, building - single, fortified structure,
landmark, production/storage area, road, runway, silo/tank, tunnel,
fence/wall, railway, control point.
Small Craft Facilities
Soundings
Traffic Routes
For example, radar range, recommended track, ferry route,
navigation line.
APPENDICES
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
319
Table Ap-3
Viewing Groups (continued)
Viewing Group
Description
Unknown Objects
Any feature object not found in feature object look-up table.
Symbolized with question mark “?” symbols.
Water and Seabed Features
For example, swept area, tunnel, submarine cable, sand waves.
a. Viewing Groups in grey are not part of the Standard display [see 3.A.6.A, “Displaying and hiding features”].
320
APPENDICES
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Ap.D Objects detected by the anti-grounding cone
The ECPINS anti-grounding cone [4.F] generates an alarm or warning when it
encounters any of the objects specified by IEC 61174 (for S57 data) and
ECDIS-N (for DNC data). In addition, objects from the IHO ECDIS Presentation
Library edition/revision 3.2 are included. The type of the object within the
cone is displayed in the Anti-Gr field.
Ap.D.1
S57 objects
IEC 61174, ed 3.0, Annex C: “The following are the areas which ECDIS shall
detect and provide an alarm or indication under 4.10.2 (232/A11.3.5) and
4.10.3 (232/A11.4.4)”:
a
b
c
Traffic separation zone
Inshore traffic zone
Restricted area
d
Prohibited area (IHO ECDIS)
e
f
g
h
i
j
Caution area
Offshore production area
Areas to be avoided
Military practice area
Seaplane landing area
Submarine transit lane
k
Pipeline area (IHO ECDIS)
l
Cable area
m Anchorage area
Ap.D.2
n
o
p
Anchorage prohibited (IHO ECDIS)
Spoil ground (IHO ECDIS)
Specially protected areas (IHO ECDIS)
q
r
PSSA (Particularly Sensitive Sea Areas)
Marine farm/culture
DNC objects
ECDIS-N specification, Appendix 4 — AREAS FOR WHICH SPECIAL
CONDITIONS EXIST: “The following are the areas that the ECDIS-N shall detect
and for which it shall provide an alarm or indication under 3.8.4.5 and
3.8.5.4”:
DNC or TOD description
IHO description (if different)
Traffic separation scheme, separation zone
Traffic separation zone
Maritime area, inshore traffic zone (TSS)
Inshore traffic zone
Restricted area
Maritime area, unknown
APPENDICES
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Caution area
321
DNC or TOD description
IHO description (if different)
Maritime limit boundary, Oil Field or Gas Field
Offshore production area
Restricted area, areas to be avoided
Areas to be avoided
Maritime limit boundary, submarine exercise,
mine laying, firing range
Military practice area
Seaplane landing area
322
Maritime area, submarine traffic lane
submerged “TOD only”
Submarine transit lane
Restricted area, pipelines
Pipeline area
Restricted area, cables
Cable area
Anchorage, not an anchoring berth
Anchorage area
Restricted area, anchoring prohibited
Anchorage prohibited
Maritime limit boundary, spoil
Spoil ground
Maritime area, entry prohibited
Specially protected areas
APPENDICES
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Ap.E Preparing the vessel shape
On the chart, you can have displayed (at larger scales) a vessel shape at the
location of the own ship. You can make available a vessel shape that
represents the specific vessel on which it is installed by doing the following:
a
b
c
d
Ap.E.1
Selecting a vessel shape (Ap.E.1).
If no suitable vessel shape is available on the ECPINS system:
i
Installing a vessel shape (Ap.E.2)
ii Creating a new vessel shape (Ap.E.3)
Customizing a vessel shape (Ap.E.4) (if necessary)
Adjusting vessel offsets (Ap.E.4.D) (if necessary)
Selecting a vessel shape
The scaled graphic of the own ship is based on a vessel shape. An ECPINS
system may have more than one vessel shape from which to select.
To select a vessel shape:
1
In Windows, choose Start > Programs > ECPINS v.x > Setup ECPINS.
2
In ECPINS Setup, choose > Setup > Vessel Setup > Select Vessel Shape…. The Select
Current Vessel Shape dialog appears [figure Ap-2].
3
Select a shape and click Select. A dialog advises that changes take effect
after the system is restarted.
4
Shut down ECPINS (choose > Shutdown...).
Figure Ap-2 Select Current Vessel Shape dialog
•
Ap.E.2
Lists available vessel shapes.
•
Angle brackets enclose the currently
selected vessel shape.
Installing a vessel shape
We recommend that you ensure that the file that defines the vessel shape
required is available to ECPINS.
If the ECPINS system is an upgraded installation, you can copy the vessel
shape files over from the previous ECPINS installation (refer to the ECPINS
Technician’s Guide).
APPENDICES
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
323
If the ECPINS system is a new installation, you can copy the vessel shape files
over from an existing system (refer to the ECPINS Technician’s Guide), or
create a new vessel shape.
Ap.E.3
Creating a new vessel shape
A new vessel shape can be created. Its initial width and length values are used
to scale the coordinates in the vessel shape editor.
To create a new vessel shape:
1
In ECPINS Setup, choose > Setup > Vessel Setup > Vessel Shape Editor…
[figure Ap-7].
2
Choose Vessel > New.... The New dialog appears [figure Ap-3].
3
Enter values, including the Units (Meters or Feet).
4
Click OK. The Vessel Shape Editor (VSE) appears containing a rough vessel
shape.
5
Edit the vessel shape.
6
Choose Vessel > Save.
7
Choose Vessel > Exit.
Figure Ap-3 New vessel shape dialog
•
Ap.E.4
Vessel Name: The vessel or class name.
Once set, this name cannot be changed.
•
Hull Type: Determines the initial vessel
outline. For convenience only.
Customizing a vessel shape
To have a vessel shape accurately represent the ship, you set the vessel’s
physical and turning characteristics, adjust its shape, and work with the
various offsets that determine the position of sensors relative to the vessel
shape.
Ap.E.4.A
Physical characteristics
Physical characteristics of the vessel you set take effect during ECPINS
operation. ECPINS uses some values for the safety contour, anti-grounding,
and route scans: Draft and keel clearance combined equal the Safety Depth;
Masthead Height and Safe Vertical Clearance combined equal the Safety
Height (refer to the ECPINS Operator’s Manual for details).
324
APPENDICES
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
To set the vessel’s physical characteristics:
1
In ECPINS Setup, choose > Setup > Vessel Setup > Vessel Shape Editor…
[figure Ap-7].
2
Choose Vessel > Open. The Open dialog appears. This dialog contains a list of
saved vessel shapes.
3
Select a vessel shape and click OK. The shape appears in the Vessel Shape
Editor (VSE).
4
Choose Vessel > Edit.... The Edit Vessel dialog appears [figure Ap-4].
5
Change settings as necessary.
Figure Ap-4 Edit Vessel dialog
•
•
Ap.E.4.B
Draft: The vessel’s deepest draft. ECPINS
uses this value to establish a safety depth.
In ECPINS, the operator can change this
value.
Keel Clearance: The clearance desired.
ECPINS uses this value to establish a
safety depth. In ECPINS, the operator can
change this value.
•
•
•
Safe Vertical Clearance: The clearance
desired. ECPINS uses this value to
establish a safety height.
Masthead Height: Set by ECPINS to the
height above the keel of the highest offset
associated with the vessel shape in use.
ECPINS uses this value to establish a
safety height.
Maximum Speed: The vessel’s greatest
operational speed. For information only.
Squat characteristics table
Note: Squat characteristics may not be available on all ECPINS systems.
By setting the vessel’s squat characteristics into a table, you enable the ECPINS
operator to have ECPINS include the own ship’s temporary increase of draft
(known as squat) in its safety depth calculations along a route leg [5.C.1.B].
Caution: Squat characteristics must be tested and approved by an appropriate authority.
APPENDICES
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
325
To set a vessel’s squat characteristics:
1
With the appropriate vessel open in the Vessel Shape Editor (VSE)
[figure Ap-7], choose Vessel > Squat Data....The Squat Tables dialog appears
[figure Ap-5].
2
To add a new Table, click Table: Add. The Enter Table Name dialog appears.
3
Type a name, and click OK.
4
Enter values for the Table, click Data: Add. The Enter Squat dialog appears
[figure Ap-6].
5
Enter values for Speed and Squat.
6
Click OK
•
To change a data set, highlight it, and click Update.
Figure Ap-5 Squat Tables dialog
1
1
•
The vessel shape name
Table: Tables can be added or removed. Or
you can select a Table from the list.
•
Data: Speed and Squat data for the named
vessel.
Figure Ap-6 Enter Squat dialog
Ap.E.4.C
Adjusting a vessel shape
You can draw a vessel shape to scale for use in ECPINS [figure Ap-7].
Caution: It is good practice to retain the original vessel shape and edit a copy: Choose Vessel >
Save As... to save a copy of the vessel shape on which to work. Thereafter, choose Vessel >
Save.
326
APPENDICES
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Figure Ap-7 Vessel Shape Editor (VSE)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
Vessel shape name
Menus
Shape points: white
Hull outline
Centre line
Hull outline
7
8
9
Additional outlines
Stern
Zoom level: Available levels (%): 10, 30,
50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 300, 500.
10 Cursor coordinates: Shows measurement
units (meters).
To edit a vessel shape:
1
In ECPINS Setup, choose > Setup > Vessel Setup > Vessel Shape Editor….
2
Choose Vessel > Open. The Open dialog appears. This dialog contains a list of
saved vessel shapes.
3
Select a vessel shape and click OK. The shape appears in the Vessel Shape
Editor (VSE).
4
Edit the vessel shape.
5
Choose Vessel > Save.
6
Choose Vessel > Exit.
Working with a vessel shape A vessel shape in the VSE window can be
changed. The shape's outline is defined by points. A vessel shape may contain
one or more separate outlines, such as the hull, superstructure, and bridge.
APPENDICES
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
327
To move a point:
1
In the Vessel Shape Editor, with a vessel shape open, choose Shape > Move.
2
Click a point. The selected point turns green [figure Ap-8].
3
Move the cursor to a new location and click to set the point there. The
point appears in the new location and ECPINS adjusts the nearest outline
accordingly.
•
Click another point to work with it. The editor stays in Move mode until you
choose Shape > Move again or right-click in the editor window.
To move a point to a precise location:
1
In the Vessel Shape Editor, with a vessel shape open, choose Shape > Edit....
2
Click a point. The selected point turns green and the Edit Point dialog
appears.
3
Enter values for the point’s position relative to the vessel shape’s centre
line and stern.
4
Click OK. ECPINS places the selected point in the specified location.
Figure Ap-8 Vessel Shape Editor (VSE) — shape manipulation example
1
2
3
4
6
5
1
2
328
Vessel-offset-with-vector point (a red
circle within a yellow circle): Indicates the
position of an offset where a vector is to
originate.
Shape point (a white circle): Used to draw
or modify the vessel shape.
APPENDICES
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
3
4
5
6
Selected point’s (green) new location (it is
in the process of being moved)
Selected point’s old location
Vessel offset point (a red circle): Indicates
the position of an offset.
To display the names of the vessel offset
positions, choose Offsets > Show Names.
To delete a point:
1
In the Vessel Shape Editor, with a vessel shape open, choose Shape > Delete.
2
Click at or near a point. The point is deleted and ECPINS adjusts the
outline accordingly.
To insert a point into an outline:
1
In the Vessel Shape Editor, with a vessel shape open, choose Shape > Insert.
2
Click a location. ECPINS inserts a point at the location and adjusts the
nearest outline to include it.
Working with a new outline Some vessel shapes are complex with, for
example, parts of the superstructure extending beyond the hull shape or
sensors at locations other than centre line. For these, you may need to create
additional outlines. All outlines appear on the ECPINS display as part of the
vessel shape.
To add an outline:
1
In the Vessel Shape Editor, with a vessel shape open, choose Shape > Add.
2
Click a location. A shape point appears.
To add a point to an outline:
1
In the Vessel Shape Editor, with a vessel shape open, choose Shape > New.
2
Click a location. A shape point appears. It is connected to the last point
added.
Working in the VSE window While editing a vessel shape, the scale of the VSE
window may automatically change to accommodate the entire shape. The
technician may find it necessary to zoom in, zoom out, or scroll the window.
To change the measurement units:
Choose Units > Meters or Feet. A dot (·) indicates the current units.
•
The current units are also displayed on the status bar.
To zoom in:
Choose Zoom > Zoom In.
•
•
•
Or, press the + key.
Or, left-click.
Or, (if zoomed out) choose Zoom > Fit to Screen.
To zoom out:
Choose Zoom > Zoom Out.
•
•
•
Or, press the - key.
Or, right-click.
Or, (if zoomed in) choose Zoom > Fit to Screen.
To scroll the VSE window:
Press an arrow key.
•
•
Or, press PG UP or PG DN.
Or, centre-double-click on a location. The window centres on that location.
APPENDICES
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
329
To centre on the vessel shape:
Choose Zoom > Fit to Screen. The window re-centres on the centre of the
vessel shape.
Ap.E.4.D
Adjusting vessel offsets
You can edit the vessel shape’s offsets, which are positions relative to (that is,
offset from) the shape’s centreline and stern. Offsets serve as locations to
which you assign ECPINS reference points, including sensors and, optionally,
as the source of a velocity vector displayed during ECPINS operation.
To re-position an offset (or display its velocity vector):
1
In the Vessel Shape Editor, with a vessel shape open, choose Offsets > Edit....
The Edit Offsets dialog appears [figure Ap-9].
2
In the Edit Offset box, choose an offset.
•
The selected offset is automatically centred in the VSE window and the
offset name is displayed.
3
Change the values in From Centerline and From Stern to re-position the offset.
4
Check or clear Show Vector.
Figure Ap-9 Edit Offset dialog
•
•
Name: Each offset must have a unique
name.
Height: The height above the lowest point
of the keel. This may be a factor in the
readings of a sensor assigned to this
offset. It is a factor in line of soundings
and circle of position calculations.
Height is a critical factor in ECPINS’s fixing
calculations using a line of soundings.
•
Height is a critical factor in ECPINS’s fixing
calculations using a circle of position. A
circle of position is based on a vertical
sextant angle (VSA) measurement from a
known position on the ship.
Vector: If set to ON, a velocity vector will
originate on this point on the ECPINS
display.
To display the offset name:
In the Vessel Shape Editor, with a vessel shape open, choose Offsets > Show
Names. The names are displayed in the Vessel Shape Editor [figure Ap-8].
To delete an offset:
1
In the Vessel Shape Editor, with a vessel shape open, choose Offsets >
Delete.... The Delete Offset dialog appears.
2
From the Name box, choose an offset.
3
Click Delete.
Offsets can be added to a vessel shape for a variety of purposes, for example,
a high point on the superstructure, GPS antenna, a bow thruster.
330
APPENDICES
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
To add an offset:
Ap.E.4.E
1
In the Vessel Shape Editor, with a vessel shape open, choose Offsets > Add....
The Add New Offset dialog appears (similar to figure Ap-9).
2
Type or choose values and click Apply. The offset appears on the vessel
shape.
Assigning a reference point to an offset
ECPINS depends on offset positions for a variety of calculations, such as
position, vessel track, and range and bearing. These “reference points” that
ECPINS uses are each assigned to an offset. You can change the assignments.
Standard reference points include:
a
ARPA Reference: When displaying ARPA contacts [9.B.2], ECPINS plots them relative to
this reference point. Typically, this is assigned to an offset at the ARPA radar.
b
Cross-track Distance Origin: ECPINS tracks this point’s distance to port or starboard of the
active route [5.F.6].
c
Cursor Origin: In the Cursor text box [see figure 2-3], ECPINS displays the range and
bearing to the cursor from this point. Typically this is assigned to an offset at the conning
position.
d
EBL/VRM Origin: On an EBL [6.A], ECPINS displays the bearing and range to the end point
from this reference point. Typically this is assigned to an offset at the conning position.
e
Heading Marker Origin: ECPINS displays a heading vector originating from this point.
Typically this is assigned to an offset at the bow.
f
Radar Reference: When displaying radar image overlay [9.E], ECPINS positions the image
relative to this reference point. Typically, this is assigned to an offset at the radar.
g
Route Monitoring Offset: ECPINS uses this location to calculate the ship’s position along
the active route.
h
Track History Origin: The location ECPINS records constantly to form a vessel track.
i
Velocity Vector Origin: ECPINS displays a vector [4.B]originating from this point indicating
the ship’s velocity. Typically this is assigned to an offset at the conning position.
j
Vessel Position: ECPINS uses this location to calculate the ship’s position. Typically, this is
assigned to the centre of rotation.
Warning: The precise placement of an offset is critical to the accuracy of the devices that are
assigned that offset, such as GPS, DPS, Depth, and ARPA devices.
To assign a reference point to an offset:
1
In the Vessel Shape Editor, with a vessel shape open, choose Offsets >
Assign.... The Assign Offset dialog appear [figure Ap-10].
2
Choose values and click Apply.
Figure Ap-10 Assign Offset dialog
•
Reference: Reference points relevant to
ECPINS operation. Each reference can be
assigned to one offset.
APPENDICES
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
•
Offset: The offsets listed are those of the
selected vessel shape.
331
Ap.F Setting up an Autopilot
If the vessel is equipped with an autopilot device, and the device is connected
to the ECPINS system, you can designate that device for control by ECPINS.
This allows ECPINS to guide the own ship along a pre-planned route using
Track Control.
There are two way of using Track Control in ECPINS. Track Control can use a
connected autopilot device to control the own ship's movement or Track
control can use a simulated autopilot device that provides sensor data for
ECPINS training and testing purposes.
Autopilot for Navigation
When ECPINS is connected to the Raytheon NautoPilot 2025 (NP 2025) device
it can operate in a Track Control mode that meets the IEC 62065 Category B
Track Control Standards.
Note: For this option, your ECPINS software must be licensed with this functionally and you
must select a connected autopilot device (i.e. one that does NOT contain the word "Simulated"
in the "Model" field), such as the "Raytheon NP 2025 (APB, CRQ, PSR)".
Warning: While ECPINS is certified as an ECDIS and (when connected to the Raytheon NP2025)
complies with the Category B Track Control System Standard, the combination of the two
systems has not been certified.
Autopilot for Simulation
Several simulated autopilot devices are available in ECPINS. If one of these is
selected, and track control is turned on, ECPINS automatically connects to it
on startup. This is particularly useful for simulation [Ap.H] or demonstration
purposes.
To turn Track Control on and off, choose > Routes >Track Control... or press Ctrl+T.
The Track Control state is retained when ECPINS is shut down and restarted.
For example, if ECPINS is shut down with Track Control turned on, Track
Control will be on when ECPINS restarts.
Note: For this option, you must select a simulated autopilot device (i.e. one that contains the
word "Simulated" in the "Model" field).
Warning: This mode must not be used for operational/navigational purposes. It is for simulation
purposes only.
To designate an autopilot device:
1
In ECPINS Setup, choose > Setup > Sensor Setup > Setup Sensors.... The Setup
Sensors dialog box appears. Set the following:
In the Device Type list, choose Autopilot.
In the Port 1 list, choose sock 1.
• If required, select an alternate port to receive your Autopilot messages.
• In the Model list, choose a model compatible with the vessel’s device.
Compare the NMEA string types in brackets to those accepted by the device.
(For use with OSI’s NVES Vessel Simulator, choose “Simulated Autopilot C”.)
Click Save, then Exit.
•
•
2
332
APPENDICES
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Ap.G Operating system security
ECPINS has an optional security system that prevents unauthorized users from
gaining access to the operating system and any application on the system
other than ECPINS. This system, SoftLock, “locks” the Microsoft Windows
desktop so that it is not accessible to the user. This protects the ECPINS system
from tampering. Access is controlled by a password.
While SoftLock is installed automatically with ECPINS, you must activate it.
When active, SoftLock stays in the background and continuously monitors
ECPINS until you shut down the system. When ECPINS is shut down, the
SoftLock dialog appears [figure Ap-11].
Figure Ap-11 SoftLock dialog
1
1
•
Count down: If you do not click a System
Option button or enter a Password, after
20 seconds SoftLock automatically restarts
the ECPINS application.
Shutdown System: Shuts down ECPINS
and the operating system.
•
Service Access Password: When the proper
password is entered the operating system
appears. If ECPINS is configured to
automatically launch at startup, it will
restart immediately. The Service Access
Password changes automatically every
day.
To activate Softlock:
1
In ECPINS, choose > Setup > Security > Softlock until ON is selected. A Verify
Password dialog appears.
2
Type a Password.
3
Shut down ECPINS and the operating system.
4
Restart the operating system and ECPINS. In ECPINS, Softlock is active.
Once SoftLock is active, an operator can restart ECPINS or shut down the
entire ECPINS system. To shut down ECPINS and view the operating system
the operator needs a service access password.
To shut down ECPINS and work with the operating system:
1
In ECPINS, choose > Shutdown.... The Softlock dialog appears.
Or, press Alt+F6.
In the Service Access area, type a valid Password.
•
2
Note: Only an authorized person can gain access to the operating system. The Service Access
Password changes automatically every day. The password is available from the Service
APPENDICES
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
333
Department at OSI Maritime Systems (call 1-778-373-4600 or toll free in North America at 1877-432-7467) or, in some circumstances, the password authority for your organization.
Caution: When work on the operating system is complete, you must:
Ensure that Softlock is engaged (run ECPINS, choose > Setup > Security > and ensure that for
the Softlock menu choice ON is selected) before restarting the operating system.
Restart the operating system to re-engage Softlock. If you do not restart the operating system
after entering the Service Access Password, any ECPINS user who shuts down ECPINS will have
access to the operating system.
334
APPENDICES
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Ap.H Vessel simulation
This section describes how to use NVES Vessel Simulator 2.1.x, which simulates
a vessel’s sensor inputs to ECPINS.
Using the Simulator enables ECPINS to plot the vessel’s position, make its
calculations, and display realistic navigational information. The Simulator is
for ECPINS testing, training, route planning, and demonstration.
Warning: NVES is not for use in navigation.
Ap.H.1
Getting started
The Simulator simulates essential navigational sensors such as GPS, speed log,
and gyrocompass. It also simulates other sensors (such as depth log, dived
depth sensor, magnetic compass, ARPA, and LORAN-C), meteorological and
oceanographic sensors (such as wind, temperature, air pressure, waves, set,
and drift). You can adjust these sensors before or during a simulation.
Note: NVES Vessel Simulator is intended for simulating vessel positions between the latitudes
5° and 82°. Outside these latitudes, the Simulator generates inaccurate positions.
Note: NVES Vessel Simulator 2.1.x software uses the FOX Toolkit Library (http://www.foxtoolkit.org).
Note: NVES Vessel Simulator 2.1.x is for use with ECPINS 5.1 or greater.
Ap.H.1.A
Preconfiguring the ECPINS-SC sensors for simulation
An ECPINS-SC system is configured to operate with the ACT equipment and
sensors. To use the NVES simulator, you must change the Position and
Heading source.
To preconfigure the sensor data for simulation:
1
In ECPINS Setup, choose > Setup > Sensor Setup > Setup Sensors….
2
Set the Device Type to “Position 1”.
Ensure that Port 1 is set to "sock1".
b Set Model to “NMEA GPS (GLL,GGA,VTG,GSA,GSV,MSK,ZDA)”.
c
Click Save.
Set the Device Type to “Heading 1”.
a
3
Ensure that Port 1 is set to "sock1".
Set Model to “NMEA Gyro (HDT)”.
c
Click Save.
Shut down ECPINS Setup.
a
b
4
Ap.H.1.B
Starting a simulation
The Simulator is designed to operate concurrently with ECPINS.
Note: For NVES Vessel Simulator 2.1.x to be fully functional on a computer, that computer
must have a licensed version of ECPINS 5.1 or greater installed.
APPENDICES
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
335
To start the Simulator:
1
On the Windows desktop, double-click the NVES shortcut. The NVES Vessel
Simulator window appears [figure Ap-12], the simulator loads the default
setup [Ap.H.2.A], and the simulation starts.
Or, in Windows, choose Start > Programs > ECPINS [#.#] > NVES Vessel
Simulator [#.#] > NVES.
• Or run the file \eng\SIMNT\nves.exe
• Or run the shortcut \eng\SIMNT\nves
• Or run a Windows shortcut with startup parameters [Ap.H.12].
• By default, the Simulator starts in Vancouver Harbour with HDG 0°T and
Thrust 0 knots.
• To use a saved setup [Ap.H.2.C], click Setup....
• If the simulation doesn’t start, click Go.
Start ECPINS.
•
2
Figure Ap-12 NVES Vessel Simulator window
4
5
1
2
3
7
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
336
HDG/COG: Heading indicator (orange) and
course over ground (yellow)
Location: In Latitude and Longitude
Sensor readings
RoT: Rate of Turn indicator
LOG-L: Longitudinal water speed
indicator: Differs from SOG.
Helm: Rudder angle indicator [Ap.H.4.A]
Throttle: Click STOP to pause the
simulation.
Setup...: Enables you to set the simulation
start parameters or load a saved
simulation.
Restart: Starts the loaded simulation.
Go: Starts or resumes the simulation.
Stop: Ends the simulation [Ap.H.1.D].
Full Control: Restores the NVES Vessel
Simulator window to its full size (the
default, which is shown).
Half: Reduces the size of the ECPINS
window [figure Ap-13]. Enables you to
specify heading, speed, and position.
Console: Displays communication
between the Simulator and ECPINS. Also
enables you to use key strokes to control
the Simulator [Ap.H.11]. The Console
display resembles the single display of
previous NVES Vessel Simulator versions.
APPENDICES
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Environment: Used to set meteorological
and oceanographic conditions [Ap.H.6]
such as wind, set and drift, and
temperature.
Sensors: Used to activate and adjust the
simulated sensors [Ap.H.5].
GPS: Used to enter the GPS setting.
Engine: Used to activate and adjust the
simulated engine.
Sub: Used to activate and adjust the
simulated submarine features such as
mast status and hydroplane angles
[Ap.H.10].
INS: Used to enter the inertial navigation
system (INS) setting.
ARPA: Used to activate and adjust the
ARPA contact parameters.
Contacts: Displays simulated ARPA
contact [Ap.H.5.A] specifications, which
you can change.
Pump On: Enables you to send sensor
input to ECPINS from a file [Ap.H.9].
Off: Stops the sending of saved sensor
input.
Sensors On: Enables all of the sensors.
Off: Disables all of the sensors.
Figure Ap-13 NVES Vessel Simulator half window
•
•
Ap.H.1.C
HDG: You can type a heading.
LAT/LON: You can specify a position.
•
•
Thrust: You can enter the engine speed.
All editable fields are indicated with a
yellow boarder.
Pausing a simulation
You can effectively pause a simulation by stopping the vessel.
To stop the vessel:
On the throttle, click STOP. The Simulator holds the vessel’s heading and
sets the speed log to 0 knots.
•
•
Ap.H.1.D
The Simulator maintains other sensor and environmental effects.
To resume, use the throttle to resume your speed.
• Or click Setup..., type the desired HDG and Thrust, click Set, and then
Go.
• Or click Restart to start the vessel from the saved setup.
Ending a simulation
You can end a simulation without closing the Simulator. When you end a
simulation, ECPINS operation is not affected.
To end the simulation:
Click Stop.
•
•
•
Ap.H.1.E
The absence of sensor input will likely generate ECPINS alarms.
To resume, click Setup..., type the desired HDG and Thrust, click Set, and
then Go.
Or click the X in the top right corner of the NVES Vessel Simulator window
[figure Ap-12]. The window disappears and (after a brief delay) the vessel
disappears from the ECPINS display.
Switching between ECPINS and the Simulator
Since each application is controlled separately, you may have to switch
between the Simulator and ECPINS.
Since the NVES Vessel Simulator window [figure Ap-12] stays topmost on the
desktop, you can switch to the other application by clicking anywhere on its
window. If the Simulator is not visible, you can display it again using standard
Windows techniques.
APPENDICES
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
337
To switch to the Simulator when only ECPINS is displayed:
1
Press and hold Alt+Tab. The icons of active applications appear.
2
Press Tab one or more times to move the selection to the NVES icon.
3
Release the Alt key. The NVES Vessel Simulator window appears at the
forefront.
or
1
Press Ctrl+Esc to view the Windows task bar.
2
On the task bar, click the Simulator.
ECPINS operates normally even with the NVES Vessel Simulator window
displayed on top of it. To view ECPINS better, you can drag the NVES Vessel
Simulator window aside when necessary (click and hold on its title bar and
drag it to a new location). Or reduce the size of the Simulator window by
clicking Half.
To work in ECPINS when the NVES Vessel Simulator is displayed:
If the ECPINS window is in view, click anywhere on the ECPINS window.
•
•
Ap.H.2
Or on the Windows task bar, click the ECPINS application.
Or minimize the Simulator window (if a minimize button is displayed on the
NVES window [Ap.H.13]).
Preparing a simulation setup
You can alter the Simulator’s default setup to have a vessel start at a location
of your choice with a specified heading, Rate of Turn (RoT), and speed. You
can save a variety of setups for future purposes, such as having a vessel follow
a route under control of an autopilot.
Ap.H.2.A
Default setup
When you first run the NVES Vessel Simulator, it loads a default setup. This
setup includes the following basic settings:
a
Latitude: 49° 18.000’ N
b
Longitude: 123° 04.800’ W (the harbour at Vancouver, BC, Canada)
c
RoT: 0°/minute
d
HDG: 0° T
e
Thrust: 0 knots
f
Set: 0° T [Ap.H.6.B]
g
Drift: 0 knots [Ap.H.6.B]
For the default state of other settings, consult the relevant section of this
manual. In general:
a
b
c
d
e
338
All main sensor types (position, gyro, speed log) are enabled.
20 ARPA contacts [Ap.H.5.A] are active.
There is no wind [Ap.H.6.A].
The depth sounder [Ap.H.6.C] reads 100.0 m.
The ECPINS autopilot [Ap.H.7.A] is engaged.
APPENDICES
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
f
g
h
Ap.H.2.B
The magnetic variation is set to 10° west of true.
The temperature is set to 21°C.
The NVES Vessel Simulator window is set to stay topmost on the Windows
desktop.
Moving the simulated vessel to another location
At any time, you can move the simulated vessel to another location. You have
the option of keeping or changing the speed, heading, and rate of turn.
To move the vessel to another location:
1
Click Setup....
2
Specify a starting Latitude and Longitude for the vessel.
The format is degrees, minute, direction (ddd° mm.mmm’ H); for example,
“49° 52.740’ W”, “123° 02.040’ W”.
• Separate the three elements with a space.
• If you type the value in decimal format (for example, 48.355), the Simulator
converts it to standard format.
• For a western longitude or a southern latitude, precede the value with a
“-”; for example, “-123.08" is 123 degrees 13.8888 minutes west, “49.05” is 49° 03.000’ S.
Click Set.
•
3
•
If Go is active, ECPINS displays the new position.
or
1
Click Half.
2
Click Stop. The Simulator ends the current simulation.
3
On the Simulator interface, type values in the following fields:
HDG
Thrust
LAT
LON
Click Go. A simulation starts with the vessel in the position specified.
•
•
•
•
4
Ap.H.2.C
Saving a setup
You can change the default setup to suit a different simulation scenario.
Once you change the setup, you can save it for later use. You can save as
many setups as you wish. Since each setup is a file, you can transfer it to
another system.
To save a setup:
1
In the NVES Vessel Simulator, adjust the settings as you want them.
2
If you wish, you can move the vessel to the desired location and have it
moving at the desired heading, speed, and rate of turn [Ap.H.5].
Click Setup....
3
For Title, type a name for the setup.
•
APPENDICES
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
339
4
The Simulator uses the title for the file name.
Specify a starting Latitude and Longitude for the vessel.
5
For HDG, type a starting heading for the vessel in °T.
6
For Thrust, type a starting speed in knots.
7
If you wish, type a rate of turn (RoT) and the current’s Set and Drift.
•
Since Latitude, Longitude, HDG, RoT, Thrust reflect the vessel’s current
location and state, you can, as an alternative to typing in all these settings,
move the vessel [Ap.H.2.B] to the desired location before clicking Setup.
Click Save.
•
8
If you wish to save the file with a name other than the Title, type the name
in Simulation File to Save.
• The Simulator saves the setup as a file with the extension *.sim in the same
folder as the Simulator (usually “\eng\SIMNT\ “).
Click OK.
•
9
10 Click Set to use this setup.
•
Ap.H.2.D
Or click Cancel to return to the simulation.
Using a saved setup
To use a saved setup, you “load” it into the Simulator.
To use a saved setup:
1
In the Simulator, click Setup....
2
In the New Simulation dialog, click Load....
3
In the Load Simulation File dialog, select the setup.
4
Click OK.
5
Click Set. The setup takes immediate effect.
•
If the setup does not take immediate effect, ensure that you click Go.
To restart a saved setup:
In the Simulator, click Restart. The Simulator reloads the saved position
and settings.
Ap.H.3
How to simulate a vessel following a route
Note: This section includes optional ECPINS features that are only available on some systems.
A typical simulation has a vessel travel along a route in ECPINS. The ECPINS
autopilot directs the vessel along the route’s legs, monitors the vessel’s
position in relation to the route, and corrects its course if necessary. During
the simulation, you can control the vessel’s heading and speed.
The following steps describe how to create a typical simulation with basic
settings for vessel speed and course:
a
b
c
d
340
Prepare ECPINS to use an autopilot (Ap.H.3.A).
Ensure that ECPINS sensors are on the right port (Ap.H.3.C).
Set up a route in ECPINS (Ap.H.3.D).
Create a custom Simulator setup to start the vessel on that route —
Saving a setup (Ap.H.2.C).
APPENDICES
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
e
Run the simulation by launching ECPINS and the Simulator setup — Using
a saved setup (Ap.H.2.D).
With experience, you can use more elaborate setups and controls than shown
in this example.
Ap.H.3.A
Prepare ECPINS to use an autopilot
For the simulation to work, ECPINS must have a designated autopilot device
and the track control option turned on (choose > Routes >Track Control... or press
Ctrl +T).
For more information, see 5.G.2, “Track Control using a simulated autopilot”.
Ap.H.3.B
Track Control engagement conditions
When enabled, track control engages the autopilot on startup. ECPINS
displays the track control status in the message line (the drop-down list in the
top right of the screen layout): “Track Control: engaged” or “Track Control:
disengaged”. Scan the message for potential causes of the problem.
Track control disengages the autopilot under any of the following conditions:
a
b
c
The active route does not have, for every waypoint, a turn radius set at
between 1 metre and 50 nautical miles.
The active route has not been scanned since any change was made to it.
The vessel is outside the cross-track corridor.
You can remove any of these conditions or ensure that track control does not
engage the autopilot at all.
To adjust track control engagement conditions:
Ap.H.3.C
1
Choose > Setup > Vessel Setup > Set Track Control Options.... The Set Track Control
Options dialog appears.
2
Choose options and click OK.
Ensure that ECPINS sensors are on the right port
For ECPINS to receive sensor data input from the Simulator, its sensor devices
must be configured to monitor the port “sock1”. Since a Simulator outputs
sensor data to sock1 (a TCP/IP connection), ECPINS running on the same
computer will receive that data.
Note: To have a single Simulator output sensor data to several ECPINS systems across a
network, refer to the ECPINS Operator Training Course Instructor’s Manual.
To have a sensor device monitor sock1:
1
In ECPINS Setup, choose > Setup > Sensor Setup > Setup Sensors….
2
For each device (of the sensors types to be simulated, which could include
Position, Heading, ARPA, AIS, Depth Sounder, Anemometer, Mast, LOP,
Speed Log, Attitude, and Helm):
Ensure that Port 1 is set to "sock1".
Click Save.
c
Click Exit.
Shut down ECPINS Setup.
a
b
3
APPENDICES
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
341
Ap.H.3.D
Set up a route in ECPINS
For the autopilot to operate, it needs an active route. You can use an existing
route or set up a new route for the purposes of the simulation. For the
autopilot (and thus the simulation) to work [Ap.H.3.B], the route must:
a
b
c
d
e
Have cross-track warning and alarm distances set.
Have, for every waypoint, a turn radius set at between 1 metre and 50
nautical miles (optional).
Be scanned and have no change to it since the scan (optional).
Be designated as the active route.
Have a direction set to match the intended direction of the vessel.
To set up a route:
1
In ECPINS, create a route in the area of interest:
Choose > Routes > Create Route.... The Enter Route dialog box appears. Name
the route and set the planned speed. Click OK.
b When the next dialog box appears, follow the instructions to lay out the
route’s waypoints. ECPINS loads the charts necessary for that route.
c
Set leg properties for all the legs at once: choose > Routes > Edit Route > Leg
Properties... [figure Ap-14]. Properties include cross-track warning and alarm
distances.
d Set a turn radius for all waypoints: choose > Routes > Edit Routes > Set Turn
Radius....
• For the ECPINS autopilot to work, the turn radius must be between 1
metre and 50 nautical miles.
• To check or set the turn radius for a single waypoint, choose > Routes >
Edit Routes > Waypoint Properties....
e [Optional] Change the safety depth to suit the simulated vessel: choose >
Setup > Vessel Setup > Set Safety Depth....
Scan the route for dangers: choose > Routes > Scan Route.... The scan refers
to the Safety Depth. Save the scan results.
a
2
If the scan finds dangers, adjusting the route to eliminate them is optional.
The route will work with the simulator with or without dangers.
Record the latitude and longitude of waypoint 1 (or the waypoint at
which you want to start the vessel). A reliable way to do this is to:
•
3
Choose > Routes > Display Route Monitor.... The Route Monitor appears
[figure Ap-15].
b From the Routes list, choose the route created.
c
Write down the latitude and longitude of “wp 1”.
Record the course of the first route leg (or the leg on which you want to
start the vessel). A reliable way to do this is to:
a
4
a
342
In the Route Monitor, click Legs.
APPENDICES
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Write down the course for the first leg.
Designate the route as the active route: choose > Routes > Select Active Route
> Select Route by Name.... ECPINS displays the route in red (instead of
orange).
b
5
6
If the vessel is to proceed along the route in a direction opposite to that
in which you plotted the route, set the route direction to “Reverse” or
“Automatic” (choose > Routes > Set Route Direction…).
If the route direction is opposite to that of the simulated vessel, it will
reverse direction along the route.
• Route direction applies to the active route only.
Shut down ECPINS: choose > Shutdown....
•
7
Figure Ap-14 A route selected
1
2
1
Selected waypoint (all the waypoints are
selected)
2
Route leg (Mathews Point to Georgeson
Bay)
Figure Ap-15 Route Monitor
•
Ap.H.3.E
Legs: Click to find the course between two
waypoints [see figure Ap-17].
Save a setup for the route
For the convenience of having the vessel start at the first waypoint of the
active route, you can save a Simulator setup that starts the vessel there with a
suitable heading.
APPENDICES
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
343
To set up the Simulator to match the saved route:
Follow the procedure described in Ap.H.2.C, Saving a setup, with the
following adjustments:
•
•
•
•
Ap.H.3.F
We recommend that you give the setup a Title identical to that of the route
on which it starts the vessel.
For HDG, type the course of the route’s first leg (recorded in Ap.H.3.D).
For Latitude and Longitude, type the location of the route’s first waypoint (or
the waypoint on the route at which you want to start the vessel).
Ensure that the ECPINS Autopilot is enabled (on the Sensors display, under
Autopilot, check Enabled).
Running the simulation along the active route
Now, run the Simulator setup and ECPINS together to produce the desired
simulation.
To run a simulation with ECPINS:
1
Run the Simulator.
2
Load the saved setup [Ap.H.2.D].
3
If it is not running, start ECPINS; if ECPINS is running, switch to it [see
Ap.H.1.E]. After a delay, the vessel appears on the display at wp 1 (or at
the location designated as the vessel’s location) under way [figure Ap-16].
ECPINS displays location, sensor, and route information that corresponds to
the simulation setup.
• In the ECPINS message line (the drop-down list in the top right of the screen
layout), a message regarding the status of the autopilot should appear [see
Ap.H.3.B].
• To better view the simulation, the operator may wish to:
• Zoom in (left click) or zoom out (right click) to a suitable scale.
• Choose Relative Motion (RM) from the chart-window menu to keep the
vessel on the display.
• Choose Head Up (HUP) from the chart-window menu to have the
display adjust to the vessel’s course.
• Ensure that cross-track corridor, vessel speed and course, and a wheelover line are displayed (choose > Setup > Display Setup > Route
Display Options...).
• View the Route Monitor (choose > Routes > Display Route Monitor),
which among other information, indicates the active leg and waypoint
[figure Ap-17].
• In the NVES Vessel Simulator window, click Half to reduce the size of
the window.
Use the Simulator to change the vessel’s behaviour [Ap.H.4]; for example:
•
4
•
•
344
Change the heading: press the left or right arrow key.
• If the autopilot is engaged, it will return the ship to a heading that
follows the route.
• When the autopilot is engaged, the Simulator does not display the
autopilot’s changes to rudder angle and RoT.
Increase the vessel’s speed: press the up arrow.
APPENDICES
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
•
•
•
•
Decrease the vessel’s speed: press the down arrow.
Stop the vessel: click Stop. The vessel’s speed is set to 0.
When the vessel reaches the route’s last waypoint, it comes to a stop.
Change the location of the vessel: click Setup.....
Note: If you move the vessel to a position along a different route (that is, a position within the
cross-track distance of that route), the autopilot monitors and corrects the vessel’s progress
along that new route.
Figure Ap-16 A simulated vessel on a route
1
2
3
4
1
2
Simulated vessel
Cross-track corridor boundary
3
4
Active leg
Active waypoint
Figure Ap-17 Route Monitor — active route, Waypoints view
1
2
1
Ap.H.4
Route: The active route is indicated by
brackets.
2
Active waypoint (the waypoint to which
the vessel is heading)
Controlling a simulation
You can control the sensor readings that ECPINS receives from the Simulator.
This enables you to control the simulated vessel and its environment.
Ap.H.4.A
Controlling the vessel
You can use the Full Control or Half display to control the vessel’s heading,
speed, and rate of turn [figure Ap-18]. When simulating a submarine, you can
also set the vessel’s dived depth.
APPENDICES
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
345
Figure Ap-18 Vessel controls
1
2
3
4
5
6
COG: Indicates the vessel’s course over ground.
Differs from HDG due to the effect of wind
[Ap.H.6.A] and current [Ap.H.6.B].
SOG: Speed over ground.
HDG indicator: Indicates the vessel heading.
Always at the top; the “compass card” rotates.
STW: Speed Through Water (STW) indicator.
LOG-L: Longitudinal water speed indicator.
LOG-T: Transverse water speed indicator.
RoT: Rate of Turn indicator. To adjust, use the
Rudder controls to adjust, or press the left or
right arrow keys.
Thrust: Engine speed indicator.
Helm: Helm or rudder angle.
• Rudder angle indicator. Affects RoT. To
adjust, click the arrow or centering
buttons, or press the left or right arrow
keys, or click and hold on the indicator and
Ap.H.4.B
1
2
3
4
5
6
drag it to the desired angle. The actual
rudder angle (indicated by an orange line)
simulates a real vessel by taking some
time to move to the ordered angle, which
is indicated by a blue line. You can adjust
the rudder speed [Ap.H.5].
Left rudder: Increases the rate of turn
(RoT) to port.
Center rudder: Centres the rudder.
Right rudder: Increases RoT to starboard.
Throttle command: Click a command to set
the speed. Full is 100% of 60 knots.
Throttle slider: Affects the SOG, STW,
LOG-L, and Thrust. To adjust, click and
drag the slider, press the up or down
arrow keys, or click a command (such as
“Full”). SOG may be affected by wind.
Throttle indicator
Turns
You turn the vessel as you would a real ship — by increasing the rudder angle
so that the vessel’s rate of turn (RoT) increases [figure Ap-18]. The RoT varies
according to both the rudder angle and the speed; for example, 10° of rudder
at 5 knots may generate an RoT of 4°/minute whereas at 30 knots the RoT
may be 40°/minute.
To turn the vessel:
1
On the keyboard, press the left arrow to turn to port and the right arrow
to starboard.
This increases the rudder angle and thereby the rate of turn (RoT).
Or click the left rudder or right rudder button [figure Ap-18].
Or click and drag the Rudder indicator to the desired rudder angle.
Or center-click on the desired rudder angle.
When the vessel approaches the desired heading, decrease the rudder
angle to 0°.
•
•
•
•
2
•
Ap.H.4.C
Click the center rudder button to instantly set the rudder angle to 0°.
Speed
You control the vessel’s speed by setting the speed log to the desired speed.
The vessel changes to that speed immediately.
346
APPENDICES
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
To adjust the vessel’s speed:
On the keyboard, press the up arrow to increase the speed or the down
arrow to decrease the speed. The throttle indicator displays a percentage
of 60 knots (you can change this value).
•
•
Ap.H.4.D
Or drag the throttle slider until the indicator displays the desired percentage
[figure Ap-18].
Or click a throttle command.
Dives
You can simulate a submarine by setting the dived depth. Submarine versions
of ECPINS display the dived depth, which has an effect on the anti-grounding
cone and safety depth.
To set the dived depth:
1
Click Environment.
2
Type a Dived Depth and press Tab or Enter.
•
Ap.H.5
Or drag the slider to the desired depth.
Controlling navigational sensors
To refine your simulation, you can specify some of the sensors for which the
NVES Vessel Simulator simulates signals. You can also set the type or
characteristics of some sensors. Finally, you can vary the accuracy of some
sensors, such as GPS.
To set up navigational sensors:
1
Click the following sensor buttons:
Environment
Sensor
GPS
Engine
Sub
INS
ARPA
Set options.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
2
•
•
These options take effect immediately.
Your options are included in a saved setup.
APPENDICES
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
347
Note: You must be in the NVES Console window to use the Toggle keys.
Table Ap-1
Sensors display options
Default
state
NVES
button
Toggle
keya
Type:
• NMEA
• SIU
• Send HDT
• Send THS
Sensor
F1
Enabled
SHCHDM
SHCHDG
SHCROT
Sensor
F2
Uniaxial
Speed Log
Enabled
Generate Error
Water Lock
Sensor
Speed
Doppler Speed
Log
Enabled
8 knots
Generate Error
Water Lock
Bottom Lock
Type:
• NMEA
• EDO (DVL)
Sensor
Depth
Transducer
Offset
-2.0 m
Depth
Doppler Depth
Log
Enabled
Depth
Deep Water
Sounder
Depth
Shallow Water
Sounder
Sensor type
Sensor
Heading
Gyro
Enabled
0°
Heading
Magnetic
Compass
Speed
348
Options
Notes
F5
Positive offset numbers
provide the distance from
the transducer to the
waterline. Negative offset
numbers provide the
distance from the
transducer to the keel.
This sensor generates
NMEA sentences.
Environment
This sensor generates
readings unrelated to the
charted depth at the
vessel’s location.
Sensor
F6
Enabled
This sensor generates
readings unrelated to the
charted depth at the
vessel’s location.
This sensor generates
NMEA sentences.
Sensor
F8
Enabled
This sensor generate
readings unrelated to the
charted depth at the
vessel’s location.
This sensor generates
NMEA sentences.
Sensor
F7
Type:
• DRU
• DBT
• DPT
• 3-Byte
• Elac
NMEA Ver:
• 2.20
• 2.30
APPENDICES
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Table Ap-1
Sensors display options
Default
state
Options
Notes
NVES
button
Dived Depth
Sensor
Enabled
NMEA
Refer to table Ap-4.
Sensor
METOC
Enabled
A specialized anemometer
Sensor
Sensor type
Sensor
Submarine
Wind
Toggle
keya
F3
a. Refer to Ap.H.11, “Control by key stroke”.
Table Ap-2
Engine display options
Sensor type
Sensor
Default state
Options
Notes
NVES
button
Propulsion(s)
Propulsions
Enabled
Propulsions ID:
• ID 0 - ID 9
RPM can be set as a %.
Engine
Auto RPM
RPM (rpm)
Pitch (%)
Rudder(s)
Rudder
Enabled
Port
Starboard
Speed (%)
RPM can be set as a %.
Engine
Thruster(s)
Thruster
Enabled
Thruster ID:
• ID 0 - ID 9
RPM and Pitch can be set using
a percentage mode.
Engine
RPM %
Pitch %
RPM (rpm/%)
Pitch (º/%)
Angle (º)
APPENDICES
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
349
Table Ap-3
GPS display options
NVES
button
Toggle
keya
You can arbitrarily increase
or decrease the number of
satellites.
If you set the number to
Random, the Simulator has
enough satellites for a
position most of the time.
GPS
F12
Waypoint Request enables
you to request a particular
waypoint.
GPS
F11
Sensor type
Sensor
Default state
Options
Notes
Position
GPS
Enabled
NMEA
AUTO
DGPS
WGS 84
Random
number of
satellites
Random
HDOP
QYF GPS
Types:
• NMEA
• Magnavox
• Starlink
(Enable MR2B
Beacon)
• Starlink Invicta
Operating Mode:
• Auto
• No Fix
• 2D
• 3D
Quality:
• No Fix
• GPS
• DGPS
• PPS
Datum:
• WGS 84
• WGS 72
• NAD 27
Number of
Satellites:
• Random
• Fixed (12 max)
Options:
• Generate Error
• Generate Noise
• Random HDOP
• Enable QYF GPS
NMEA Ver:
• 2.20
• 2.30
GLONASS:
• Auto
• No Fix
Position
Dynamic
Positioning
System
Enabled
Waypoint Lock
Position
Auto Pilot
Disabled
GPS
Position
Loran-C
Enabled
GPS
a. Refer to Ap.H.11, “Control by key stroke”.
350
APPENDICES
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Table Ap-4
Submarine sensors display options
Sensor type
Sensor
Default state
Submarine
Periscope Server
Disabled
Submarine
Dived Depth Sensor
Enabled
NMEA
Submarine
Mast
Disabled
Options
Simulates a periscope server
that generates visual bearings.
Sub
NMEA
To set the depth, refer to
Ap.H.4.D, Dives.
Only ECPINS submarine
versions display the Dived
Depth and takes it into account
for anti-grounding and safety
depth.
Sensor
Mast:
A visual representation of each
mast’s status, as described
below.
Up - Tall green bar
Down - Shorter red bar
No Info - Blank space
Not Fitted - Not displayed
Sub
The hydroplane angles can be
set between 45.0 to 135.0
degrees.
Sub
Both distance fields can be
reset to zero.
Sub
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Submarine
Hydroplane
Disabled
ATTACK
COMMS
ECM
EO IR
ESM
Radar
SAT COM
SEARCH
Hydroplane:
• FWD
• AFT P
• AFT S
Angle (º)
Submarine
Water Distance
Table Ap-5
Disabled
NVES
button
Notes
Travel Dist
Cumulative Dist
INS display options
Sensor type
Sensor
Default state
Options
Position
INS
Disabled
Format:
• NMEA
• Binary
Device:
• SAGEM Sigma 40 SINS 1
• SAGEM Sigma 40 SINS 2
• SAGEM Sigma 40 Gyro
• SAGEM Sigma 40 INS
Position
SINS Error Ellipse
Mode
Disabled
Error Ellipse Mode:
• Auto
• Manual
• <#> m
APPENDICES
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Notes
NVES
button
INS
You can control the
size of the Error
Ellipse.
INS
351
Table Ap-6
ARPA display options
Sensor type
Section title
Default state
Options
Notes
Contacts
ARPA
Enabled
ARPA 1
Sperry Rascar WLB
ARPA 1
ARPA 2
Send Name
Send as AIS (VDM)
Send as AIS (VDO)
Generate Noise
Sperry Rascar default is RTA
standard.
ARPA 1 and ARPA 2 displays
the contacts stored in the files
“ARPA1.cfg” and “ARPA2.cfg”
[Ap.H.5.A].
Using the Send Name option,
you can have NVES send the
contacts to ECPINS as AIS
contacts.
NVES
button
ARPA
AIS information is sent via AIS
VHF Data-link Messages (VDM)
and AIS VHF Data-Link
Own-Vessel Report (VDO)
NMEA messages
Contacts
Stabilization
Contacts
OSI CTC ARPA/AIS
Contacts
Types
Ground
Disabled
• Ground
• Water
ARPA
• Associated
• No MIL symbol
These settings only apply to the
OSI CTC ARPA and OSI CTC AIS
messages.
ARPA
NMEA
Decca Racal
Raytheon
Sperry Marine
Atlas
Hughes
MOF AIS
MCC AIS
Kelvin Hughes
Construct
If multiple OSI CTC contacts are
selected, their positions will be
offset to declutter the displayed
contact symbols.
ARPA
KH Tracks
NMEA TTD
OTH-Gold
TMA
TPB
OSI CTC ARPA
OSI CTC AIS
OSI CTC OC
OSI CTC USR
Ap.H.5.A
ARPA contacts
The Simulator initially defines the position, course, and speed of two sets of
21 simulated ARPA contacts: ARPA 1 (active by default) and ARPA 2 (available
to activate). These contacts start in positions specified by a bearing and range
from the vessel. Each contact has an initial altitude, course, speed, and rate of
turn. The Simulator displays these contacts on the Contacts display [figure Ap19].
352
APPENDICES
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
By default, the Simulator sends each contact’s number and not its name. To
have the Simulator send the name, check the Send Name box on the Sensors
display.
Figure Ap-19 Contacts display
1
1
•
•
•
•
•
Click and drag the border down to view all
the contacts in the list.
Load...: Loads a set.
Save...: Saves the displayed set.
Add...: Adds a contact.
Remove: Removes the selected contact.
ARPA 1: The set of contacts displayed for
the ARPA 1 radar. Stored in the file
“ARPA1.cfg”.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
ARPA 2: The set of contacts displayed for
the ARPA 2 radar. Stored in the file
“ARPA2.cfg”.
E: Enabled (Yes or No)
A: Affiliation
Th: Threat (Threat or Non-threat)
T: Type (Air, Ground, Sea Surface, Sea
Subsurface)
S: Status (Query, Tracking, Lost)
Latitude: The contact’s current location.
Longitude: The contact’s current location.
You can add contacts to the list or change the characteristics of any of the
contacts. Each ARPA configuration file may contain settings for up to 101
ARPA targets.
To add a contact:
1
Click Contacts.
2
Choose an ARPA set: ARPA 1 or ARPA 2.
3
Click Add.
4
In the Target Information dialog [figure Ap-20], type values.
The Name can be a maximum of 8 characters.
The Simulator assigns an ID.
Use Range and Bearing to specify the contact’s starting location relative to
the vessel.
Click Accept. The Simulator appends the contact to the list.
•
•
•
5
APPENDICES
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
353
Figure Ap-20 Target Information dialog
To edit a contact:
1
Click Contacts.
2
Choose an ARPA set: ARPA 1 or ARPA 2.
3
In the list, double-click a contact.
4
In the Target Information dialog, change values.
5
Click Accept.
You can save a contact set for later use.
To save a contact set:
1
Choose the ARPA set: ARPA 1 or ARPA 2.
2
Click Save.
3
In the Save ARPA Configuration File dialog, type the Name of the Configuration File
to Save.
The file extension is *.cfg.
Click OK.
•
4
To use a contact set:
1
Click Contacts.
2
Choose an ARPA set: ARPA 1 or ARPA 2.
3
Click Load.
4
In the Load ARPA Configuration File dialog, select a file or type the Name of the
Configuration File to Load.
The file extension is *.cfg.
Click OK. The Simulator displays the new set.
•
5
Ap.H.6
Controlling the environment conditions
The NVES Vessel Simulator generates readings for meteorological and
oceanographic sensors [figure Ap-21] such as wind, current, air, and depth
under the keel. You can change the initial readings or adjust them on the fly.
354
APPENDICES
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Figure Ap-21 Environment window
Ap.H.6.A
Wind
You can have the Simulator to simulate true wind and take into account the
effect of this wind [figure Ap-22]. By default, the wind speed is 0 knots.
Note: The Simulator generates only true wind. That is, when you are using the Simulator, even
if you switch the wind vector displayed in ECPINS from true wind to apparent, ECPINS displays
true wind.
Figure Ap-22 Wind controls
1
2
1
Wind direction indicator
2
Wind speed slider
To set the wind speed and direction:
1
Click Environment.
2
Type a Wind Dir in degrees.
Or click and drag the indicator.
Or center-click a wind direction.
Type a Wind Speed in knots.
•
•
3
•
Or drag the slider up or down.
You can have the wind drift affect the vessel’s speed over ground (SOG).
To apply a percentage of the wind speed:
1
Click Environment.
2
Under Wind Options, type the Wind Drift percentage.
Or drag the slider.
The vessel’s speed over ground is affected by the assigned percentage of
the wind speed.
•
APPENDICES
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
355
Ap.H.6.B
Current
You can have the Simulator take into account current speed (drift) and
direction (set) [figure Ap-23]. Initially, there is no current.
Figure Ap-23 Current controls
1
2
1
Current direction indicator (Set)
2
Current speed slider (Drift)
To set the set and drift:
1
Click Environment.
2
Type a Set in degrees.
Or click and drag the indicator.
Or center-click a current direction.
Type a Drift in knots.
•
•
3
•
Ap.H.6.C
Or drag the slider up or down.
Depth
The Simulator generates random depth readings. As an alternative, you can
have the Simulator generate specific depth reading.
Note: Depth readings are unrelated to the charted depth at the vessel’s location.
To have the Simulator generate a specific depth:
1
Click Environment.
2
Under Depth Options, click Direct.
3
Type a Depth in metres.
•
Ap.H.6.D
Or drag the slider to the desired depth.
Dived Depth
For Submarine simulation the dived depth needs to be defined. The default
setting is a depth of 0 meters. Three options are available for simulating the
dive depth: defining a single depth value, randomly generating depth values,
or calculating depth values using a Sine function.
To assign a dived depth simulation:
1
Click Environment.
2
Under Dive Options, do one of the following:
a
b
c
356
Select Direct and type a Dived Depth in metres (or drag the slider).
Select Random.
Select Sine.
APPENDICES
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Ap.H.6.E
Magnetic variation and deviation
The Simulator sets the magnetic variation at a constant -10° and the
deviation at -1°. You can change the variation or deviation at any time.
To set the magnetic variation:
1
Click Environment.
2
Type a Mag. Deviation or Mag. Variation.
•
Ap.H.6.F
Or drag the slider.
Air
The Simulator provides ECPINS with constant air temperature and pressure
readings. The initial values are 21°C and 1010.0 mb. You can adjust these
values at any time.
To change the air temperature or pressure:
1
Click Environment.
2
Type an Air Temperature or Air Pressure.
•
Ap.H.6.G
Or drag the slider(s).
Waves
The Simulator generates constant wave length and height readings. The
initial values are 12 seconds and 0.3 m. You can adjust these values at any
time.
To change the wave length and height:
1
Click Environment.
2
Type a Wave Period or Wave Amplitude.
•
Or drag the slider(s).
You can also simulate how the waves and other meteorological conditions
affect the vessel’s pitch and roll movement. The Simulator automatically
generates random pitch and roll values; however, you can change this setting
to define specific values.
To specify the vessel’s pitch and roll:
1
Click Environment.
2
Clear the Automatic Pitch Mode or Automatic Roll Mode.
Clearing the automatic mode allows you to enter data in the Vessel Pitch
and Vessel Roll fields.
Type a Vessel Pitch or Vessel Roll.
•
3
•
Or drag the slider to the desired value.
Ap.H.7
Simulator options
Ap.H.7.A
Autopilot
Where an ECPINS has an autopilot device set up, the Simulator communicates
with it. This enables you to have a vessel automatically follow the active
APPENDICES
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
357
route [Ap.H.3]. If you want to forego automatic control and control the ship
directly, you can turn off the autopilot.
To turn off autopilot:
Ap.H.8
1
Click GPS.
2
Under Autopilot, uncheck Enabled.
Observing ECPINS activity
By default, the NVES Vessel Simulator reports any activity on the Console
display [figure Ap-24]. Activity includes any changes you make on other
displays or by key stroke [Ap.H.11].
Figure Ap-24 Console display
1
1
•
•
Ap.H.8.A
Scroll bar: Enables you to view the most
recent 100 lines.
Incoming: Enables you to observe
messages sent from ECPINS.
Outgoing: Enables you to observe
messages sent from the simulator.
Typically, a large volume of data is
displayed and the window constantly
scrolls to accommodate it.
•
•
•
Save Incoming...: Enables you to save
messages received from ECPINS to a text
file (*.log).
Save Outgoing...: Enables you to save
messages sent from the Simulator to a text
file (*.log) [Ap.H.8.B].
Console: Reports any activity such as
changes to controls or settings [Ap.H.8.A].
Observing ECPINS-Simulator communications
You can view the communication between the Simulator and ECPINS. This
two-way communication consists of many “sentences” — strings of data
arranged in standard formats.
Note: To understand the sentence formats (NMEA-standard and ECPINS-specific), refer to the
ECPINS Technician’s Guide.
To observe communications:
1
Click Console [figure Ap-24].
2
Click Outgoing to view sentences sent to ECPINS by the Simulator.
•
Ap.H.8.B
Or click Incoming to view sentences sent to the Simulator by ECPINS.
Saving communications
You can save all the communications that take place over a period of time in
a text file. The Simulator writes the sentences to the file you identify until
you stop it.
358
APPENDICES
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
To save communications:
1
Click Console.
2
Click Save Outgoing....
Or click Save Incoming... to save sentences sent to the Simulator by ECPINS.
Type a file name in Log file to Save.
•
3
Use the extension *.log.
Click OK. The Simulator saves all sentences to the file and displays a
message to that effect.
•
4
•
Ap.H.9
To stop the Simulator saving to the file, click Save Outgoing... again.
Playing back saved communications
You can use the Simulator to play back ECPINS data streams saved using the
Simulator [see Ap.H.8.B] or another application such as HyperTerminal.
Instead of generating simulated sensor input on the fly, the Simulator
“pumps” pre-recorded sensor input. This facilitates testing and analysis of
sensor data sentences.
To play saved data:
1
Click Console.
2
Click Pump On.
3
In the Message Pump dialog [figure Ap-25], type a File Name
Or click Browse... to select a log file (*.log).
Choose options.
•
4
5
Click OK. The Simulator sends the sentences in the file one by one from
the beginning of the file; ECPINS responds to this data accordingly.
•
To observe the data sent, click Outgoing.
Figure Ap-25 Message Pump dialog
•
•
Ap.H.10
Delay Time (s): Determines the length of
time the Simulator waits after each
sentence before sending the next.
Repeat: When the Simulator reaches the
end of the log file, it begins sending from
the start of the file.
•
Sync String: Specifies the character the
Simulator uses to identify the start of a
new sentence.
Simulating a submarine
The following steps allow you to simulate a submarine:
a
Add a depth sensor device: Follow the procedure described in Ap.H.3.C, Ensure that
ECPINS sensors are on the right port.
•
In the Setup Sensor dialog, click Add Device. In the Device Type list, choose a
depth sensor. In the Port l list, choose sock 1.
APPENDICES
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
359
b
Simulate the pressure depth: The Simulator simulates depth. You can vary this depth
[Ap.H.11.D].
c
Add an LOP sensor: Follow the procedure described in Ap.H.3.C.
d
In the Setup Sensor dialog, click Add Device. In the Device Type list, choose a
LOP sensor. In the Port l list, choose sock 1. The LOP sensor enables you to
simulate periscope bearings for position fixing.
Display the mast status: Follow the procedure described in Ap.H.3.C.
•
e
In the Setup Sensor dialog, click Add Device. In the Device Type list, choose
Mast. In the Port l list, choose sock 1. In the Model list, select Submarine
Mast Status.
Display the Hydroplane angles: Follow the procedure described in Ap.H.3.C.
f
In the Setup Sensor dialog, click Add Device. In the Device Type list, choose a
Helm sensor. In the Port l list, choose sock 1. In the Model list, select
Submarine Conning Data.
Display the log distance: Follow the procedure described in Ap.H.3.C.
•
•
In the Setup Sensor dialog, click Add Device. In the Device Type list, choose a
Speed Log sensor. In the Port l list, choose sock 1. In the Model list, select
WT: NMEA Speed Log - Water.
Display the Pitch and Roll: Follow the procedure described in Ap.H.3.C.
•
g
•
Ap.H.11
In the Setup Sensor dialog, click Add Device. In the Device Type list, choose
an Attitude sensor. In the Port l list, choose sock 1. In the Model list, select
Nautronix DPS.
Control by key stroke
On the NVES Vessel Simulator’s Console display, you can control the simulation
using the keyboard. You can control the Simulator, the movement of the
simulated vessel, meteorological conditions, and the simulated sensors. To see
a list of commands, press ?.
When you use a keyboard command, the Simulator displays the result
[figure Ap-26].
Figure Ap-26 Console display — command results
360
APPENDICES
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Some of the main commands are linked to the keyboard’s function keys, as
shown in table Ap-1.
Table Ap-1
Ap.H.11.A
Function key summary
Function key
Action
F1
Toggle gyro compass on and off.
F2
Toggle magnetic compass on and off.
F3
Toggle meteorological sensors on and off.
F4
Toggle LORAN-C on and off.
F5
Toggle Doppler speed log on and off.
F6
Toggle Doppler depth log on and off.
F7
Toggle shallow water sensor on and off.
F8
Toggle deep water sensor on and off.
F9
Toggle ARPA1 radar on and off.
F10
Toggle ARPA2 radar on and off.
F11
Toggle DPS on and off.
F12
Toggle DGPS on and off.
Controlling the Simulator
The Simulator works in real time, that is, it cannot be speeded up or slowed
down.
Table Ap-2
Simulator commands
Key
Action
?
Displays a list of the key stroke commands available.
p
Toggle on and off the display of the data that the Simulator is sending to ECPINS.
Shift+p
Toggle on and off the display of the data that ECPINS is sending to the Simulator.
The data displayed is indented. Typically, very little data or none at all is
displayed; typically the data includes Autopilot output (if active in ECPINS) and
DGPS Beacon Control output.
l
Logs the data that ECPINS is sending to the Simulator to the file nves.log.
Shift+l
Disable logging of the data that ECPINS is sending to the Simulator to the file
nves.log.
APPENDICES
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
361
Ap.H.11.B
Controlling the vessel
Table Ap-3
Vessel movement commands
Key
Action
i
Increase vessel velocity.
Shift+i
Increase vessel velocity by 5%.
k
Slow vessel by 20%.
}
Increase rotation counter-clockwise by 0.1°/minute.
{
Increase rotation clockwise by 0.1°/minute.
]
Increase rotation counter-clockwise by 1.0°/minute.
[
Increase rotation clockwise by 1.0°/minute.
Space bar
Stop vessel and current.
Arrow up
Increase vessel speed 0.5 meters per second north.
Arrow right
Increase vessel speed 0.5 meters per second east.
Arrow down
Increase vessel speed 0.5 meters per second south.
Arrow left
Increase vessel speed 0.5 meters per second west.
Home
Increase vessel speed 0.5 meters per second north and 0.5 meters per second
west.
Page Up
Increase vessel speed 0.5 meters per second north and 0.5 meters per second
east.
Page Down
Increase vessel speed 0.5 meters per second south and 0.5 meters per second
east.
End
Increase vessel speed 0.5 meters per second south and 0.5 meters per second
west.
Shift+arrow right
Increase vessel heading 1°.
Shift+arrow left
Decrease vessel heading 1°.
Table Ap-4
Autopilot commandsa
Key
Action
e
Increase vessel maximum turning rate by 1° per second.
Shift+e
Decrease vessel maximum turning rate by 1° per second.
Shift+u
Toggle autopilot on and off.
a. Autopilot must be set up in ECPINS. Refer to Ap.H.3.A, Prepare ECPINS to use an autopilot. Once set up,
ECPINS engages the autopilot automatically.
362
APPENDICES
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Ap.H.11.C
Controlling the meteorological conditions
Table Ap-6
Key
Action
F3
Toggle meteorological sensors on and off.
m
Decrease time between waves.
Shift+m
Increase time between waves.
n
Decrease wave height by 20%.
Shift+n
Increase wave height by 20%.
o
Increase relative humidity by 1%.
Shift+o
Decrease relative humidity by 1%.
q
Increase temperature by 1°C.
Shift+q
Decrease temperature by 1°C.
r
Increase wind speed.
Shift+r
Decrease wind speed.
t
Increase wind direction.
Shift+t
Decrease wind direction.
v
Increase pressure by 0.1 bars.
Shift+v
Decrease pressure by 0.1 bars.
Table Ap-7
Ap.H.11.D
Meteorological conditions commands
Water current commands
Key
Action
w
Increase current 0.5 meters per second north.
a
Increase current 0.5 meters per second west.
s
Increase current 0.5 meters per second south.
d
Increase current 0.5 meters per second east.
Adjusting sensors
Table Ap-8
ARPA/AIS commands
Key
Action
F9
Toggle ARPA 1 radar on and off.
F10
Toggle ARPA 2 radar on and off.
Shift+a
Toggle between ARPA 1 and ARPA 2 command mode.
b
Toggle ARPA message format.
Shift+b
Display current ARPA contact.
APPENDICES
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
363
Table Ap-8
364
ARPA/AIS commands (continued)
Key
Action
Tab
Select current ARAP contact 0.
1
Select current ARPA contact 1.
2
Select current ARPA contact 2.
3
Select current ARPA contact 3.
4
Select current ARPA contact 4.
5
Select current ARPA contact 5.
6
Select current ARPA contact 6.
7
Select current ARPA contact 7.
8
Select current ARPA contact 8.
9
Select current ARPA contact 9.
0
Select current ARPA contact 10.
!
Select current ARPA contact 11.
@
Select current ARPA contact 12.
#
Select current ARPA contact 13.
$
Select current ARPA contact 14.
%
Select current ARPA contact 15.
^
Select current ARPA contact 16.
&
Select current ARPA contact 17.
*
Select current ARPA contact 18.
(
Select current ARPA contact 19.
)
Select current ARPA contact 20.
x
Enable current ARPA contact.
Shift+x
Disable current ARPA contact.
`
Set the current ARPA contact to Lost or not Lost.
~
Identify the current ARPA contact as a threat or not a threat.
Ctrl+m
Change the current ARPA contact’s type (for example, Air, Surface).
Ctrl+n
Change the current ARPA contact’s affiliation (for example, Hostile, Friendly).
Shift+z
Send sample AIS message (MCC format).
g
Toggle between WLB modified and RTA standard for Sperry RASCAR ARPA.
APPENDICES
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Table Ap-9
Depth sounder commands
Key
Action
F6
Toggle Doppler depth log on and off.
F7
Toggle shallow water sensor on and off.
F8
Toggle deep water sensor on and off.
;
Decrease depth by 0.5 feet.
:
Increase depth by 0.5 feet.
Shift+g
Toggle between NMEA DRU, DBT, DPT, and 3-Byte sentences.
Shift+j
Toggle depth randomizer on and off. If On, the Simulator generates random
depths for ECPINS, regardless of the depth indicated by the active chart.
Table Ap-10 Dynamic Positioning System commands
Key
Action
F11
Toggle DPS on and off.
Shift+w
Initiate waypoint request.
z
Toggle waypoint lock.
Table Ap-11 Gyro compass commands
Key
Action
F1
Toggle gyro compass on and off.
F2
Toggle magnetic compass on and off.
Shift+c
Toggle between normal gyro (2 Hz) and SIU gyro (10 Hz).
Table Ap-12 Position commands
Key
Action
F12
Toggle DGPS on and off.
Shift+d
Toggle GPS/LORAN-C errors.
Shift+s
Toggle GPS errors and noise (+/- 0.1 kn).
u
Toggle between GPS types.
Shift+k
Toggle geodetic datum between WGS 84, WGS 72, and NAD 27.
Shift+F12
Toggle MRB2A beacon output.
Ctrl+F12
Toggle QYF GPS output.
Ctrl+d
Increase the number of satellites.
Ctrl+Shift+d
Decrease the number of satellites.
APPENDICES
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
365
Table Ap-12 Position commands (continued)
Key
Action
Ctrl+f
Toggle the number of satellites randomizer on and off.
Ctrl+i
Increase magnetic variation.
Ctrl+Shift+i
Decrease magnetic variation
Ctrl+j
Increase HDOP.
Ctrl+Shift+j
Decrease HDOP.
Ctrl+k
Toggle HDOP randomizer on and off.
Shift+y
Toggle simulated offset of the GPS/LORAN-C position. This movement of the
vessel's position simulates a loss or disruption of the GPS signal caused by events
such as passage under a bridge.
Shift + F11
Toggle binary SINS on and off.
Table Ap-13 LORAN-C commands
Key
Action
Shift+d
Toggle GPS/LORAN-C Errors.
F4
Toggle LORAN-C on and off.
Shift+s
Toggle errors and noise (+/- 0.1 kn).
Shift+y
Toggle simulated offset of the LORAN-C position. This movement of the vessel's
position simulates a loss or disruption of the LORAN-C signal caused by events
such as passage under a bridge.
Table Ap-14 Periscope commands
Key
Action
Ctrl+p
Toggle periscope server on and off.
Ctrl+c
Increase bearing uncertainty.
Ctrl+Shift+c
Decrease bearing uncertainty.
Ctrl+v
Increase range uncertainty.
Ctrl+Shift+v
Decrease range uncertainty.
Ctrl+b
Increase pitch uncertainty.
Ctrl+Shift+b
Decrease pitch uncertainty.
Table Ap-15 Pressure depth commands
366
Key
Action
Ctrl+w
Toggle pressure depth sensor on and off (default is on).
APPENDICES
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Table Ap-15 Pressure depth commands (continued)
Key
Action
Ctrl+e
Increase pressure depth.
Ctrl+Shift+e
Decrease pressure depth.
Table Ap-16 Speed log commands
Ap.H.12
Key
Action
F5
Toggle Doppler speed log on and off.
h
Toggle bottom lock on and off for Doppler speed log.
Shift+h
Toggle water lock on and off for Doppler speed log.
f
Toggle uniaxial speed log.
Shift+f
Toggle error conditions on uniaxial speed log.
y
Toggle uniaxial bottom-lock/water-lock speed log.
Startup parameters for use in shortcuts
Rather than load a setup after starting the NVES Vessel Simulator, you can
have it start up with a custom setup. To do this, you create a Windows
shortcut to nves.exe and enter command-line parameters in the Target field of
the shortcut’s Properties dialog.
For example, the Simulator’s default setup is as follows:
-tp5050 -la49.2983 -lo-123.0567 -mNMEA -a0 -r -i8.0 -z0
These settings are in the form of a command line. The syntax of the command
line is similar to UNIX, as follows:
nves -parameter1[parameter1 value] -parameter2[parameter2
value] -parametern[parametern value]
The command line begins with the program name “nves” (“nves.exe” is also
acceptable). This is followed by one or more parameters (any number of
parameters are accepted). Each parameter is prefixed with a minus sign (-)
and is followed by its value. The parameters may be in any order.
You can change the setup on startup to suit a different simulation scenario.
You can save such setups for easy use as separate, named Windows shortcuts.
APPENDICES
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
367
To create a custom setup for startup:
Ap.H.13
1
In Windows, right-click on “nves.exe” and choose Create Shortcut from the
menu.
2
Right-click the new shortcut and choose Properties.
3
In the Properties dialog, click the Shortcut. tab.
4
In the Target: box, modify the parameters.
5
Click OK.
6
Rename the shortcut, if desired. The shortcut name is displayed in the
title bar of the NVES application.
Startup parameters
The tables that follow show the parameters and their values available for use
in the command line.
Table Ap-17 ARPA type parameters
Parameter
Variable values
-ua[n]
ARPA type:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
0 = NMEA
1 = Decca Recal
2 = Raytheon
3 = Sperry Marine
4 = Atlas
5 = Hughes VTS
6 = MOF AIS
7 = MCC AIS
8 = Kelvin Hughes
9 = Construct
10 = NMEA TTD
11 = OTH-Gold
12 = TMA
13 = TPB (Tactical Picture Broadcast)
14 = KH Tracks
15 = OSI CTC ARPA
16 = OSI CTC AIS
17 = OSI CTC OC
18 = OSI CTC USR
w = Send as AIS (VDM)
g = Generate Noise
Table Ap-18 Baud rate parameter
Parameter
Variable values
-b[nnnnn]a
Where nnnnn is a baud rate between 1200 and 56000.
a. When entering a parameter with a variable of the form [n], omit the square brackets
and substitute a value for n.
368
APPENDICES
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Table Ap-19 Course parameters
Parameter
Variable values
-c[course]
Initial course (degrees). If no course is specified, the course defaults to 0° North.
Table Ap-20 COM port parameters
Parameter
Variable values
-pcom[n]
Port number from 1 to 12+
-n7
7 data bits
-n8
8 data bits
-qnone
No parity
-qodd
Odd parity
-qeven
Even parity
-s1
1 stop bit
-s1.5
1.5 stop bits
-s2
2 stop bits
Table Ap-21 Depth message type parameters a
Parameter
Variable value
-ud[n]
Depth sensor type:
•
•
•
•
•
0 = DRU
1 = DBT (NMEA string)
2 = DPT (NMEA string)
3 = 3 BYTE protocol (non-NMEA)
4 = ELAC
a. Specifying a depth message type parameter (that is, -z[n]) causes a random depth simulation to be turned on
[see table Ap-9, ”Depth sounder commands”, on page 365].
Table Ap-22 Echo data to window parameters
Parameter
Variable values
-e
Echo data to window.
Table Ap-23 Input parameters
Parameter
Description
-g
Starts the Simulator with the simulation stopped.
APPENDICES
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
369
Table Ap-24 GPS type parameters
Parameter
Description
-ug[n]
GPS:
•
•
•
•
0 = NMEA GPS
1 = Magnavox GPS
2 = Starlink DNAV212 GPS
3 = Starlink Invicta GPS
Table Ap-25 Position parametersa
Parameter
Description
-la[nn.nnn]
Latitude degrees and decimal degrees North
-la[-nn.nnn]
Latitude degrees and decimal degrees South
-lo[nnn.nnn]
Longitude degrees and decimal degrees East
-lo[-nnn.nnn]
Longitude degrees and decimal degrees West
a. To calculate decimal degrees: decimal degrees = minutes / 60
Table Ap-26 Sensor output parameters
Parameter
Description
-dgps
GPS data only
-ui[n]
SINS:
•
•
-dgyro
Gyro data only
-dspeed
Speed data only
-ddvl
Binary doppler velocity log
-dwind
Anemometer data only
-ddepth
Depth data only
-dloran
LORAN-C data only
-darpa
ARPA data only
-dbeacon
Starlink MRB2A DGPS beacon only
-dmagcompass
Magnetic compass only
-dpds
Dived depth (pressure depth) sensor only
-up[n]
Dived depth sensor:
•
•
370
1 = SINS 1
2 = SINS 2
0 = NMEA
1 = ISCMMS
-dperiscope
Periscope server only
-dechosounder
Binary echo sounder
APPENDICES
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Table Ap-27
Speed log parameters
Parameter
Description
-i[nnn]
0 to 20 knots recommended. If no speed is specified, the speed defaults to 8
knots.
-us[n]
Speed log type:
•
•
•
•
0 = Water lock
1 = Bottom lock
2 = NMEA
3 = EDO (DVL)
Table Ap-28 TCP/IP port number parameters
Parameter
Description
-tp[nnnnn]
5000 - 10000 recommended
Table Ap-29 Window parameters
Ap.H.13.A
Parameter
Description
-k
Enables Windows to treat the NVES Vessel Simulator window as a normal
window. This window has a minimize button that enables you to hide the NVES
window. When this flag is not set, the Simulator window stays topmost on the
Windows desktop and you cannot minimize it.
Startup command examples
a
The command to set the Simulator to COM2 at 9600 baud in Vancouver
Harbor (latitude 49.3, longitude -123.1):
nves -pcom2 -b9600 -la49.3 -lo-123.1
b
The command to set the Simulator to output Gyro data only:
nves -dgyro
c
The command to set the Simulator to output NMEA GPS data only:
nves -dgps -mNMEA
d
The command to set up the Simulator as a TCP/IP socket server on port
5000:
nves -tp5000
APPENDICES
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
371
Ap.H.14
ARPA 1 and ARPA 2 contacts
The Simulator uses the following contacts for the ARPA 1 and ARPA 2 contact
sets. ARPA 1 is selected for the default setup [see Ap.H.5.A, “ARPA contacts”].
These contacts are saved in the files ARPA1.cfg and ARPA2.cfg.
Altitude
Course
(degrees)
Speed
(knots)
RoT
(rad/s)
Name
(8 characters,
no spaces)
-0.0570
0.0
170.0
2.0
0.0
Spar
-0.005
0.0570
0.0
270.0
0.0
0.0
Halifax
enabled
0.010
-0.0090
0.0
45.0
4.0
1.0
Nanticok
3
enabled
0.000
-0.0090
0.0
0.0
8.0
3.0
Manitoul
4
enabled
-0.012
-0.0205
0.0
45.0
6.0
-2.0
HalDean
5
enabled
-0.006
-0.0460
0.0
0.0
2.0
-0.5
Juniper
6
enabled
0.160
-0.0630
0.0
135.0
4.0
-2.0
IdaLewis
7
enabled
0.004
-0.0370
0.0
305.0
4.0
1.0
Smalwood
8
enabled
0.018
-0.0833
0.0
220.0
8.0
3.0
Endeavor
9
enabled
0.001
0.0230
0.0
270.0
10.0
4.0
Surveyor
10
enabled
-0.018
-0.0810
0.0
320.0
2.0
-0.0
Munsen
11
enabled
-0.005
-0.1070
0.0
0.0
0.0
-0.0
MVArctic
12
enabled
0.117
0.0450
0.0
270.0
4.0
-2.0
Fearless
13
enabled
0.018
-0.0890
0.0
95.0
8.0
3.0
Memphis
14
enabled
0.004
-0.0270
0.0
70.0
6.0
2.0
CapRoger
15
enabled
-0.006
0.0390
0.0
280.0
2.0
0.0
AnHarvey
16
enabled
0.005
-0.0204
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Caribou
17
enabled
0.004
-0.0113
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Ferbec
18
enabled
0.0022
-0.0019
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Desmaras
19
enabled
-0.005
-0.0028
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Renfrew
20
enabled
0.0003
0.0075
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Algowest
Contact
ID
Enabled
Lat offset
(degrees)
Lon offset
(degrees)
0
enabled
0.005
1
enabled
2
Ap.H.15
Joystick control
It is possible to control the own ship in NVES using a joystick. Forward and
back motion controls the throttle; left and right motion controls the rudder.
To work, the joystick must output NMEA sentences $IIROT, $IIRSA and
$IIVHW. Connect the joystick to the same socket or port NVES and ECPINS use
to communicate. Typically, this is IP:127.0.0.1 port:5050 (“sock1” in ECPINS).
(To change the port on which NVES sends out data, right-click the NVES
372
APPENDICES
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
shortcut and in the Target field append “-tp####” where #### is the port, such
as 5051.)
Note: When the ECPINS Autopilot is engaged, the joystick is disabled automatically.
APPENDICES
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
373
374
APPENDICES
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Index
Symbols
-........................................................................................25, 27
^ .......................................................................................... 364
+ ......................................................................................25, 27
Numerics
0.5-1....................................................................................... 27
1 to 1 chart scale (default)................................................. 35
1-1.......................................................................................... 27
2-1.......................................................................................... 27
24-hour data logs.............................................................. 140
2D DGPS coverage ............................................................ 183
2D GPS coverage .........................................................42, 183
3D DGPS coverage ............................................................ 184
3D GPS coverage ..................................................42, 92, 183
90-day data logs ............................................................... 140
A
AA4C1X00 - ECDIS Symbols .............................................. 54
abbreviations, S57 ....................................................240, 312
About... .................................................................................. 13
absolute display scales ....................................................... 27
Acknowledge AIS Alarms... .................................................. 208
Acknowledge Alarms ..............................................15, 21, 100
acknowledge alarms ........................................................... 51
Acquire ARPA Contact.......................................................... 193
action points ...................................................................... 159
activating a BSB chart CD ................................................ 289
Active Radar......................................................................... 189
Add AIS Channel Management Region... ............................. 207
Add DGPS Beacon... ............................................................. 185
Add Expanding Square......................................................... 155
INDEX
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Add Parallel Legs... ...............................................................155
Add Sector Search.................................................................155
Add Waypoint.......................................................................149
Adjust Parallel Index .............................................................109
Adjust Position with Cursor.....................................................90
Adjust Position........................................................................89
adjusted position .................................................................89
range and bearing ..........................................................89
Administrative Areas .........................................................318
Admiralty Information Overlay (AIO) ..............................265
Admiralty TotalTide ...........................................................136
Adobe Acrobat .....................................................................15
Aero .....................................................................................312
age, ARPA contact .............................................................192
AHS
Australian Hydrographic Service
raster chart format .......................................................266
vector chart formats .....................................................265
AIR interrogation request .................................................200
AIS .......................................................................................197
alarms ..........................................................................208
alarms display ................................................................48
anchor watch and.................................................... 72, 73
antenna position ..........................................................206
broadcast .....................................................................204
broadcast position........................................................206
call sign ........................................................................206
certified equivalent MKD..............................................188
channels display .............................................................47
contact .........................................................................198
contact call sign ...........................................................200
contact heading............................................................199
contact query .................................................................15
contact symbol .............................................................198
contact time-out.................................................. 198, 199
375
contact, locating .......................................................... 248
device position ............................................................. 206
down time.................................................................... 209
IMO number................................................................. 207
info update time........................................................... 200
message ....................................................................... 204
MMSI ........................................................................... 207
organization identification ........................................... 211
Password...................................................................... 207
ports display................................................................... 47
position source............................................... 46, 47, 206
position source switching............................................. 206
reporting rate ............................................................... 210
Safety Related Message ............................................... 201
screen layout.................................................................. 45
secure........................................................................... 209
secure channel ............................................................. 209
secure identification..................................................... 211
secure key .................................................................... 211
secure mode................................................................. 213
setup ............................................................................ 188
signal age..................................................................... 200
simulated contacts ....................................................... 352
source........................................................................... 188
static ship information .......................................... 47, 206
static voyage information...................................... 47, 207
Status panel ................................................................... 45
symbol display..................................................... 198, 317
transponder identification ............................................ 207
transponder switch....................................................... 206
vessel shape and .......................................................... 206
water level and .............................................................. 87
AIS................................................................................. 45, 199
AIS Display Options... ........................................................... 199
AIS Radio Transmission....................................... 207, 208, 209
AIS synchronization........................................................... 207
Al ......................................................................................... 312
alarm
warning.......................................................................... 20
Alarms .................................................................................... 43
alarms ............................................................................ 19, 91
acknowledging................................................. 15, 20, 21
AIS................................................................................ 208
anti-grounding ............................................................... 93
audible ........................................................................... 95
autopilot......................................................................... 95
conditions that generate ................................................ 91
crossing................................................................. 68, 174
cross-track...................................................................... 94
cross-track limit.............................................................. 51
depth.............................................................................. 93
GPS ......................................................................... 52, 92
indicators ....................................................................... 20
logging of..................................................................... 140
panel ....................................................................... 43, 51
376
screen layout ..................................................................43
sensor .............................................................................91
stages of .........................................................................19
summary of.....................................................................19
when GPS position is lost ...............................................52
zone................................................................................94
AlF Fl ....................................................................................312
alidade error .......................................................................123
AlLFl .....................................................................................312
AlOc .....................................................................................312
AlOc Fl .................................................................................312
Alt+Ctrl+S .............................................................................16
Alt+F6..................................................................................333
Alt+I .......................................................................................16
Alt+Tab ................................................................................338
AMLs
feature display ................................................................35
Groups category .............................................................35
updates.........................................................................280
anchor
bearing .........................................................................110
EBL................................................................................110
position...........................................................................72
watch..............................................................................72
watch alarm....................................................................94
anchorage .............................................................................72
Anchorage area ..................................................................321
Anchorage prohibited...............................................321, 322
Anchorage, not an anchoring berth ................................322
anemometer .........................................................................64
alarm ..............................................................................51
offset ..............................................................................66
sensor alarm ...................................................................92
angle brackets, on a menu .................................................17
ans file .................................................................................307
antenna, AIS .......................................................................206
Anti-Gr field ...................................................................69, 94
Anti-Grounding .......................................................................69
anti-grounding cone ............................................................68
alarm ..............................................................................93
best charts and the .......................................................231
clearing line and the .....................................................174
configuration ..................................................................69
objects detected by the.................................................321
apparent wind ......................................................................65
Apply Sensor Fix....................................................................122
Approach chart ...................................................................227
ARCS 08 expiry warning ...................................................235
ARCS charts ........................................................................236
Admiralty Raster Chart Service
backing up permits for..................................................276
format...........................................................................266
INDEX
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
highlighting updates on............................................... 285
invalid permits for........................................................ 275
license..................................................................235, 274
loading priority ............................................................ 232
Navigator license ......................................................... 270
night colours for an........................................................ 53
Notice to Mariners ....................................................... 248
obtaining a license....................................................... 270
official.......................................................................... 228
outdated ...................................................................... 284
permits........................................................267, 270, 274
presentation library version ........................................... 13
updates........................................................................ 283
verifying currency of data in ........................................ 273
areas
chart correction............................................................ 256
quick correction ........................................................... 252
to be avoided.......................................................321, 322
updated ....................................................................... 285
ARPA ................................................................................... 191
anchor watch and ....................................................72, 73
contact age .................................................................. 192
contact query ................................................................. 15
contact time-out .......................................................... 192
contact, lost .........................................................191, 192
contacts ....................................................................... 189
contacts, locating......................................................... 248
display feature ............................................................. 317
radar ............................................................................ 191
screen layout..........................................................44, 193
source(s) ...................................................................... 180
target display...........................................................44, 45
Target Tracking............................................................. 193
ARPA ...................................................................................... 44
ARPA Reference point ...................................................... 331
ARPA Setup... ....................................................................... 195
arrival alert .................................................................159, 160
arrival circle, autopilot and the ....................................... 102
asterisk before a route name .......................................... 170
asterisk on a waypoint name .......................................... 164
asterisks in a triangle on a chart..................................... 319
attributes
chart feature ...............................................255, 256, 319
marker ......................................................................... 119
attributes, chart correction ......................................256, 257
category....................................................................... 257
display of ..................................................................... 262
informational ............................................................... 258
AUA ..................................................................................... 149
audible alarm ....................................................................... 95
augmentation, chart ......................................................... 251
Australian Geodetic Datum (AVA) .................................. 149
Australian Hydrographic Service. See AHS.
INDEX
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Auto ARPA Acquisition .........................................................194
Auto Chart Loading ..............................................................231
Auto Chart Loading Setup.....................................................232
automatic chart loading ...................................................231
automatic heading sources ..............................................187
automatic position fixes .....................................................89
automatic position sources ..............................................182
automatic route direction .................................................161
autopilot ...................................................................... 96, 332
alarm ..............................................................................95
alarm conditions.............................................................95
simulation engagement conditions ..............................341
AVA
Australian Geodetic datum
AVI file type ........................................................................247
Az° .........................................................................................42
azimuth angle (GPS)
Azimuth, radar ...................................................................219
B
B .............................................................................................32
B+...........................................................................................32
Backup Permit Files to Disk...................................................276
Backup Permits to Disk... ......................................................279
Base display..........................................................................32
example..........................................................................33
Base+ display .......................................................................32
beacon, DGPS.....................................................................184
bearing
anchor ..........................................................................110
ARPA contact................................................................192
between a marker and the own ship ............................116
calculation....................................................................113
clearing. See clearing line.
display of information on a ..........................................104
display options .............................................................111
hazard ..........................................................................111
line, range-and- ............................................................109
line. See EBL.
magnetic vs. true............................................................59
berth number .....................................................................318
Better Positioning Source Available ................................182
Better Scale Chart Available ............................................230
Beyond Scale warning.........................................................28
Black.....................................................................................218
black-level.............................................................................54
blind pilotage .....................................................................108
BMP file type ......................................................................247
bn .........................................................................................312
bottom, profile of sea .........................................................50
boundaries, chart .................................................................29
377
display of...................................................................... 319
simplified...................................................................... 239
traditional .................................................................... 239
bow velocity vector ............................................................. 62
bridge-wing pelorus .......................................................... 123
briefing, screen layout for nav ........................................... 41
brightness ............................................................................. 54
Brightness and Contrast... ...................................................... 54
Broadcast AIS Messages....................................................... 205
broadcast, AIS .................................................................... 204
browser, ECPINS ......................................................... 15, 246
BSB charts......................................................... 236, 266, 288
CD ....................................................................... 288, 289
chart notes ................................................................... 245
highlighting updates on ............................................... 285
loading priority............................................................. 232
night colours for............................................................. 53
official .......................................................................... 228
presentation library version............................................ 13
updates ........................................................................ 289
buoyage system, display of the ....................................... 318
buttons, trackball/mouse .................................................... 14
By ......................................................................................... 312
By Keyboard .............................................106, 148, 150, 244
By Name ................106, 117, 121, 148, 150, 244, 247, 248
C
C/NO ...................................................................................... 42
carrier-to-noise ratio (GPS)
Cable areas......................................................................... 321
Cables ................................................................................. 322
cables (distance to run) ...................................................... 80
Calc (RoT sensor) ................................................................. 50
calculator
distance........................................................................ 113
route ............................................................................ 164
Calculator... ................................................................. 113, 114
Calibrate Radar with Cursor.................................................. 221
Calibrate Radar..................................................................... 221
call sign
AIS................................................................................ 206
AIS contact................................................................... 200
Canadian Hydrographic Service ...................................... 228
Cancel All ARPA Contact... ................................................... 194
Cancel ARPA Contact... ........................................................ 194
cancelled charts ........................................................ 281, 284
catalog file, absent chart .................................................. 228
Caution area....................................................................... 321
cautionary areas, display of ............................................. 318
Cb ........................................................................................ 312
378
CC ..................................................................................31, 233
Chart Centred - selected chart mode
Chart Centred - topmost chart mode
CC-selected .............................................................................31
CC-topmost.............................................................................31
CD, update ........................................................ 283, 284, 285
centering the chart ..............................................................14
centre .....................................................................................14
centre button ........................................................................14
centre line, vessel ...............................................................328
centre of a vessel shape ....................................................330
centre-click on a two-button mouse .................................14
Ch .........................................................................................312
Change Chart Display Order dialog box .........................233
Change Chart Order... ....................................................54, 233
Change Ordered Course and Speed ......................................131
Change Ordered Course and Speed... ..........................129, 131
channel, AIS secure ...........................................................209
Chart 1 ..........................................................................54, 238
Chart Centred - selected .....................................................31
Chart Centred - selected chart mode. See CC.
Chart Centred - topmost chart mode. See CC.
chart correction ..................................................................253
anti-grounding cone and ................................................69
appearance of a.......................................... 256, 257, 258
attributes .............................................................256, 257
automatic removal from display ...................................254
based on an existing feature ........................................258
by deleting an existing feature .....................................260
choosing attributes of a................................................257
clearing line ..................................................................174
converting an OSI correction to a .................................263
copying .........................................................................262
creation ........................................................................255
default attributes ..........................................................258
deletion ........................................................................262
finding a .......................................................................248
modifying a...................................................................256
SCAMIN and a ..............................................................262
set........................................................................253, 255
set status .............................................................253, 261
time-dependent attributes of a .....................................258
viewing .........................................................................261
See also chart features.
chart data, display of information about........................319
chart display .........................................................................18
display range ...........................................................25, 26
menu ................................................................ 17, 19, 25
mode ..............................................................................25
title bar ...........................................................................18
chart display menu ..............................................................25
chart features
INDEX
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
See also chart correction.
adding information to.................................................. 258
adding new..........................................................253, 255
categories of ..........................................................34, 317
control of .................................................................19, 25
correcting.............................................................253, 258
creating........................................................................ 253
deleting........................................................................ 260
display of ....................................................................... 32
display of optional ......................................................... 34
on system startup .......................................................... 36
optional ......................................................................... 34
querying.................................................................16, 243
reviewing C-MAP updates to ....................................... 308
reviewing raster updates to ......................................... 285
reviewing S57 updates to ............................................ 281
symbol information...................................................... 244
time-dependent ...................................................258, 317
updated ....................................................................... 282
updates to............................................................283, 305
updates to BSB ............................................................ 289
updates to C-MAP........................................................ 299
viewing corrected ........................................................ 261
chart index ......................................................................... 226
display of the ............................................................... 317
Chart Library ................................................................13, 314
chart note ..........................................................245, 246, 247
in an S57 update.......................................................... 283
in query result.............................................................. 244
in route scan results..................................................... 169
chart-centred chart mode. See CC.
charts
active ............................................................................. 57
adding features to........................................................ 255
ARCS updates for......................................................... 283
automatic loading........................................................ 231
best to load.................................................................. 231
boundaries between ..............................................29, 319
BSB .............................................................................. 288
BSB, updates to............................................................ 289
cancelled..............................................................281, 284
centering on a location ................................................ 247
C-MAP ......................................................................... 290
C-MAP licenses ............................................................ 299
C-MAP updates to........................................................ 305
database, C-MAP ......................................................... 295
date warning................................................................ 284
datum, source .............................................................. 227
display modes ..........................................................30, 32
display order ................................................................ 233
display quality indicator............................................... 319
display scale.............................................................25, 27
displayed..................................................................18, 25
excluded .....................................................230, 233, 234
expiry date ................................................................... 235
green outline................................................................ 226
INDEX
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
grey outline ......................................................... 226, 234
history log ....................................................................227
inactive...........................................................................57
index ............................................................................226
information panel.........................................................227
installation date ...........................................................228
installing.............................................................. 267, 303
invalid permits for ............................................... 275, 278
issue date .....................................................................228
last update date for......................................................228
legend ..........................................................................227
license for ARCS ...........................................................270
license for Seafarer RNC...............................................270
loaded ..........................................................................230
loading .................................................................. 19, 229
loading during a route scan..........................................168
loading priority.................................................... 231, 232
magenta outline ...........................................................226
manually loaded...........................................................231
memory limit ....................................................... 229, 231
note..............................................................................245
number.........................................................................227
number of the current ....................................................29
official ..........................................................................228
order of display ............................................................232
orientation........................................................ 19, 25, 29
outdated.......................................................................285
outlines ...................................................... 226, 269, 305
outlines on other charts..................................................40
permit for S57 ..............................................................271
permits .........................................................................267
permits and ARCS updates ...........................................284
permits for ARCS or Seafarer RNC.............. 267, 270, 274
permits for NZMariner..................................................274
permits for S57........................................... 271, 277, 278
printing...........................................................................41
producer .......................................................................228
production date..............................................................25
radar image overlaid ....................................................215
raster ............................................................................235
reviewing raster updates to..........................................285
reviewing updates to C-MAP........................................308
reviewing updates to S57.............................................281
scale ...............................................................................19
scale and range ..............................................................26
scale and updates.........................................................283
scale bar.........................................................................29
scale, source .................................................................227
stack.............................................................................232
summary of installed ....................................................272
symbols ........................................................................237
text on..........................................................................239
title of the current ..........................................................29
types.............................................................................265
uninstalling...................................................................272
unloading .....................................................................230
unofficial ......................................................................228
379
unsurveyed areas ......................................................... 319
update date.................................................................... 25
update history .............................................................. 228
updates to AML............................................................ 280
updates to NZMariner .................................................. 283
updates to S57 ............................................................. 280
updates to Seafarer RNC .............................................. 283
updating HCRF ............................................................. 283
vector ........................................................................... 236
world....................................................................... 19, 36
zone of confidence ....................................................... 319
zoom point on a route.................................................. 160
Checksum Status ............................................................... 273
CHT ...................................................................................... 286
CL. See clearing line. ......................................................... 174
class, name of vessel......................................................... 324
Clear Anchor Watch................................................................ 72
Clear Fix History.................................................................... 131
Clear Guard Zone ................................................................... 74
Clear Position Adjustment... ................................................... 90
clearing bearing. See clearing line.
clearing line ........................................................................ 174
anti-grounding and ........................................................ 68
modifying a .................................................................. 177
Clearing Lines... .................................................................... 175
clock, computer’s ................................................................. 58
Closest Marker Active........................................................... 115
closest point of approach. See CPA.
Clr ........................................................................................ 312
Clr cl .................................................................................... 312
Clr op ................................................................................... 312
clutter, filtering out chart display .................................... 317
CM-93 ........................................................................ 266, 297
See C-MAP.................................................................... 266
C-MAP ................................................................................. 290
chart database ............................................................. 295
chart updates ............................................................... 305
charts, installing......................................... 268, 302, 303
data type...................................................................... 266
ENC .............................................................................. 228
isolated danger on a .................................................... 242
licenses......................................................................... 299
loading priority............................................................. 232
official data .................................................................. 228
Professional.................................................................. 228
reviewing updates to an............................................... 308
SDK .............................................................................. 266
shallow danger on a..................................................... 242
support software .......................................................... 292
unofficial data .............................................................. 228
World ........................................................................... 228
Co ........................................................................................ 312
Coast Guard station, display of a.................................... 319
380
cocked hat ......................................................... 123, 127, 130
COG
course over ground (formerly Course Made Good)
AIS contact ...................................................................198
alarm ..............................................................................91
and bearing units............................................................59
anti-grounding cone and .........................................69, 70
bearing units and............................................................59
field and GPS ..................................................................92
position source and ......................................................181
collision
indicated by velocity vectors...........................................64
threat monitoring using ARPA .............................189, 193
Color Scheme... ................................................................53, 55
colour .....................................................................................16
contrast ..........................................................................53
manual .............................................................................1
night operations .............................................................52
radar image ..................................................................218
scheme ...........................................................................52
scheme change ...............................................................16
test square......................................................................54
compass
gyro ..............................................................................186
magnetic.......................................................................186
compass rose ........................................................................71
display of the ................................................................317
compilation scale .................................................................27
components, hardware .....................................................315
Computed Fix-to-Fix (set and drift) ...................................90
Computed Sensor (set and drift) .................................90, 91
confidence ellipse .....................................................128, 129
fix and .................................................................121, 122
conning position ................................................................331
Conning screen layout.........................................................49
Console ........................................................................358, 360
conspicuous landmarks, display of ..................................318
contact
AIS ................................................................................198
anchor watch and a ........................................................72
ARPA.............................................................................189
display of an AIS...........................................................198
G type ...........................................................................190
getting information on a............................... 15, 192, 200
guard zone and a............................................................73
intercept .......................................................................197
L....................................................................................191
lost.......................................................................191, 192
lost AIS ................................................................198, 199
number .........................................................................191
radar .............................................................................215
velocity vector........................................................63, 191
zone alarm for a .............................................................94
INDEX
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Contact Info... ..............................................................192, 200
Contact Intercept... .............................................................. 197
Contact Symbols .................................................................. 191
cross-hatch pattern ...........................................................241
crossing alarm ............................................................. 68, 174
cross-track
contact symbols
alarm ................................................................ 51, 94, 99
alarm distance....................................................... 94, 157
alarm limit............................................................. 51, 146
corridor...................................................75, 76, 146, 157
corridor and a route scan .............................................168
distance..........................................................................37
distance for a leg................................................... 82, 163
limit display
XTD
limit display49, 51
warning distance ................................................... 94, 157
warning limit ..................................................................51
Cross-track Distance Origin reference point ..................331
Crs ................................................................................. 78, 174
Next.................................................................. 76, 78, 81
CTM .............................................................................. 78, 174
default mode ............................................................... 191
simple mode ................................................................ 191
contact symbols display ................................................... 191
Contacts ............................................................................... 352
contour
safety depth................................................................... 85
contrast................................................................................. 54
coordinates
chart feature ................................................................ 254
entering the own ship’s ................................................. 90
waypoint...................................................................... 149
Copy Clearing Lines from Disk... .......................................... 178
Copy Clearing Lines to Disk.................................................. 178
Copy Corrections from Disk.................................................. 263
Copy Corrections to Disk...................................................... 263
Copy Markers from Disk....................................................... 119
Copy Markers to Disk... ........................................................ 119
Copy Reference Points from Disk... ...................................... 127
Copy Reference Points to Disk.............................................. 127
Copy Routes from Disk......................................................... 171
Copy Routes to Disk... .......................................................... 171
Copy Screen Captures to Disk... ........................................... 139
CORECO radar interface board ....................................... 219
Corr ....................................................................................... 42
differential correction (GPS)
correction. See chart correction.
corridor
clearing line .........................................................175, 177
cross-track ................................................................... 157
countdown marks ............................................................... 79
course
change ......................................................................... 174
contact......................................................................... 197
display of route.............................................................. 76
distance to new ........................................................... 174
made good. See COG.
planned........................................................................ 146
to steer display ............................................................ 162
CPA...................................................................................... 193
AIS contact..................................................................... 45
ARPA contact .........................................................44, 192
closest point of approach
Create Manual Fix... ............................................................. 121
Create Marker ...................................................................... 117
Create Operator Fix... ...................................................127, 130
Create Route... .............................................................148, 342
Create Screen Capture ......................................................... 138
INDEX
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
course to maintain
Ctrl+A....................................................................................16
Ctrl+a ..................................................................................192
Ctrl+c ..................................................................................271
Ctrl+Esc...............................................................................338
Ctrl+F ....................................................................................16
Ctrl+f ...................................................................................247
Ctrl+H....................................................................................16
Ctrl+I .....................................................................................16
Ctrl+i ...................................................................................198
Ctrl+J .....................................................................................17
Ctrl+K ....................................................................................17
Ctrl+L ....................................................................................17
Ctrl+l ...................................................................................138
Ctrl+P ....................................................................................17
Ctrl+p ............................................................................. 45, 46
Ctrl+Shift+C .........................................................................16
Ctrl+Shift+c ..........................................................................53
Ctrl+v ..................................................................................138
Crs
course, or course to steer
CTS
course to steer, or "CRS"
current
database.......................................................................136
display of......................................................................317
information ..................................................................131
locating a .....................................................................248
monitor.........................................................................133
orientation....................................................................132
station ................................................................. 131, 133
velocity.........................................................................132
381
cursor .................................................................................... 55
depth at the ................................................................... 57
range and bearing........................................................ 112
reference point on own ship......................................... 331
text box................................................................. 19, 112
Cursor Origin offset position ............................................ 331
curve, turn .......................................................................... 158
Cy ......................................................................................... 312
D
dangers
isolated ........................................................................ 242
on a route .................................................................... 169
shallow......................................................................... 242
dark blue chart shade ....................................................... 241
Dark Green ........................................................................... 218
data log............................................................................... 140
importing ..................................................................... 142
playback....................................................................... 142
saving........................................................................... 141
data types, chart ................................................................ 265
database
C-Map chart ................................................................. 305
converting log files to a................................................ 140
Database Administrator..............................296, 298, 299, 302
date ....................................................................................... 58
datum
distance calculations and ............................................. 114
incorrect shift ............................................................... 220
marker placement and ................................................. 117
placing By Keyboard and.............................................. 149
shift, in a chart note ..................................................... 245
shifting the................................................................... 249
sounding ...................................................................... 228
source chart ................................................................. 227
Unknown...................................................................... 228
vertical ......................................................................... 228
warning and GPS............................................................ 93
water level ................................................................... 154
daymarks, display of ......................................................... 318
DBT strings ........................................................................... 84
dead reckoning
when GPS position lost .................................................. 52
decimal degrees ................................................................. 149
decimal minutes ................................................................ 149
deck log .............................................................................. 137
default display ..................................................................... 35
Deg ...................................................................................... 312
degrees, decimal ................................................................ 149
Delete DGPS Beacon............................................................. 185
Delete Marker... .................................................................... 117
Delete Received Safety Messages......................................... 201
382
Delete Route from System.....................................................170
Delete Screen Captures... ......................................................139
Delete Sent Safety Messages... .............................................206
Delete Waypoint... ................................................................150
depth...............................................................................84, 91
alarm .......................................................................91, 93
at the cursor location......................................................57
chart maximum.............................................................228
chart minimum .............................................................228
charted units.................................................................228
colour shades.......................................................240, 241
display units....................................................................29
field ................................................................................93
field and depth sounder..................................................91
profile ............................................................... 43, 49, 50
safe vs. unsafe ................................................................86
safety..............................................................................50
scale ...............................................................................50
sounder....................................................................84, 93
sounder display...............................................................38
sounder sensor alarm ..............................................51, 91
units................................................................................56
units on a raster chart.....................................................57
unsafe...........................................................................241
depth contour
display of a ...................................................................318
desktop security .................................................................333
Dest ETA ................................................................................78
deviation, from the active leg ............................................51
DGPS ....................................................................................183
differential global positioning system
antenna offset ..............................................................185
as position source.........................................................181
beacon.................................................................184, 185
beacon frequency .........................................................184
disabling .......................................................................184
source ...........................................................................184
differential GPS. See DGPS.
Digital Ocean ......................................................................288
Dir.........................................................................................312
direction, route ...................................................................161
directional guide ..................................................................51
disk space
for chart installation .....................................................267
for C-Map chart installation..........................................303
display
default ............................................................................35
Standard ..................................................................15, 35
Display AIS Alarm/Status.......................................................208
Display AIS Long Range Requests... ......................................203
Display AIS Non-Functioning Time... .....................................209
Display Chart Information Panel... ........................................227
Display Chart Notes... ...........................................................246
INDEX
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Display Enabled Features... ............................................12, 316
Display General T&P Notice to Mariners... ........................... 248
Display Hardware Key........................................................... 315
Display License Info......................................................270, 274
Display Permit Information for All Charts............................. 277
Display Permit Information for Charts... ............................... 274
Display Public Keys............................................................... 279
Display Received Safety Messages... .................................... 201
Display Route Monitor .................................................342, 344
Display Route Monitor.................................... 16, 81, 152, 162
Display Secure Key Info... ..................................................... 211
Display Sent Safety Messages... ........................................... 206
display stack, chart ........................................................... 232
Display User Permit... ........................................................... 271
distance to new course .................................................... 174
distance to run..................................................................... 80
marks............................................................................. 75
Distance to Run...................................................................... 80
distance units ...................................................................... 56
divide a route leg .............................................................. 151
DNC chart
objects detected by anti-grounding ............................. 321
scale boundary within a................................................. 29
docking
ghost ship and ............................................................... 67
vectors useful for ........................................................... 62
documentation, online ......................................................... 1
hot key ........................................................................... 15
dongle ................................................................................... 11
C-MAP ......................................................................... 291
See hardlock.
DPT strings ........................................................................... 84
draft .......................................................................85, 86, 325
AIS setup info for ship’s ............................................... 208
route scan and ............................................................. 168
drag circle
alarm ............................................................................. 94
anchor watch ................................................................. 72
Drop Event Marker ............................................................... 116
DTE ...................................................................................... 206
Data Terminal Equipment (AIS keyboard and display)
DTG ........................................................................78, 81, 163
distance to go
along a route ............................................................... 165
off-track ............................................................78, 81, 82
Dual........................................................................................ 40
Dual screen layout .............................................................. 40
E
ebb ...................................................................................... 133
INDEX
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
EBL .......................................................................................103
electronic bearing line
anchor ..........................................................................110
creation ........................................................................105
display of information on an ........................................104
display options .............................................................111
during chart correction ........................................ 256, 257
field ..............................................................................104
fixed .............................................................................107
hazard ..........................................................................111
label .............................................................................107
label display .................................................................317
locked.................................................................. 105, 106
offset ............................................................................107
offset parallel index............................................. 108, 109
parallel index....................................................... 108, 109
range and bearing ........................................................109
relative bearing ............................................................112
removal ........................................................................106
text box ................................................................. 19, 104
EBL/VRM
display options .............................................................111
fixed .............................................................................107
offset ............................................................................107
point.............................................................................107
removal ........................................................................106
EBL/VRM #................................................................... 106, 111
EBL/VRM Display Options... ..................................................112
EBL/VRM Origin reference point ......................................331
ECDIS .................................................................................. 1, 8
electronic chart display and information system
areas that generate an alarm in ...................................321
ECDIS-N alarm object specification.................................321
ECPINS
About ...........................................................................314
ECPINS Browser ...................................................................15
EcpinsHwKey.cfg ................................................................315
Edit DGPS Beacon.................................................................185
Edit SAR Pattern... ................................................................156
Edit/Display AIS Channel Management ... ............................207
El° ..........................................................................................42
elevation of satellites (GPS)
electronic chart display and information system. See ECDIS.
Enable Heading Sources... ....................................................187
Enable Position Sources... .....................................................183
ENC ............................................................................... 35, 265
Seafarer........................................................................265
encrypted S57 chart ..........................................................271
public key and ..............................................................279
encryption key, secure AIS ................................................211
Enter ......................................................................................16
383
Enter Beacon Name or Frequency... ...................................... 184
Enter Manual Datum Shift for Chart..................................... 250
Enter Set and Drift... ............................................................... 91
Entry prohibited ................................................................. 322
Environment, simulated.................................................... 336
EP ......................................................................................... 123
marker.......................................................................... 128
EP. See estimated position.
error ellipse
operator fix and ........................................................... 128
See also confidence ellipse
Esc ......................................................................................... 16
Estimated Lock Time Report... .............................................. 214
estimated position .................................................... 120, 130
estimated time of arrival. See ETA.
estimated time of departure. See ETD.
ETA .............................................. 78, 81, 161, 162, 163, 164
estimated time of arrival
Dest................................................................................ 78
display of route .............................................................. 76
planned ........................................................................ 162
report ........................................................................... 174
route ............................................................................ 165
waypoint ...................................................................... 164
wheel-over point ................................................. 162, 164
ETA/TTG Speed ..................................................................... 161
ETD ..................................................... 81, 161, 162, 163, 164
estimated time of departure
planned ........................................................................ 162
route ............................................................................ 165
waypoint ...................................................................... 164
wheel-over point ................................................. 162, 164
event
ECPINS system ............................................................... 19
log, ECPINS .................................................................... 19
marker.......................................................................... 116
record of system...................................................... 19, 20
excluded charts ................................................ 230, 233, 234
Exit Manual Waypoint Selection Mode................................... 79
expanding square SAR pattern ........................................ 154
expiry date, chart ............................................................... 235
expiry date, license ............................................................ 314
warning of the.............................................................. 314
expiry, software ................................................................. 314
Export Hardware Key... ......................................................... 315
Export NMEA Routes to Disk... ............................................. 171
Export Recorded Data to Disk............................................... 141
external GPS ....................................................................... 206
Exting .................................................................................. 312
384
F
F ............................................................................................312
F1 ......................................................................................1, 15
F10 ..................................................................................15, 35
F11 ..................................................................................16, 81
F12 ................................................................................16, 243
F2 ...........................................................................................15
F3 ........................................................................... 15, 21, 100
F4 ......................................................................... 15, 192, 200
F5 ......................................................................... 15, 127, 130
F6 ..................................................................................15, 116
F7 ......................................................................... 15, 105, 106
F8 ......................................................................... 15, 105, 106
F9 ......................................................................... 15, 105, 106
fast-time constant. See FTC.
fathoms .................................................................................56
Features ............................ 25, 28, 34, 35, 71, 216, 226, 240
features, ECPINS
enabled by a license .......................................................11
feet .......................................................................................329
FFl .........................................................................................312
FID ........................................................................................273
file issue date
find. See location.
Firing range boundary .......................................................322
fix
interval .........................................................................130
manual .........................................................................120
marker .................................................................123, 128
marker, manual.............................................................121
measurement error in an operator................................124
measurement errors......................................................123
operator........................................................ 15, 122, 123
own ship’s position.......................................................120
radar .............................................................................128
removal.........................................................................131
running .........................................................................129
sensor ...........................................................................122
visual ............................................................ 15, 122, 128
Fix + CR
automatic selection of ..................................................183
running fix and .............................................................130
Fix + DR(AUTO) .........................................................120, 130
Fix + EP(AUTO) ..........................................................120, 130
Fixed EBL/VRM ...................................................................107
creation ........................................................................105
locking ..........................................................................106
Fixed Position - recall mode (FP-recall) .............................31
Fixed Position chart mode (FP)...........................................31
Fl ...........................................................................................312
INDEX
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
FLFl ...................................................................................... 312
flood .................................................................................... 133
Fm ......................................................................................... 56
fathoms
fog signals, display of ....................................................... 318
footpoint on route............................................................. 159
forward route direction .................................................... 161
Forward................................................................................ 160
FOX Toolkit Library ............................................................ 335
FP........................................................................................... 31
Fixed Position chart mode
FP-recall ................................................................................ 31
Fixed Position - recall chart mode
frequency, DGPS beacon .................................................. 184
ft ............................................................................................ 56
feet
FTC ...................................................................................... 217
fast-time constant (radar)
Full Control .......................................................................... 345
Full Light Sectors.................................................................. 243
function keys ........................................................................ 16
keyboards with only 6.................................................... 16
G
G .......................................................................................... 312
contact label ................................................................ 190
fix label ........................................................................ 130
AIS-associated..............................................................206
alarm indicators .............................................................51
alarm panel ....................................................................21
as position source.........................................................181
Data screen layout..........................................................42
external AIS..................................................................206
offset and own ship coordinates ....................................43
offset and RIO mismatch ..............................................220
position lost............................................................. 92, 93
reception lost..................................................................92
sensor alarm............................................................ 91, 92
statistics .........................................................................42
time ................................................................................58
GPS Data ................................................................................42
graphical chart index ........................................................226
gray lines, vertical ................................................................28
great circle
calculator......................................................................113
route leg as a ............................................... 82, 147, 157
green chart outline ............................................................226
green chart shade ..............................................................241
Greenwich Mean Time. See GMT.
grey chart outline ..................................................... 226, 234
Grid Type .............................................................................117
ground stabilization marks on velocity vectors ...............64
grounding. See anti-grounding cone or pool of errors.
guard zone ............................................................................73
alarm ..............................................................................94
and contact ..................................................................190
creation ..........................................................................73
gain
radar ....................................................................216, 219
gain, radar .......................................................................... 216
Gas Field ............................................................................. 322
gauge station, water level ............................................... 153
GBRMP charts.................................................................... 266
Great Barrier Reef Marine Park
unofficial...................................................................... 228
GBRMPA charts ................................................................. 266
GEO ..................................................................................... 149
Geodetic Datum 1949, NZ
geodetic datum .........................................................114, 149
geographic names, display of .......................................... 318
Geosym 4 symbols
library version ................................................................ 13
Get Prediction... ................................................................... 132
Ghost Ship.............................................................................. 68
ghost ship ............................................................................. 67
rate of turn..................................................................... 68
GMT ...................................................................................... 58
Greenwich Mean Time
GPS ..............................................................................183, 330
global positioning system
INDEX
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
gyrocompass
alarm ..............................................................................51
calibration ....................................................................186
error .............................................................................186
RIO mismatch and ........................................................220
sensor alarm............................................................ 91, 92
H
Half.......................................................................................338
handle
object’s selection ..........................................................256
Harbor chart .......................................................................227
harbour. See port.
hardlock, software ...................................................... 11, 313
notebook computer and ...............................................313
hardlock.dll .........................................................................313
hardlock.sys ........................................................................313
hardware key ............................................................. 314, 315
finding a computer’s.....................................................315
software licensing and .................................................315
hazard
anti-grounding cone and ................................................94
385
bearing......................................................................... 111
See also anti-grounding cone.
Hazard 1 ............................................................................... 111
HCRF.................................................................................... 266
10 expiry warning ........................................................ 235
chart license information.............................................. 274
chart notes ................................................................... 245
data check.................................................................... 273
loading priority............................................................. 232
official .......................................................................... 228
presentation library version............................................ 13
Hdg alarm ............................................................................. 91
HDOP ..................................................................................... 92
horizontal dilution of precision (GPS)
heading
alarm.............................................................................. 91
automatic source.......................................................... 187
gyro calibration ............................................................ 186
magnetic deviation....................................................... 187
magnetic variation ....................................................... 187
manual ................................................................ 181, 186
simulated ..................................................................... 336
source........................................................................... 185
Heading Marker Origin reference point.......................... 331
height
safety ............................................................................. 85
units, charted ............................................................... 228
height of offset .................................................................. 330
Help ......................................................................................... 1
F1 key for ....................................................................... 15
Help.... .................................................................................... 15
HIGH planned speed ......................................................... 163
high water .......................................................................... 133
Highlight Raster Updates...................................................... 285
Highlight Shallow Dangers ................................................... 243
history log, chart................................................................ 227
history, chart update ......................................................... 228
hlinst.exe ............................................................................ 313
horizontal datum transformation ........................... 114, 149
HTM file type...................................................................... 247
HTTP connection ................................................................ 307
HUP ....................................................................................... 29
Head Up chart orientation
HyperTerminal .................................................................... 359
I
IC-ENC ................................................................................. 271
International Centre for ENCs
IEC 61174 ........................................................................... 321
IGLD-85 ................................................................................. 87
IHO....................................................................................... 237
386
International Hydrographic Organization
abbreviations.......................................................240, 312
colour scheme........................................................52, 241
night colour schemes....................................................241
presentation libraries......................................................13
S52 requirements for colour schemes .............................54
Scale Filter display ........................................................317
Time Filter .....................................................................317
IHO Day Black .......................................................................52
IHO Day Bright .....................................................................52
IHO Day White ...............................................................52, 53
IHO Dusk ...............................................................................52
IHO Night ..............................................................................52
Immarsat C .........................................................................202
IMO ...................................................................................1, 35
International Maritime Organization
Number, own ship’s ......................................................207
standard cursor...............................................................55
standard display .............................................................32
Import NMEA Routes from Disk... .........................................171
Import OSI Corrections..........................................................263
Import Recorded Data from Disk...........................................142
important text, display of .................................................318
Incoming ...............................................................................358
index, chart .........................................................................226
information attribute
chart correction.............................................................257
display of ......................................................................319
Input Secure Key....................................................................212
INS
simulated......................................................................336
Insert Waypoint.....................................................................151
Inshore traffic zone ............................................................321
Install Charts... .................................................... 267, 290, 303
Install New Permit from Disk... ....................................270, 271
Install New Permit from Keyboard... ............................271, 272
Install New Public Key from Disk...........................................279
Install Software License from Keyboard... .............................315
Install Software License.........................................................315
installation date, chart ......................................................228
installed charts, summary of ............................................272
installing charts .........................................................267, 303
intensity, colour ....................................................................54
intercept, contact ......................................................189, 197
interference rejection filter, radar. See IR.
Internet, updating C-MAP charts by ...............................307
IQ ..........................................................................................312
IR .................................................................................217, 219
interference rejection (radar filter)
Iso.........................................................................................312
INDEX
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
isolated danger.................................................................. 242
issue date, chart ................................................................ 228
IUQ ...................................................................................... 312
IVQ ...................................................................................... 312
J
joystick .................................................................................. 13
JPG file type ....................................................................... 247
JRC radar ............................................................................ 216
K
keel
clearance ........................................................85, 86, 325
depth under ................................................................... 85
height above................................................................ 325
keyboard ............................................................................... 14
Keyboard, By ...................................................................... 106
km ......................................................................................... 56
kilometers
kn ..................................................................................57, 312
knots
kph ........................................................................................ 57
kilometers per hour
L
land areas, display of ........................................................ 319
Land Information New Zealand ...................................... 266
Large ...................................................................................... 41
Large screen layout ............................................................. 41
last update date ................................................................ 228
lateral distance .................................................................. 157
lateral movement, bow/stern ............................................ 49
lead lines ............................................................................ 150
lead mark ........................................................................... 108
leading line ........................................................................ 150
left button ............................................................................ 14
left, rate of turn to the ....................................................... 38
leg ...............................................................................146, 147
active ............................................................................. 78
automatic active ............................................................ 79
cross-track distance for a .......................................82, 163
current ......................................................................... 150
default speed for a....................................................... 149
deviation from the active ............................................... 51
editing ......................................................................... 149
extension ..................................................................... 150
hazards on a ................................................................ 169
information .................................................................. 152
list...................................................................81, 82, 163
moving a...................................................................... 151
planned course for a ...................................................... 75
INDEX
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
planned speed for a............................................... 75, 157
properties .....................................................................157
rhumb line vs. great circle ............................ 82, 157, 163
scan..............................................................................169
Leg Course ............................................................................78
Leg Properties... ........................................................... 157, 161
in simulation ................................................................342
legend, information from a paper chart .........................227
legend, S57 chart ...............................................................238
length, vessel .....................................................................324
LFl ........................................................................................312
license.cfg ...........................................................................315
licenses
ARCS type.....................................................................274
C-MAP chart.................................................................299
ECPINS ...........................................................................11
ECPINS software.................................................. 314, 315
ECPINS upgrade ...............................................................6
valid chart ....................................................................235
vessel simulator............................................................335
light description, display of a...........................................318
Light Green...........................................................................218
light grey chart shade .......................................................241
light sectors ........................................................................243
lights, display of .................................................................319
line
chart correction ............................................................256
quick correction............................................................252
line of position ...................................................................127
and a running fix ..........................................................129
transferred....................................................................129
LINZ .....................................................................................266
List and Verify HCRF Charts... ...............................................273
Load Charts................................. 54, 229, 234, 235, 238, 281
Load Data... ..........................................................................135
Load......................................................................................340
loaded charts ......................................................................230
summary of ....................................................................19
loading charts ....................................................................229
Loc .........................................................................................58
Locate... ................................................................................247
location ...............................................................................248
finding a chart ..............................................................247
updated........................................................................286
Lock Schedule Report... ........................................................214
lock, Seaway report on a ..................................................214
locked EBL...........................................................................105
locking a route ...................................................................170
locking an EBL ....................................................................106
Log .........................................................................................38
speed log
387
log
book............................................................................. 137
data..................................................................... 140, 141
ECPINS event ................................................................. 19
Log Book... ........................................................................... 138
Log field alarm ..................................................................... 91
Long Range Response Filter ............................................. 202
look-ahead
anti-grounding cone....................................................... 70
maximum autopilot...................................................... 102
space on the chart.......................................................... 30
LORAN-C
as position source ........................................................ 181
sensor alarm................................................................... 91
lost AIS contact ......................................................... 198, 199
lost ARPA contact ..................................................... 191, 192
LOW planned speed .......................................................... 163
low water............................................................................ 133
low-accuracy symbols ....................................................... 319
LRF mode ............................................................................ 203
LtV ....................................................................................... 312
M
M.......................................................................................... 312
heading source............................................................. 186
m ................................................................................... 56, 312
metres
M (fix label) ............................................................... 121, 122
Mag Var ......................................................................... 21, 39
magenta chart outlines..................................................... 226
magnetic bearing units ....................................................... 59
for an EBL..................................................................... 112
magnetic deviation ........................................................... 187
display of...................................................................... 319
magnetic north indicator .................................................... 21
magnetic variation ............................................................ 187
Magnetic Variation/Swept, display of ............................ 318
main menu ........................................................................... 17
commands...................................................................... 17
toggling the.................................................................... 14
major coastal features, display of ................................... 319
Man Overboard .................................................................... 116
Man Overboard marker set .............................................. 117
man overboard. See MOB.
manual chart correction. See chart correction.
manual chart orientation.................................................... 29
manual correction. See chart correction.
Manual Corrections... ........................ 253, 254, 255, 261, 262
manual datum shift ........................................................... 249
and RIO mismatch........................................................ 220
388
manual heading ........................................................181, 186
Manual Position Adjustment warning ..............................89
manual sensor source........................................................180
Manual....................................................................................30
manually loaded chart.......................................................231
Maptech ............................................................ 266, 288, 289
Marine farm/culture ...........................................................321
maritime boundary ............................................................260
marker .................................................................................115
active ............................................................................115
attributes ......................................................................119
copying a ......................................................................119
display of a ...................................................................317
event.............................................................................116
fix .................................................................................128
locating a.............................................................118, 248
manual fix.....................................................................121
MOB ............................................................. 15, 115, 116
no active .......................................................................115
placing a .......................................................................118
report............................................................................120
set status ......................................................................118
sets ......................................................................117, 119
standard ..............................................................115, 116
Markers... ..............................................................................117
masthead height .........................................................86, 325
maximum chart depths .....................................................228
maximum ebb.....................................................................133
maximum flood ..................................................................133
MDSP ...................................................................................219
Multi Digital Signal Processor
measurement errors, fix ....................................................123
memory
automatic chart loading and.........................................231
chart ....................................................................229, 231
route scan and..............................................................168
menu
chart display ..................................................... 17, 19, 25
main ...............................................................................17
message line ..................................................................19, 20
zone alarms in the ..........................................................73
messages
AIS ................................................................................201
AIS preformatted ..........................................................205
AIS user-defined............................................................205
long-range ....................................................................202
Safety Related...............................................................201
meteorological sensors, simulated ..................................354
meteorological warning, NAVTEX ...................................222
meters ...........................................................................56, 329
Military practice area ........................................................321
Mine laying boundary .......................................................322
INDEX
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
minimum chart depths ..................................................... 228
minimum keyboard display. See MKD.
minimum scale requirement. See SCAMIN.
minutes, decimal ............................................................... 149
MIO ..................................................................................... 253
mariner’s information object
See chart correction.
MKD, AIS ....................................................................188, 202
minimum keyboard display
MLA
mean line of advance
MMSI .................................................................................. 198
Mobile Marine Service Identifier
AIS contact................................................................... 200
own ship’s.................................................................... 207
receiving a message from ............................................ 204
sending a message to .................................................. 205
Mo ....................................................................................... 312
MOB
man overboard
dropping a marker for a ................................................. 15
marker .................................................................115, 116
marker set.................................................................... 117
mode
chart .................................................................25, 30, 32
Monitoring... ........................................................................ 134
mouse ................................................................................... 13
three-button................................................................... 13
two-button..................................................................... 14
Move Action Point................................................................ 160
Move Leg... .......................................................................... 151
Move Marker... ..................................................................... 117
Move Waypoint.................................................................... 149
MPEG file type ................................................................... 247
MPG file type ..................................................................... 247
mph ....................................................................................... 57
miles per hour
N
Name Marker........................................................................ 117
Name Waypoint... ................................................................ 152
Name, By ............................................................................ 106
name, vessel ...................................................................... 324
native chart scale ................................................................ 27
natural features, display of .............................................. 319
nature of seabed, display of the ..................................... 318
Nav......................................................................................... 36
Nav Detailed .......................................................................... 38
Nav Detailed screen layout ................................................ 38
Nav screen layout ..................................................18, 35, 36
INDEX
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Navigation chart correction class ....................................255
navigational purpose, chart .............................................227
navigational warning, NAVTEX .......................................222
Navigator chart license (ARCS)............................... 270, 274
NAVTEX ...............................................................................222
NAVTEX Message Manager... ...............................................222
NAVTEX Setup... ...................................................................222
NCE ......................................................................................286
Net Water Level .................................................................154
Network Time Protocal (NTP)
NTP.................................................................................58
New Zealand Geodetic Datum (GEO) .............................149
Next Crs ................................................................................78
NGDC ..............................................................13, 21, 59, 187
National Geophysical Data Center
night operations, colour scheme for .................................52
NLT ..................................................................... 175, 178, 312
NM .........................................................................................56
nautical miles
NMEA
importing and exporting...............................................171
NLT
not less than
NMT
not more than
No ........................................................................................312
NOAA ......................................................................... 228, 266
National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration
presentation library version............................................13
Nobeltec Tides and Currents ............................................136
north
indicator .........................................................................21
magnetic ........................................................................21
true.................................................................................21
note, chart ..........................................................................245
notebook computer
hardlock drivers for a ...................................................313
Notes on Chart Data .........................................................318
notes, voyage .....................................................................137
NTM
Notice to Mariners
NTX
loading priority.............................................................232
unofficial ......................................................................228
NUP ................................................................................. 25, 30
NUP chart orientation .........................................................29
North Up chart orientation .............................................25
Standard display and......................................................35
nves.exe ..................................................................... 336, 367
nves.log ...............................................................................361
389
NZMariner .......................................................................... 266
chart license information.............................................. 274
chart loading priority.................................................... 232
chart permit ........................................................ 270, 274
chart updates to a ........................................................ 283
chart, verifying an ........................................................ 273
highlighting updates on ............................................... 285
Notice to Mariners ....................................................... 248
official .......................................................................... 228
RCDS mode .................................................................. 236
O
object names, display of ................................................... 318
obstructions, display of ..................................................... 319
Oc ........................................................................................ 312
Occas ................................................................................... 312
official chart .............................................................. 228, 233
loading priority of an.................................................... 231
offset
DGPS antenna .............................................................. 185
EBL/VRM ...................................................................... 107
EBL/VRM creation ........................................................ 105
EBL/VRM locking.......................................................... 106
offset parallel index ................................................. 108, 109
offset, vessel ............................................................... 61, 330
addition of.................................................................... 331
adjustment ................................................................... 330
assignment................................................................... 331
creation ........................................................................ 330
deletion ........................................................................ 330
display a velocity vector for a....................................... 330
list ................................................................................ 331
missing........................................................................... 62
reference and ............................................................... 331
show names ................................................................. 330
transducer ...................................................................... 85
Offshore production area ................................................. 321
off-track track ............................................................... 83, 84
off-track values .................................................................... 82
DTG ......................................................................... 78, 81
TTG................................................................................. 81
Oil Field ............................................................................... 322
operator fix ......................................................................... 123
optional chart features, display of .................................... 34
orange alarm indicator ....................................................... 20
orange rectangle highlight ............................. 285, 286, 287
order, chart display ............................................................ 232
ordered set and drift .................................................... 90, 91
orientation
chart................................................................. 19, 25, 29
North Up as default........................................................ 35
OSI.......................................................................................... 39
390
OSI colour scheme ...............................................................52
OSI corrections ...................................................................263
OSI cursor ..............................................................................55
OSI Day HI .............................................................................52
OSI Night HI ..........................................................................52
OSI Night LO .........................................................................53
OSI screen layout .................................................................39
OSL charts ...........................................................................237
loading priority .............................................................232
unofficial.......................................................................228
Other.......................................................................................32
Other features display .........................................................32
Other Text, display of ........................................................318
outdated charts ..................................................................285
warning ........................................................................284
Outgoing...............................................................................358
outline, vessel .....................................................................327
displayed ........................................................................19
editing ..........................................................................327
overhead clearance............................................................168
Overlays......................................................................226, 317
Overscale warning ...............................................................28
Overview chart ...................................................................227
own ship ..............................................................................323
anchor watch..................................................................72
coordinates vs. GPS coordinates .....................................43
crossing a chart boundary...............................................29
draft and safety depth ....................................................85
finding the ....................................................................248
guard zone......................................................................73
position adjustment........................................................88
position fix....................................................................120
position of the ................................................................19
position source ...............................................................19
predicted position of the.................................................67
scaled outline of the .......................................................19
symbol for the..........................................................19, 61
track ...............................................................................66
vector vs. wind vector.....................................................65
velocity vector.................................................................62
See also vessel shape.
P
P ...........................................................................................312
padlock symbol .........................................................146, 170
Page Down ............................................................................16
Page Up .................................................................................16
paging, frequency ................................................................30
pan, chart ..............................................................................30
paper chart..........................................................................235
symbols.........................................................................237
INDEX
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
parallel index .............................................................108, 109
creation........................................................................ 106
offset ...................................................................108, 109
parallel legs SAR pattern ................................................. 154
partial light sectors ........................................................... 243
Password
AIS ............................................................................... 207
password
SoftLock ....................................................................... 333
patch, software ................................................................. 313
path predictor, AIS contact .............................................. 199
patrol pattern..................................................................... 154
Pause ..................................................................................... 16
PDF file type .................................................................15, 247
pelorus offset (alidade error) ........................................... 123
periodic chart feature ....................................................... 258
permit
ARCS updates and ....................................................... 284
backing up a chart ....................................................... 276
backing up an S57 chart .............................................. 279
chart ............................................................................ 267
checking for an invalid.........................................275, 278
information on an HCRF .............................................. 274
S57 chart...................................................................... 271
S57 user ....................................................................... 271
permits
S57 information ...................................................277, 278
valid S57 ...................................................................... 277
pilot service, display of ..................................................... 319
PIM ...................................................................................... 162
planned intended movement
application of a............................................................ 162
displayed on a route ...................................................... 76
DTG.............................................................................. 163
ETA .............................................................................. 163
from the own ship’s position........................................ 165
stopover and................................................................ 164
TTG .............................................................................. 163
wheel-over point and................................................... 164
Pipeline area ...................................................................... 321
Pipelines ............................................................................. 322
pitch, propellor .................................................................... 49
plan, route .......................................................................... 171
planned course .................................................................... 75
planned intended movement. See PIM.
planned speed .................................... 75, 82, 157, 161, 163
report........................................................................... 174
See also SOA.
Playback Recorded Data... ................................................... 143
playback, of voyage data ................................................. 142
plotting a route ................................................................. 147
plotting a waypoint .......................................................... 148
INDEX
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Plt .........................................................................................312
point
chart correction .......................................... 177, 256, 257
quick correction................................................... 252, 253
vessel shape ........................................................ 327, 328
point, vessel shape ............................................................327
port features, display of ....................................................319
port, locating a...................................................................248
Portable Network Graphics (PNG).......................................6
position
adjustment of the own ship’s .........................................88
manual adjustment warning...........................................89
own ship.........................................................................19
sensor. See offset.
simulated......................................................................336
position source ...................................................................181
"better available" message..........................................182
AIS.................................................................. 46, 47, 206
automatic .....................................................................182
available for auto-selection ..........................................183
primary.........................................................................181
secondary .....................................................................182
verifying the quality of the ...........................................214
powering down the system ................................................21
powering up the system .....................................................11
Predicted Drift
tidal stream vector and ........................................... 76, 77
predicted position
of the own ship ..............................................................67
time of the......................................................................68
Predicted Set
and tidal stream vector ........................................... 76, 77
PRF .......................................................................................219
pulse repetition frequency
Primar ..................................................................................271
primary position source ....................................................181
Print Chart Corrections Report..............................................264
Print Chart Summary Report.................................................272
Print Marker Report... ...........................................................120
Print Route Report... .............................................................173
Print Screen ..........................................................................138
Print Screen Captures... ........................................................139
printing, chart ......................................................................41
Priv .......................................................................................312
PRN ........................................................................................42
pseudo-random noise (GPS)
Prod .....................................................................................312
producer, chart ...................................................................228
Product ID .................................................................... 13, 314
Professional database, C-MAP ........................................295
Professional+ database, C-MAP ......................................295
391
Prohibited area .................................................................. 321
propellor pitch & RPM ........................................................ 49
PSSA (Particularly Sensitive Sea Areas) .......................... 321
Pump On............................................................................... 359
pump, sensor data ............................................................. 336
pumping data to ECPINS .................................................. 359
purpose, chart .................................................................... 227
Q
Q .......................................................................................... 312
Q+LFl ................................................................................... 312
Query Chart Features..................................................... 16, 243
query of a chart feature ............................................. 16, 243
correction attributes and.............................................. 257
to view a correction ..................................................... 261
quick correction ................................................................. 251
modifying a .................................................................. 252
set ................................................................................ 253
Quick Corrections... .............................................................. 252
Quick MIOs ......................................................................... 253
R
R ........................................................................................... 312
R, fix label........................................................................... 128
radar
alarm indicator............................................................... 51
and a fix ....................................................................... 123
ARPA ............................................................................ 191
fix ........................................................................ 128, 215
image overlay............................................................... 214
image overlay and two radars...................................... 189
image processing board (RIB) ...................................... 219
information on the .............................................. 218, 319
interference rejection filter ........................................... 217
MDSP ........................................................................... 219
offset and RIO mismatch.............................................. 220
PRF............................................................................... 219
range and RIO .............................................................. 220
range fix error .............................................................. 124
resolution ..................................................................... 219
RIB ............................................................................... 219
signal ........................................................................... 219
Radar Image ......................................................................... 216
radar image ........................................................................ 215
caution ......................................................................... 214
colour ........................................................................... 218
display of the ............................................................... 317
enhancement ............................................................... 216
mismatch...................................................................... 219
spurious data ............................................................... 220
toggling on and off ........................................................ 15
transparency ................................................................ 217
Radar Information... ............................................................. 218
392
Radar Reference point .......................................................331
Radar Settings.......................................................................217
radio station, display of a .................................................319
rain clutter, radar ............................................. 216, 217, 219
range
and bearing line............................................................109
ARPA contact................................................................193
calculation ....................................................................113
chart display ............................................................25, 26
range rings ............................................................................71
display of ......................................................................317
Range/Bearing ....................................................................117
raster chart..........................................................................235
anti-grounding cone and a .............................................69
depth units on a..............................................................57
indicator .......................................................................236
loading priority .............................................................232
note ..............................................................................246
reviewing updates to a .................................................285
scale bar .........................................................................29
types .............................................................................266
Raster Chart Display System. See RCDS.
rate of turn. See RoT.
RCDS ....................................................................................236
raster chart display system
Mode ............................................................................236
reading, manual sensor.....................................................180
Recover Removed Public Keys...............................................280
red alarm indicator ..............................................................20
red chart outlines ...............................................................226
red circle ..............................................................................244
red highlight ................................... 243, 283, 286, 287, 288
reference .............................................................................331
reference point ...................................................................123
addition ........................................................................125
adjusting during fixing.........................................127, 128
copying a ......................................................................127
group ............................................................................124
temporary ............................................................127, 128
track ....................................................................127, 129
Reference Points....................................................................124
refresh chart list ........................................................230, 235
refresh rate
display ..........................................................................317
relative bearing ..................................................................112
relative display scales ..........................................................27
release notes ........................................................................15
Remove Action Point.............................................................160
Remove Charts......................................................................230
Remove Public Keys... ...........................................................280
Remove Recorded Data from System... .................................142
INDEX
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Remove Route... ................................................................... 147
Remove S63 Permits............................................................. 278
reporting rate, AIS ............................................................. 210
Request Own Ship Status Info... ............................................. 46
resolution, radar ................................................................ 219
Restart.................................................................................. 340
Restore Permit Files from Disk.............................................. 276
Restore Permits from Disk... ................................................. 279
Restricted area...........................................................321, 322
reverse route direction ..................................................... 161
Reverse................................................................................. 160
Review Chart Updates.........................................281, 286, 309
rhumb line
calculator ..................................................................... 113
route leg as a....................................... 82, 147, 148, 157
RIB ....................................................................................... 219
radar interface board
right button .......................................................................... 14
right, rate of turn to the ..................................................... 38
RIO ...................................................................................... 214
radar image overlay
See radar image.
RM ...................................................................................14, 30
Relative Motion chart mode
RNC, Seafarer .................................................................... 266
raster nautical chart
RoT ........................................................................................ 38
rate of turn
ghost ship and ............................................................... 68
maximum autoplilot.............................................100, 102
planned........................................................................ 159
simulator...................................................................... 336
route.................................................................................... 145
active .....................................................................78, 146
calculator ..................................................................... 164
copying ........................................................................ 170
cross-track distance ..................................................... 157
deleting........................................................................ 170
direction...............................................................161, 173
direction and action points .......................................... 159
display ...................................................................75, 146
editing ......................................................................... 149
exporting NMEA .......................................................... 171
features........................................................................ 156
importing NMEA .......................................................... 171
leg................................................................................ 146
length .......................................................................... 164
locating a..................................................................... 248
locked .......................................................................... 170
Monitor........................................................................ 163
monitoring ...............................................................78, 81
patrol ........................................................................... 154
plan.............................................................................. 171
plotting a......................................................................147
removal of a .................................................................147
report ...........................................................................171
saving...........................................................................170
scan..............................................................................168
scan date and time.........................................................78
search-and-rescue ........................................................154
start time......................................................................174
text box ..........................................................................19
Window................................................................. 81, 163
Route Calculator... .............................................. 165, 166, 167
Route Display Options... ................................................ 76, 344
Route Monitor ....................................................................163
Route Calculator and....................................................164
Route Monitoring Offset reference point .......................331
Route Up display........................................................... 49, 51
RPF
raster product format
RPM, propellor .....................................................................49
rudder angle indicator ........................................................49
simulated......................................................................336
running fix ..........................................................................129
RUP ........................................................................................29
Route Up chart orientation
S
S ...........................................................................................312
S .............................................................................................32
S+...........................................................................................32
S52 presentation library version ........................................13
S57 chart .................................................................... 237, 265
abbreviations on.................................................. 240, 312
backing up a permit for an ...........................................279
correction .....................................................................255
display of objects on an................................................317
encrypted ................................................... 265, 271, 276
invalid permit for an.....................................................278
isolated danger on an...................................................242
legend ..........................................................................238
loading priority.............................................................232
number.........................................................................230
objects detected by anti-grounding..............................321
official ..........................................................................228
permit...........................................................................271
permits .........................................................................271
presentation library version............................................13
reviewing updates to an...............................................281
scale boundary within an ...............................................29
shallow danger on an...................................................242
unknown datum on an .................................................228
updates to an ...............................................................280
WGS84 and ..................................................................228
S63 encryption .......................................................... 265, 271
INDEX
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
393
chart administration..................................................... 276
public key and .............................................................. 279
See also S57 chart, encrypted.
Saab R4 AIS ........................................................ 46, 188, 202
S model ............................................................... 209, 213
safe sounding ....................................................................... 86
safety depth ......................................................................... 85
contour........................................................................... 85
route scanning and ............................................. 168, 169
shallow dangers and .................................................... 242
squat and ....................................................................... 86
water level and .............................................................. 87
safety height ........................................................................ 85
safety limits .......................................................................... 85
route scanning and ...................................................... 168
safety message, NAVTEX .................................................. 222
Safety Related Message, AIS ........................................... 201
SAR ...................................................................................... 154
search and rescue
satellite, GPS ................................................................. 92, 93
Sats field ............................................................................... 93
Save Incoming... ................................................................... 358
Save Outgoing... ................................................................... 358
Save Recorded Data As......................................................... 141
Save Route............................................................................ 170
scale
1 to 1.............................................................................. 27
1 to 1 as default ............................................................. 35
absolute display ............................................................. 27
bar on chart.................................................................... 29
Beyond Scale warning .................................................... 28
boundary within a chart ................................................. 29
changes at boundaries ................................................... 29
chart............................................................................... 26
chart display..................................................... 19, 25, 27
chart display order and ................................................ 233
chart loading priority and............................................. 231
compilation .................................................................... 27
display of areas ............................................................ 319
filter ............................................................................. 317
filter, IHO...................................................................... 317
native chart .................................................................... 27
Overscale warning.......................................................... 28
own ship symbol and ..................................................... 62
relative display ............................................................... 27
RIO mismatch and........................................................ 220
Underscale warning ....................................................... 28
Scale Areas/Boundaries ...................................................... 28
scaled outline of the own ship .......................................... 61
SCAMIN ..................................................................... 262, 317
minimum display scale
finding for a feature ..................................................... 317
scan route ........................................................................... 168
394
after chart updates .......................................................281
and chart loading..........................................................168
date and time .................................................................78
leg.................................................................................169
results ...........................................................................168
Scan Route Legs... .................................................................170
Scan Route... .........................................................................168
Screen Capture Recording Options........................................139
screen captures ..................................................................138
automatic .....................................................................139
during playback ............................................................143
screen layout ........................................................................36
AIS ..................................................................................45
Alarms ............................................................................43
ARPA......................................................................44, 193
choosing a ......................................................................36
Conning ..........................................................................49
Dual ................................................................................40
GPS Data ........................................................................42
Large...............................................................................41
Nav .................................................................................36
Nav Detailed...................................................................38
OSI..................................................................................39
Standard display .............................................................37
Scroll Contact Table Down ...............................................44, 45
Scroll Contact Table Up ....................................................44, 45
scroll, chart ...........................................................................30
sea areas, display of ..........................................................319
sea clutter, radar .............................................. 216, 217, 219
seabed, display of the ..............................................319, 320
Seafarer
ENC chart......................................................................265
ENC updating ...............................................................280
RNC chart .....................................................................266
Seafarer RNC chart ............................................................236
backing up permits for..................................................276
highlighting updates on a.............................................285
invalid permit for a .......................................................275
license for a .........................................................235, 270
license information for a...............................................274
loading priority .............................................................232
Notice to Mariners on a ................................................248
obtaining a license........................................................270
official...........................................................................228
outdated .......................................................................284
permit ......................................................... 267, 270, 274
updates to a..................................................................283
verifying currency of data in a ......................................273
Seaplane landing area..............................................321, 322
search-and-rescue
notice............................................................................222
pattern..........................................................................154
Seaway report............................................................213, 214
INDEX
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
secondary position source ............................................... 182
secondary vessel track................................................67, 182
sector search SAR pattern ................................................ 154
secure AIS........................................................................... 209
secure transponder identification, AIS ........................... 211
security system .................................................................. 333
Select Active Marker............................................................. 115
Select Active Waypoint........................................................... 79
Select AIS Source for Display... ............................................. 188
Select AIS Status Page............................................................ 46
Select ARPA Screen Index...............................................44, 193
Select Bearing Units... ............................................................ 59
Select Contact of Interest... .................................................. 201
Select Depth Units.................................................................. 56
Select DGPS Beacon... .......................................................... 184
Select Distance Units.............................................................. 56
Select Primary Position Source... ..................................130, 182
Select Radar Source.............................................................. 189
Select Route by Name... ....................................................... 343
Select Route to Display......................................................... 146
Select Route with Cursor... ..................................................... 78
Select Secondary Position Source... ...................................... 182
Select Sensor Source... ............................... 180, 181, 186, 188
Select Speed Units.................................................................. 57
Select Time Source... .............................................................. 58
Select Time Zone... ................................................................. 58
Select Vessel Shape... ........................................................... 323
SENC ................................................................................... 280
System Electronic Navigational Chart
generation ................................................................... 228
Send AIS Message... ............................................................. 205
Sensitivity Time Control (STC) ......................................... 217
sensor
AIS ............................................................................... 188
alarms............................................................................ 91
DGPS............................................................................ 184
heading........................................................................ 185
input disabled with no license ..................................... 314
manual source ............................................................. 180
offset location for a ..................................................... 330
position........................................................................ 181
position. See offset.
simulated .............................................................336, 347
simulated readings....................................................... 336
sources......................................................................... 179
Sensor field .........................................................93, 181, 182
Sensors................................................................................. 347
Sensors Off
simulated ..................................................................... 336
Sensors On
simulated......................................................................336
Service Access Password ..................................................333
Service Department, OSI ...................................................333
service number, customer ..................................................... ii
services, display of .............................................................319
set
chart correction ................................................... 253, 255
copying a correction .....................................................262
creating a clearing line .................................................175
creating a correction ....................................................254
deleting a correction ....................................................262
marker ..........................................................................117
Set AIS Data Port Rates.........................................................207
Set AIS Long Range Response Filter......................................202
Set AIS Radio Parameters .....................................................209
Set AIS Ship Static Data........................................................206
Set AIS Transponder Identification........................................207
Set AIS Voyage Static Data... ................................................207
Set Anchor Position... .............................................................72
set and drift
calculation frequency .....................................................90
Computed Fix-to-Fix .......................................................90
Computed Sensor .................................................... 90, 91
course to steer and.........................................................78
dead reckoning and......................................................131
display............................................................................38
interval ...........................................................................90
ordered.................................................................... 90, 91
Set Anemometer Offset ..........................................................66
Set Anti-Grounding.................................................................70
Set Blank Sectors... ...............................................................218
Set Computed Set and Drift Interval... ....................................90
Set Default Secure Mode... ...................................................213
Set Disk Space Monitor... ......................................................144
Set Drag Circle... .....................................................................73
Set Guard Zone.......................................................................74
Set Gyro Error........................................................................186
Set Gyro Heading..................................................................186
Set Log File Size... .................................................................140
Set Magnetic Deviation... .....................................................187
Set Measurement Errors... ....................................................124
Set Prediction Time... ..............................................................68
Set Route Direction...................................................... 161, 343
Set Safety Depth... ......................................................... 85, 342
Set Secure Channel Reporting Rate ......................................210
Set Secure Identification... ....................................................211
Set Secure Mode...................................................................213
Set Squat... ...........................................................................152
Set Swing Circle... ...................................................................73
Set Track Control Options... ................................ 100, 102, 341
INDEX
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
395
Set Transparency................................................................... 217
Set True Motion Paging... ....................................................... 30
Set Turn Radius............................................................ 158, 342
Set Water Level Station... ..................................................... 153
Setup ECPINS........................................................................ 323
Setup Sensors... .................................................. 332, 335, 341
Setup... ................................................................................. 339
SEU
hardlock and ................................................................ 313
SEU. See serial expansion unit.
sextant
error .................................................................... 123, 124
See also VSA, HSA.
Sf clr .................................................................................... 312
Sh ......................................................................................... 312
shading, chart ........................................................... 240, 241
shallow danger .................................................................. 242
shallow water .................................................................... 241
Shift Chart .......................................................................... 250
Shift+F1 ................................................................................ 15
Shift+F2 ................................................................................ 15
Shift+F3 ................................................................................ 15
Shift+F4 ................................................................................ 15
Shift+F5 ................................................................................ 16
Shift+F6 ................................................................................ 16
Shift+Insert ........................................................................ 138
Ship Symbol............................................................................ 62
ship symbol .......................................................................... 62
shore features, display of ................................................. 319
Show Five Depth Shades ...................................................... 241
Show Shallow Water Pattern ................................................ 242
Show Symbol Info on Query ................................................. 245
Shutdown... ............................................................................ 21
shutting down the system .................................................. 21
Si .......................................................................................... 312
signal station service, display of ..................................... 319
signal, radar ....................................................................... 219
SIM file ................................................................................ 340
simplified boundaries........................................................ 239
simplified chart symbols ................................................... 237
simulation, vessel .............................................................. 335
across a network .......................................................... 341
autopilot....................................................................... 341
dived depth and ........................................................... 347
route direction and....................................................... 343
sensors ......................................................................... 347
setup ............................................................................ 339
submarine ........................................................... 347, 359
Skip to Next Waypoint............................................................ 79
Skip to Previous Waypoint...................................................... 79
396
small craft facilities, display of .........................................319
SOA ......................................................................................165
SoftLock ........................................................................21, 333
password ......................................................................333
Softlock .................................................................................333
Software License, C-MAP ..................................................291
software protection device ...............................................313
SOG ........................................................................ 78, 81, 161
speed over ground (formerly speed made good)
field and GPS ..................................................................92
position source and ......................................................181
Sound......................................................................................95
sounder, depth ......................................................................93
sounding
(chart correction) ..........................................................256
anti-grounding and.........................................................68
datum ...........................................................................228
display of a ...................................................................319
graphical representation.................................................50
safe.................................................................................86
unsafe.............................................................................86
source chart datum ............................................................227
source scale ........................................................................227
spatial data types...............................................................265
Specially protected areas ..................................................321
speed
default route.................................................................148
display of route...............................................................76
ETA/TTG ..........................................................................81
maximum......................................................................325
over ground (formerly Speed Made Good). See SOG.
planned.................................75, 82, 146, 157, 161, 163
proposed.......................................................................164
recommended............................................... 82, 162, 163
squat and........................................................................87
through a turn .......................................................75, 157
units................................................................................57
speed log ...............................................................................38
alarm ..............................................................................51
alarm (Log) .....................................................................91
Log field..........................................................................38
sensor alarm ...................................................................91
simulated......................................................................336
Speed/Time/Bearing ...........................................................117
Sperry radar ........................................................................216
Spoil .....................................................................................322
Spoil ground .......................................................................321
Squat.......................................................................................87
squat
applying to a route leg..................................................152
characteristics, ship.......................................................325
data ................................................................................87
effects.............................................................................86
INDEX
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
safety depth and ......................................................85, 86
speed and ...................................................................... 87
table ............................................................................ 153
table in use .................................................................... 86
Squat Data... ........................................................................ 326
SRM. See Safety Related Message.
St ......................................................................................... 312
St. Lawrence Seaway message........................................ 213
stabilization marks on velocity vector .............................. 64
Standard display.....................................................15, 32, 35
example ......................................................................... 33
screen layout.................................................................. 37
setting for all categories ................................................ 35
Standard Display on Startup................................................... 36
standard marker ................................................................ 116
set................................................................................ 117
Standard+ display ............................................................... 32
standards, chart display .............................................13, 314
start time
of a route ..................................................................... 174
starting up the system ........................................................ 11
statute miles ........................................................................ 56
STC ...................................................................................... 217
sensitivity time control (radar)
stern mark .......................................................................... 108
stern velocity vector............................................................ 62
stern, vessel ....................................................................... 328
stopover......................................................................164, 167
excluded from PIM speed ............................................ 165
Sub version of ECPINS ........................................................ 18
subdivide a route leg ........................................................ 151
Subdivide Leg....................................................................... 151
Submarine exercise boundary ......................................... 322
submarine simulation ...............................................347, 359
Submarine traffic lane ...................................................... 322
Submarine transit lane ..................................................... 321
submenu, moving up from a ............................................. 14
Submerged "TOD only" ................................................... 322
sub-route ............................................................................ 165
SUP .......................................................................30, 286, 287
South Up chart orientation
superstructure .................................................................... 330
support, customer ..................................................................ii
survey error ........................................................................ 220
swing circle .......................................................................... 72
symbols, chart .................................................................... 237
low-accuracy................................................................ 319
simplified ..................................................................... 237
traditional .................................................................... 237
synchronization settings......................................................... 22
System Electronic Navigation Chart. See SENC.
System ID, C-MAP ..............................................................301
T
Tab ................................................................................ 16, 138
Target Tracking ...................................................................193
target, ARPA. See contact.
TCPA ....................................................................................193
time to closest point of approach
of an AIS target ..............................................................45
of an ARPA target...........................................................44
TDO
time-dependent object
See time-dependent chart features.
technical support ................................................................... ii
Temp ....................................................................................312
test, colour display ..............................................................54
text
box .................................................................................19
chart correction ............................................................256
quick correction............................................................252
Text Groups ............................................................... 240, 318
thruster, indicators........................................................ 49, 50
tidal stream
vector ...................................................................... 76, 78
tide
database.......................................................................136
display of............................................................. 317, 318
height of.......................................................................132
information ..................................................................131
level in a chart note......................................................245
level, predicted.............................................................132
locating ........................................................................248
monitor.........................................................................133
station ................................................................. 131, 133
stream tables in a chart note........................................245
Tides and Currents Setup... ...................................................136
Tides and Currents, Nobeltec ...........................................136
TIF file type .........................................................................247
time .......................................................................................58
time filter
anti-grounding cone and ................................................70
time filter, IHO ....................................................................317
time label on a vessel track......................................... 66, 67
time marks, velocity vector ......................................... 63, 64
time source ...........................................................................58
time to closest point of approach. See TCPA.
time to go. See TTG.
time zone ..............................................................................58
time-dependent chart features ........................................258
display of......................................................................317
INDEX
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
397
time-out, AIS contact ........................................................ 199
title of the current chart .............................................. 18, 25
TM ......................................................................................... 30
True Motion chart mode
token, C-MAP ..................................................................... 291
topmarks, display of .......................................................... 318
TotalTide, Admiralty .......................................................... 136
ToV
time of validity
heading ........................................................................ 181
towing an object.................................................................. 50
track
advancing reference points .......................................... 127
own ship’s .................................................................... 146
range and bearing........................................................ 113
reference point ............................................................. 129
vessel ............................................................................. 75
vessel’s planned ............................................................. 75
Track Control ........................................................................ 96
fields .............................................................................. 98
steering modes............................................................... 98
using a simulated autopilot.......................................... 101
using Raytheon NautoPilot 2025.................................... 96
Track History Origin ........................................................... 331
trackball ................................................................................ 13
three-button................................................................... 13
traditional boundaries ...................................................... 239
traditional chart symbols .................................................. 237
traffic routes, display of .................................................... 319
Traffic separation scheme................................................. 321
Traffic separation zone ..................................................... 321
transparency, radar image ............................................... 217
transponder identification number, AIS.......................... 207
Transponder Switch, AIS ................................................... 206
transponder, AIS ................................................................ 197
Trigger, radar ...................................................................... 219
true bearing units ................................................................ 59
for an EBL..................................................................... 112
True Motion chart mode. See TM.
true motion paging ............................................................. 30
true north indicator ............................................................. 21
TTG ................................................................37, 81, 161, 163
time to go
along a route................................................................ 165
from the own ship to the cursor .......................... 148, 149
off-track .................................................................. 81, 82
report ........................................................................... 174
turn ...................................................................................... 157
curve ............................................................................ 158
radius ........................................................... 81, 158, 164
speed through a ........................................................... 157
398
TXT file type ........................................................................247
TXTDSC ................................................................................245
Type of Charts.....................................................................267
C-MAP ..........................................................................290
U
U ...........................................................................................228
in text box ....................................................................228
in text box = Unofficial Data warning
on chart ........................................................................319
on chart = unsurveyed data
UAIS .....................................................................................197
Universal Automatic Identification System
See also AIS.
UKHO ................................................................. 266, 270, 271
United Kingdom Hydrographic Office
raster chart format of....................................................266
under-keel clearance............................................................85
and a route scan ...........................................................168
underlying chart ...................................................................19
Underscale ............................................................................28
Underscale warning .............................................................28
Underwater Danger /Underwater Hazard .......................261
Uninstall Charts.....................................................................272
Uninstall Software License... .................................................316
uninstalling
charts............................................................................272
uninterruptable power supply (UPS) .................................95
units
bearing ...........................................................................59
depth ..............................................................................56
distance ..........................................................................56
speed ..............................................................................57
Universal Automatic Identification System. See UAIS.
Unknown area ....................................................................321
Unknown Datum ................................................................228
unknown objects, display of .............................................320
Unload Data..........................................................................135
unloading charts ................................................................230
unofficial chart ...................................................................233
Unofficial Data - Refer to Paper Chart ............................228
unsafe depth .......................................................................241
and a route scan ...........................................................168
unsafe sounding ...................................................................86
unsurveyed chart area .......................................................319
update
AML ..............................................................................280
ARCS charts ..................................................................283
area ..............................................................................285
BSB chart ......................................................................289
CD.................................................................................283
INDEX
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
C-MAP .................................................................305, 308
history..................................................................228, 282
last chart...................................................................... 228
location........................................................................ 286
NZMariner chart........................................................... 283
raster chart .................................................................. 285
route scan and ............................................................. 281
S57 chart..............................................................280, 281
Seafarer RNC chart ...................................................... 283
Update Charts... ................................ 280, 284, 305, 306, 308
upgrade, software major .................................................. 313
UPS ...................................................................................... 106
uninterruptable power supply
Universal Polar Stereographic ...................................... 149
position entry............................................................... 149
warning.......................................................................... 95
UQ ....................................................................................... 312
UQ+LFl................................................................................ 312
USB port and C-MAP ........................................................ 291
Use IMO Cursor...................................................................... 55
Use Rate of Turn..................................................................... 68
Use Traditional Boundaries .................................................. 239
Use Traditional Symbols ....................................................... 238
user
permit, ARCS/Seafarer RNC .................................270, 274
usr file ................................................................................. 291
UTC ....................................................................................... 58
UTM ............................................................................106, 149
Universal Transverse Mercator
V
V, fix label ........................................................................... 128
valid chart license ............................................................. 235
variable range marker. See VRM.
Varn ..................................................................................... 312
vector
bow................................................................................ 62
stern............................................................................... 62
vector chart ........................................................................ 236
anti-grounding cone and ............................................... 68
loading priority ............................................................ 232
note ............................................................................. 246
types ............................................................................ 265
velocity vector
ARPA contact ............................................................... 190
bow................................................................................ 62
contact...................................................................63, 191
display of a ..............................................................61, 64
own ship ..................................................................62, 63
stern............................................................................... 62
true vs. relative ........................................................63, 64
variable length............................................................... 64
Velocity Vector Origin .......................................................331
velocity vector, display of a ..............................................330
Velocity Vectors... ...................................................................64
Verify Permits........................................................................275
Verify S63 Permits.................................................................278
version, ECPINS............................................................. 11, 18
vertical clearance ...............................................................325
vertical datum ....................................................................228
vertical sextant angle (VSA) .............................................330
Vessel Position reference point ........................................331
vessel shape ........................................................... 19, 61, 62
AIS and.........................................................................206
AIS contact ...................................................................198
and chart display scale ...................................................62
creating a .......................................................................62
creation ........................................................................324
customization...............................................................326
editor............................................................................327
file ................................................................................323
ghost ..............................................................................67
offsets ..........................................................................330
outline ..........................................................................327
point.............................................................................328
preparation...................................................................323
selection .......................................................................323
velocity vector ................................................................62
Vessel Shape Editor.....................................185, 324, 325, 327
vessel simulation ...............................................................335
vessel track .................................................................... 66, 75
secondary ....................................................... 66, 67, 182
Vessel Track... .........................................................................67
vessel. See own ship.
View S63 Permits... ...............................................................277
Viewing Groups .................................................................318
visual fix .............................................................. 15, 122, 128
voyage data ........................................................................140
playback .......................................................................142
voyage logs ........................................................................140
VQ ........................................................................................312
VQ+LFl ................................................................................312
VRM ..................................................................... 15, 103, 107
variable range marker
display options .............................................................111
fixed .............................................................................107
label display .................................................................317
offset ............................................................................107
VSA ......................................................................................330
VSE. See vessel shape editor.
W
W..........................................................................................312
INDEX
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
399
WA DPI charts ........................................................... 228, 266
Western Australia Department of Planning and
Infrastructure
warning
adjusted position............................................................ 89
conditions that generate a ............................................. 91
cross-track...................................................................... 51
level of severity .............................................................. 19
summary of a ................................................................. 19
when GPS position is lost............................................... 52
water feature, display of a ............................................... 320
Water Flow Report................................................................ 214
Water Level............................................................................. 88
water level
applying to a route leg ................................................. 153
effects ............................................................................ 87
net................................................................................ 154
safety depth and ............................................................ 85
safety height and ........................................................... 85
station.......................................................................... 154
water level report, Seaway .............................................. 214
Water Level Report... ............................................................ 214
water stabilization marks on velocity vectors ................. 64
waterspace management
alarm.............................................................................. 51
waypoint ...................................................................... 75, 146
active ............................................................... 75, 78, 79
automatic active............................................................. 79
bearing........................................................................... 78
distance to another ...................................................... 164
editing.......................................................................... 149
ETA............................................................................... 164
ETD............................................................................... 164
information .................................................................. 152
list .................................................................................. 81
locating a ..................................................................... 248
naming................................................................ 152, 164
non-display of ................................................................ 75
numbering.................................................................... 152
PIM to a selected ......................................................... 166
plotting a.................................................... 147, 148, 149
selected........................................................................ 150
stopover at a ....................................................... 164, 167
turn radius for a .................................................. 158, 159
Waypoint Properties... ........................................ 159, 164, 342
Weather Station Report... ..................................................... 214
weather warning, NAVTEX............................................... 222
web page ............................................................................ 246
WECDIS
software version............................................................. 18
WGC .................................................................................... 149
World Geodetic Datum 1972
WGE .................................................................................... 149
400
World Geodetic Datum 1984
distance calculations and..............................................114
marker placement and ..................................................117
WGS72.................................................................................149
WGS84.................................................................................149
and GPS ...................................................................92, 93
and RIO mismatch ........................................................220
and S57 charts ..............................................................228
and Unknown Datum warning......................................228
wheel-over
distance to run and.........................................................79
line...........................................................................75, 76
off-track values to....................................................83, 84
point ............................................................. 75, 157, 158
point ETA .............................................................162, 164
point ETD .............................................................162, 164
wheel-steady point ............................................ 75, 157, 158
White ....................................................................................218
white chart shade ..............................................................241
width, vessel .......................................................................324
wind
apparent .........................................................................65
direction display .............................................................64
relative............................................................................65
sensor alarm ...................................................................92
speed display ...........................................................38, 64
speed indicator ...............................................................65
vector.......................................................................65, 66
vector length...................................................................64
Wind Information Report... ...................................................214
Wind Vector ............................................................................65
Windows 2000
access security ..............................................................333
hardlock drivers for.......................................................313
Windows task bar ..............................................................338
Windows XP
hardlock drivers for.......................................................313
world chart.....................................................................19, 36
World Magnetic Model (WMM) .......................................187
and bearings...................................................................59
and variation ...........................................................21, 39
WP Brg...................................................................................78
X
XTD .................................................................................37, 51
alarm ..............................................................................94
cross-track distance
Y
Y ...........................................................................................312
yards ......................................................................................56
yellow chart outlines .........................................................226
INDEX
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
Z
zip file and BSB charts ...................................................... 289
zone alarm ........................................................................... 94
for a guard zone ............................................................ 73
for an anchor watch....................................................... 72
indicator......................................................................... 51
zone of confidence ............................................................ 319
zoom in ................................................................................. 27
Beyond Scale warning ....................................................28
using an action point....................................................159
using the trackball..........................................................14
Zoom Floor .....................................................................28
zoom out ...............................................................................27
using an action point....................................................159
using the trackball..........................................................14
Zoom Ceiling ..................................................................28
INDEX
ECPINS 5000 6.0 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rev J
OSI Maritime Systems
401
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising